AN HEX 
 
 072 
 
 901
 
 'HEBREW 
 
 (HEBREW-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-HEBREW^E^RCISES) 
 
 WITH 
 
 PRACTICAL GRAMMAR OF THE WORD-FORMS 
 
 AND AN 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 ANALYSIS OF THE VERB-FORMS IN GEN. I-III, & XII, AND LIST OF ALL THE FORMS 
 OF THE SO-CALLED ' DOUBLY-IRREGULAR ' VERBS IN THE BIBLE ; 
 
 ALSO 
 
 FULL AND EXTENSIVE TABLES. 
 
 [SECOND EDITION 
 
 OF THE FIRST AND SECOND PARTS.] 
 
 P. H. MASON, M.A., 
 
 FELLOW AND HEBREW LECTURER, AND SENIOR DEAN OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, 
 
 CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 CAMBRIDGE : J. HALL & SON. 
 
 LONDON : 
 SIMPKIN, MARSHALL & Co., AND WHITTAKER & Co. 
 
 1876. 
 {Entered at Stationer? Hall.']
 
 STEPHEN ACSTIS AND SONS, PRATERS, HERTFORB
 
 ADDRESS TO THE READER. 
 
 IT is gratifying to have to bring out now a Second Edition* 
 of the 'First Part of the Exercise-book,' and also of the 
 ' Continuation.' The author was anxious to complete the 
 whole work before having to spend time on a new Edition of 
 any Part ; and therefore no part of the Exercise-book has 
 been advertised at all as yet in the Papers or Reviews. He 
 desires however to express his best thanks to those who have 
 caused such a re-issue to be necessary now, although it is 
 required rather earlier than he anticipated. And perhaps he 
 may trust that the expenditure of time and labour demanded 
 for going carefully over every page in the preparation of the 
 re-issue may be kindly taken into consideration as offering 
 some excuse for the delay in the completion of the work. 
 
 He is very glad to be enabled to put forth now the whole 
 work complete in one volume with ' INDEX or HEBREW 
 
 * The ' First Part of the Exercise-book ' was published at the beginning of the 
 year 1872. A new Edition of it was really required about a year ago ; and there 
 was then issued what might have been called a Second Edition of it. This issue 
 was not so called because it was only intended to serve temporarily. The ' Con- 
 tinuation' was published in May, 1873 ; and what might have been called a Second 
 Edition of it was required and issued some months ago.
 
 IV ADDRESS TO THE READER. 
 
 WORDS' (so far as was thought necessary), and an ' INDEX 
 OF MATTERS/ A ' Vocabulary ' of some Hebrew words which, 
 are sometimes not given (after Exercise XX) in the Notes 
 to the Exercises may be found useful ; as also the very brief 
 English-Hebrew Vocabulary following it. Generally all the 
 necessary help is given in the 'Notes to the Exercises.' 
 
 The purpose of the author is to enable Students to learn 
 to know this language as a MEANS FOR THE EXPRESSION OF 
 THOUGHT. The great variety of the forms of words in the 
 Bible may well seem likely to perplex a Student unless they 
 be carefully classified for him, and unless he be familiarised 
 with them as so classified. In this book therefore it is en- 
 deavoured not only to classify the forms intelligibly,' and to 
 present them for study in their several Classes one after the 
 other, but moreover TO ILLUSTRATE THE FORMS BELONGING TO 
 THE SEVERAL CLASSES in Exercises specially devoted to those 
 Classes severally, so that the Student may gradually be 
 familiarised with them all and may be able TO EMPLOY THEM 
 freely and unhesitatingly in rendering English into Hebrew. 
 
 AM the Exercises are wholly taken from The Hebrew 
 Bible, and they furnish the Student with a series of passages 
 containing EXAMPLES OF ALL THE LEADING GRAMMATICAL 
 FORMS in the Language. They are arranged progressively, 
 from the very simplest expressions and sentences, which the 
 Beginner may master without any difficulty, to passages in- 
 volving very intricate forms. By help of the remarks which 
 precede the several sets of Exercises the Student will gradually 
 be able not only to recognize and understand such gram- 
 matical forms when he meets with them in his reading,
 
 ADDRESS TO THE READER. V 
 
 but moreover lie may become so familiar with them as to 
 form them himself and write them down at once with ACCURACY 
 as well as with ease and confidence. Let him spare no pains 
 in attaining ACCURACY OF ELEMENTARY KNOWLEDGE. To 
 encourage him in patient endeavours to attain such accuracy 
 it may be well perhaps to add that during an extensive and 
 varied experience of now nearly a quarter of a century of 
 active work in guiding and training Students to attain a 
 familiarity* with this Language, the author has had impressed 
 upon him and continually more and more strongly impressed 
 upon him that time and patient care devoted to elementary 
 work are always found by the Student to be time well spent 
 and care well bestowed ; that the toil (it may be) of working 
 conscientiously through the Exercises, till thorough familiarity 
 with the principal forms of all the great Classes of words 
 shall have been gained by him, is toil which he will find to 
 involve great and unfailing reward ; and that so a good 
 solid foundation will be laid on which may be raised a secure 
 building of sound knowledge that can stand firm against 
 fiercest assaults of the floods and storms of conflicting 
 opinions. 
 
 P. H. M. 
 
 ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 
 October 9, 1876. 
 
 [FOR AN ADDITIONAL 'NOTE' SEE NEXT PAGE.] 
 
 * And of course far beyond the ej* p "* Covered by this present book, which is 
 necessarily but elementary. 
 
 2C97635
 
 NOTE: 
 
 There is not much difference between this and the former 
 Edition beyond the correction of a few typographical accidents 
 and the addition of a few new pages. These new pages, and 
 the 'Index/ and the 'Index of Hebrew words/ may be had 
 on application by those who already have all the Parts. 
 
 [The 'Preface/ which follows, is that of the First Edition.]
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 THE object of this Work is to present in an EASY 
 form the leading features of what is usually called the 
 'Hebrew' Language. The supposition that this is an ex- 
 ceedingly difficult language is caused, to some extent, by 
 attempts to explain it on foreign principles, fundamental 
 . principles of its own being ignored. For instance, what we 
 call 'First Person' viz., 'I' is not First in Hebrew, but 
 'He' is First. Herein lies a fundamental difference of 
 Bible-Thought from Thought in which each one refers all 
 to himself as the Centre of reference. And is it very 
 reasonable that each one of us should reckon himself as 
 'Number One'? That it is natural for one to start from 
 himself as First, is merely an evidence of the need of 
 education for the correction of natural errors to which each 
 of us is liable. There are not as many ' FIBSTS ' Originating 
 Centres of all Time and Space as there have been, are, 
 and will be, individual men. GOD is the only True Centre 
 of reference. HE, The Unseen, is ' FIRST.' It is not too 
 much to say that the conflicting Doubts and Difficulties in 
 modern thought regarding the Bible, arise, in great measure, 
 from misapprehensions caused by non-recognition of this 
 great Principle. [And the mind itself, groping after Truth, 
 seems to shew its want of this by its vain efforts to rise 
 out of mere individual-self made in high Philosophy and 
 in Scientific Thought, in the mighty conception of the 
 Transcendental 'Ego,' and in the thought of the 'Self of 
 Humanity.'] As, in regard to the planetary world, so long 
 as the Earth was reckoned as the centre of the visible 
 Universe, there were strange confusions and perplexities in
 
 IV PREFACE. 
 
 human speculations, which have vanished, which have 
 given way to the recognition of Unity, and grand Sim- 
 plicity, and beautiful Order, since the Sun was perceived 
 to be the Centre of our System ; so, but much more grandly 
 (for the above is but .an imperfect illustration), the recogni- 
 tion of the TRUE CENTRE OF BEING removes vast confusion 
 from our self-centred speculations regarding the world of 
 sense and sight and thought and being. We gain great 
 advantage, if we gain only the recognition of this, from study 
 of 'Hebrew' IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS OWN PRINCIPLES. 
 This study has been neglected. 
 
 The endeavour here is to state simply the facts of the 
 Language (without discussing, at present, how they came 
 to be such), and, as far as possible, in what may be called 
 a Concrete form rather than ' Abstract '-ly. 
 
 My best thanks are due to those friends who have kindly 
 and carefully Revised the Proof-sheets, and favoured me with 
 many valuable observations, viz., DR. CHANCE, of Trinity 
 College, Cambridge (and of Burleigh House, Sydenham Hill, 
 London), also the Eev. E. T. LEEKE, M.A., Fellow of Trinity 
 College, and Vicar of Barnwell, and the Rev. F. WATSON, M.A., 
 Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. 
 
 P. H. M. 
 
 ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, CAMBEIDGE, 
 December, 1871.
 
 PREFACE TO THE CONTINUATION. 
 
 THE endeavour of the writer, in this as in the preceding part 
 of the ' Exercise- book,' is TO STATE FACTS. Controversy is 
 excluded here. 
 
 The accompanying pages follow the plan of the 'Exercise- 
 book,' as far as p. 166. After that, pp. 167-178 contain a 
 Sketch, merely, of the remaining Sections. That Sketch is 
 given in order that the Student may be enabled to proceed 
 at once (with the help of the corresponding Tables) to read 
 The BIBLE itself. Pressure of time caused this variation of 
 plan. The Reader will probably be very glad of it, whatever 
 may have caused it. 'Exercise '-work is indeed very helpful 
 to Hebrew Students one might say even necessary for them. 
 But a somewhat long experience as a lecturer and teacher 
 has made the writer aware of that eager and not unnatural 
 desire to "begin The BIBLE," which many Students shew 
 as soon as they have acquired a certain familiarity with the 
 principles of the Language. This desire the writer endea- 
 vours to comply with here, rather earlier than he would, by
 
 IV PREFACE TO THE CONTINUATION. 
 
 giving in tlie 'Sketch' the chief features of the further in- 
 formation which is needful to the Student, and by some full 
 Tables. 
 
 The elaborate TABLES given in this work (pp. I-XLIII) have 
 cost much trouble and pains, which the writer does not regret 
 having bestowed, as he is sure that these Tables will be found 
 more and more useful to the Student in his onward progress. 
 
 In the body of the work, and in several of the Tables, 
 ACCENTS are given. They have been so given for the con- 
 venience of the Student. But they have been purposely 
 omitted in some few of the Tables, because the Student should 
 learn to know the position of the Accents without seeing 
 them, and must be able to do without them at the earliest 
 moment. Scholars never accentuate their Hebrew Com- 
 position. See, for instance, N. Herz Weisel's rnXSH H* 1 ^ 
 and Eichenbaum's mT TlD- The Accentuation of The BIBLE 
 is a different matter. It is a very important subject, which 
 must be dealt with at some length elsewhere : here it would 
 be out of place. 
 
 The several Exercises in this Continuation have been put 
 together on a plan : i.e. the disconnected sentences illustrating 
 Verb-forms have an underlying connection in thought. The 
 thought running through an Exercise is not, however, always
 
 PREFACE TO THE CONTINUATION". V 
 
 to be perceived easily. The writer has sometimes amused 
 himself by illustrating* Rabbinic thought and allusion to be 
 recognized, it may be, by those only who are in the secret 
 of the method. But sometimes the thought running through 
 an Exercise may be easily seen at once. The Student need 
 not, however, trouble himself at all with this ; but may limit 
 his attention, at present, to the Yerb-forms. Also he is not 
 expected to parse or analyze any word of which the full 
 meaning is given in the Notes. 
 
 Any Verb mentioned in the Notes, or elsewhere, is supposed 
 to be of the First Yoice (Kal), unless some other Voice-mark is 
 attached to it. 
 
 After a time the Student may learn TO KNOW WORDS for 
 himself. Some few words are therefore not given in the 
 Notes sometimes. It will be found useful to write out in a 
 list those marked ' not to be given again,' and those in the 
 Short Yocabularies I-YI ; and moreover to combine them 
 all Alphabetically. This will make much easier the first use 
 of a Lexicon. 
 
 A few Abbreviations have sometimes been used, which will 
 be recognized without trouble ; as ' fr.' for ' from,' ' r.' for 
 ' root,' etc. 
 
 * As, for instance, in the latter part of Excrc. XX (last few lines 0/p. 92).
 
 VI PREFACE TO THE CONTINUATION. 
 
 The Reader need not trouble himself, at first, with what ia 
 IN SMALL puiNT^-except when such is specially referred to. 
 
 The many cross References (to other ) will be found very 
 useful to the careful Student. Much trouble has been bestowed 
 upon them. 
 
 The Contents will supply the want of an Index* temporarily, 
 and may advantageously be read along with Sections XI-XIII 
 as an ANALYTICAL SUMMARY so far which is afterwards un- 
 necessary. 
 
 The writer is glad of this opportunity for repeating his 
 thankful acknowledgments to Dr. Chance, of Trinity College, 
 Cambridge (and of Burleigh House, Sydenham Hill, London), 
 the Rev. E. T. Leeke, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cam- 
 bridge, and Yicar of Barnwell, and the Rev. F. "Watson, M.A., 
 Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. He does not know 
 how to thank them enough for their kind and careful Revision 
 of the Proof-sheets, and for the valuable suggestions with which 
 they have favoured him. 
 
 ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 
 May, 1873. 
 
 * To be supplied at the earliest opportunity.
 
 PREFACE TO THE 'CONCLUDING PART.' 
 
 AFTER rather more than a year of severe work, and not a 
 little ill health, the writer of these pages is enabled to put 
 forth this ' Concluding Part of the Exercise Book.' 
 
 First, it has been found necessary to give some ADDITIONAL 
 EXERCISES exemplifying forms of the important Classes of Verbs 
 in Tables XXI-XXIII, and of those Yerbs which belong to 
 more than one of the Seven Classes mentioned in 186, and 
 of Yerbs with Pron.-Affixes. To the Exercises are prefixed 
 some brief remarks (in the form of OBSERVATIONS on those 
 several sets of Yerb-forms). 
 
 Those Students who are wise enough to work through these
 
 IT PREFACE. 
 
 additional Exercises, with careful study of the Verb-forms 
 illustrated therein, will hereafter find themselves amply re- 
 warded for their pains by the much greater ease and pleasure 
 with which they will be able to read The Bible. 
 
 Secondly, an Appendix has been added in order to supply 
 some aid which the Student is likely to want at his first 
 attempt to read The Bible itself. As a means of not only 
 enabling him to recognize more easily the various forms of 
 Yerbs, but also of familiarizing him (by references) with 
 several Tables and Sections in which such forms are classified 
 and mentioned, we give on pages 226-266 an ANALYSIS OF 
 THE VERB-FORMS in chapters i.-iii. and xii. of the Book of 
 Genesis with a few Notes on some points of interest which 
 we will briefly speak of again at the close of this Preface. 
 
 Thirdly, on pages 267-314 the Student will find a List of 
 what some call 'Doubly Irregular' Verbs, which we would 
 speak of rather as Verbs belonging to more than one of the 
 Seven Classes in 186 (page 124), which might perhaps for 
 convenience be termed briefly ' MIXED' Verbs. 
 
 On pages 315-380 we mention some matters and forms and 
 words of importance or of special interest as means of fixing the
 
 PREFACE. V 
 
 attention on some principle (see, for instance, pages 360-364). 
 These need not be dwelt upon in detail here. We may there- 
 fore now conclude this Preface with a remark or two about 
 the few Notes offered, perhaps somewhat unnecessarily, on some 
 passages in the opening chapters of the Book of Genesis. 
 
 The brevity of some of these Notes might possibly cause 
 misapprehension of our meaning, if we were to neglect to 
 give this preliminary notice that we have been content here 
 and there to mention some opinions without entering into any 
 discussion of them. Thus, we very much prefer to render 
 Gen. i. 20 in accordance with what is said in the brief Note 
 upon that verse on page 230 ; but we have not troubled the 
 Reader with the discussion which would have been necessary 
 had we attempted to give the reasons for our preference. 
 
 So in the Note on Gen. i. 5 (p. 227) we have held aloof from 
 the controversy as to the signification of the word ' day ' ; 
 nor have we there touched upon the signification of the words 
 for 'evening' and 'morning.' And we beg leave to be allowed 
 to hold aloof from the tumult of that controversy still. But, 
 although a quiet remark of one who will not join in the fray 
 can hardly be expected to be listened to amid the din of 
 conflict, we may perhaps just observe in passing that the
 
 VI PREFACE. 
 
 Hebrew word here used for ' evening ' involves the notion of a 
 'Mixing up/ and that the word for 'day' cannot rightly be 
 limited to a twentyfour hours' day, as some wish to limit it.* 
 Also we may venture to express the hope that our own use of 
 the English words 'evening' and 'morning' and 'day' in our 
 little Note on page 227 may not be misunderstood. We do 
 not there mean merely a ' twentyfour-hours ' day, with its 
 evening after the daylight and its morning after the night. 
 We use there common words. All of us use common words. 
 And may we not sometimes use common words as a vehicle 
 for rather more meaning than we want them for ordinarily ? 
 For many years past Gen. i. has spoken to us of successive 
 ' Mixings up ' followed successively by grand breakings of 
 'Morning' after 'Morning' not to be confounded with those 
 of ordinary ' day.' We know too that we English people our- 
 selves can have our English word 'day' used indefinitely in 
 such expressions as " the DAY of salvation," and " the passing 
 DAY of this our mortal life." And so with regard to our 
 
 * It will be seen that we are speaking of what is stated by the Book itself. We 
 object, as strongly as any one, to all attempts to bend and alter and reduce the 
 statements of the Book in order to suit what we might adopt as results of scientific 
 research or any speculations or theories of our own. And as we would not limit it, 
 so also we would not have it made to say more than it says. We may not add 
 thereto, any more than we may diminish therefrom. We hope that the Reader will 
 not misinterpret our Xote on Gen. i. 21 (p. 230) to carry more than the corresponding 
 words of this Preface on page vii.
 
 PREFACE. Vli 
 
 English word 'morning' in such an expression as "we are 
 looking for the dawn of the MORNING of the great Day of Life 
 the Day of Eternity which shall be closed in by no evening, 
 and shall know no setting Sun." 
 
 ****** 
 
 And may we, without descending into the arena of controversy, 
 be permitted to say a word or two about a very common 
 
 mistake ? In our short Note on Gen. i. 21 (p. 230) we call 
 attention to what all who will may see for themselves to be 
 the fact, viz. that 'CREATING' is mentioned in ONLY THREE 
 VERSES of Gen. i. It is said in v. 1 that 
 
 "GOD CREATED the heavens and the earth." 
 
 But then no mention is made any more of 'Creating* until, 
 after the introduction of animal life had been ordered (v. 20), 
 it is said in r. 21 
 
 "And GOD created" [certain forms]. 
 
 Again, 'Creating' is mentioned in v. 27. Three times in this 
 verse the expression is used. And, as said on p. 230, 
 
 The making of man in (or into) the Image of Got) 
 is spoken of as an act of Creation. 
 
 Is it too much then to say that all objections and difficulties 
 and doubts which rest upon the supposition that the Book of
 
 Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 Genesis speaks of either "Six days of ' Creation,' " or " 'Crea- 
 tion' of 'Species,'" fall at once to the ground ? The Book 
 does not so speak,* as all may see who will. 
 
 But it is true that the Book is opposed to Materialism, is 
 opposed to Pantheism. It is true that it declares 
 
 "GOD CREATED the heavens and the earth." 
 
 And after the grand exordium of the opening verse, it tells 
 of OPERATION OF GOD, ordered production and evolution at the 
 
 * It will be seen that we are merely stating facts. We have been endeavouring 
 also to be brief. 
 
 It is possible that some may think that we attach too much importance to the fact 
 that the word for ' creating' is not used except as we have stated. It is also very 
 commonly supposed that the word for ' making ' is ' all the same ' as the word for 
 'creating.' And we own that some have given 'creating' in a few places as the 
 sense of the word to which they allow the sense of ' making' in many other places, 
 and some seem to have no notion of accuracy in the use of the two Roots. In 
 accordance with our general plan of avoiding controversy as much as possible, we 
 will but observe here that 
 
 (i.) The two Roots are not identical, but different ; 
 
 (ii.) The usage of the two Roots is not exactly the same, [it is even less so perhaps 
 than is the usage of the English words ' create' and ' make' ; and most will allow 
 that to ' make' a box (for instance) is not necessarily the same as to ' create' one] ; 
 
 (iii.) It is distinctly the Root for ' making,' NOT the Root for ' creating,' which 
 is used in Exod. xx. 11, where the six days of ' making' are spoken of thus : " For 
 [during] six days The-LoRD made (or wrought] the heavens and the earth, the sea 
 and all that [is] in them," etc. 
 
 It cannot be wrong to observe the fact of the Roots being different. And perhaps 
 we may fairly doubt whether the case against a passage is necessarily a strong one, 
 so far, at least, as the case rests upon the supposition that it does not matter which 
 one of two different words is used in the passage. "We allow however that we have 
 not in this Footnote dealt with the controversy about those two different words. "We 
 shall be glad to have an opportunity for dealing with it fully, in a more fit place 
 than this.
 
 PREFACE . IX 
 
 OF GOD, and His Resting after 'Creating' man in the 
 Image and after the Likeness of GOD. 
 
 Enough, for the present. 
 
 ****** 
 
 We would add a remark about the danger of limiting the 
 Original by our Translations. The substitution of " the first 
 day" by Translators, in Gen. i. 5, for the expression in the 
 Original which signifies literally " one day," is perhaps hardly 
 a fair instance of this, because the facts which, we have 
 endeavoured to state in the Note on pages 234-236 scarcely 
 allow us to speak of the renderings " the first" and "one" 
 as equally admissible renderings of the word which occurs 
 there. A better example of the danger of limiting the 
 Original, by the exclusion of a possible rendering, is offered 
 in the Note on Gen. iii. 22 (pp. 253-259). The important 
 difference between such renderings as 
 " Behold ! the man is BECOME as one of us to know good and 
 
 evil," and 
 "Behold the man WAS as one of us with-regard-to-knowing etc.," 
 
 is sufficiently plain. That the second is an admissible render- 
 ing,* and that it has some support from antiquity, will we 
 
 * Of another possible rendering, which we have not mentioned, the principle was 
 partially expressed in the Preface to the First Part of the ' Exercise-book.' 
 
 b
 
 X PREFACE. 
 
 think be .seen by the Reader of the Note referred to. We 
 may not dwell upon that further here. 
 
 We have the pleasurable duty of repeating our expression 
 of warmest thanks to the Friends who have kindly revised 
 Proof-sheets and favoured us with valuable observations and 
 suggestions, viz. Dr. Chance of Trinity College, Cambridge 
 (and of Burleigh House, Sydenham Hill, London), the Rev. 
 E. T. Leeke, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, 
 and Vicar of Barnwell, and the Rev. F. Watson, M.A., Fellow 
 and Theological Lecturer of St, John's College, Cambridge. 
 
 It is but right to record also our thankful acknowledgments 
 to those who have very kindly made the 'Index of passages 
 in the Bible' whose names we are not permitted to mention. 
 
 P. H. M. 
 
 ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 
 November, 1874.
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 (OF THE PA.RT ISSTJED IN 1872). 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Sect. I. The Prefixes 1, ^33, 0, H 1_6 
 
 Exercises L, II 7, 8 
 
 Sect. II. Personal Pronouns, Absolute Forms (Tab. I.) . 9, 10 
 
 Plan of the Exercises 11 
 
 Exercises III., IV 11, 12 
 
 Sect. III. Personal Pronouns, Affix Forms (Tab. II.-VII.) 13-15 
 
 Exercises V.-X 16-20 
 
 Sect. IV. The Eelative Pronoun 1$B 21-24 
 
 Exercises XI., XII 25-27 
 
 Sect. V. Demonstrative Pronouns 28 
 
 Sect. VI. Interrogative Pronouns 29 
 
 Sect. VII. Nouns-Substantive (Tab. V.-XIII.) . . . 30-47 
 
 Exercises XIII., XIV. . 47-49 
 
 Sect. VIII. Nouns-Adjective 50-55 
 
 Exercises XV., XVI 55-57 
 
 Sect. IX. Pronouns-Adjective . 58-59 
 
 Exercises XVII., XVIII 59-61 
 
 Sect. X. Numerals 62-68 
 
 Sect. XI. Verbs : (I.) Voices, (II.) Tenses, (III.) Arrange- 
 ment of Table XIV. of the ' Full ' Verb . . 69- 
 
 Tables I.-XIV. i-xv
 
 CONTENTS OF THE CONTINUATION. 
 
 FAOK 
 
 Sect. XI continued. Verbs. Kemarks on Table XIV 77-89 
 
 (1) Infinitives Absolute 77, 78 
 
 Construct, and with B^S [App. (A) to Tab. XIV] 79 
 "With Pron. Affixes [Tab. XV] 80 
 
 (2) Past Tense [see also p. 73 & 74] 81, 82 
 
 (3) Participles [App. (B) and (C) to Tab. XIV] 82-85 
 
 (4) Imperative and (5) Future [see also p. 75 & 76] 85-89 
 
 Exercises XIX-XXIII 90-96 
 
 Vocabulary 1 91 
 
 Observations i-xi.. 93 
 
 Sect. XII. Verbs continued. Certain USAGES 97-1 05 
 
 GENERAL usage of the TWO TENSES 97-100 
 
 The Tenses with 1 pref. 100-102 
 
 Brief Summary 102,103 
 
 Imperative, Negative Imper., etc 103 
 
 Some usages to be referred to, as occasion may arise 104, 105 
 
 Vocabulary II 106 
 
 Exercises XXIV, XXV 106-108 
 
 Sect. XIII. Verbs continued. VARIATIONS 109-124 
 
 I. Pause-forms 109-113 
 
 II. Certain necessary Variations 114, 115 
 
 III. FIHST Rt-letter n, H, or y [Tab. XVI (1)] 115-120 
 
 IV. SECOND Rt-letter K, H, H, or V [Tab. XVI (2)] 120 
 
 V. THIKD Hi-letter PI, H, or $ [Tab. XVI (3)] 120, 121 
 
 VI. Verbs with 1 in the Root. [For "I as 2 d letter, see also 
 
 App x to Tab. XVI (2)] 121 
 
 VII. Verbs whose 3 d Rt-letter is ] or n 121,122 
 
 VIII. Verbs with any of nS3"m in the Root 122,123 
 
 IX. A TABLE of 7 other Classes 124 
 
 Vocabulary III 125 
 
 Exercises XXVI, XXVII 125-127
 
 Till CONTENTS OF THE CONTINUATION. 
 
 PAOB 
 
 Sect. XIV. Verbs whose 1 st Rt-letter is tf [Tab. XVIIj ... 128-130 
 Exercises XXVIII, XXIX 131, 132 
 
 Sect. XV. Verbs whose 1 st Et-letter is * [Tab. XVIII] 133-139 
 
 Observations xiir-xv , 139 
 
 Vocabulary IV 140 
 
 Exercises XXX, XXXI 140-142 
 
 Sect. XVI. Verbs whose 1 st Et-letter is J [Tab. XIX] 143-146 
 
 Vocabulary V 147 
 
 Exercises XXXII, XXXIII 147-149 
 
 Sect. XVII. Verbs whose 2 d Rt-letter is 1 or * [Tab. XX] 150-163 
 
 Vocabulary VI 164 
 
 Exercises XXXIV, XXXV 164-168 
 
 Sects. XVIII-XXIV [Note]. 
 
 XVIII. Verts whose 2* and 3* Rt-letters are the same [Tab. XXI] 169 
 
 XIX. Verbs whose 3 d Rt-letter is S [Tab. XXII] 169 
 
 XX. Verbs whose 3d Rt-letter is H [Tab. XXIII] 170-173 
 
 XXI. Verbs belonging to more than one of the last 7 Classes ... 174 
 XXII. Verb-forms with Pron.-Affixes [Tabs. XXIV-XXX] 175 
 
 XXIII. Some other Voice-forms 175-177 
 
 XXIV. 'Compound' or 'Mixed' forms 177,178 
 
 App T (A), (B), (C) to Tab. XIV, and Tabs. XV-XXX XTI-XT.TTT
 
 CONTENTS OF THE CONCLUDING PART. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Observations XVI-XXII 179, 180 
 
 Exercises XXXVI & XXXVII [on Verbs having the same 
 
 letter for their 2 d and 3 d Itt-letters] 181-184 
 
 Observations XXIII-XXV 185 
 
 Exercises XXXVIII & XXXIX [on Verbs V] 186-189 
 
 Observations XXVI-XXX 190-193 
 
 Exercises XL-XLII [on Verbs H* 1 ?] 194-201 
 
 Observations XXXI & XXXII 202 
 
 Exercises XLIII & XLIV [on what are sometimes called 
 
 'Doubly-Irregular Verbs'] 203-207 
 
 Observations XXXIII-L , 208-212 
 
 Exercise XLV [on Verbs with Pron-Affs.] 213-215 
 
 Psalm XXIII 215,216 
 
 Exercises XLVI-L [General Exercises] 217-220 
 
 APPENDIX 221-382 
 
 (T.) A few brief remarks on the significations of Voice-forms 221 
 
 (II.) Certain Tense-forms, and Apocopated forms, used with 
 1 Convers., and with ?K Deprecative, and in the expres- 
 sion of a Positive wish , 222
 
 Xll CONTENTS. 
 
 PAOK 
 
 (III.) ANALYSIS OF VERB-FOBMS in Gen. i.-iii. and xii 226-266 
 
 Preliminary Note : A few remarks on the sometimes given to 
 
 ordinary Prefixes 1 and ^23 223-225 
 
 Note on Gen. i. 5 '. 227 
 
 Note on Gen. i. 11 228 
 
 Obs. (i)-(iii) on Gen. i. 14 229 
 
 Note on the use of the Root N"Q in Gen. i. (viz. only in vss. I, 
 
 21, and 27) 230 
 
 Note on Gen. i. 24 231,232 
 
 Obs. (a) & (0) on " day one" and " second" " third" "fourth," 
 
 "fifth," but " the sixth," in Gen. i 234-236 
 
 Note on Gen. ii. 3 (lit. " He created to make") 236, 237 
 
 [For another rendering which is possible see Note (H) on 
 pp. 380-382]. 
 
 Preliminary Note on Gen. ii. 4 etc 237 
 
 Note on Gen. ii. 5 (the use of DIB) 238,239 
 
 Note on Gen. iii. 6 (the signification of b^H^) 246, 247 
 
 Note on Gen. iii. 22 (the passage rendered in the E.V. "Behold 
 
 the man has become at one of us to know good and evil") 252-259 
 
 (IV.) LIST OF forms of what are sometimes called ' DOUBLY 
 IKBEGULAB YEKBS,' or, rather, Verbs belonging to 
 
 more than one of the Seven Classes in 186 (p. 124) 267-314 
 
 The following may be selected, as being more or 
 less important, viz. : 
 
 mX 267 
 
 TlX 268 
 
 JYIN and fl^K 269 
 
 HBK 270 
 
 nnK 271 
 
 Nil 272-275 
 
 ,-pn 276-278 
 
 rpn 278-280 
 
 na 281 
 
 rrr (i.) 28i 
 
 PIT (II.) 281,282 
 
 ^ 282 
 
 nr> 283 
 
 HD* 283,284 
 
 K* 284-286 
 
 tO^ 286-288 
 
 m' 288,289
 
 CONTENTS. Xlll 
 
 PAGE 
 
 PIK3 290,291 
 
 N33 291 
 
 TJ3 292 
 
 ni3 (forms given from this R. by some, but from P13* by 
 
 others) 294 
 
 !TO 296 
 
 nBJ 297 
 
 H33 298,299 
 
 no: 300 
 
 Nbj 302-304 
 
 NKO 305 
 
 nt?J 305,306 
 
 my '. 309 
 
 ni 309,310 
 
 nip 311,312 
 
 Xote on HITHPA-EL forms 
 
 (I.) Transposition of 1 st Rt-letter of Verbs whose 1 st Rt- 
 
 letter is E>, B>, D, or V 315 
 
 [For natfJDiBmn (Jer. xlix. 3) see 246, p. 162]. 
 
 The replacing of the r> by B after X 315 
 
 (II.) The dropping of the J"l of ^, and the insertion of 
 Dagesh 
 
 (a) in a 1 st Rt-letter T or or n 316 
 
 (/8) SOMETIMES in the case of a 1 st Rt-letter T or 3 
 
 or 3 or ^ 316-318 
 
 (7) also in some 'Mixed Voice' forms 318 
 
 (V.) FUETHEE REMAEKS ox VEBE-FOBMS 
 
 (1) Some Infin. Absolute forms 319 
 
 (2) Some Infin. Constr. forms 320-324 
 
 (3) Some Past-Tense-forms 324-326 
 
 (4) Some Partic. forms 326-330 
 
 (5) Some Imper. & Future forms 330-337 
 
 (6) Some Niph-Al forms 338-341 
 
 (7) Some Pi-Si forms 342-347 
 
 (8) Some Pu-a/ forms 347,348 
 
 (9) Some Hiph-il forms 348-355 
 
 (10) Some Hoph-al forms 355-357 
 
 (11) Some Hithpa-el forms , 357-360
 
 XIV CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 (V.) FURTHER REKABKS ON VERB-FORMS (continued] 
 
 The word JnjF)0 Prov. xxvii. 15 360-364 
 
 Note (A) on the Voice-forms by'B & bB 365-368 
 
 Note (B) on some Verb-forms with K or H or n or V as 
 
 2 d Kt-letter 368,369 
 
 Note (C) on some Verb-forms with 7( or n or V as 
 
 3 d Rt-letter 370-374 
 
 Note (D) a remark on 230 & 231 374 
 
 Note (E) remarks on 236 (7) & 237 374-378 
 
 Note (F) on some forms of Pron-Affs. to Verbs 378, 379 
 
 Note (G) Objective Pron-Affs. may be used Relatively 380 
 Note (H) on Gen. ii. 3 380-382 
 
 VOCABULARY .. .383-388
 
 
 CORRIGENDA. 
 
 Page 235, 1. 18, for Gen. i. 1, read Gen. i. 5. 
 
 1. 24, for Gen. i. 2, Gen. i. 5. 
 268, 1. 6, after 'lightened? add 'bright, glorious ;' 
 
 1. 6, for HO, read Hd>. 
 287, 1. 10, dele * 
 
 292, 1. 15, after 'Gen. xxxi. 40 ' add 'Comp. . 210 (/3).' 
 313, 1. 20, after 'partly H6,' add ' See pp. 360364. 
 
 Note. A dot has disappeared in the following instances : 
 p. 288 last line but four ; p. 298 1. 12 ; p. 317 last line but two (twice) ; 
 p. 321 1. 10 ; p. 330 last line of Notes ; p. 338 1. 10 ; p. 368 1. 1 (twice) ; p. 370 last 
 line but six ; p. 381 last line but ten ; p. 382 last line but one. 
 
 Vocabulary: In the words for 'car,' 'nation' (twice), 'hand,' ' Jethro,' 
 'hen rt,' 'work,' 'Noah,'
 
 EXERCISE-BOOK 

 
 HEBREW EXEECISE BOOK. 
 
 [THE Student is supposed to 'be familiar with Part I of the Grammar, which 
 is referred to in the following pages thus Pt. I. 
 
 N.B. Many Footnotes on the following pages NEED NOT BE BEAD at present. 
 They will be found very useful hereafter when the Student is reading the Bible ] 
 
 SECTION I 
 CERTAIN PBEFIXES. 
 
 1. The Student should be .familiarized as soon as possible 
 with the use of the following Prefixes : 
 
 (i.) 1, (ii.) ^33, (Hi.) D, (iv.) n. 
 
 2. As regards the Punctuation of these Prefixes, 
 
 (i.) The 1 takes [see also 3 (bd)], 
 (ii.) The 3, the 3, and the S, also take [ 4] ; 
 (iii.) The takes followed by Dagesh [ 5]. 
 (iv.) Of the prefixes /"J, there is 
 
 one which takes followed by Dagesh [ 6], 
 and one which takes -=7 [ 7]. 
 In 3 7 we will deal with these one by one in order. 
 
 3. (a.) The 1 (and*) is prefixed thus, 
 
 T a hand, Tit AND a hand. 
 
 f T ; 
 
 But some CHANGE MUST BE MADE when the 1 is prefixed 
 to a word which has a Shva under its first letter, because 
 
 * Also, even, that, though, whereas, etc. There is also a \ followed by 
 Dagesh, which is prefixed to certain Verb-forms only. This need not be dealt 
 with at present. 
 
 t For J before a letter bearing an Accented rowel, see hereafter , Obs. XYI 
 
 (p. 179). ' 
 
 B
 
 2 PREFIXES 1 AND fc ? 3 3. 3 (5) 4 (6). 
 
 N.B. There can never be two Moving Shvas together. 
 The changes which are made are as follows : 
 (J.) Before * *, the 1 takes ; and with this the * blends 
 so as to form * (Long-Khirik], the of the * being then 
 
 dropped; thus, 
 
 rn-liT. Juda, rn-irV} AND Juda. 
 
 (c.) (i.) Before any other letter with , 5) (not \) is prefixed; thus, 
 PIDJ;! yesterday, t >1Dr>1 AND yesterday. 
 
 [(ii.) Also !| (not 1) is put before 3 and Jb and 3 even 
 when these letters have a Vowel ; thus, 
 
 from pa & D & ), we have +p2-1 & IM & tjgl.] 
 
 (d.) Before any one of the letters ^PHX + with a Compound 
 Shva, the ) takes 
 
 before -=r, before -^r, o before -^ ; thus, 
 OKI, 3S1 AND I, andsoTiqi, fl?$., Mr SJ, 4, etc - 
 
 4. (a.) The three 3 e/i or by, 3 as or like, 7 <o or ^r, are 
 
 prefixed thus, 
 
 *1*3 IN a ftand, T3 LIKE a Aand, "TJ7 TO a hand. 
 
 But some change must be made when one of these is to be 
 prefixed to a word which has a Shva under its first letter, because 
 there can never be two Moving Shvas together. The changes 
 which are made are as follows : 
 
 (5.) Before *||, the 3 or 3 or ^ takes . With this the ' 
 blends so as to form * (the of the * being dropped) ; thus, 
 from rn-in Juda, rnirpa, 
 
 * But not before The NAME [Pt. I. 79 (2)], which may be represented by J* } 
 for which ^"iX is read. Before this NAME the 1 takes , and the is dropped, 
 as in "1 (which is read as *J'"JN1). 
 
 t For the removal of Dagesh Lene from the f\ see Pt. I. 51 (iv). 
 t (i.) Before ^'"IK The Lord (and some words from D* 1 ?"!*?, besides), the 1 
 takes , and the of the K is dropped, as in *yiX} AND The Lord, tflNI, &c. 
 (ii) Before DVi?S God (and some words from it) the t takes -sr- and 
 the -vj- of the N is dropped, as in D^K.I AND God. 
 
 (iii.) Euphonic exceptions are DD^HI, Wty, Vf}\, DD^ni, ^Hl, P- 277 9. 
 (iv.) Before -=r or when NOT under one of JJnntf, -1 is put; thus 2n_M. 
 8 i.e. one of the three , -yr, ; Pt. I. 23. 
 
 II But before The NAME ** -=- is given (the being dropped); thus ^2 etc. 
 Gomp. Note (*) above.
 
 PREFIXES 33 AND . 4 (c) 5 (i). 3 
 
 (c.) Before any other letter with T , the 3 or 3 or S takes a 
 'Slight' -vowel [Pt. L 56], generally - ; thus, 
 from 
 
 (<) Before any one of the letters yiTlKt with a Compouiid 
 Shva (Pt. I. 23), the prefixes ^3 take 
 
 before , before ^, o before 77 ; thus, 
 ofe, n$, Dhr, ^3, etc. 
 
 (e.) For the 733 with followed by Dagesh\ (with another 
 vowel in some cases in which the Dagesh cannot stand), see 
 below, 8. 
 
 Note, (a.) These prefixed particles have some other significations sometimes, 
 besides those that are given above. When any instance of this occurs in the 
 Exercises, due notice will be given. 
 
 (.) The 733 have sometimes; comp. Eule II. on p. 225. 
 
 (y.) Besides these prefixes 733, there are also the Prepositions 1D3 in, 
 1D3 like, 1D^ to. There is also J from, as well as the prefix D of (5).] 
 
 5. (a) The prefix & (from} takes followed by Dagesh; thus, 
 TO FP.OIT a hand, *32?p FROM weeping. 
 
 (b.} But the 5 letters ^ymX do not receive this Dagesh. And 
 
 * For the removal of Dagesh Lene from the 5, see Pt. I. 51 (iv). 
 
 * (i.) Before *J1X (and some words from D^"JX besides), the 733 take --- 
 and the ^- of the S is dropped ; thus, *31K3, etc. Comp. Note (t, i.) on p. 2. 
 
 (ii.) Before D^iT?.^ (and some words from it) the 733 take and the of 
 the N is dropped; thus, DST7X3, etc. Comp. Note (i, ii.) on p. 2. 
 
 (iii.) Euphonic exceptions are nVHSj T\frf? t etc., on p. 276 & 277; & ril'D^ 
 p. 278. 
 
 t rlign.313 (Is. xxiv. 2) has '33 irregularly, instead of '^3. 
 
 5 In a few cases the Dagesh is omitted, where it would be over a Shva; as 
 from the 3 of "V?, J U( 1- viii. 2 (where some have the Dagesh); from the 2 of ' 
 Drn-13?t? Ez. xxxii. 30; from the ? of DIN^P Gen. xxv. 23. [These instances 
 are cited by R. D. KimkhL]
 
 4 PREFIXES ft AND H. 5 (5) 6 (c). 
 
 'COMPENSATION* for the Dagesh' is said to be made by 
 lengthening the of the ft into ; thus, 
 
 gp, ninp, Vino, i-yip, ^N~>, etc. 
 
 (c.) Before * } the ft takes , with which the blends so 
 as to form * (the of the * being dropped and the Dagesh 
 NOT then given after the ft ;) thus, 
 
 V Ju<Za, iTTirVp FBOM Juda. 
 
 6. (a.) The prefix ,1 bearing and followed by Dagesh is 
 the mark for 'the 1 J; thus, 
 
 T 1 a ftand, TH THE hand; pip a voice, ?ij?n THE w>ie. 
 
 (5.) The 5 letters "lyn/ltf do not receive the Dagesh. And 
 ' COMPENSATION for the Dagesh ' is said to be made by 
 lengthening the into ; thus, 
 
 K^K a man, tJ^Xn THE man, and so "PJjn THE city, K>JOn THE head. 
 
 As a RULE, this Compensation IS MADE before *1 and before 
 tf, and generally before ^; but 
 
 (c.) N.B. The Compensation is NOT MADE 
 (i.) before j"l, 
 (ii.) before H except in a few instances : thus, 
 
 * This ' Compensation for the Dagesh' is sometimes refused, as in D-1fip, and 
 BO in pn; but we find DiXnp (Jer. yii. 34). So 1?^O and ^M"1O Is. xiv. 3, 
 ^hnp 1 Sam. rani. 28, (& 2 Sam. xviii. 16,) etc. And before it, as in nv^jp 
 1 Ki ii. 27, Dn'VrjO Hag. ii. 16, 'only when it is with Shya,' as B. D. Kimkhi 
 remarks, who cites these examples. This case (of the il) is slightly different from 
 the others. For, the simple Shva beneath the fl [being quiescent (Pt. I. 25)] 
 shows that the H is made to end the syllable beginning with the D. [Obs. 
 Modern editions are not always to be relied upon in this, and in some other 
 matters.] 
 
 t But before The NAME J*, for which *2'"1$ is read, the D takes -TT-; thus ^13. 
 
 t The 'Definite Article', as it is called. This Prefix has some other values 
 also, as will be seen by and by. [For another prefix which sometimes appears 
 like this, see 7 (b, Note). 
 
 S inn THE mountain (from 1H), and so rnHHj and so also DHH 
 nn, from Dn, npn, ri3n, for which see 9 (a) & 94.
 
 PREFIXES n. 6 (c) 7 (a). 
 
 (i.) in favour, }nn THE favour; "lin a hole, "tinD THE hole*', 
 (ii) lin majesty, "linn THE majesty, etc. 
 
 (c?.) N.B. Moreover, this Prefix ,1 (ffo) takes 
 (i.) before words beginning with H, 
 
 thus, in a/eas, Jnn THE feast; and so nn, D3nn, etc.; 
 (ii.) before words beginning with UNACCENTED Hf, or y f, 
 thus D^.n mountains, D^nn THE mountains t, 
 D"njJ cities, D^n THE cities ; 
 
 [(iii.) also, but only rarely, before unaccented tf , as in 
 ^toXn (Mi. ii. 7), according to some]. 
 
 (e.) The of the Prefix ,*J (the} is sometimes retained before 
 y, as in Miyn (Prov. ii. 13) THE ones-forsaking (ra.). But 
 
 this is somewhat rare except in cases of the 'Contraction' 
 mentioned in 8.] 
 
 [(/.} The Dagesh for this Prefix H (the) is generally NOT 
 given to * having Shva; thus "l&Vl THE river, 1^D\1 THE 
 foundation. But the Dagesh is given sometimes, as in DOVft 
 tlte Greeks (Joel iv. 6); and so in fi5ttyn (Is. xiv. 26)]. 
 
 7. (a.) The prefix n having signifies Interrogation ||; thus, 
 ^ there is, K^n. Is there?, DJ a sea, D^n WHETHEsIf a sea? . 
 
 * So inn THE living (or that liveth), for which there is once *nn Gen. vi. 19. 
 Comp. D*3Bnn 2 Chr. xiv. 4 (and xxxiv. i&7) with D^^DI? once, Is. xvii. 8. 
 t N.B. The here is the Long --; not the 5, ". Khautuph. 
 
 i So in nitfnnn 2 K. xv. ie, -li^n Ezra x. u. 
 
 The Dagesh F. is sometimes omitted also from t? (thus B$?n the little 
 Nu. xxxv. 8, etc.) ; and in the case of a few other letters with T the Dagesh is 
 not given in a few instances. 
 
 II Sometimes it serves as a 'Note of Admiration!' 
 
 1T We have no word really in English for this n. Perhaps the word 
 "Whither?" may temporarily be used for it where an English word may seem 
 to be necessary. The prefix may sometimes be represented by "whether" 
 almost without interrogation.
 
 6 H INTERROG. 7 (b & c). A CONTRACTION 8. 
 
 (b.) Before a letter \rith Shva (Simple or Compound), the 
 Interrogative ,1 takes a ' Slight '-vowel ; thus, 
 
 BJft?n* WHETHER a little?, np^H WHETHEB truth? 
 
 (c.) The fi Interrogative sometimes takes f before one of 
 the letters ^H/IK (even when having a Vowel) ; thus, 
 
 PX there is not, pKH Is there not?; "ity yet, 1'iyn WHETHER yet? 
 
 [NOTE (i.) This prefix is to be placed before the FIRST word of the Interro- 
 gative clause. 
 
 (ii.) In some instances the context alone t can decide whether the 
 prefix H is a mark of Interrogation or for the Definite Article.] 
 
 8. (a.) A CONTRACTION is often made when a word with the 
 'Definite Article' is to have one of the prefixes 733, the fi 
 being left out , and its vowel given to the prefix ; thus, 
 
 D3 for D'HS, D3 for D T H3, D for D'H^; 
 and so, 3H3 for JHPI3, ^H? for ^>nfl|, $ for vjjjrfo 
 
 (b.} N.B. This Contraction is NOT made in the case of the 
 prefixes } & fc of 3 & 5. In the case of these, the full form 
 must always be written ; thus, 
 
 Djni AND THE sea, D^HIp FROM THE tea. 
 
 (c.) The full forms sometimes occur, with the prefixes 7> 3> 3; 
 
 thus DjOK'na, Di'ni, 
 
 and so 
 
 (d.) The contracted forms are the most common, and should 
 always be written in Composition. 
 
 * This word, with the n thus pointed, is exactly like a word with the 
 'Definite Article' in Note () on p. 5. By the Context alone can it be known in 
 this case whether the prefix H is a mark of interrogation or for the ' Definite 
 Article'. Comp. 'Note (ii.)' above. 
 
 t And sometimes (before an unaccented Long -^-) it takes ; thus "ibtffl 
 Ez. xxviii. 9, *?!)Kn Nu. xi. 12, Job. xxi. 4, HTVnri Joel i. 2, 3C>nn Gen. xxiv. 5. 
 
 t The context, however, generally decides without any doubt. 
 
 I This is but one instance of a not unusual Contraction (as will be seen here- 
 after). When H would be preceded immediately by a letter bearing Shva, the H in 
 several other cases is dropped sometimes, and its vowel given to that preceding 
 letter. 
 
 I! All these instances in (c.) are given by B. D. Kimkhi.
 
 [To face p. 6.] 
 
 TABLE OP THE PREFIXES IN SECTION I. 
 % The after a letter stand in place of a word. 
 
 (i) The 1, and the 3, 3, 7, are prefixed thus : 
 
 (a) -I and -3, 3, "'S, ordinarily [ 3() & 4 (a)]. 
 (5) -"I and -*3, '"3 , -'S, before "* [ 3 (5) & 4 (ft)]. 
 (c) i. 5| and 3, 3, 7, before any other letter with 
 
 [ 3 & 5 (c)], and 
 
 ii. 5| also (instead of \) before 3 and /b and fi . 
 1 and 3, 3, 7, before -=-; 
 J and 3, 3, 7, before ; 
 1* and 3* 3* 7* before -, 
 
 t T > T ) T > 
 
 [Note. For ^NJ, tflN3, etc., and D^rs.1, C3^N3, etc., 
 see Note (J) p. 2 and (t) p. 3.] 
 
 (ii) The D of 5 is prefixed thus : 
 () '"ti followed by Dagesh, 
 
 (b) -0 before one of the letters lynPlN (Pt. I, 49), 
 
 (c) -^before-*. 
 
 (iii) The PI of 6 is prefixed thus : 
 
 (a) Pi followed by Dagesh ordinarily, 
 
 (b) H for ' Compensation/ but 
 
 (c) Jl is retained before M generally (and before Pi some- 
 
 times), 
 
 (d) PI is given before Pi and before unaccented Pi and ]} 
 
 t T t T * 
 
 (iv) The Interrogative Pi is prefixed thus : 
 
 (a) n ordinarily, 
 
 (b) Pi before a letter which has a Shva. 
 
 * The here is &
 
 7 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 (To be translated into English.} 
 * # * The English meanings required are given in a foot-note. 
 
 . 
 
 : ' 
 
 T T -: * TT:- ' TT- 
 
 , 
 
 TTV" ' T T V ' TTV:' TTV 
 
 i A word. 2 A wise man. ' A lion. 4 A city. 5 Salvation. 6 Words.
 
 8 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew.) 
 
 * # * The Hebrew words required are given in a foot-note. Contracted forms 
 ( 8) are to be used here. 
 
 Harvest. * And harvest. In harvest. The harvest. And 
 the harvest. In the harvest. And in harvest. And in the 
 harvest. To harvest. And to harvest. To the harvest. And 
 to the harvest. From harvest. From the harvest. And from 
 the harvest. And from harvest. Whether in harvest ? 
 Whether like the harvest ? 
 
 Fire. 2 The fire. In the fire. As the fire. As fire. 
 And as the fire. And in the fire. From fire. And from fire. 
 In fire. Whether in the fire ? To the fire. And to the fire. 
 
 Water. 3 And water. And the water. From the water. 
 Whether to the water? And as the water. And in the water. 
 
 Sand. * As sand. The sand. As the sand. From sand. 
 And the sand. And as the sand. In the sand. And in the 
 sand. And from the sand. 
 
 An ornament. 8 As an ornament. To an ornament. From 
 an ornament. And an ornament. And to an ornament. And 
 from an ornament. Whether an ornament ? And in an orna- 
 ment. 
 
 Truth. 6 And truth. In truth. To truth. As the truth. 
 From truth. Whether truth ? Whether as truth ? Whether 
 from truth ? And the truth. And in the truth. And to the 
 truth. And in truth. 
 
 A bee. 7 In a bee. And in a bee. As a bee. And as a 
 bee. And from a bee. The bee. And to the bee. From a 
 bee. From the bee. Whether a bee ? Whether from the bee ? 
 And the bee. 
 
 a ; s on? s bin* nys noge
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. ABSOLUTE FORMS. 
 
 9. (a.) The absolute forms of the Personal Pronouns are given 
 fully in Table I (at the end of the book). The following are the 
 leading forms : 
 
 I *3jJ (or DJK), thou (m.) HF!K, he WPI, 
 
 we ttP$S (or ttm), ye (TO.) DrjS, tliey (m.) DH or HDH; 
 
 besides which there are the Feminine forms, 
 
 shewn*, tfcy(/.)nj53, 
 
 thou (/.) JjIK, ye (/.) H3FIK. 
 
 There are also the ' PAUSE '-forms [Pt. I. 41], 
 
 i : is (: ?!IK), | thou (m.) : nnx, | tfcw (/.) t IJIK, | IM : urftg (J wna). 
 
 These may be conveniently arranged in a Tabular form : 
 
 TABLE I. 
 
 [N.B. p. stands for ' Pause-form ', Pt. I. 41.] 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 ( JN V33K 
 
 r-^ 
 ((P. : *:) ^p. j VMK) 
 
 thou m. (p. : nriK) nn 
 
 thouf. (p. { flK) FIX 
 
 " \" " T / 5 ^ 
 
 \ 
 she (*wn) \n 
 
 / ( urn ) rox 
 
 v * / / .v ~; 
 
 tceJ 
 
 |(P. njn^^p. : ^D,?) 
 
 PLUBAL. 
 
 t/e m. CPlX 
 
 ^/. njris 
 
 tfty/. nsn 
 
 (/3.) These (except * Xin\ are the forms to be used in Com- 
 position. Those in the Notes on the full Tab. I are given 
 
 The form N1H occurs in the Pentateuch. It is 'read 1 Nn [Pt. I. 79 (3)].
 
 10 PERSONAL PRONOUNS 9, 10. 
 
 in order that the Student may be able to recognise them 
 when he meets with them in the course of his reading. 
 
 (7.) The words by the side of which the "p." is placed, 
 are forms that occur in " Pause " (Cp. Pt. I., 41). Those 
 Pronouns for which no * Pause * forms are specified retain, 
 when in ' Pause,' the form given in Table I. 
 
 (5.) According to a fundamental principle of the Language in 
 the Bible, what we call ' Third Person ' is reckoned ' First ; ' 
 i.e., He is First not I. The corresponding arrangement of 
 the personal Pronouns, in an order so contrary to that with 
 which we are all of us familiar, would appear very strange to 
 the English Reader. The arrangement of Table I.*, above, 
 has been devised as a means of introducing the matter gradu- 
 ally. According to this, the Reader may take the Pronouns 
 /, Thou, He, etc., from left to right as he is used to read 
 English. But he may also take the Hebrew Pronouns there 
 from right to left, as he will wish to take them when familiar 
 with the Hebrew order of the Pronouns. 
 
 [N.B. Since English words must be used in the sense which they usually bear 
 in English, we must use the English terms FIRST ' Person for I, Me, We, etc., 
 and ' THIRD ' Person for He, Him, Them, etc., because this is the English usage. 
 But the Student must remember that the Hebrew usage is just the reverse, as he 
 will know for himself by-and-by.] 
 
 10. (a.). Only two Genders, Masculine and Feminine, are 
 recognized in Hebrew. 
 
 (.). The ' First Person ' Pronouns (as they are called in 
 English) are of common gender, i.e., have no different forms 
 for different genders. 
 
 [Note. There being no ' Neuter ' Pronouns in Hebrew, we 
 .may have to place (m.) or (f.) by the side of " it " sometimes, 
 thus, it (w.), it (f.}, in order to point out the gender 
 of the Hebrew word to which " it " refers.] 
 
 * And so in some other Tables below.
 
 PLAN OF THE EXERCISES, 11. 11 
 
 [11. N.B. In the Exercises: 
 
 (a) The figures 1, 2, 3, etc., attached to words, refer to Notes below the Exer- 
 cise, in which Notes all necessary assistance is given. 
 
 (/3) In the Hebrew Exercises (to be translated into English) the meaning of 
 each word is put in the Note so far as it cannot be made out from what has 
 been previously given. 
 
 (y) Wherever a Hebrew word involves something that has not previously been 
 explained, the full meaning is always given in the Note. 
 
 (S) The mark -f- is put in the earlier Exercises to shew the place of ' the 
 logical copula,' or the ' Substantive Verb ' (as some call it), in any of the various 
 forms am, is, teas, were, art, etc. [This mark, (necessary, perhaps, at first in 
 order that the student may know where such words are to be supplied in English) 
 will gradually be dispensed with.] 
 
 (i) The Hebrew Verb generally precedes its Subject, except where there is 
 emphasis on the Subject. Hence the order of the words in English must some- 
 times differ from that of the Hebrew, but no difficulty (it is hoped) will be caused 
 by this. 
 
 () In the English Exercises (to be translated into Hebrew), words in the 
 Notes stand each of them for that one English word simply to which the figure is 
 attached. [N.B. All English words connected by hyphens are to be taken as one 
 word in regard to this.] 
 
 (n) The English words are always given in the order in which they are to stand 
 in the Hebrew rendering. But 
 
 (0) The English words, in the order to be observed in the Hebrew rendering, are 
 sometimes given within ( ), preceded by the word * Hebr.' 
 
 (1) So, too, when the form of expression required in Hebrew is different from 
 the English form ; thus, for example, THINK (m.), (Hebr., to Thee}. 
 
 (je) English words (when there are more than one), which are to be rendered 
 according to the form within the ( ), are connected by hyphens. 
 
 (X) Words within [ ] are not to be translated into Hebrew. 
 
 (ji) In accordance with (), The Hebrew Pronouns are to be expressed 
 except where the English Pronoun is joined to the Verb by a hyphen. 
 
 (v) J stands for The NAME, pronounced ^'"J, Pt- I, 79 (2).] 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 (To be translated into English.') 
 
 i See <v) above. * O'p6 God. 3 DW. [the] counsel of. * shall stand 
 
 5 hast called. 6 to. 7 ^p a king. thy servant. 9 133 thy son. 1 who ?
 
 rab 
 
 26 *ja " 3 : urn** + 24 pna : cnx + 
 
 ... T ^ : IT -: ITT- v - 
 
 : + 
 
 11 K"X a man. 12 s h a ll call Me. 13 my Father. u beautiful (/.). 15 O 
 my love (E.V.). 16 na-n? blessed (f). "entangled (pi. m.) 18 H 5 ? ( fr - 
 pS) a land. W knowest'. 20 that. 21 mighty men. 22 fair (/.) [E.V., Gen. vi. 2]. 
 23 whence? 24 Haran (with D). 25 ^ f or all us. 26 sons o f. 27 27 one man, 
 28 true men. 29 My flock. 30 thus. 31 hath said. 32 The Lord. 33 See Pt. I., 
 79 (2), and 'Vocabulary' (p. 385). 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew.) 
 
 I [was] in the way. 1 He said 2 to the king. 3 Who 4 [art] 
 thou (m.)? Who 4 [art] thou (/.)? They (m.) said 5 to the 
 man. 6 Like a queen 7 she [was]. As kings 8 [were] they (m.). 
 It (/.) [is] Jezebel. 9 It (m.) [is] the bread. 10 From Haran " 
 [were] they (/.). Ye (/.) [are] like queens. 12 And through " 
 our -iniquities 14 we-have-been -given, 15 we and our -kings, 16 
 into 13 their-hands. 17 THOU [art] our-Father. 18 And we will- 
 be-joyous 19 in Thy-salvation. 20 
 
 s 
 
 133 
 
 (Pause- 
 
 form).
 
 [To face p. 12.] 
 
 ABSTRACT OF TABLED Il-Vi. 
 
 (A) Pron.-Affix endings in Tabs. 
 
 V (i) & VI (i), i.e. with a 
 SINGULAR NOUN. 
 
 V V i- 
 
 my thy (m.) his 
 
 my thy (/.) her 
 
 ^ Dp- D- 
 
 our your (m.) their (m.) 
 
 W D t 
 
 I V IT 
 
 our your (/.) their (/.) 
 
 (a) Pron.-Affix endings in Tabs. II (i) & III,. 
 t.e. with certain Particles. 
 
 * S| ] Sing. Masc. 
 
 me thee (m.) him 
 
 *__ 'I JTJ Sing. Fern. 
 
 me thee (/.) her 
 
 !)}_ D5 
 
 H Plu. Masc. 
 
 us you (m.) them (m.) 
 
 Fern. 
 
 us you (/.) 
 
 (/.) 
 
 (B) Pron.-Affix endings in Tabs. 
 V (ii) & VI (ii), i.e. with a 
 PLURAL NOUN. 
 
 my thy (m.) his 
 
 thy (/.) 
 
 V DV 
 
 V (m.) 
 
 our your (/.) their (/.) 
 
 (b) Pron.-Affix endings in Tab. IV, i.e. with 
 certain Particles. 
 
 me thee (m.) him 
 
 * *n*_ H* Sing. Fern. 
 
 me thee (/.) her 
 
 W__ D5*_ DfT Plu. Masc. 
 us you (m.) them (m.) 
 
 MS 
 
 _ p__ p*_ Plu. Fern. 
 w (/.) fAem (/.) 
 
 Note : (a) For the affix-forms with 3 as or like, and ttfrom, see Tab. II (ii). 
 
 (0) The endings in (a) for Tabs. II (i) and III are seen to agree with those 
 
 in (A) for a SING. Noun in the main. 
 (7) The endings in (b) for Tab. IV are seen to agree with those in (B) for a 
 
 PLU. Noun in the main. 
 (S) The Pron.-endings with a DUAL are the same as with a PLU. Noon.
 
 [To face p. 13.] 
 
 [NOTE. 
 
 The TABLES referred to in the following pages will be found 
 AT THE END of the volume. The remarks on these pages are 
 introductory to and explanatory of the Tables. 
 
 N.B. In using the Tables for the ENGLISH-HEBREW Ex- 
 ercises the Student should prefer THE FORM TO THE RIGHT 
 always, where more forms than one are given, as in some 
 parts of Tab. II].
 
 13 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. AFFIX-FORMS. 
 
 12. Besides the 'Absolute' Forms (as they are called) of 
 the Personal Pronouns, given in 9 above, there are some 
 Affix-forms consisting of one or more of the letters D^D/l 
 by which the Personal Pronouns are often represented. 
 
 13. The Pronoun- Affixes are attached both (a) to Particles* 
 and Nouns, and (/3) also to Verbs -f*. 
 
 14. (1.) Thus, from 3 in, we have [comp. Tab. II (1)] 
 *3 in me, T|2 in thee m. /1|3 f.Y 13 in him /F13 in her), 
 
 133 in us, D33 in you m. (J33 /.), DH3 in them m. ({H3 /.). 
 
 (2.) So from 7 to or for, we have [comp. Tab. II (2)]. 
 ^ to me, T to thee m. (\^/-), '$ to him (r6 to fter), 
 I:!? to us, DD^> to you m. (|D^> /.), DH^ to them m. (JH^ /.). 
 
 (3.) Of itoS (or 3) as, like, the forms are [Tab. II (3)] 
 >ib3 like me, *|b3 Jtfcc tftce m. (^3 /.), -inbS Zifte him (Hb3 /.), 
 13b3 Zifce us, ODD? lifte t/ou m. (|3b| /.), DHb? Zifce iftem m. (JH3 /.). 
 with some other forms to be seen in Tab. II. 
 
 (4.) Of |2p (or tyfrom, the forms are [Tab. II (4)] 
 '3p from me, ^t? from thee m. (5p?/.), -13gp/rom Aint (H39/.), 
 
 ISSp/ro/TiMs, D3O /rom you m. (|3D /.), DHO /row tAe?re m. (jn. /.). 
 with some other forms to be seen in Tab. II. 
 
 * # * Where more than one form is given in the Table, the Student may take 
 the EIGHT-HAND form. 
 
 * Including Preposition-Zem, as in Table II., and Words such as those 
 in Tables, III., IV. [The Tables are given at the end of the book.] 
 
 t Independently of, and sometimes in addition to, the inflexion-forms. See 
 more hereafter.
 
 14 PRON- AFFIXES IN TABS. II VI. 15 20. 
 
 15. The Affixes in Tab. Ill*, as in Tab. II (1) & (2), are 
 
 i 1 8., ^ 2 s. m. CSJ^-/.), i 3 s. m. (B /.), 
 
 1 pL, D? 2 pi. m. (13 /.) DPI (or D -) 3 pL m. (JH or j -, /.). 
 
 16. But in Tab. IV, although the affixed letters representing 
 the Pronouns are mainly the same as those above, the CONNECTING 
 LINKS (between the Pronouns and the words to which they are 
 affixed) are different, the complete Affixes being as follows, 
 
 -ls., T-2s. m. (^ -=-/.), V-3s.m. (W-f.), 
 -^ 1 pi., Dy-sr- 2 pi. m. (| /.), Drp 3 pL m. (f /.). 
 
 17. Now if the Student will look at Tab. V, he will see that 
 (i.) The Affixes in Tab. Ill are the samef as those 
 
 which in Tab. V (i.) are attached to the SINGULAR Noun 
 Tfc? a song, 
 
 (ii.) The Affixes in Tab. IV are the same as those which 
 in Tab. V (ii.) are attached to the PLURAL Noun D^"Tfc? songs. 
 
 18. The Singular *)*&? a song with Pron-Affs. has the forms 
 
 *1 S B> my song, ^T^ thy (m.) song ("=!/), 'WB> his song (ft/-), 
 
 WyB> our song, KpfW your (m.) song ()? /.) } DTK? their (m.) song (} /.). 
 
 19. Of ^\y a song, the Plural is D**1^' songs. This with 
 Pron-Affs. has the forms 
 
 ' my songs, ^^^ thy (m.) songs (l]J -=-/.^ VW his songs (PP /), 
 tr songs, DJ^B' yowr (??i.) son^s (I/-), &D^1' 1 ?' *^ l ' r ( m -) son^s (!/). 
 
 N.B. The D of the Plural ending D* is dropped in these forms with Pron- 
 Affs. ; but its \ as a mark of the Plural, stands as part of the connecting link 
 between the Noun and the Pron-Affs. (except 1 s.) 
 
 20. In Tab. VI the Affixes are the same as in Tab. V, but 
 N.B. The ft of the ending in the form rnifl is replaced by J"l 
 
 when the Affixes are put on ; thus 
 
 * The form ~r\$ (in Tab. III. 1 & 3) means DX unaccented. Comp. Pt. I, 
 37 (2) & 55 (9, J). 
 
 t Except that there is -?- in Tab. m, in place of the in "0 & f\-^- 
 Si -13 of Tab. V (i. ), and in a few other places.
 
 PRON- AFFIXES IN TABS. VI & VII. 20 22. 15 
 
 my law, ^rnin thy (m.) law (^\f.), irniFl his law (H^-/.). 
 IJrnin our law, D^liF) your (m.) law (jr> /.), Drnifl iMr (m.) law (I/-). 
 
 21. Of rnifi a ?aw> the Plural is rThifi (or rhlfl) Zaws. 
 
 This takes Pron-Affs. of the same form as those in Tab. V (ii.), 
 the ending fii (or fl J_) being NOT dropped, but Affixes ADDED 
 THERETO, like those in Tab. V (ii.); thus 
 
 *rhin my laws, ^n'lin thy (m.) laws, Vrn'lfl his laws, 
 etc., see Tab. VI (ii.) 
 
 N.B. (1.) There are TWO marks of the Plural in such forms 
 as these, viz. the FH (or fi ) and the 1 of the Affix form. 
 
 (2.) Some forms occur with only one of these marks of 
 
 the Plural, as *!TTl vVltt Ps. ix. 15. The Student must never 
 I T : 
 
 write such in Composition. 
 
 22. To a Noun of Dual form, as tMTK ears [Tab. VII], 
 
 Pron-Affs. are attached as in the SECOND PART of Tab. V 
 (i.e. as in the forms from the Plural D^* 1 !^ songs}; thus 
 ^JK my ears, *J^tK thy (m.) ears, V3JX Ms ears, 
 IJ^fr? our ears, DD^.tX your (m.) ears, Bp H J3?K their (m.) ears. 
 etc., see Tab. VII. 
 
 NOTE (a.) We shall see hereafter that D* is the special mark for the Plural 
 MASCULINE, and Dl (or fl ) for the Plural Feminine. 
 
 (ft.) For the meaning of 'i.e.', and of the forms in connection there- 
 with, on the right of the forms with the Pron-Affixes in Tabs. V VII, see 
 hereafter, 53. The Student need not be troubled with these at present. 
 
 (7.) Many Nouns undergo some change of form on receiving Pron-Affs. 
 This matter belongs to Sect. VII on NOUNS. 
 
 (5.) The PEON-AFFIXES EEMAIN UNCHANGED in form whatever changes 
 the Noun-forms themselves undergo. But 
 
 (e.) Several variations in the forms of these Affixes occur in different 
 parts of the Bible. For these it is sufficient to refer to Tab. VIII. ] 
 
 Obs. Exercises V & VI are on Tab. II, 
 
 VII & VIII on Tabs. Ill & IV, 
 IX & X on Tabs. V VII.
 
 16 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 (To be translated into English.} 
 
 T |T 
 
 TIT onto t 26 
 
 1 See Vocab. p. 385. 2 not. 3 1 will fear, [i.e. (2 and 3 going together) / 
 will not fear}. 4 my God. 5 I have trusted. 6 hath thirsted. 7 my soul. 8 the 
 prefix 3 of 4 here signifies * on.' 9 hath-taken-supporting-hold. 10 Thy 
 right hand. u [O] God ! l2 who ? 13 darkness. 14 will obscure, [the not ' 
 of the preceding word goes with this word to express * will not obscure '] . 
 15 not [This Negative Particle with the Tense after it, in No. 16 (' Thou wilt 
 hide'}, signifies 'Do not hide,' deprecatively]. 16 [see No. 15]. 17 Thy face. 
 18 it shall be hid. 19 any. 20 thing. 21 nViy eternity. 22 ye shall make. 
 23 idols. 24 e yes. 25 & n ot. 26 they will see. 27 s h a ll be. 28 their makers. 
 29 every one. so that. 31 trusteth. 32 ^ God. 33 f or salvation. 34 my God. 
 35 my Rock. 36 1 will take refuge. 3? counsel. 38 and understanding. 39 my 
 salvation. * D^S gods. *See Pt. L, 12. 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 (To be translated into Hebrew.} 
 To thee (m.}. To thee (/.). 
 
 To me. 
 
 To us. To you (.). 
 them (/.). 
 
 In me. In thee (m.). In thee (f.y In him. 
 In us. In you (m.). In you (f.). In them 
 them (/> 
 
 To him. To her. 
 To you (/.). To them (m.). To 
 
 In her. 
 .. In
 
 17 
 
 Like me. Like thee (m.). Like thee (/.). Like him. 
 Like her. Like us. Like you (in.). Like you (f.). Like 
 them (m.). Like them (f.). 
 
 From me. From thee (m.). From thee (/.). From him. 
 From her. From us. From you (m.). From you (/.). 
 From them (m.). From them (f.). 
 
 Thine (m.) (Hebr., to Thee) [am] I. And His (Hebr., to 
 Him) [are] we. What ' dost-thou-(m.)-here (Hebr., [is there] 
 to thee here 2 ) 7 . There-is-not 3 one-calling 4 among-them (m.) 
 (Hebr., in them). Hath-He-not-also-spoken-by-us (Hebr., 
 Whether not 5 also 6 by 7 us hath-He-spoken ") ? There-is-none 3 
 like it (f.) I-am-as-thou-(m.)-art (Hebr., like me, like thee). 
 Thou-[art]-mightier-than-we (Hebr., thou-art-mighty 9 from 
 us). No-one-of-us-will-withold-his-sepulchre-from-thee (m.) 
 (Hebr., any -one from-us his-sepulchre" will-not -witliold 
 from thee). Thou-(m.)-shalt-not-be-afraid 13 of-them (m.) 
 (Hebr., from them). 
 inc. ana. z \^. *vrjp. *6. DI. 73 ( t h e Prefix). 
 
 EXERCISE VII. [AND VIII J. 
 (7b ie translated into Hebreio.) 
 
 Me. 1 Thee (m.). Thee (/.). Him. Her. Us. You (m.). 
 You (/.). Them (m.). Them (/.). 
 
 With 2 me. With thee (m.). With thee (/.). With him. 
 With her. With us. With you (m.). With you (/.). With 
 them (m.). With them (/.). 
 
 To 3 me. To thee (m.). To thee (/.). To him. To her. 
 To us. To you (m.). To you (/.). To them (m.). To 
 them (/.). 
 
 Upon 4 me. Upon thee (m.). Upon thee (/.). Upon him.- 
 Upon her. Upon us. Upon you (m.). Upon you (/.). Upon 
 them (m.). Upon them (/.). 
 
 l Table III. (1). 2 Tab. III. (2). [Also write these with Dy, Tab. III. (3)] 3^S. *Vg. 
 
 C
 
 18 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 Thee l (m.)I-brought 2 unto 3 me. It 1 (/.) I-brought 2 upon 4 
 him. With 6 thee (m.) [am] I. What 6 [is] with 5 us? And-they- 
 will-kill 7 me 1 and thee 1 (/.) they- will-keep-alive 8 . He-spake 9 
 with 5 us roughly, 10 and-set-us-down (Hebr., and-gave" us 1 ) as 
 spies (E.V.). 12 And-we-said 1J unto 3 him true-men 14 [are] we. 
 An d-he-made-him self-strange 15 unto 3 them. And-the-people- 
 set (Hebr., and-they -set 16 [viz.] the people} him 1 over* 
 them (m.) for a head 18 and for a chief. 19 And-he-came 20 to 3 
 them (m.). And-he-saw 2l them^m.). And-He-hath-set-thee 22 
 to K [be] king 24 over 4 us (m.). 
 
 1 Table III. (1). 2 *nxin. 8^. 4<?j>. 5 nN [Table III. (2)]. 6 nD. 
 
 8 -viT. 9 ">in.' 'io'niE^. v fli. "D^fip. ' 
 
 16 *B*te 17 y ^H w^h the Def.' Art.). 
 21 n1. ' T 22 ^jpri'1.' 23 ^) (the prefix). 24 o. 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 (To be translated into English.} 
 
 l6 
 
 1 Hear Thou. 2 See Vocab. p. 385. 
 
 3 ?ip a voice. 4 "1-1 S a rock. 5 not. [This with the next word, No. 6, 
 signifies do not be silent.']. 6 See in No. 5. 7 sing ye hymns. 8 See No. 2 
 above, and p. 2 Note (ll). 9 T'pn a saint (pi. D^Tprj). 10 and give thanks. 
 
 11 for a remembrance of. 12 KHp holiness [with aff. ^"l.fj wt/..., etc.]. 13 may 
 He hear. ^PD^H a palace-temple. 15 The mark fora ' Definite object.' This 
 word flX (or HS when unaccented as here) cannot be rendered by any word 
 in English : it corresponds with the Accusative form in languages which 
 have that form. 1G I heard. 17 J3, |3, a garden. 18 and he said. 19 viz.. Ssi"i
 
 19 
 
 "oa TIT 
 
 41 nn : 
 
 x 61 T 47 " 
 
 v 
 
 B "an^iaji 61 T 47 
 
 T T: 
 
 21 this. 21 [O] my son. 22Da\id. 23 bone [pi. D^VV]. 21 ")B>3 flesh [with 
 aff. nb? Aw..., etc.]. 25 and thou shall gather. 26 jj^'corn [I., with Affixes]. 
 27 tfnMgl new wine. 28 -)ny! oil. 29 i e t me drink. T T 30 I 1)ra y. 31 a little. 
 32 water. 33 H3 a pitcher. ^ and she hasted. ^ and she let down. ^ upon. 
 37 T a hand. 88 also. 39^3 a camel [pi. D^|]. *<> I will draw. 41 Yn a 
 friend. 42 went down. * 3 &nd he came. * l viz. Noah [came]. 45 D*J2 sons. 
 46 J1X with [w. aff. 'JnS u'itk me, etc.]. 4 ? to, into. 48 the ark. 49 [the] ways of. 
 50 Zion. 51 mourning. 52 fH3 a priest [pi. D*3n.3j. 53 sighing. 64 npin? a 
 virgin. 55 afflicted. 56 and as for her. 57 bitterness. 58 behold. 69 'J'y. 
 eyes of [dual D^ eyes]. 60 servants. 6 1 hand of. 62 oyjg (pi. f onn 
 a master. 63 a woman-servant. 64 iTT.^33 a mistress [also fin^li with a 
 my..., etc.]. 65 so. 66 D*rpg God [a plural form]. 6 ? until. 68 that He pity us. 
 C9 i6 not. 70 HSB'ri? a thought [^, with Affixes]. 71 your (m.) ways. 
 72 Q'pTn ways. 73 hath reigned. 74 j[nd they shall be. 75 1^2. kings [shall be]. 
 < 6 D^C'S nursing-fathers. 77 n'lb' a princess. 78 n|5O'O a nursing-mother. 
 79 TlV'a rock. 80 bless thou (/.) 81 [O] my soul. 82 ( w i t h 83) and f orge t not 
 [Cp. No. 5, above]. 84 all. 85 ^D| a benefit. 
 
 NOTE, fcfr (not) may be remembered now.
 
 20 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew.') 
 
 His horse. 1 Thy (m.) horse. My horse. Their (m.) horse. 
 Your (m.) horse. Our horse. His horses. Thy (m.') horses. 
 My horses. Their (.) horses. Your (w.) horses. Our 
 horses. 
 
 My friend 2 [is] mine (Heb., to 3 me). In thy (m.) friend. 
 Like thy (/.) friend. To his friend. From her friend. And 
 from our friend. And to your (m.) friend. And like your (f.~) 
 friend. And to their (wa.) friend. And in their (f.~) friend. 
 And my friends. "Whether thy (m.) friends? Thy (/.) friends. 
 His friends. Her friends. Our friends [are] your (m.) 
 friends. Among 4 your (/".) friends [are] their (m.) friends 
 and their (/".) friends. 
 
 His bride. 5 My bride [is] like her. Like thy (m.) 
 
 bride [is] she. The brides. Their (#.) brides. Your (m.) 
 brides and our brides. 
 
 My riddle. 6 Her riddles. Thy (/.) riddles. Their (/.) 
 riddles. Your (m.) riddle. Our riddle. Their (m.) riddle. 
 And in his riddle. 
 
 Her lamp. 7 From her lamps. To my lamps. In thy (/".) 
 lamps. And like your (m.) lamps. Their (/".) lamps. 
 "Whether 8 his lamps? "Whether like our lamps [are] thy(y.) 
 lamps ? 
 
 His eye. 9 In his eyes. Like their (/.) eyes. In our eyes. 
 And in her eyes. Thy (w.) eye. His eyes. Thy (/.) eyes. 
 Her eye. Your (m.) eyes. 
 
 1 D-1D (Plur. D'D-ID horses). 2 Yn (Plur. DHH friends). **? (the Prefix). 
 < 3 (the Prefix). ' 5 n^3 (Plur. ni;>3 brides). 6 nTH (Plur. fllTH riddles}. 
 1 S?. (Plur. nh3 lamps). 8 q (the Interrogative Prefi'x). 9 \\V (w. aff. ^J> my 
 eye, etc.; Dual DJ3^ eyes, w.' aff. ^# my eyes, etc., Table VII.).
 
 SECTION IV. 
 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 
 
 23. The word "1^5$ stands for the Relative Pronouns who, 
 which, that; and is the same in form for all Persons, Genders, 
 and Numbers; thus, 
 
 the man WHO came. 
 
 the woman WHO came. 
 
 the men WHO came. 
 
 tfta women WHO came. 
 
 ^ e thing WHICH (or THAT) thou safest. 
 
 Me things WHICH (or THAT) I saw. 
 
 24. The Oblique forms in whom (or which), to whom (or 
 which}, from ichom (or which}, are expressed by "l^frf followed 
 by a Personal Pronoun attached to a Particle; thus, for instance, 
 [Is. xlix. 3] " Israel, IN WHOM [^3 "J^frf, lit., WHO IN- 
 THEE (m.)] I will be glorified " [Deut. iv. 8] " A nation TO 
 WHICH [17 ^^, lit., WHICH TO IT (?.)] there-are-statutes 
 and judgments," etc.; [Ps. xcv. 5] "To WHOM [V? 
 lit., WHO TO-HiM (belongs)] the sea," etc. 
 
 [Note (a.) This is the full expression. The "l^Nj is sometimes omitted. 
 See 31. 
 
 (6.) The word involving the Personal Pronoun is separated from the 1^t? very 
 often. See more, below. N.B. This separation should always take place in 
 Composition, except where there is Emphasis on the Person.] 
 
 25. The full Table for In whom (for all Persons, Genders 
 and Numbers) is obtained by simply placing *1&?^ before the 
 several expressions in Table II. (i.), as follows,
 
 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 25 27. 
 
 
 I pers. 
 
 2 pers. 
 
 3 pers. 
 
 jif. ^ 
 
 W Cp.n,?)l ? T 
 
 (m.) 13 IfS 
 
 (a.) ~In whom 
 (or which) 
 
 1 '? -m 
 m \ 
 
 (/) ^13 TtPM 
 
 (/) H| *& 
 
 ?( ..*. 
 
 (m.) D33 TOM 
 
 V J ^.. r .. .. 
 
 (m.) D3, DH3 TO^? 
 
 
 { '" r * 
 
 (/.) |32 TOM 
 
 (/) l?3,?n ?T -M : 
 
 Similarly, full Tables may be formed (/3) for to whom (or 
 which), (7) for &A;e w?Aom (or which), and (5) for /row* whom 
 (or which), by placing ^Ifc^? before the several expressions 
 iu Table II. (2), (3), and (4), respectively. And so, too, in 
 the case of Tables III. and IV. 
 
 26. Similarly, Table V. with 1*$ gives the several forms 
 for WHOSE song, and WHOSE songs; and so for any other Noun ; 
 thus, [Jobv. 5, (E.V.)] "WHOSE harvest flTOj? 1B> (lit., WHO 
 HIS harvest)];" [Deut.viii.9] "Aland WHOSE stones [^^ : "IK^, 
 lit, WHICH HER stones]" etc.; [Jer. xxxii. 19] "Thou 
 WHOSE eyes [^p^tf ^^^> lit., WHO THINE eyes] are-open on 
 all-the-ways-of the-children-of men." So [Ps. xcv. 4] " In 
 WHOSE hand [ITS *1^^, lit., WHO in His hand] are-the 
 secret-depths of earth," etc. 
 
 27. Table III. (1), with *\Z'$, gives the Objective Relative 
 Pronouns whom (or which), viz., ij"fitf ^S^ whom (lit., who 
 him), Pinfc "[^ whom (lit, w?Ao her), ^k'^X w?Aom (lit., 
 tc^o thee, m.), *H& ^^5 tc^ow (lit., who we)*, etc. [So, for 
 with whom, on whom, etc.]. 
 
 * Thus Gen. xlv. 4, I am Joseph your brother WHOM ye sold [DPl*)?9 1K'^ 
 n'S, lit., WHO ye-sold ME]," etc. So, too, when the Personal Pronoun is ex- 
 pressed by an Affix attached to a Verb ( 13, /3) ; thus, Gen. xxvii. 27, etc. See 
 more, hereafter.
 
 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 28 31. 23 
 
 28. These Objective Personal Pronouns are often dropped, 
 and then the I^Nt by itself stands for whom (or which) in 
 the several Persons, Genders and Numbers ; thus [Gen. xxii. 2] 
 " Take now thy son, thine only -son, whom [*1^N] thou 
 lovest," etc., and [Gen. xiii. 15] " all the land which [f^N] 
 thou seest," etc.; and many others. 
 
 29. In all the cases of 24 27, the word involving the 
 Personal Pronoun is generally^ separated from the *l^? by a 
 word or words especially by the Verb. Thus, for instance, 
 [Gen. xxi. 23] " the land IN WHICH thou-hast-sojourned 
 [PJ|l nJTlil *)&^tf, lit., WHICH thou-hast-sojourned IN IT];" and 
 so [Gen. xxviii. 13] " the land ON WHICH thou art-lying 
 [ITJptt 3?fc? nn *\WX, lit., WHICH thou art-lying ON IT]," 
 and so [Nu. xxii. 30] " Am not I thine ass ON WHICH thou- 
 hast-ridden [ v^ ft?5"J *$$> lit., WHICH thou-hast-riddcn ON 
 ME] ;" [Job iv. 19] " vmosE-foundation is-in-the-dust 
 Q'TlD' 1 . ^3^3, lit., WHO in-the-dust is-THE 
 
 [Is. xlix. 23] " I THOSE-WAITING-FOR-WHOM shall not be 
 ashamed [*jp W3\ &w "l^f> lit., WHO not-shall-be-ashamed 
 MY-WAITERS] ." 
 
 30. Similarly, (a.) "lEJ'X which, followed by OK> there, stands for where ; thus 
 [Gen. ii. 11] " 3njn DB> '"IK'^ WHERE (lit., WHICH THERE) {there is] gold." But 
 
 ()3.) The "l^S and the D^ are generally separated (as in 29) by a word or 
 words especially by the verb thus [Gen. xix. 27] "the place WHERE he 
 stood [DK' Ifpy "1?^! lit., WHICH he stood THERE]," etc. 
 
 (y.) So IK'K which before Di^P/rom there (or thence) stands for whence; thus 
 [Gen. xxiv. 5] unto the land WHENCE thou-camest-forth [DS?D T\^\ "VJ'X, lit., 
 WHICH thou-camest-forth THENCE]," etc. 
 
 (5.) So also "V^K which, before i"H3^ thither, stands for whither; thus, 
 [Nu. xiv. 24] and I will bring him into the land WHITHER he-came [N2 IK'S 
 
 K', lit., WHICH he-came THITHER]." 
 
 l 
 
 (.) The Dt?, HD'^, are sometimes omitted ; as, for instance, in Nu. xiii. 27. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 f 
 
 31. The IBte is often omitted, as [Gen. xiii. 28] " What 
 
 * Instead 
 
 t Instead of rinfc iB'i:?. 
 
 * Except in the case of Emphasis on the Personal Pronoun.
 
 21 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. NOTES (rt.J TO 
 
 is this, God hath done to us?" instead of "WHICH [*1$N] God 
 hath done to us?"; [Lam. iii. 1] " I-am the-man HATH-SEEN 
 affliction," instead of " WHO [*)$K] HATH-SEEN," etc.* So [Ps. 
 xviii. 3] " my God, my Strength, IN WHOM I-will-trust"(Ei.V.') 
 
 [ia nonx, short for te npn$ T#K]. So iS for r? lete 
 
 in Ps. xxxii. 1, "TO WHOM [He will not impute iniquity]." 
 And so [Ps. Ixxxiii. 19] " Thou WHOSE NAME [**\E$, short 
 for ^^ *)$K], etc.", and many others. 
 
 - 
 
 [Note (a.) "IK'X is often used, like the Conjunction t'3, for 'that' (Conjunctive), 
 for' because,' etc. Thus [Gen. xi. 7] THAT ["!&?$] they may not understand," 
 etc. ; [Ex. xi. 7] THAT ["IK'S] He will separate," etc. ; and many others. 
 
 (6.) Conversely *3 is sometimes said to have the value of the Relative "li?N. 
 See Particles/ hereafter. 
 
 (c.) The prefixes *? 3 3 1 may stand before Y*J>K : ; thus, 
 (i.) With the Relative-Pronoun value of ""Ijj'tf, we have IK'XI, and who, etc., 
 tt?N : 3 (as in Is. Ivi. 4, Ixv. 12, Ixvi. 4), 1^3 (as in Job xx'ix/25, etc.), "H^ 
 (as 'in Genesis xliii. 16, etc.), "IB'N.O (as in Isaiah xlvii. 13, etc.). So "IP'S JIN 
 that (Objective) which, and whatsoever (06;.), whom, whomsoei-er, etc. 
 
 (ii.) With the Conjunctive value of IK'N., we have ")K>$3 in that, TK'i??, lit., 
 aw fAaf (very frequently for a*, according as, and when}, "KPN? /or f/af, 16JW3 
 /rom [<Ae <ime] that (= since), etc. 
 
 (d.) The prefixes K>, and K',J followed by Dagesh Forte, stand for the Con- 
 junctive "KJ'X ; and the latter, W (followed by Dagesh Forte), often for the Relative 
 Pronoun. 
 
 (e.) When prefixed to a word of which the first letter does not receive Dagesh, 
 K* becomes B'; but t^ remains B' (no compensation being made for the Dagesh). 
 
 (/.) We have also the compound prefixes "JJ'Il (once), and "1^2 like "1<^3, and 
 B'S like 
 
 (g 1 .) The word 3 (Eccles. viii. 1 7) is generally supposed to be made up of 
 & (for )>) followed 'by ^ to, and preceded by 3 in. So ^? (Jon. i. 12) is 
 taken for '^ 13 ; and 'D3 (Jon. i. 7) for 1.3 (Jon/ i. 8)]. 
 
 * It will be seen that in the first two examples the "ItJ'X understood is that of 
 23 ; and, in the following examples, that of 24 etc. [In English the Rela- 
 tive Pronoun is often left out, when, as in the first example ( 31), it is the 
 Object ; but not often when, as in the second, it is the Subject.] 
 
 t See List of Particles,' hereafter. 
 
 t Supposed by many to be a Contraction for
 
 25 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 (To be translated into English.) 
 * For the plan of the Exercise, see 11 (a e). 
 
 im I?I ?:D i6ta iDnn N 1 ? " 
 
 - 
 
 T v T -: v -: I v v T - : v v v T 
 
 1 See Vocabulary, p. 385. 2 D *!???< GOD [a Noun of 
 
 the Plural form, see Table V. (ii.)]. 3 [I]-brought-out. 4^x a i an d, earth, 
 (also land of). [With the 'definite article' pSn.] In Pause pX. 6 Egypt. 
 6 coming. 7 thither. 8 to-possess-it. 9 See Table I., Note 1 . 10 Ye-came-out. 
 11 thence (lit., from there). 12 caring-for. 13 in-poverty. i4 thou-shalt-eat. 
 15 bread. J6 thou-shalt-lack (with &O, thou shalt NOT /acft). 17 anything. 
 ^ D:3K stones (fr. J3X). 19 iron. 20 D'Tin. mountains ( 31). 21 thou-mayest- 
 dig. 'ai brass (E.V.).' " 23 blessed-is (lit., 6-the-happiness-of !) 24 i\$ a nation. 
 25 DJNDJ/'n with 'definite article') a people. 26 He-hath-chosen (31). 27 f or . 
 an-inheritance. 23 D'lpO a place. 29 standing. 3 ground of. 31 holiness. 
 32 lying. 33 I-will-give-it. 34 Israel. 3 <> I-will-glorify-Myself. 36 and-everything. 
 37 doing. S8 making-to-prosper. 39 H33 thus. 40 shall-be-done. 41 B'^K a man. 
 42 "=].? a king. * 3 delighting. 44 ^p* honour, glory, brightness. 45 I-have-. 
 established. 46 My-Covenant. 47 to-give. 48 their-(m.)-sojournings. 
 
 * For the , as Defective Shurik,' sec Ft. I. 14.
 
 26 
 
 -ninpa 
 
 f \ : 
 
 T: v TT : - T T v T T 
 
 49 they-sojourned. 60 they-shall-be-ashamed (with N? <Aey sAa/i NOT, etc.). 
 51 those-waiting-for-Me. 62 my God. 63 my Rock. ^ I will trast. 65 1^ a 
 hand. 56 [the] secret-depth s-of. 5 ? J1JJ an eye, Dual D^J. * 5 8 Opened, open. 
 59 [the] ways of. 60 [the] children-of. 61 Adam, man (generally). 62 remember. 
 63 iTiy a congregation [with Affix IJTiy his, etc.]. w Thou didst own ( 31). 
 65 of 'old. 
 
 * For the -, as 'Defective Shurik,' see Pt. I. 14. 
 t ^>3 all, '^3 as p. 14 (*). 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew.') 
 
 * For the plan of the Exercise, see 11 ( //). 
 
 Thy (m.) sojourner 1 who [is] within* thy gates. 3 The 
 thing * which thou (m.) [art] doing. 5 A man 6 in-whom- 
 there-is-Spirit (Hebr., who Spirit 1 m* hint). Ye (w.) to- 
 whom-I-have-given (Hebr., who I-have-given * to 9 you} the 
 land. 10 I [am] Joseph n whom-ye-sold (Hebr., who ye-sold IS 
 me 13 ). The land 10 from-which-I-came- forth (Hebr., which I. 
 came-forlh " from 15 it (/.)). A land 10 unto-which-I-will-bring- 
 you (m.) (Hebr., which 1-will-bring 16 you 13 unto " it (/.)). 
 A land it (f.) [is] like-which-there-is-not (Hebr. which there- 
 
 1 1|. 23 prefix. 3 nnyip (Table V. (ii.)). 4 "in^. 5 
 
 'Pin. 8> Jnn3. 9 ^> (Table II.). 10 n (Nnwith T /def. art.') n f)p'V. 
 12DPTQP. " Table III. (1). 14 'ns. 15 Table IL (4). N*?S. 17 Table IV. (1).
 
 27 
 
 is-not 18 like 19 it). Every-one M with-whom-it-was found (Hebr., 
 who it-was-found " with him). The horse 23 upon-which- 
 he-rode (Hebr., which he-rode M upon K him). The land 10 upon- 
 which-thou-art-lying (Hebr., which tJiou* art-lying K upon " it). 
 The servants 27 with-whom-he-was-angry (Hebr., who he-was- 
 angry K upon K them (m.)). The man 6 in-whose-hand-the- 
 cup-was-found (Hebr., who was-found* 9 the cup 30 in* his 
 hand 31 ). Thou (m.) in-whose-hand-the-cup-was-found (Hebr., 
 who was-found w the cup x in 2 thy hand 31 ). I in-whose-hand- 
 the-cup-was-found (Hebr., who was-found N the cup M in * my 
 hand 31 ). I-will-comfort-thee 32 [O] Zion 33 in-whom-I-have- 
 delighted (Hebr., who 1-have-delighted 34 in thee (/".)), unto- 
 whora-shall-come (Hebr., who there-shall-come K unto I7 thee) the- 
 wealth-of 36 heathen-nations, 37 and within 2 whose borders 38 
 shall-no-more-come-any-foe 39 ; whose walls 40 they-may-call 41 
 'Safety,' 42 whose Saviour 43 I [am], saith 44 thy GOD**. 
 
 18 p$. W Table II. (3.). 20 3. 21^03. 22 Table HI. (2). 23 DID. 
 
 M Table IV. (2). 26 ap^. TD^| M e|Xi?. KVP?. M ^?|- 31 "* 
 
 32^pq3^. 3spv. sii'pi^sn. Mini*. 36 >n. 37 ofia. ^tf? (Table 
 v. (ii.])." : 39 ny "?3 niy s^3" S6. 4 niton (Table vi. (a.)). 
 
 45 DVtfx (See Exerc. XI., Note 2). 
 
 * Masc.
 
 SECTION V. 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 32. The Demonstrative Pronouns are 
 
 I.* PIT this (m.), HKT this (/.), n these (m.), 
 (/.); 
 
 ii. Kin to (w.), ton to (/.), n>n or en 
 nan 
 
 T V 
 
 Thus: tJ^Xn n? this [is] Me man; K"XH N-1H that [is] Me man; 
 
 " T .** * T 
 
 flB'Xn DXT Mis [is] Me woman; HtJ'Rn K s fl Ma<[is]Me?oman; 
 
 D^ijJSn n?X these [are'] the boys; D > "iy5n(Drior)n&n Mose [are] Me 6ot/s; 
 
 niTJ/Sn nlPX these [are] the girls. finysn ri3H Mose [are] Me g-irte. 
 
 [N.B. The Demonstrative Pronouns ^Aa^, those, are (as 
 the Reader sees) represented in Hebrew by the 3rd Person- 
 Pronouns in 9.] 
 
 There is an Adjectival use of these Pronouns, which will 
 be mentioned in Section IX. on Pronouns-Adjective. 
 
 33. nj stands sometimes for such, and sometimes for thus. 
 See more hereafter. 
 
 34. (.) "With the Prefixes TOil, we find 
 
 (1) rm, n% nWi ; 
 
 (2) nj3 (once njT3 i s. xxi. 10), nx?3, 
 
 (3) nT3, 
 
 v / VVT' 
 
 (4) niS, n^iS, nxr 1 ?, nWS, pfeA 
 
 V / iv T ' v : ' i T ' v v : ' i v T 
 
 (&). With the Prefix 0, we have P$?, n^tt, nW$. 
 
 [Note. No special Exercise need be given on this Section.] 
 
 * The less frequent forms HTPn masc., T?H (also M) both masc. and /em., 
 and rtf (also U and -IT^H) /en/', for the Singular, and V$ for the Plural, 
 must be dealt with elsewhere rather than here.
 
 29 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 35. The Interrogative Pronouns are 
 
 (i.). ' who?, (ii.). Pia (also PI& and HB) what?* 
 [These Pronouns are sometimes used non-interrogatively, also.] 
 
 36. These words are themselves Indeclinable ; but they 
 may receive prefixes ; thus, 
 
 (i.). from we have 'tflf ( 3. c. ii., above), &, J, '&, 
 (ii.). from Hfi, HD and HO we have 
 
 (7.) H5 (and PI&3) ; 
 
 \ ' / VT - \ VV - / ' 
 
 (8.) Plfcfc and nfcfe|| (also flbS). 
 
 \ ./ vr T TIT" V VTT / 
 
 [Note. (a.) For expressing IVJiose?, either 
 
 (i.) 7 is prefixed to *D; thus, [Gen. xxxii. 18] flftX *Dp tcAose art thou?, or 
 (ii). A word is placed in close structural connection with *D, as, for instance, 
 J3 in [1 S. xvii. 58] *D }3 whose son? (lit., son-of whom, see below 52. 
 
 (iii.) *p nS stands for whom? (Objective), as in 1 S. xii. 3 "whom have I 
 oppressed?" 
 
 (j3.) HO is often read closely with the next word as in ^"HD Ju. xi. 12 
 [ahuost as *?!? , comp. the 3^03 in Ex. iv. 2 and Is. iii. 15]. And so HD before 
 N and "I, and np before n etc., may be said to be as the n & H in 6 (6 d). 
 But N.B. HI?, occnrs also (as in Ps. iv. 3) before 3, etc. 
 
 (7.) No special Exercise need be given on this Section.] 
 
 * Also, HO stands sometimes for howl as in [Ps. cxxxiii. 1] "Behold, HOW 
 good and HOW pleasant (0^3 HW 3^3 !"ll?) is the dwelling of brethren in unity." (/3) 
 
 t Also *I21 in the phrase V?1 *D (lit., who and who?) Ex. x. 8. Compare 
 Obs. XVI, p.' 179. '***<** ^ A 
 
 J Used for whereby? (lit., in tft tcftat?) 
 
 Used for how much?, how many? (lit., like the what?). 
 
 I Used for why? wherefore? Observe the two different positions of the 
 Accent. Also niO is sometimes used for why?
 
 so 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 NOUNS-SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 37. In regard to * Gender/ ' Number ' and ' Case/ there 
 are in Hebrew 
 
 (i.). Only the Masculine and Feminine ' Genders ' ( 10) ; 
 
 (ii.) The Singular and Plural 'Numbers,' also the Dual 
 for some Nouns-Substantive; 
 
 . (iii.). No 'Cases/ properly, according to the usual appli- 
 cation of the Term. 
 
 38. Names of men, and words expressing males and 
 functions of males, are Masculine. 
 
 Names of women, and words expressing females and 
 functions of females, are Feminine. 
 
 There is great freedom in regard to the Gender of 
 Nouns-Substantive expressing inanimate things, there being 
 really no reason why such should be limited to either one or 
 the other. The usage of the Language in regard to any 
 particular word must, of course, be attended to in Composi- 
 tion. There are, however, certain special Marks for the 
 MASCULINE PLURAL, and for the FEMININE SINGULAR and 
 PLURAL; as follows, 
 
 39. (.) In the SINGULAR Number there is no distinguish- 
 ing mark* for the Masculine Gender. But 
 
 (/3.) for the PLURAL Masculine the distinguishing mark is 
 the termination D 1 ; thus, (i) (from *V# a song] D^"W 
 songs; (2) (from SD13 a siar ) ^*{?7^ stars. 
 
 * It may be said that, 
 
 (i.) Most Hebrew Nouns, which have no special Feminine form, are Masculine. 
 But it must be borne in mind that, 
 (ii.) There are exceptions to (i.).
 
 NOUNS-SUBSTANTIVE. 39 43. 31 
 
 (7.) Many words undergo a change of vocalisation on 
 receiving this termination; thus (i) (from ^^H a word] 
 D^l words; (2) (from IfpJJ a king) D'pSp kings; (3) (from 
 
 wj %) dnyjj (4) (from &rth o^) trenn. 
 
 *V v*r: v v TT; 
 
 (5.) Some undergo still further change ; thus, Pi at the 
 end of the word in the Singular is replaced by the D* for 
 the Plural, as (from PfTO a deed} DHPJJO deeds. 
 
 40. There is a special distinguishing mark for the Femi- \ 
 nine in the SINGULAR viz., the accented termination PI; 
 thus, 
 
 (.) (from TH an uncle) PITH <w oww^y (from *Vi3 a lord) 
 m^H a Jady. 
 
 vr : y 
 
 (ft.) Some words undergo a change of vocalisation on 
 receiving this Pi; thus, (i) (from *T3 a bullock) TT\^ a cow; 
 (i) (from ^3 a ioy) Pl^-i a ^er/. 
 
 (7.) Some undergo still further change ; thus, Pi, at the 
 end of the Masculine word is replaced by the PI for the 
 Feminine as (from PT5H a shepherd) PISH a shepherdess. 
 
 41. The mark for the FEMININE PLURAL is J"li (or 
 J"! T ), which replaces the Pi of the Singular; thus, J"tt*l3 
 cows [ 40 (ft, 1)]. And some words undergo some change; 
 thus, (i) (from Pl v 3y^ a queen) Pft37 queens ; (2) (from JT11[3 
 a girl) Hi^lW perfe. 
 
 N.B. There are some other terminations for Feminine 
 Nouns, as will be seen in the Section on Nouns in Pt. II. 
 
 42. There are Feminine Nouns which are not formed 
 from the corresponding Masculine Nouns, and have no dis- 
 tinguishing mark; thus, DS* a mother (!3X a father); 7H^ an 
 ewe (7?f$ a ram). 
 
 43. Some Masculine Nouns take the Feminine mark of 
 Plural ; thus 2K a father, plu. fiinK ; ti$ a name, plu.
 
 32 NOUNS-SUBSTANTIVE. 44 - 48. 
 
 44. Some Feminine Nouns take the Masculine form of 
 Plural; thus, "HO' 7 ! a lee (also Deborah], plu. DH'Q'I bees; 
 7rn an ewe (also Rachel}) plu. DyPH ewes. 
 
 45. Some Nouns have loth of the Plural forms ; thus, 
 D'fifot and rttef?N *Aeac< (from HElStf a sheaf}. So 
 
 \ -:. \ -: . V T \ -: J ' 
 
 and JTnn (from TH o generation.} 
 
 46. The mark for the DUAL is D*- (in Pause :D*-), 
 
 V- V )/' 
 
 which is the same for both Genders. 
 
 (a-) Some Nouns do not change on receiving this termi- 
 nation; thus, (i) (from T a hand) D]T hands,- (2) (from pi$ 
 a leg) D?jW %*. 
 
 (&) Some undergo a change; thus, (i) (from \]V an eye) 
 DW eyes; (2) (from 7^1 a/oo*) vh^\ feet. 
 
 (7.) The termination J"l (in the Singular) is replaced by 
 JV-, after which the Dual termination D* is added ; thus, 
 
 (1) (from TftW a year) D*H5^ two years a couple of years ; 
 
 (2) (from HS^ a lip) DTlS&y lips (the upper and lower). 
 
 47. The Dual, in Hebrew, is chiefly used as a special 
 Plural (if one may say so) for things ' double ' or ' in pairs,' 
 as scales-of-a-balance, tongs, ears, eyes, nostrils, hands, wings, 
 feet, etc. Such generally have no other form for the ex- 
 pression of 'more than one,' and we find therefore the Dual 
 form with Numerals other than ' two ;' as in ''four feet" 
 "six wings," "seven eyes," and so in [1 S. ii. 13] "three 
 teeth " (lit , a triad of the teeth, Dual.). 
 
 48. Some Nouns that have a Dual, have a Plural in 
 another sense; thus, (i) (from j^ an eye, also a fountain) 
 
 TO (Du.) eyes, r\WV : (Plu.) fountains,- ( 2 ) (from 7j*1 a foot) 
 
 hT\ ( Plu O iimes - 
 
 Only in the phrase Onto ifa, Is. li. 8 ; Ps. Ixxii. 5, cii. 25.
 
 NOUNS, 4952. S3 
 
 49. But some few have both Dual and Plural forms ; as 
 (!) DV a day, Du., DW, Flu., D^ ; ( 2 ) DtfS one-time, 
 once, D^i?5 two-times, twice, D^y|) times ; (3) ftTl a 
 D TTH,* rrirta. So, there are the Plurals HW 'and 
 of (i) in 46 (7). 
 
 50. Some Nouns are used in the Singular only, as 
 
 fine dust, SHT gold, n*V moon ; others only in the Dual, 
 as D^T^D a balance, scales of a balance; DV? water ; D^HD^D 
 tongs, $& heaven; others only in the Plural, as 
 D'SriK and^iSnK aloes, D3j3T old-age, D^^ youth, D^3 a 
 face, front, DVDrn compassion, nVfiHPl lower-parts, etc. 
 
 51. Hebrew Nouns are Indeclinable as regards what are 
 usually called 'Cases.' But 
 
 52. Many Nouns undergo a modification of formf when 
 they are *!N CONSTRUCTION ' (as it is called), i. e., when they 
 are in close structural connection with what follows. Thus, 
 (i) from Tin a word and ^/D a Icing, we have ^]7D "Q^ 
 WORD OF a liing ; and, (2) from npJ^if a cry, and 73 a poor 
 man (in Pause 7J), /J Hplf^ CRY or a poor man; etc., etc. 
 
 In these two examples the Genitive ' of ' + is supplied iri 
 English before the Second Noun, but 
 
 N.B. The occurrence of the ' Construct form ' (as it is | 
 
 * Some give this from ril (i.q. 
 t Many others are unchanged in form when thus in < Construction.' 
 t Since this of (when it can be supplied) is, in Hebrew, involved in the First 
 of the two Nouns (not the Second) we cannot say that the word so involving the 
 
 of ' is in the Genitive ' Case. The Genitive Case of a word,' a cry,' is not 
 <wordof,'*cryof,' but t of award' * of aery.' The difference of Idiom de- 
 mands different nomenclature. Moreover, the Construct State ' (or State of 
 Construction ') may occur where the * of cannot be supplied in English. Although- 
 there is < Structural connection ' where the Genitive of ' occurs, it does not 
 follow that the Genitive of is always to be used (or can be used] wherever 
 
 structural connection ' thus modifies the form. This consideration will be found 
 to' be of importance hereafter. 
 
 D
 
 34 NOUNS. 'I.C.,' 53. CHANGES OF FORM, 54. 55. 
 
 called) must not be limited to tlie case in which ' of ' can be 
 supplied before the Second Noun. 
 
 53. The abbreviation * i. c.' is used for ' In Construction ' 
 ( 52). 
 
 Def. The term ' Alsohite-form * is used of a word which 
 is (i) not 'i. c./ and (2) without any Affix or Prefix whatso- 
 ever. 
 
 54. The CHANGES OF FORM which some Nouns undergo, 
 (i) when 'In Construction,' and (2) when increased in length 
 by the addition of some termination or Affix, may to some 
 extent be classed under these three heads : 
 
 I. The shortening of a Long- Vowel into a Short- Vowel; 
 II. The replacing of a Vowel by Shva Moving ; 
 III. Shva Quiescent. 
 
 The Second head will be found to be one of great im- 
 portance. But, observe, 
 
 55. A Vowel cannot be dropped and replaced by Shva 
 Moving, 
 
 (a.) if followed by a letter having Sliva (thus the in 
 
 if followed by Dagesh Forte, which virtually involves a 
 Shva [Pt. i. 53], (thus the in 233), 
 
 (7.) if followed by a letter which would have Dagesh 
 Forte if it could,! (thus - before *) in BH3, see 60 (*)), 
 
 (8.) if the Vowel be one which involves a Quiescent letter 
 belonging to the word, Cp. Pt. I. 36 Note, (thus the in 
 rnin law, the in ni*YJ lamps, etc. This will be understood 
 hereafter. 
 
 A 
 
 [NOTE. Generally, also, a vowel which belongs to a word (or form) is not 
 x dropped. But sometimes it is dropped, as we shall see.] 
 
 * The Plurals of Nouns like (2) are from another form ( 66, 67). 
 
 t As, one of the five lynnN which do not receive Dagesh [Pt. I. 49.]
 
 NOUNS IN CONSTRUCTION, 56. 35 
 
 56. For words ' i. c. J the following rules may be given : r 
 
 (RULE i.) The Vowel NEXT BEFORE THE ACCENTED 
 VOWEL is generally dropped and replaced by Shva- 
 Moving if that Vowel can be so dropped ( 55) ; as 
 in *Vp harvest of from *Vp harvest, and Spy heel of 
 from Spy a heel. [Obs. The vowel to be dropped is 
 
 the PENULTIMATE when the Accent of the word is on 
 the last syllable]. Also 
 (A.) Monosyllables, and words Ml-Vra [Pt. I. 42], 
 
 (Rule ii.) Generally replace Long , in a closed* 
 final syllable, by ; thus, (i) T hand of (from 
 * a hand}; ( 2 ) [D'VV] BhH an artificer^/ [wood], 
 i.e. a carpenter, (from ^H); (3) SS7 heart of 
 (from SS7); 
 
 (Rule iii.) Sometimes replace in a closed* 
 final syllable, by ; as in (i) JS son of (from 
 |3) ; more commonly by , as in (2) jpT an elder 
 of (from }j^T) ; f and sometimes (especially in 
 Monosyllables) retain the unchanged, as in DE* 
 Gen. iv. 17, Splf Gen. xxv. 26; 
 
 (Rule iv.) Replace the ending H by !"1 ; thus, 
 (i) PTOfc work of (from HB^ti a worfy so ( 2 ) fTlB> 
 je/c? q/" (from rn&J'): except *3 mouth of, from PlS a 
 mouth, i"llH.(as well as T\^T\) friend of, from Hlf*), 
 and a few others. 
 
 (Rule v.). Replace the ending Pi by TV-; thus, 
 (i) rnift ^a?o o/ (from PHID) ; (2) H"!^. company of 
 (from rntt). 
 
 (Rule vi.) Retain a * (except in the last syllable 
 of the Plural), also a 1 (or), and a }, unchanged .J 
 
 * Pt. I. 21. 
 
 t These two Examples (1) and (2) belong to different classes. See the Section, 
 on Nouns in Pt. II. 
 
 + There is sometimes, however, a change owing lo the removal of the accent 
 [Pt. I. 55 (9, b.)] A word i. c.' ( 53) is often deprived of Tone-accent, and 
 joined to the following word by Makheph (') [Pt. I. 37 (2)].
 
 NOUNS 'i.e./ 56, 57. 
 
 (B.) Of words Ml-Vel, i.e., whose Penultimate is their 
 Tone-syllable [Pt. I. 42], 
 
 (Rule vii.) Those of the form ^3, ^3, or ^3, 
 7tf3, or ^3, ^3* or 7&3f ('.<?., whose last two 
 vowels are either , , or , | , or -^ |, 
 , or ), undergo no change when < i. c.' ( 53). 
 
 (Rule viii.) Those of the forms (i) 7J3, and 
 (2) 7)3, are changed in the manner seen in the 
 following words ; (i) ^ifl midst of (from. Tl.J;l midst); 
 and (2) pi? eye of (from j*y aw eye). 
 
 (C.) (Rule ix.) Plurals ending in D* , and DUALS in D* , 
 always replace these endings by ' , when ' i. c.' 53 ; 
 thus, (i) ^W songs of (from D'W songs); ( 2 ) '3? 
 stars of (from D*pp13)j (3) WV eyes o/(from 
 ( 4 ) H! terfs o/ (from D'T). 
 
 57. () As seen in some of the Examples in 56, and those 
 in 52, there may be tivo of the changes (above-mentioned) 
 jit once. 
 
 Example (2) in 52 offers a means of introducing an 
 important further change that is often necessitated by Rule i. 
 ( 56), as may be seen thus. The removal of the vowel from 
 the y of HDyX, and the replacing it by a Moving Shva [ 56, 
 Rule i.], necessitates some change that there may not be two 
 Moving Shvas together (which must not ever be, Pt. I. 22, 
 Note *). The first of the two Shvas is, in such a case, always 
 made to adopt a ' Slight- vowel ' form [Pt. I. 56] . And, since 
 a Moving Shva beneath V takes a Compound form [Pt. I. 2-1], 
 
 * But BfcS'p truth (according to the best opinions) Ps. Ix. 6, has tpt^p truth of 
 Pr. xxii. 21 (which is merely a slightly shortened form). 
 
 t Thus we may introduce the use of S for ' First Root-letter,' and ]} and ? for 
 'Second* and ' Third Root-letters' respectively; thus, "H" 1 ! is said to be of the 
 form b]}Q, "SjVo of the form ^y, etc. This will be fully explained by-and-by.
 
 KOUXS, 57 59. 37 
 
 the particular form for the * Slight- vowel ' here, is determined 
 by the following general Rule : 
 
 N.B. A 'Slight-vowel* before a Compound Shva mostly 
 agrees with this latter in form. 
 
 Here, the beneath the $? in HD^V being replaced by , 
 the ' Slight- vowel ' to be given (instead of the beneath the 
 ) is ; and so we obtain the form HDlf^ given in 52 (the PI 
 being changed into JV-, in accordance with Rule v. 56). 
 
 (7.) Similarly, from the Plural D^?*^ words 39 (7), we 
 have the Construct form ^.!jn. For, the removal of the Penul- 
 timate vowel (viz., the beneath the 3), by Rule i. of 56, 
 necessitates the appearance of a ' Slight-vowel ' form for the 
 beneath the ^t, in order that there may not be two Moving 
 Sheas together [Pt. I. 22, Note(*),and 56]. 
 
 [Obs. A (Short-Kherik) may be considered as the common form for a 
 Slight-vowel,' and as the form to be given when there is no reason for adopting 
 some other Short-vowel. See also Pt. I. 56, Note (t)-] 
 
 58. The Classification of Nouns, for the changes of form 
 which many of them undergo when receiving Affixed additions, 
 is a somewhat long and difficult subject with which it is unad- 
 visable to trouble the Student at present. Sufficient help will 
 always be given in the Notes to the Exercises. The general 
 subject must be dealt with elsewhere. There is, however, one 
 application of 54 (II.) which is of such very great importance 
 for understanding vowel-changes in all parts of the Language 
 that it ought to be mentioned at once, viz. : 
 
 59. A word, when increased in length by the appendage of 
 an additional syllable, generally drops (if it can* drop) and 
 replaces" by 7 Sfica Moving that vowel which would else stand 
 
 ?> EXT BUT O.NE BEFORE, or TlIlUDf FHOM TUB ACCENTED 
 
 VOWEL of the word. 
 
 * See 55. 
 
 t [Reckoning from left to right, and from the Accented Vowel inclusively.] 
 Obs. If this vowel cannot be dropped ( 55), the preceding vowel is generally 
 dropped, if there be one, and if it can be dropped. Sometimes the succeeding one.
 
 38 NOUNS, 59. 
 
 This will be more easily understood by an Example or two. 
 Thus: 
 
 () ^5*3 a wor d, on receiving the appendage D* as the 
 mark of the Plural, drops the beneath the ^ and takes the 
 form * E^^l ( tne beneath the *1 being reckoned First, the 
 beneath the 2 is Second, and the beneath the *3, if not 
 dropped, would be Third*). So, as may be seen in the Declen- 
 sion of this word with Pronoun- Affixes [Table IX.], the form 
 for ' his word ' is T$y3 (not 1*13^, the of the ^ being dropped 
 as said above). And so all through the Singular of Table IX. 
 
 The Hebrew forms for 'his words,' 'her words,' etc., 
 are from 0^^ words ; and there is no vowel Third before 
 the Accented vowel. But 
 
 (7.) When we come to the Hebrew for ' their (m.) words,' 
 the analogy of the preceding words might lead us to expect 
 under the 3. Here, however, the Accent being on the DTI, 
 the (if it were to appear under the 3) would be ' Third ' 
 (before the Accented vowel reckoned as First). It is therefore 
 dropped, as above, and replaced by Shva Moving. But this 
 necessitates the appearance of a ' Slight-vowel ' instead of the 
 Moving Shva beneath the **! [Pt. I. 56]. And is the form 
 which it adopts [ 57 Obs.]. 
 
 The same holds in the Hebrew forms for ' their (/.),' 
 ' your (w.),' and ' your (jf.) words 'f (and for the corresponding 
 parts of Tables IV. and X. (1 6) But in the case of 'our 
 loords,' the Accent of the word being on the syllable *"}, the 
 of the 3 is retained it does not come under the Rule of 
 59. Thus we have li*^.^ our words. Similarly for the 
 corresponding forms in Tables IV. and X. (1 6). 
 
 * See 39 (y). 
 
 t The Pronoun-Affixes for 3 pi. m. and /., and 2 pi. m. and /., are by many 
 called the Heavy Affixes.' The Accent of the word is on these Affixes.
 
 [To face p. 38.' 
 
 SUMMARY OF 39-59 
 
 (a) The mark for MASC. PLU, is D* ; and 
 
 (/3) this D* is replaced by * 'in Construction.' 
 
 (7) The mark for the FEM. SING, is Jl-^- ; and 
 
 (8) this H is replaced by H in ' Construction.', 
 (e) The mark for the FEM. PLU. is Hi or fi ; and 
 (5") this termination is unchanged ' in Construction.' 
 (77) The mark for the DUAL is D*_ ; and 
 
 (6) this D* is replaced by * *in Construction.' 
 
 (t) For changes of form of Nouns ' i.c.' see 56 & 57. 
 
 (K) For a GREAT BULB of ordinary change of form, see 59.
 
 [To bee r. 89.] 
 
 INDEX FOB NOUNS WHS PEON. -Aprs. 
 
 (a) For Nouns which do not change, see Tab. V. 
 
 (/8) For Nouns ending in Pl-^- which change only the ending, see 
 Tab. VI. 
 
 (7) For Nouns like "O^ which drop the penult. , see Tab. IX. 
 
 (8) For Nouns like (A) ^3 & S>yS , (B) ^iB (& SySIb) & btfS > 
 
 (c) nStfS & rnjto, see Appf (A), (B), & (c) to Tab. IX. 
 
 (e) For Nouns in , or , or -^-, or in -*, or -=- , 
 
 see Tab. X. 
 
 () For Nouns in , or , see Tab. XI. 
 (17) For Nouns (fern.) corresponding to those (masc.) in Tabs. 
 
 X & XI, see Tab. XII ; (cp. 66-69). 
 
 (0) For (i) i, (2) ntj, (a)n% (op, oona, ( 6 )ns, see 
 
 Tab. Xin. 
 (i) For Nouns in H > see p. 44. 
 
 _(i) For HNt (or HiJ) mark of the 'De/Jw^e Object,' see 
 
 p. 43 (e-h). 
 
 (ii) For some words before which the 'Def. Art.' H 
 must NOT be placed, see 73.]
 
 NOUNS, 60- 62. 39 
 
 60. Some Nouns with , as HS* for example, are not 
 of the same form as *n, an< ^ must not be declined like it-* 
 as they do not drop the of their first letterf [See 55]. 
 
 61. ( a .) The Declensions of Table X. (16) are all the 
 same in character. Such a word as *tfeft Table X. (1), and 
 T13 Table X. (2), is said to be of *6-point' form, and 
 TTJ Table X. (2) of 5-point ' form. J 
 
 (13.) The - of yjj, and the - - of TIN [Table X. (4 and 
 5)], are because of the guttural letter 5?. So the in H5J a 
 sacrifice, and the in j^rP oppression, because of H. [But 
 we may have two Segols, though the word has a guttural, 
 as in DHp bread, etc.] 
 
 (7.) So JDJ> fulness, SHI breadth, are of the same Declen- 
 sion as ^J"1X length [Table XI.] ; the replacing because 
 of the guttural letter. 
 
 N.B. All words like the Nouns in Tables X., XI., have their 
 Accent on the penultimate, in the ' Absolute ' Singular. 
 
 62. The < DECLENSION- VOWEL ' (as it may be called) is seen 
 to be (i.) for the <6-point' Noun in Table X (1), and 
 (ii.) for the ' 6-point ' (as also for the ' 5-point ') Noun in 
 Table X (2). (iii.) Some words, as *!^0, p7$ (f r instance), 
 have for their ' Declension-vowel * ; thus ^3 ? lP^> ^[-$> 
 
 etc., '70* 7if?%> ^l?? 1 ?* etc> TIie terms 
 
 'ct-Decl.' 'e-Decl.' 'Z-Decl.' 
 
 will be found useful as a means of designating these Declen- 
 sions [viz., those of (i.) (iii j (ii.), respectively]. Similarly the 
 Declension of Table XI. (in which the is d) may be called 
 an d-Decl.' 
 
 * This is really of the form 333 ; but as the five letters lynnX do not receive 
 Dagesh, the is put under the 2 to 'Compensate for the Dagesh' which belongs 
 to the "I. 
 
 t Any of these that may occur will be duly mentioned, so that no practical 
 difficulty will arise therefrom. 
 
 J The actual terms in use (in Rabbinic works on Grammar) are 'Nouns of 6 
 points,' <Xouns of 5 points,' the dots in the and the being counted.
 
 40 NOUNS, 6367. 
 
 f>3. The following shew the Declensions of 
 (a.) (1) &}. [p. I Will honey, wyi my...; 
 
 (2) D3^ [p. t D3e>] a shoulder, *|?B>, "lO?K ; , etc. ; 
 03.) (1) n.B [p. t nS] //&, "IS, in?, etc., ma, DahB], CnS and 
 
 (2) CP- 'i] ./">. \*f, DU 
 
 their (m.)] ; 
 
 (3) Hg [p. 5 njj] an ornament, injj, Plu. 
 
 (4) $Q [p. J 'yn] a fca'/. i'VH, etc. ; 
 
 (y-) (0 7C1 t p ' : ^^ cftnm, V^n, etc., Plu. 
 (2) *3y [p. ijj] affliction, ioy, etc. 
 
 (<.) From 'ta [p. V|l a t'es*e/, etc., -p?3 % (m.)..., the Plural is 
 D^3 [i'. c.' 23], $5, TO.., 0071 ;' " 
 
 v .. i v: JI i-"' IT- ' iv : ' 
 
 64. In 63, the 'Construct' Singular is the same as the 'Absolute.' 
 
 65. The ' Slight-vowel ' for the 'Construct State' of the 
 Plural ( 57, 7.), and for the Plural Noun with the Affixes 
 for the 3 & 2 pi. (m.)& (/.) ( 597, $), is the same generally as 
 the * Declension-vowel' of the Noun. Thus the in \5/> 
 the - in DH^pSn, the - inByVp, '1?, etc. See Table X. 
 
 66. The Feminine Noun in Table XII. 1, corresponds 
 with the Masculine Noun in Table X. 1 ; and so the Femi- 
 nines in Table XII. 2, 3, with the Masculines in X. 2, 5. This 
 observation is important as helping to understand the forma- 
 tion of the Feminine Plurals. Thus, from ^J/D a king, and 
 rtS/ip a queen (the latter agreeing in form with the Declension- 
 
 forms of the Singular in Table X. 1), we have the kindred 
 Plurals Ey?^? kings, FVDSzp queens. So from t?!33 a lamb 
 (m.), nfcO3 T [and H^l] a lamb (/.), we have the Plurals 
 
 67. Feminine Nouns of this class that have no correspond- 
 ing Masculine kindred-form follow (as might be expected) the 
 law of those that have. Thus, from !TH|)6/ a woman-servant, 
 we have the Plural Hinfi^ (formed after the analogy of an 
 imaginary Masculine Plural D\HS^ from the imaginary Sin- 
 gular
 
 NOUNS, 6870. 41 
 
 68. Similarly there are some Feminine Nouns (with the. 
 ending Pi) corresponding to Masculines of the form T^f . 
 Thus DVJJ? might (m.) and fiZOT* might (/.), the latter 
 agreeing in form with the Decl.-forms of the Singular in 
 Tab. XI. And so !3^n drought, aridity, desolation, ""iS^n f 
 desolation. The Plural of this latter is HI^H, the Feminine 
 form analogous to an imaginary Masculine D^^H. 
 
 69. ( a .) The Declension of HH^ with Pron. Aff. is the 
 same as that of Pl^/5 in Tab. XII. 1, with instead of the 
 under the first letter there ; thus 
 
 my. 
 
 , thy(m.) 
 
 [ $$ 
 
 [ TS'n??' 
 
 ( IJJW-D 
 
 , his J 
 
 I prfnatr r 
 
 V IT : I. 
 
 {woman servant]. 
 
 [woman-servants]. 
 
 etc. etc. etc. 
 
 The Declension of a word of the form P^Tin "with 
 Pron. Affixes is of corresponding form, but with (6, K. Kh.) 
 instead of the under the 22 in Table XII. 1; thus from 
 Pltopn icisdom, we have 
 
 *nt33PJ mil wisdom. ^[TfoyR. thy Cm.)..., into!})! his...: and 
 
 V*T;T </ V';T:T' 9 \ s y VT;T 
 
 from ri1!l"in desolations (i. c. ITD^n), Vnn"in his.., PPrQ"in 
 her.., IJ^nilPI thy (/".).., DPlVQ*in their Cm}... 
 
 ' l'\~ :T >f \J ' ' vv :T \ J 
 
 70. Besides the accented ending Pi of 40, there is 
 an ending Pi unaccented which is not a mark of Feminine 
 Gender, but merely gives a varying equivalent form for some 
 words; thus 7*7 and Pl/v night, and so Pin^Pl Ps. cxvi. 15 
 
 N.B. Sometimes the Declension-form of the Noun is 
 used in this case, as H^X land of, Is. viii. 23 ( = j*^+), and 
 n^nX earth (Pause form) Job xxxiv. 13, and xxxvii. 12. 
 
 * The under the V is 5, K. Kh. 
 
 t The under the n is seen to be 0, K. Kh. by Pt. I. 55 (5 and 10 c.). 
 
 : A Noun of -Dccl., 62.
 
 42 NOUNS, 7172. 
 
 71. (i.) There is another unaccented ending PI which is of 
 frequent occurrence, signifying to, towards, into ; thus P"pn 
 Hebron, Piyi5PI to Hebron, j) north, T\ jjb northwards ; 
 D^ip_ east, ntnip. eastwards. 
 
 (ii.) This PI to, towards, into may be attached to 
 
 (,.) a Noun having the definite J"l; thus, rVSH //je 
 house, njY3n into the house, and 
 
 ' T :v- 
 
 (y3.) a Noun in the State of Construction ; thus, 7V3 
 house of,r\y~\% "^0\5 into-\the\-house-of Pharaoh. 
 
 (iii.) Sometimes the Declension-form of the Noun is 
 adopted for this, as PllSpK* earth-wards (p. t '""J-p^) ; and 
 so 3J3 [of -Decl.] south, H333 southwards; etc. 
 
 72. N.B. There being no ' Genitive,' ' Dative,' ' Accus- 
 ative ' or < Ablative ' Cases in Hebrew, the ' of,' < to/ 
 'from,' etc., are expressed by other means: 
 
 (a.) The ordinary 'of ' of connection is expressed by 
 the State of Construction/t 52; 
 
 (5.) The 'to,' of relation, is expressed by the prefix 
 S of 4; 
 
 (c.) < From ' is expressed by the prefix 22 of 5, or by 
 the full Preposition JO; 
 
 (</.) The context alone can determine when an Indefinite 
 Noun is used Objectively, as the word man twice in " and he 
 SAW A MAN, an Egyptian, SMITING A MAN, a Hebrew " 
 [Ex. ii. 11], where the word W*& a man has nothing to mark 
 it as < Objective ' ; but 
 
 (e.) The Particle HNI (or ~fiX) is a mark of the ' Definite 
 
 * Also to or towards land-of, frequently; [from ")$, p. 41 J]. Obs. The 
 context alone can decide, sometimes, between the H of 70 and 71. 
 
 t The of =/rom, out of, is expressed by the Prefix D of 5, or by JID. 
 [Ju. xiii. 2, 1 S. i. 1, etc.].
 
 NOUNS. 7273. 43 
 
 Object; thus in "and he SMOTE THE EGYPTIAN" [Ex. ii. 12] 
 we have *"lV^n~riN{ the Egyptian (Accus., or 'Objective'). So 
 in "God created [DWH HS] the heavens, [pNH nfcOJ awrf 
 /*e ear^A " [Gen. i. 1] , we have J"IX before " THE heavens " 
 and before " THE earth," marking them as < Objective.' 
 
 (y.) This mark of the ' Definite Object ' is not always 
 expressed, and then the context alone can determine whether 
 the Definite Noun is 'Objective' or not; thus, "And they 
 spoiled CT3?n] the city" [Gen. xxxiv. 27]. 
 
 (<?.) This J"1Z$ (or "HX) may stand before a Definite < Ob- 
 jective' word (i.) which has the 'Definite Article' [ 6]; 
 (ii.) the ' Proper Name ' of a person or place, as Noah, Job, 
 Ruth, Athaliah, Makkeda, Babylon, etc. ; (iii.) i Construc- 
 tion, as in " and he took [*3p}~nS] [the] elders of the city, 
 
 and he taught P&^K HN] [the'] men of Succoth " [Jud. viii. 
 16]; (iv.) having a Pron. Affix attached to it, as in "they 
 took [DJXXTIN] their flock," etc. [Gen. xxxiv. 28]. 
 
 (A.) This HK (or TlK) may also stand before "iBte used 
 Objectively for ' that which 9 or 'him, thee, them (etc.), who'*, 
 and in a few other cases to be mentioned elsewhere. 
 
 73. Obs. The H for the ' Def. Art.' must never be placed 
 before 
 
 (1) a Noun < i. c.', f 
 
 (2) a Noun with a 'Pron. Aff.',f 
 
 (3) *)K^ who, whom, or which ; 
 
 f^-)[Note. Nor before Proper Names, as a Kule. There are 
 some exceptions (to be mentioned elsewhere), especially the 
 names of some Places and Rivers. 
 
 * Thus, [1K ; ^ HNV] and that.which [was] in the city, [IK'K.T)!* 1 !] and that ) 
 which [was] in the field, they took" [Gen. xxxiv. 28]. 
 
 t A few instances may be cited to the contrary iwhich must be mentioned 
 elsewhere), but this great Rule of 73 MUST ALWAYS BE OBSERVED in Compo- 
 sition.
 
 NOUNS, 74, NOTES (a.) TO (d.). 
 
 74. More must be said on the Nouns elsewhere [Pt. II.]. 
 but the following Notes may be added here. 
 
 Note (a.) It need scarcely be said that a Noun, such 
 as HVl spirit, for instance, having Furtive-Pathakh to its 
 last letter, must drop the Furtive-Pathakh on receiving any 
 Affix; thus, niPlVl (Plu.), and so irflT his spirit, 'PlVl my..., 
 etc. 
 
 (b.) Nouns ending in Pi drop the Pi on receiving Affixes; 
 thus from PHE? afield (i. c. PHJ^) the Declension is 
 
 my 
 
 ^1 
 
 thy 
 
 On.) Tlb> 
 
 ^ / U T 
 
 his . 
 
 field, 
 her PPEM 
 
 VTT / 
 
 Nouns ending in PI generally take the Affix form Ml for 
 <AeV as in ^mb his field, }P1E?S?0, fos tt?or&. 
 
 V"T t/ ' \* -; * 
 
 [The Plural D* 1 "!^ of this Noun does not occur, but the 
 Construct form **1^ occurs. The usual Plural is HH^ fields 
 (i. c. nnb>), with'Affixes UTn2>, DpW^, etc.] 
 
 From rTO a work (i. c. HbTO), Plu. D WO (i. c. ^0), 
 we have the Plural Declension 
 
 our 
 
 thy 
 
 (m.) 
 
 c/o 
 
 (m.) 
 
 his 
 her 
 
 T vv -:- 
 
 their 
 
 tan 
 
 works. 
 
 (c.) Besides the ending H , for the Feminine, there are 
 some others (to be mentioned elsewhere). The most im- 
 portant, perhaps, of these is the ending H-^ (p. JV- ), 
 as in rVlfiy lead (the H being part of the ending). 
 
 (c?.) This remark (c.) will be found to be of great use 
 hereafter when we shall have to give the forms of Participles. 
 These have simple Noun-forms, and for the Feminine Sin- 
 gular they have the ending P - - as well as i"T_ _ ; thus,
 
 NOUNS, 74, NOTES (e.) TO (7.). 45 
 
 from *)& one (m.) saying, we have both rntf and 
 owe (/.) saying. 
 
 (<?.) Some Nouns have both endings, viz., H and 71 ; 
 thus, (i) from TJjl a /ore?, we have both TTf^ and 
 a lady, a mistress, So we have (2) both n^.N$P) and 
 beauty, glory; etc. 
 
 (/I) The ' Singular ' Declension (including the Construct 
 State') of such Nouns as those in (e.) is, generally, only 
 that of the fl form; thus we have rVT3!l (the < Construct' 
 form), and *$T3f, nrrpjl, etc. (Cp. Tab. X. (2)), and so 
 rng^n (the 'Construct' form), and WH^Pl, ^1**?^ 
 iPnNSfi, etc. (Cp. Tab. X. (1)), rn;3jl and JTwipPl are 
 Indeclinable. 
 
 (gr.) This is so even in certain Nouns of which the 
 * Absolute ' form in fl does not occur, as rO/ftft a king- 
 
 I V IV ' IT T : - J' 
 
 <fom, (17^^^ dominion, 1133*).^ a chariot. Of these the 'Con- 
 struct' forms are Hj7fi. fP^Jbft, n!33^D, respectively, and 
 
 vvv : - ' _ vv-'i : v ' X vv ( : v . . ' 
 
 the Declension-forms are 1^07^0, 1^17^^ iPl53^D, etc. 
 
 (^.) The Plurals of such Nouns are from the !l form ; 
 thus, from n^hpp and np7 war, battle (of which the 
 Declension is of the form of iPl^Hpp), the only Plural is 
 
 (e.) No separate Table is needed for Nouns ending in Pi 
 which drop the Penult, vowel of their Absolute form ; thus, 
 rny* an assembly, i. c. JTIJ? ( 56, i.), w. affs. *ny, 1^72, e * c - 
 
 (7u) Table XIII. (1 6) gives the Declensions of some 
 special Nouns, viz., 
 
 [1] 3K a father, [2] HK a brother, [3] JV3 a Aowse, 
 [4] |3 a son, [5] H3 a daughter, [6] PI3 a mouth. 
 
 (1.) The Noun feJ^N a man (also each-one, etc.) is declined 
 * Obs. rny a testimony, RETAINS its .
 
 46 NOUNS, 74, NOTES (/.) TO (7.). 
 
 in the Singular like V& [Tab. V.]. The Plural s 
 
 used, but not generally. The ordinary word for 'men* is 
 D'gJJK, which is declined like D^lf [Tab. X. (6)]. 
 
 (m.) The Noun nfcPtf a woman, a wife, is not declined. 
 But there is a Declension of the corresponding Noun HE^$ 
 (which occurs in the 'Absolute,' Deut. xxi. 11, IS. xxviii. 7, 
 Ps. Iviii. 9, and frequently <i. c.'). This is declined V?$K, 
 ^Fl#K, frlBte, etc., like Tt) [Tab. X. (2)] as if it were an 
 ordinary ' 5-point ' Noun ( 62), but only in the Singular. 
 For the Plural 'women' or 'wives' the word is D*$3 (i. c. *&50) 
 
 v T V. ; / 
 
 which is declined thus, 
 
 my 
 
 our 
 
 thy (w.) 
 
 v J 
 
 your (i.) 
 
 his VIM) 
 
 ST* . 
 
 their (m.) 
 
 wives. 
 
 (n.) The Vocative ! ' is sometimes marked by the Prefix H followed by 
 Dagesh Forte, the same as for the Def. Art.' ( 6) ; thus, [1 S. xvii. 55] As 
 thy soul liveth pj^tpri] king!", [1 S. xxiii. 20] "According to all the desire 
 of thy soul [tjVen] king!", etc. 
 
 (o.) The Rules of 6 (6.), (c.), etc., apply to this Prefix n for the Vocative 
 O!', as well as to that for the Def. Art.'; thus in [Is- xlii. 18] [D^nn] O 
 deaf men, hear ye I, and [D^l.yn] blind men, look ye ! that ye may see," etc. 
 
 (p.) This H for the Vocative O!' may stand before a word i. c.' ( 53); 
 thus [Lament, ii. 13] What-thing shall I liken to thee [n3H] daughter -of 
 Jerusalem 1 " etc. 
 
 (q.) In Table V. (i.) the words DT. P' and j'VB' may be considered to be contracted 
 from DHIT and in^. With these latter the Plural words DiVT^ and ]^T^ 
 in Tab. V. (ii.) correspond, as D3'TB' and }5^^ (your m., and your /. SONGS) 
 in Tab. V. (ii.) correspond with DDT?' & n< l J3T?'(y our m - an< i y ur / SONG) in 
 Tab. V. (i.). This being so, the analogy between the Affix-forms in Tab. V. (i.) 
 and those in Tab. V. (ii.) t. e., for the Sing, and the Plu. Noun respectively, 
 is seen to be complete. 
 
 (r.) Similarly in Tab. VI. (i.), the words DHTIfl and frnin may be considered 
 to be contracted from DnjnVl and 
 
 (.) The before the Affixes DD" and |D." in the Tables is, of course, Shva 
 Moving, because there is no Dagesh Lene in the D, Pt. I. 55 (4). 
 
 (f.) N.B. There is before the DDT and the }D-r instead of in the corres- 
 ponding places of the other words in these Tables (and in DDT your (m.) hand, 
 from T a hand, w. Affixes IT his.., etc.). Owing to the stress and emphasis on 
 these Affixes, the earlier parts of the words having them are shortened as much 
 as possible. The Short-vowel followed by the Shva Moving admits of rapid moving
 
 NOUNS, 74, NOTES (.) TO (Z0.). 47 
 
 on to the final syllable, on which the stress and emphasis is laid. There could 
 not be Shva in the place of this Short vowel, because of the Shva following it. 
 
 So, too, in the CPtJTVn and inrnin, from which DrVYlPl and jrnW may be 
 considered to be contracted, Tab. VI." (i.), and in D"\3 <: ! and in"*?^ from which 
 mn. and pin may be considered to be contracted, Tab. IX. (i.). 
 
 (u.) There is a not unfrequent contraction of the forms D-VlYlTlFl and 
 into DflWlfi and fnWlR This is for the sake of shortness. 
 
 (IT.)' The form DgB> is 'i. c.' the same (viz. Bglfc>), Plu. D'PpG? (i.e. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 (To be translated into English.) 
 
 nir 
 
 1 See p. 385. 2 Table X. (1). 3 DJ days. * njC' year. 6 px earth, 
 
 a land, a country (see page 25 (Note 4), Plu. HWlX). 6 JTli? a company. 
 7 T2X a strong one. O'nX? pits. 9 slime. 10 Zion." n no t. T 12 let them 
 be slack. T a hand (Dual On;). W P]33 a wing (Dual D*B33). 15 a dove. 
 16 Tab. IX. " Tab. XIII. (6) 18 a wise* man. 19 a lamp. 26 ^>jn a foot (Dual 
 D^f!D- 21 and light. se nTH? a path. 23 nan? a free-will offering. 24 be 
 pleased with, accept. 25 I pray. 26 t3B2'D a judgment. 27 teach Thou me. 
 28 niVP a commandment. 29 I have longed, had a great desire. 30 I thought 
 on. 31 "ip. 1 ;! a way. 32 and I made to return. 33 to. 34 PH^ a testimony 
 (the of this word cannot be dropped). 35 Seek ye. 36 See Exerc. IX. Note 15. 
 3V Va all (*?3 when unaccented). 38 13V a meek one. 3 for, because. 40 py 
 iniquity. 41 they have gone into captivity. *- and they shall know. 43 !"ni3,V 
 service. 44 H37CO a kingdom. 4 they shall be ashamed. 46 72]} a worshipper. 
 4" a graven image. ^ nb'J7D a work. 49 a workman, smith. 50 nothingness. 
 61 a grave, sepulchre. 52 opened. 53 ^"13 a throat. 5 * D'ncb' lips. S3 smooth- 
 * 56 (i. & ix.). 1 59. t 74 (t.). S 56 (ix, 4).
 
 48 
 
 60 
 
 : 69 Tiri 
 
 Tni 
 
 ness, flattery. 66 Esau. c7 (with the preceding word) do not gather.' 58 Qjj 
 with. 69 sinners. 60 jj>B3 a soul. 61 74 Note (.). 62 blood. 63 Qin life 
 (a Plural form). 64 wickedness. 65 hath spoken. 66 vanity. 67 incline Tliou. 
 68 Q*tptJ> heavens (Dual form). 69 an( j mayest Thou come down. 70 send forth. 
 7 1 "fix* light. 7 2 nEK truth (with aff. iflDS. few.., etc.). 7 3 shall guide me. 
 74 VIIQ a ransomed one. 75 shall return. 7 6 and I will have mercy upon. 
 77 See" Tab. XIII. (3). 7 Israel, "and I will be jealous. 80 ft& a name . 
 81 Bh'P holiness. 82 And I will collect. 83 Tab. III. (l). 84 3^ & n enemy. 
 85 Righteous. 86 an d Gracious. 87 \y_ an eye (Dual DW). 83 Tab. IV. (1). 
 89 look with hope. 93 giving. 91 ?3'K food. a2 in its season. 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew.') 
 
 * # * For the plan of the Exercise see 11 ( ft}. 
 
 According-to 1 the word 2 of Elijah. 3 The man 4 with- 
 whom-is-My-word (Hebr., who My word 2 ivith 6 him'). And- 
 I-will-put 6 My words 2 in his mouth. 7 The words 2 of wise- 
 men 8 and their riddles. 9 As ' the flesh 10 of our brethren " 
 [is] our flesh. 10 Thy (m.} bone 12 and thy flesh 10 [are] we. 
 Your (m.) bone 12 and your flesh 10 [am] I. And-as-for-me 
 
 1 3 the Prefix. 2 -|:n a word. ' in 
 7 Tab. XIII. 6. 8 D3n(s.) T . HTH (.). 
 
 Tab. III. 2. 
 -)l"2 Tab. IX. "Tab. XIII. 2.
 
 49 
 
 (Hebr., and /) my prayer ls [is] to your (m.) God " according- 
 to l your words. 2 For 1S great-is-His-Mercy-towards-us (Hebr., 
 mighty-hath-been 16 over us His Mercy 18 ). Thy (w.) Counte- 
 nance 19 make-Thou-to-shine 20 upon 21 Thy servant. 22 Many 23 
 [are] my persecutors 24 and my enemies. 25 Let-my-supplication- 
 come-before-Thee (Hebr., let-come 26 my supplication 27 to Thy 
 Presence 19 ). I-will-extol-thee, 28 my God, u O* King 29 ; and- 
 I-will-bless 30 Thy Name 31 for-ever-and-ever. 32 His praise 33 
 shall-speak 34 [viz.] my mouth 7 ; and-shall-bless 35 [viz.] all- 
 flesh 36 His-Holy-Name (Hebr., the Name 31 of His Holiness 37 ) 
 for-ever-and-ever. 32 
 
 Tab. X. (1). 13 n;>BJp. I* D>r6x (a Noun of Plural form). 15 3. 16 153. 
 17 t>j?. 18 non Tab^ X. (1). 19 D'JS (a Noun of Plural form). 20 -^H. 21 3 
 the Prefix of 4. 22 nny Tab. X. (1). 23 Q^-J. 24 Q^n'-i. 25 T iy ( s .). 
 
 26 Niari. 27 nanj-i. 28 Tjop'n^. 29 ^o. so 'rmm 3 i DB* (i. c. the same), 
 
 with affix iD^ Aw..., etc.t 32 ij;j D$P 33 H^nj^. ' 34 i|T. 35 -jj-j^^ 
 '. 37 {jnp, Tab. XI. l.'J 1* See 74 T (nj. 
 
 t See Tab. XIH, Note (, a).
 
 50 
 
 SECTION VIII. 
 NOUNS-ADJECTIVE. 
 
 75. There being no ' Cases' in Hebrew, and no Gender- 
 forms for other than Masculine and Feminine, we have only 
 four forms to consider, viz., those for the Masculine and the 
 Feminine in (1) the Singular, and (2) the Plural.* 
 
 N.B. Adjectives should agree with their Substantives in 
 Gender and Number. 
 
 76. The forms referred to in 75 are the usual Noun- 
 forms, having the termination D* for the Masc. Plural 
 ( 39. ft 8), and H_ for the Fern. Sing. ( 40), and rf\ (or 
 
 for the Fern. Plu. ( 41). Thus, for instance, 
 
 Ov.) 
 
 fem. masc. 
 
 beautiful. 
 
 (iii.) 
 
 fern. 
 
 it 
 
 masc. 
 
 <w 
 
 little. 
 
 (u.) 
 
 fern. 
 
 :t 
 
 great. 
 
 fern. m 
 
 rnio ,: 
 tninb ,D': 
 
 good. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plu. 
 
 77. Adjectives may be used < i. c.'; thus, [Dan. i. 4] 
 " Children... [^ri3] ffood-of appearance;" [Gen. xxiv. 16] 
 " the damsel was [J"Qb] goodly -of appearance ;" and so || /IS 
 (Sing, m.} great-of, J"l5* (Sing, m.) and H3* (Sing. /.) 
 beautiful-of, etc.lf 
 
 78. The proper PLACE for the Hebrew Adjective is offer 
 
 * There are no Dual forms for Adjectives proper. 
 
 t For the two forms 1 and _L for the same vowel, see Pt. I. 13. 
 
 J For the removal of the vowel that would be Third before the Accented vowel 
 (reckoned as First}, see 59. 
 
 The last of J13J5 is replaced by followed by Dagesh Forte, on the 3's 
 receiving a vowel. Cp. Tab. IX. (j8). [Of the more common word jb? little, there 
 is no other form except only |b;? (i. c.) 2 Chr. xxi. 17.] 
 
 II And "7*111 (when followed by Makkeph, Pt. I. 37), in which word the is 0. 
 This, in Pr. iix. 19, is Kri for V"I3 Kthlv [Pt. I. 74. 3]. In Na.i. 3, Ps. cxlv. 8, 
 the ) of ?H3 there written ' is superfluous.' 
 
 IT There are also the following forms (Masculine), 
 
 na? 'i. c.' 12?, pl. DH3? i. c.' n33; BO, fr. 1$, D\1.3J? 'i. c.' )$; etc.
 
 ADJECTIVES, 78 - 81. 51 
 
 its Noun-Subst.*; thus, ID fcX a good man (lit., a man 
 good), rpnJ ft&$ a great woman, D y1% 
 beautiful virgins. 
 
 79. Sometimes Participles are used as Adjectives ; as in 
 tt a confident (or careless) people, flTiy^! S^tf a burning 
 
 fre, DHttia D'$JX burning men, JTlHtpill H03 careless 
 daughters.^ 
 
 80. With DUAL Nouns-Subst., Adjectives (and Participles 
 used as such) take Plural forms ; thus D^KHH D?D$ wo 
 heavens, HIS*]. D*T w?ea& hands, D^p?^ DTlSE? flaming lips, 
 r\r>W3 Wtt failing knees. 
 
 81. If the Noun-Snbst. is 'Definite' either (1) having I 
 the ' Def. Art./ or (2) having not that Prefix because it is I 
 < i. c.' ( 73), or (3) having a Pron. Affix, the Ad- 
 jective follows the Subst., and receives also the * Def. Art. ; ' 
 
 * (i.) There may be more than one Noun Subst. referred to by one Adjective ; 
 thus, "good statutes and judgments," would be D^l'lD D^SB'O-I D'pn (lit. *ta- 
 tutes and judgments good "). 
 
 (ii.) In a few instances, an Adjective before a Subst. is supposed to qualify that 
 Subst.: this must not be in Composition. 
 
 t This is a not unfrequent form of the Feminine Participle instead of i"nV3; 
 see hereafter. 
 
 t (i.) There may be several Adjectives (or Participles used as such) one after 
 another, following the Subst. ; thus, [Gen. xli. 23] " ears withered, thin, and 
 blasted," etc. 
 
 (ii.) In a few instances two Adjectives of different Gender refer to the same 
 Subst. ; thus, [1 K. xix. 11] pTPI^ H?n| ll-IT a wind great (/.) and strong (m.\ 
 the wind/ being without life, cannot be said to have any Gender ' really. 
 
 (i.) There may be more Adjectives than one so following the 'Definite* Sub- 
 stantive, and having each of them the Prefix n for the Definite Article'; thus, 
 " the high and fenced walls," would stand thus, the walls the high-ones and 
 the fenced-ones." So the high and fenced walls of a city " would stand thus, 
 'walls of a city the high-ones and the fenced ones;" and so, "thy high and 
 fenced walls " is " thy walls the high-ones and the fenced-ones " (Deut. xxviii. 52). 
 
 (ii.) A few instances might be cited in which an Adjective not having the Pref. 
 H is rendered by many as an Adjective qualifying a Definite ' Substantive. 
 Suffice it to say here, that such a form of expression must never be used in 
 Composition.
 
 52 ADJECTIVES, 81-82. 
 
 
 thus, iitSil "ft 1 ^ THE good word (lit., the word the good), 
 DOhHNH *in HIP! THE ^ as * words of David (lit., words-of 
 David the last-ones}, H/faSH ^3 wy e/cfer daughter (lit., wy 
 daughter the great-one}, D^D DiT^T^ fAet'r iac? w?ays (lit., 
 tfAe/r ways the bad}. 
 
 N.B. When the Adjective after a ' Definite ' Substantive 
 7ms wo the Prefix H for the 'Definite Article,' the Adjective 
 generally serves as a ' Predicate.' See below 83, etc. 
 
 82. Hebrew Adjectives have no (1) < Comparative ' or 
 (2) ' Superlative forms. An Adjective of ordinary form 
 
 (i.) followed by JE (or by p, the Prefix of 5) serves in 
 the place of the 'Comparative,' and 
 
 (ii.) with the Prefix H for the ' Definite Article,' and 
 followed by 3 (the Prefix of 4), serves in the place of the 
 < Superlative ;' thus, 
 
 (i.) HDH riHSlH |23 SiD BETTER THAN the dead lion (lit., 
 GOOD FROM, or MORE THAN, the dead lion}, and ijfiJp Hlft letter 
 than he, $inp P^ sweeter than honey. 
 
 (ii.) D*p3$n /il3n THE GREATEST OF the Anaklm (lit., 
 THE GREAT ONE IN, or AMONG, the Analdm} ; and so nBODS 7^1 
 THE WEAKEST OF Manasseh ; ^^ H^5^ ^^^D THE LEAST OF 
 the house of my father. 
 
 N.B. These expressions for (i.) the ' Comparative ' and 
 (ii.) the 'Superlative' are often used ' Predicatively;' thus, 
 [Ps. Ixiii. 4] D^nfi Tj^pH nto Thy Grace [is] letter than 
 life, and [Judg. vi. 15] "My thousand [is ...S /TTl] the 
 weakest in Manasseh, and I [am] the least," etc.. 
 
 * If, instead of "David," we had the expression a great kin 
 we should have for the last words of a great king," D^IHSil 
 (lit., words-of a king great the -last -ones) ; and if, instead of < David," we had the 
 expression < the great king," we should have for the last words of the great 
 king," Dppri ^lan T^SH n:n (lit., words-of the king the great-one the-last- 
 mes).
 
 ADJECTIVES, 8386. 53 
 
 83. Hebrew Adjectives are often used 'Predicatively,'* 
 and then some form of the so-called < Substantive Verb ' (or 
 'logical Copula') is to be supplied; thus, 31 tD f"lNTI IHTI 
 and the gold of the land [is] good, IKfc Sn3 G^NiTI * and the 
 man [tea*] great exceedingly, \^ Vn| GREAT [is] His Name, 
 ?p : pn SID good [is] Thy Mercy; and" so Pim pHJ? Righteous 
 [art] Thou, H3H J-Qb yoorf/y *% (/.) [ware], ttrtfK D'pirn 
 
 /ar atray [are] tee, etc. etc. 
 
 N.B. The Adjective when used ' Predicatively,' often 
 precedes its Subject as in the last five examples; it is then 
 generally emphatic. 
 
 84. An Adjective which precedes the Substantive or Pro- **> 
 noun to which it belongs, generally serves as a f Predicate ' 
 thereto; thus, [1 S. xxvi. 13] DipSH Tl great \ioas~\ the space 
 [between them} ; [Job v. 25] * "^1! 3~\ great (or abundant) 
 thy seed [shall be], etc. : as, also, in the last five examples 
 in 83. 
 
 85. So, also, after a ' Definite ' Subject an Adjective that 
 has not the Prefix H for the < Def. Art.' is generally used 
 ' Predicatively ;'f thus, [Judg. vii. 4] IH Dl^H the people [is] 
 great (or numerous), whereas " the numerous people " would 
 be Din D*jn as [Is. xvi. 14] 11H pSHn the great multitude. 
 
 TT Tf' TT|TV V 
 
 [Obs. D1 Dy (or !U1 Di?) means " a numerous people"] 
 
 86. There are not very many adjectives + in Hebrew. But 
 no want of them is particularly felt because there is, in com- 
 mon use, another mode of defining, describing, and qualifying 
 Substantives, viz., by placing them in Construction with a 
 
 * In which case the Adjective need not agree with the Subst. in Gender or I 
 Number. 
 
 A Noun-Subst. may also be used Predicatively ' of another Noun-Subst. or a 
 Pronoun. 
 
 t A few instances may be citod in which this seems not attended to. It must I 
 ahrays be attended to in Composition. 
 
 * i.e. Strictly such. Participles are often used Adjectively.
 
 54 ADJECTIVES, 86 90. 
 
 word (or expression 87, 2) which, denotes the qualification, or 
 the describing or defining thing or quality; thus, [Pr. xv. 26] 
 Dyj *1^X pleasant ivords (lit., words-of pleasantness}; [1 K. 
 xx. 31] "IDH ^J?'-? merciful kings (lit., kings-of mercy}, etc. 
 Moreover, 
 
 87. The second of two words so connected may have a 
 *U Pron. Affix referring to informer one ; thus, (1) [Ps. cxix. 62] 
 
 ^JjyiV *95^D 7% righteous judgments (E.V.), and so (2) 
 [Is.''lxiv.' 'lO] ttJmijpVttBhjJ JV3 our holy and beautiful 
 house (lit., the-house of our holiness and our beauty), etc. 
 
 88. A less common idiom is the following : A Noun 'in 
 Construction ' with a word after it sometimes qualifies or 
 describes this second word, in an Adjectival manner;* thus, 
 [Gen. xvi. 12] D"1tf tf'lS) a wild man (lit., a ivild-ass-of man), 
 and so [Deut. xxxii. 41) *3"iri p*l!l My Jlashing sword (lit., 
 the-lightning-of My sword, i.e., My lightning sword}. 
 
 In accordance with this, D^H rttSy.irY) (lit., and the-might- 
 of mountains, Ps. xcv. 4) seems best understood as equivalent 
 to "and mighty mountains" we have then the whole verse 
 running thus : 
 
 " In Whose hand [are] the-secret-depths-of earth, 
 "And His [are] the mighty mountains." 
 
 89. Some Adjectives, chiefly Gentilic and Patronymic,^ have the ending * for 
 the Masculine, and n* T or IV for the Feminine, in the Singular. These take 
 D'- (or D ) for the Plural 1 Masc. and H^T for the Plural Fern. ; thus n.^y 
 Hebrew (Sing. m.\ np (Sing. /.), &*$$ [0^3? Ex. iii. 18] (PJur. m.\ 
 n'V-py (Plu. /.) ; and" Vyi? Egyptian (Sing, m.ji hnyo (Sing. /.), Dn.V 
 
 (Piu. 'm.\ nipyp (Piu./.)." ' 
 
 90. It seems hardly necessary to say that Comparison,' in the way of Likeness 
 and Similitude is expressed by the Prefix 3 of 4 (or the word 1D3, 4 Note y); 
 thus, D^'lpXB |bn strong as the oaks; ^iE3 D3I11 |i23 intelligent and wise as 
 tfiou; jaSI '13 p-li i:tf> ftts Aearf [i*]/rm ^a stone. 
 
 * Somewhat as we say a giant of a man (for a gigantic man), a fool of a man 
 (for a foolish man). 
 
 t There are some others, as nj? cruel, and so M?H Gen. xlix. 12.
 
 ADJECTIVES, 91 93. 55 
 
 91. The 3 of Comparison is sometimes used with two words in succession, to 
 express just so much as," or as much the one as the other;" thus, in 
 [Is. xxiv. 2] 13b3 nip? so with the buyer as with the seller ; so 13 in the well- 
 known passage* [Ps. Iviii. 10] pin 1D3 *n 1D3 as much quick as on fire. 
 
 92. (a.} Adjectives (and Participles used as such) may be used concretely ; 
 thus, p^V righteous (m.) for a righteous [MAN], and 11D good (m.) for a good 
 [MAN or THING]; [often so 
 
 (ft.} when < Predicative,' and then they need not agree in Gender and Number 
 with the word to which they refer; thus, [Ps. Ixxiii. 28] 218 "k D'nfcfc? n31j? the 
 
 how awful [are] Thy works! etc.]; 
 
 (7) So [Nu. xxii. 18] to do tittle or great pl|S3^ IS n3t3p, lit. a little [thing] 
 or a great [thing]], and so some give [Pr. viii. 6] I will speak excellent-things" 
 
 (fl) Especially the Fem. Phi.; thus, (1) JT!>"I| great [things] Ps. xii. 4, Ixxi. 19. 
 etc., (2) niSl'13 terrible [things] Ps. xlv. 5, cvi. 22, etc. : 
 
 () And Adverbially, as lYlKlto fearfully, Ps. cxxxix. 14, etc. 
 
 93. Besides the forms of Expressing the Comparative ' and Superlative,' 
 which were mentioned in 82, there are some others which need not be mentioned 
 in a Section on Adjectives. 
 
 EXEKCISE XV. 
 
 (To be translated into English.) 
 
 * * For the plan of the Exercise, see 1 1 (a t). 
 
 : 7 vnpn + 
 
 1 hath uttered. 2 my heart. 3 "13^J a wordT(with Affix *^2' ! l my ;ord, etc.). 
 4 2it3 good (m.), HliO (/.). 5 See Exercise IX. Note 2. 6 fo r ever. ? 1DH 
 mercy (with Affix ^DPI my mercy, etc.)- 8 not. 9 hath fallen. 10 one< 
 11 "PS all, '^3 when " unaccented, [Pt. I. 37, 55 (9, 6.)]. 12 a day. 
 
 * Perhaps best known in the rendering, So let indignation vex him even as a 
 thing that is raw." The words ^H alive and pin hot, or on fire, refer to 113X a 
 Worn or a briar ; the Psalmist seems to express the wish that there may 
 suddenly and utterly fail all the force and fire required for bringing to maturity 
 the plot which his foes are concocting; and this he expresses in figurative language 
 which refers to a storm-blast's sweeping away a fire of thorn-twigs partly quick 
 (i.e., with the sap yet in them) but partly kindled. 
 
 t Also a promise; and a matter, a thing.
 
 56 
 
 13 in Thy courts. 14 CjK a thousand [p. t S]. I 5 for. 16 Q^n life. 17 there 
 hath come. I 8 ?JJ upon. i9 JHfc? earth, land (Vl^n when the Definite 
 Article' is prefixed). 20 He gave. 21 a son. 22 wise. 23 w in gladden. 24 a 
 father. 25 ^05 a fool. 26 man , a man. 27 despises. 28 his mother. 29 a^j 
 a fly. 30 death. 31 D^Hlp men. 32 number. 33 and it shall be. 34 EJJ a 
 people (Oyn when the 'Definite Article' is prefixed). 35 JH3 a priest. 36 verily. 
 37 to Israe'lJ 38 God. 39 -fl pure (sing, m.) *<> heart. "?N God. 42 Vn| 
 great. 43 x^13 awful, to be feared. 44 gracious. 45 an d merciful. 46 m y 
 beloved. 47 white (E.V.). 48 an d ruddy. 49 HQ> beautiful (/.). 50 D^3 women. 
 51 n33^ moon. 62 bright. 53 nn sun. 54 will forsake. 65 (See Exerc. IX., 
 No. 15). 66 His people. 57 because of. 58 His Name. 59 and I will redeem. 
 jnt an arm (/.). stretched out (/.). 62 QttpQ^ judgments. 63 an d I 
 will establish, 64 Blessed (m.). 65 He that cometh. 66 in [the] Name of. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew.) 
 
 [N.B. The H for the 'Definite Article' must not be put before a word i.c.' 
 Is, " are," and am," here, are not to be expressed in Hebrew.] 
 
 * # * For the plan of the Exercise, see 11 ( /u). 
 
 A great l city. 2 The great ! city. z The city 2 is great. ' 
 Great 1 cities. 2 The great 1 cities. 2 The cities 2 are great: 1 
 76 (ii.). 2-vj? a feminine Noun (Plur.
 
 57 
 
 Great 1 and goodly 3 cities. 2 The great 1 and goodly 3 cities. 2 
 The cities 2 are great l and goodly. 3 The great l and good 3 
 prophet. * The prophet 4 is good 3 and great. 1 A good 3 and 
 great l prophet 4 he is. The great 1 and good 3 prophets. 
 A great 1 crown-of 5 gold. 6 Is-not (Hebr., Whether 7 not 6 ) her 
 little 9 sister 10 better " than she? What 12 is sweeter 13 than 
 honey, 14 and what is stronger 15 than a lion. 16 The greatest 17 
 of the Anakim. 18 My thousand 19 is the weakest 20 of Manasseh, 21 
 and I am the least 22 of the house 23 of my father. 24 The 
 most-beautiful 25 [one] of the women. 26 Thy (/.) high 27 and 
 fenced 28 walls. 23 The Glorious 30 and Awful 31 NAME. M 
 
 3 aiB, 76 (i.). * S033 (m.). 5 JTlBg (/.} 6 3HT. 7 7. 8 & 
 76 (iii.). 10 Tab. XIII. t (a). U Comparative ' of T (3). See 82 (i.). 
 ispiriD sweet. U&y(. 15 Ty strong. 16 n. ".Superlative' of (1). See 
 82 (ii".). is Dj?3g. 19 Pl^K Tab. X. (i.) (m).20 ^ wea k. 21 nyjp. 22 vy?. 
 23JV3 Tab. XIIL (3). 24 Tab. XIII. (i.) 25 HSJ (/.) [naj'm.]. 0^ 
 ( 74, m.). 27 nba high (Sing, m.) 28 -j^fa fenced (Sing, m.j T 29 nDlH a waif. 
 so n233. 
 
 Note (o). The phrase "flies of death," (p. 56, No. 29 & 30) stands for "dead 
 flies." 
 
 (ft). The phrase "men of number" (p. 56, No. 31 & 32) stands for 
 "a few men."
 
 58 
 
 SECTION IX. 
 PKONOUNS-ADJECTIVE. 
 
 94. The Pronouns of Section V. (see p. 28), viz. 
 (I.) nj this (m.), TINT this (/.), n ?&$ these (m. &f.) ; (H.) K-in that (m.), SST that {/.), 
 
 etc., may be used ADJECTIVELT thus, 
 
 or tsnn 
 nsnn 
 
 tn Mose words ntSHH or Dnn 
 
 this man Pljll KXri that man 
 
 this woman DX-TH HK'Kn that woman 
 
 these boys *H? 
 
 these girls HpS 
 
 like these words ri?J< 
 
 i.e., these Pronouns -Adjective follow the Rule of 81 (p. 51) 
 respecting Adjectives with * Definite* % Nouns-Subst. 
 
 Obs. The 'Definite' Noun-Substantive may be i. c.' as in [1 S. xvii. 11] 
 n?Sn VH/^Sfl '"O^ these words of the Philistine (lit., words of the Philistine the 
 
 v T : : - : 
 
 these) ; and with a Pron. Aff., thus iT? H ^SJJ this Thy people. 
 
 95. If the Definite ' Noun-Substantive has an Adjective 
 belonging to it, besides one of these Pronouns used Adjec- 
 tively, the proper place for this Pronoun is after the Ad- 
 jective / thus, [Nu. xx. 5] run yiri Dip^n this bad place 
 (lit., the place the bad the this); [Nu. xvi. 26] D^NH 
 "V^l? ^yfc^iri these wicked men (lit., the men the wicked the 
 these]; and so [Deut. i. 19] N^n N^Uni ^Hjn *8l@r\ that 
 great and terrible wilderness (lit., the wilderness the great and 
 the terrible the that), etc. 
 
 96. (i.) The Pronouns HT (m.), and flNT (/), (especially the latter) are sometimes 
 used for < this [thing]"; and n?X is sometimes used for these [things']" So, also, 
 
 i (ii.) (a) The 3 s. (m. and /.) and 3 pi. (m. and /.) Pers. Pronouns of Tables I., 
 
 * ?Sn, sometimes ; thus, [Gen. xix. 8] 7XH D^'JS? to these men. 
 
 fFor the n in S-inn, fcOHn, and the n in Dnri, etc., see 6 (c, ii.) and 
 Note. 
 
 J The Nouns to which the this ' or these,' that ' or < those ' refer being 
 Definite.' But the il is sometimes omitted, thus N-IH n^3 in M< ntg-Af, 
 D?X ^S'l <Aee my words. 
 
 There are some instances in which this Rule is not attended to. It must 
 always be observed in Composition.
 
 PRONOUNS ADJECTIVE, 96 98. 59 
 
 III. (1) (and in other forms), are sometimes used Neutrally as in "Is not IT* \ 
 [JOH] written etc.", Josh. x. 13, < IT * [IFIX] 1 must observe to speak," Nu. xxiii. ' 
 12, etc., etc. 
 
 (j8) N.B. Pronouns of the Thkd Pers. (Tab. I.), stand sometimes where no 
 corresponding Pronoun is required in English, as in These are [DH n?S, lit. these . 
 THEY (are)] the sons of Ishmael," Gen. xxv. 16; Knowest thou not what are 
 these [npX DDT r\D, lit. what THEY these]?" Zech. iv. 5. 
 
 97. By reason of an Ellipsis of the 'Relative' Pronoun after 'this,' PIT and U 
 stand sometimes where a Relative Pronoun is required in English ; thus, [Ps. civ. 8] 
 unto the place [Ht] WHICH (E.V.) Thou hast appointed for them." 
 
 98. The Prefix H of 6, as < Defining/ or < Marking,' 
 or f Pointing out,' that one who, or those who, or that which, 
 and the like, stands sometimes where the Relative Pronoun 
 is required in English ; thus, [Gen. xxiv. 43] " the damsel 
 [HX*n] who cometh out (lit., the-one-coming-ouf) and to whom 
 I shall say, etc." Cp. Gen. xix. 15, Deut. viii. 14 16, 
 Josh. x. 24, etc. 
 
 [N.B. Henceforth the following words need not be given in the Notes to the 
 Exercises: 
 
 7X not (generally deprecatively'). 
 J1X (t'JlS), see Exercise IX. 15. J 
 b(l4f)*aB. 
 N> not. 
 V For H.t, nxt, n^S } used 'Absolutely,' see p. 28. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 (To be translated into English?) 
 # * For the plan of the Exercise see 11 (a ). 
 
 1 "12'n a word, thing. * the covenant. 3 and spake. 4 Moses. ' 7 
 (this varies slightly from the Bible). 6 thou wilt observe. ' to do. 8 the Law. 
 
 * Cp. 10. 
 
 t The Makkeph is generally not given in the Exercises. 
 
 I The Student is supposed to be familiar with the rest of Tables I IV.
 
 60 
 
 JK nete nxm "nwsn :n-n 
 
 T v -: t : - v - 
 
 16 'a :aon Is njTn a&] sjaa Nin M n 
 
 fi ya#jn "i njn 19 Snjn *W3 18 rrn;ri : 17 
 
 "^ PIT jiba& wnn "Dto 23t ?inS "m-ni nnba 
 
 " ~ 
 
 Kin j 
 
 :Dnn i9 
 
 T T 
 
 23 
 
 T : 
 
 nr :"Dns'tt M 3 nr 
 
 nn- M min "y^n nnn 
 
 v-: : T : r " f' T 
 
 9 2-1713 written (See 93.) 10 in the Book. H the commandment. 
 12 commanding thee (m.). 13 to-day. 14 (with the 13 following) too hard for. 
 15 far off. 1G for. 17 n?p3n wisdom (the to the n is 8). 18 has there been? 
 ?VH great ( 76 (ii )) T 20 or. 21 has there been heard? 22 an d thou shalt 
 tell. '23 Tab. XI11. (4). 24 Q^ a day. 23 saying. 26 ^ God. 27 an d l will 
 glorify HIM. 28 Tab. XIII. (1). 29 Who owneth thee (i.e., Wnose thou art). 
 30 f^ljfl praise. 31 See Exerc. IX. 66. 32 i, ath done. 33 92 (5, 2). 34 flix a 
 sign (Plu. rrin'N). 35 riSID a wonder. 36 on account of. 37 96. 38 hath heard. 
 3'Jhath seen. 40 nyy counsel (/.). 41 f-iJT counselled (m.). For the force of the 
 H here, see 98. 42 and according to what (or, and as}. 43 I have counselled. 
 44 shall stand. 4 $ Israel. 46 Table X. 6. 47 and He will expel (or, pluck away). 
 <8 See Exerc. IX. 2. & the nations. 5094(). 61 Q^| a face (a Noun of Plu. 
 form.) 52 yp aye [ by ] little [and] little. 53 the former things (/.). 54 coming 
 (Sing. m.). '55 DHX. Edom. 56 -p^ a friend. " D 1 ^ Plu. of 24. 58 ny time. 
 5 9 saith (E.V.). 60 they shall come. 61 J u dah. 62 together. 63 i w m make (lit., 
 cut). 64 house of. 65 sn all be saved. 66 O ne shall call. (This word, with the 
 to her ' following, signifies she shall be called "). 67 p*1.V righteousness.
 
 61 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew. ) 
 
 * * For the plan of the Exercise see 11 ( /i). 
 [O'js. 'Is' and are," here, are not to be expressed in Hebrew.] 
 
 This house. 1 This is the house. In this house. Is-this 
 (Hebr. Whether 2 this ?) the house ? That is the house. These 
 are the houses. * These houses. Those houses. This great 3 
 house. That great city. * In this city. In this great city. 
 This is the great city. These cities. * Those cities. In these 
 cities. From, those cities. Who * are these men 5 with 6 thee 
 (?.)? What* is this (m.} in thy (m.~) hand 7 ?, and-he-said, 8 
 A rod. 9 This (/.) we-will-do 10 to 11 them (m.). Hear-ye 12 
 this (/. ) 13 priests. " What is this (/.) thou-(/.)-hast-done 15 ? 
 Is this (/.) Naomi 16 ? Whose-son (Hebr. son of" whom *) is 
 this ? Whose daughter 18 is this ? That is the man 19 from whom 
 we-heard 20 these good 21 words. 22 At 23 that time. 24 In those 
 days 25 I-will-pour-out 26 My Spirit. 27 On 23 that day 28 shall-be- 
 sung 29 this song 33 in the land 31 of Judah. 32 
 
 1 JT3 (m.), Flu. D s fl3. 2 The prefix of 7. 3 Exerc. XVII. 19. * T# (/.), Plu. 
 
 nny. 5 D^':^. 6 oj?. 7^. SICK'*}. 9 nap. lonbga. n? prefix. 
 
 12-iyp^. 13 74 (.). 'UD^HS. ISH'by. 16 *py3. 17 J3. v Ts n? (the same 
 i.e.'). 19jy>K. ao^yoyJ. 21 310 76.' i. 22 Exerc. XVII. 1 . 233 prefix . 
 
 2*ny. (/.x 25Q^p 26-jjiB^x. 27rrn. 28Qi\ 29-^^. 30 i^; m< 31 pix 
 
 (56 vii.). 32 m-liV __ * See page 29.
 
 62 
 SECTION X. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 99. The Cardinal Numbers from 1 to 20 are 
 
 Fern. Masc. Notation. 
 
 Construct. Absolute. Construct. Absolute. 
 
 .N* 1. 
 
 .3 
 
 3. 
 
 .n 4. 
 .n 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 sn$ ntf3$ r\V3w .T 7. 
 
 * ~ v* i- : " ^T : 
 
 .n s. 
 
 ngra .to 9. 
 10. 
 
 13. 
 
 mJyj? y3ix i^y nysnNt .T 14. 
 
 15. 
 or? 16. 
 
 .r n. 
 .rv is. 
 
 _ m ny^n .ta 19. 
 
 IT T T: 
 
 (m. & /.) QH^y .5 20. 
 
 t In pause { rin^f. * Some few times
 
 NUMERALS. 100103. 63 
 
 100. The expressions for the Cardinal Numbers from 21 
 to 29 inclusive, are formed by placing the Cardinal Numbers 
 1 9 (in their Absolute forms, m. & /.) either BEFORE or 
 AFTER D^^y twenty, with 1 prefixed to the Second of the 
 two Numbers; thus, 
 
 (/) 00 (/.) (m.) I 
 
 or] 
 
 or] 
 
 or 
 
 M D'-iB>y or] 
 i onp>y or] ^ D^I : (^^c 1 ) n^an .na 
 
 or] 
 
 or] 7 on^sn (y??o ny?^ -n 
 
 .ro 
 
 or 
 
 ] nra () neto .tsa 
 
 23. 
 24. 
 25. 
 
 27. 
 28. 
 29. 
 
 101. If we replace the DV in 100, ( a .) by D\^ 30, 
 (/3.) by D75"|N 40, (7.) by DTHgl 50, (S.) by D\^ 60, 
 (e.) by D\V^' 70, (C.) by D'^ 80^ (^7.) by D^P'W, we 
 get the Card. Numbers, ( a .) for 3139, (.) for 4149, 
 (7.) for 51-59, (S.) for 6169, (eO for 7179, (?.) for 
 8189, C?.) for 9199 
 
 102. The word for 100 is HJJ2? (<i. c./ HNItt), Plu. rto 
 hundreds. The Dual DN2p (p. J D*pNfi) expresses 200. 
 By placing the Construct Feminine forms [ 99] for 3, 4 V . 9, 
 before niNO, we have 300, 400,.. 900 ; thus, 
 
 o B 3oo, niKS y5n 400, nixa an 500, rte ^ 
 eoo, nixa 375^ 700, rtRD'njb^ soo, nixp ym 900. 
 
 103. The word for 1000 is 6]j* (' i. c.* the same), Plu. 
 D^Ss* thousands ('i. c.' ^). The" Dual D^X* (p. JD^iX*) 
 expresses 2000, By placing the Construct Masculine forms
 
 64 NUMERALS. 103105. 
 
 [ 99] for 3, 4, 5,.. 10, before D^Stt (or < i. c.,' 'fitf), we 
 have 3000, 4000, 5000,... 10,000; thus, 
 
 Q'lx n&> 3000, D'ls nra-ix 4000, Ds nBn 
 
 5000,./ D^9 rWy : 10,000, for which, viz. 10,000, we have 
 also rDi*] a myriad (<i. c.' rO5"1) Flu- f^Tl myriads, 
 
 (<i. p.' rfiyi), [and Kiri, i3i, piu. WKsn, JTiKi-n, & nisi; 
 
 Dual D7ri, Ps. Ixviii. 18]. 
 
 104. For intermediate Numbers to those in 102, 103, 
 we have 
 
 (i.) "ijyyj PIK2? 110, Dn^1 s n& 120 [and also 
 nXDI tny], HN01 D^b^ 130," Hxl DWIJ 150, and so 
 [DV] mtf) D % ^ 180 [rfayi], 
 
 Q s ^pn 250, oW] ni2? ^^ seo, 
 nsa V5>^ 420, D^orn nix 
 5 530, hixa ^arn o^an 550 ; 
 
 (ii.) n^ Dn.y5 y^ 127, tE D: D^n9 232, 
 jbpl 318, ^} DW niND cy^ eee, 
 
 ^ 675, etc., f|7^ Hg'pn 1005, 
 
 HOO, s|j. nixz? ^^ oWi nfebn 1365, 
 1406,' ni^a y^jo D:S^ 2400^ etc. 
 
 [Note. As may be seen in the above, there is variety in 
 the order of the several Numerals which make up a Com- 
 posite Number. Still further variety exists; but notice of 
 it, and of some other matters relating to Numerals, must be 
 deferred at present.] 
 
 105. "We may mention, as examples of the form of higher 
 Numbers, 
 
 DTlXttl ^Stf D'B^ D3B> 32,200, 
 
 D'Btero ni&to atom D^N na^Bh tfot ni^a ^ 603,550. 
 
 -;- .. .. r -: V : |VV 
 
 This last Example offers an illustration of both the follow- 
 ing Rules :
 
 NUMERALS. 106108. 65 
 
 106. (i.) After the Numerals 3, 4, 5,... 10, a Noun is 
 properly put in the Plural; but 
 
 (ii.) After a Number higher than 10 it may be (and com- 
 monly is) in the Singular. 
 
 Thus, after K'K' six, we see (in the last Example) niKD hundreds (Plu.) ; but 
 after the 600 we see P)?X a thousand (Sing.): after the 3 we see D*B;?K thousands 
 (Plu.) ; and after the 5 we see fiiNG hundreds (Plu.). 
 
 The same may be seen in the Examples of the following 107, and in many 
 others. 
 
 N.B. There are, however, several examples of Numbers 
 higher than 10 followed by Nouns in the Plural. 
 
 107. In expressing time, the Numerals are often divided, 
 as in 
 
 P0$ D'E^B^I nj$ niX JCT 930 years [lit., 900 year, 
 and 30 year} Gen. v. 5, 
 
 nj$ nXDI D^$ $&n 105 years [lit., 5 years, and 100 
 
 T T : T " T * 
 
 (< i. c.') year} ib. 6, 
 
 r\)$ niX/5 Pl3b&Jh D^$ 1D$ 807 years [lit.. 7 years, and 
 
 T T V : T ' - V * f 
 
 800 year} ib. 7, 
 
 fW nX! HJB> D^b^l y3# 187 years [lit., 7 awrf 80 
 year, awa 7 100 year] t. 25, 
 
 H^ niX,5p y?^ 1 ! '^^ E^ifc^ &.$$ 782 years [lit., 2 awe? 
 80 year, awe? 700 year] tfc. 26, 
 
 H^ niX?? y^l nj^ D'WI y^n 969 years [lit., 9 awa* 
 60 year, awa 1 900 year] ib. 27. 
 
 108. The above are Nouns. Some of them are used 
 sometimes in the same way as Adjectives in 78, 81. This 
 is very frequently the case with THX and nilX one (m. & f.} ; 
 thus, *!HX Dip one place, Gen. i. 9, nilX H|)^ one lip (or 
 language*) Gen. xi. 6, inXH fcJHj^n the one board, Ex. xxvi. 16, 
 nnXH ny^^n the one curtain, Ex. xxvi. 2, etc. [Cp. 78, 81]. 
 From "tnX [owe] the same, we have the Plural DHH^ the 
 same (as in Gen. xi. 1), also a few (as in Gen. xxix. 20). 
 
 F
 
 66 NUMERALS. J 109 112. 
 
 109. The Ordinals are- 
 Plural. Singular. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 First 
 Second 
 
 Third 
 
 Fourth 
 
 Fifth 
 
 Sixth 
 
 Seventh 
 
 Eighth 
 
 Ninth 
 
 Tenth. 
 
 110. These Ordinals are Nouns- Adjective. The Femi- 
 nines of some of them may be used to express Fractional 
 parts; thus, JV$v$ a third [part], rVSTlinil a fourlh 
 [part], etc. 
 
 111. For a half, however, we have 
 
 tffi (p. J ^p) Masc., and rarely **nfi (<i. c. 5 n^Htt) Fern. 
 
 . One of is expressed either by (1) m., 
 
 followed by the prefix 23 of 5 (or JD /rom, o/ 1 ), Cp. 
 
 * The with Defective Long Kherik, see Ft. I. 12. So in tl^n Sing, m , 
 and rW^i} (TjPT^ft D. xxvi. 12) Sing. /. [The Sing. /. HJB'^ is rare.] 
 
 t Also ^Op/iand tftoq, as in Note (*)]. 
 
 : Also n^pq [and H^pq, as in Note (*)J. 
 
 Or n^VV, or nty^ 1 [whence nn? 5 ^^, Ez. xxi. 19, the-third-time (E.V).]. 
 DN^pB' tWrd [generations] . 
 
 II Also jnn, and J?5'n. D*pn /our/A [g-enera/toTw]. 
 
 H i. c.' the same. There is also niSq half-of, only used with H?)P night, 
 lo express midnight' 
 
 ** More often JVVD'? a half, only used i. c.' and with Pron. Affixes.
 
 NUMERALS. 112 114. NOTE (rt). 67 
 
 Lev. vii. 14, xxv. 48, 2 K. iv. 22 (D^Wn |& Iptf owe o/ *7<e 
 youths}; or by 
 
 (2) nnK m., nriK /., followed by the prefix of 5 (or 
 fp from, of}, as Lev. xiii. 2, Vi3tt 1HX owe of his sons, 
 Cp. Lev. iv. 13; or by 
 
 (3) *Jil^ wi., nrt^s y., in direct Construction with the word 
 following, as in D^ntl "iHt^ one of the mountains [Gen. xxii. 
 2], D^yn mitt owe of the cities [D. xix. 5]. 
 
 [Note. "inX is found as the Absolute form some few times, as Gen. xlviii. 22, 
 2 S. xvii. 22/etc.]. 
 
 113. There is a Noun "fl'tf which stands for: 
 
 (1) ten, as a decad [of days, or nMMitffjj also an instru- 
 ment-of-'TE^-strings ; 
 
 (2) tenth, as Zew/i day [of a month]. 
 
 [Note. For several other words connected with the Numerals, as 
 double, (*B^>L/'t? tripled, *J?-i:n and *JJ21p, etc., foursquare), etc., see Ft. ILj. 
 
 114. The letters of the Alphabet are used to mark 
 Chapters and Verses [and for the * reckonings ' at the end 
 of certain Books] in the ordinary Editions of the Hebrew 
 Bible ; but they are not so used in the Text itself. 
 
 [Note. (a.) As seen in Q 0, (a.) the first ten letters in Alphabetical order 
 from N to " stand for the Numbers from 1 to 10 ; and, (/3.) for those from 11 to 
 19, S to 13 stand to the left of i; thus, JO (i.e., 10 and 1) for 11, 3* for 12, 
 3 for 13, T for 14, but t1t3 (i.e., 9 and 6) for 15. V Cor TO) for 16, V for 17, 
 n* for 18, W for 19. D, the eleventh letter, stands for 20; the next letter ^ 
 for 301; and so D for 40, 3 for 50, D for 60, V for 70, B for 80, X for 90, p for 
 100, ~\ for 200, t? for 300, D for 400 [see the Table of the Alphabet in Pt. I.]. 
 
 * Each of these is a Participle-form, as we shall see. There are some ot'aer 
 rer6-forms, see Pt. II. 
 
 t For, rP are letters of The Name [Pt. I., 79 (2)]. 
 
 For the Intermediate Numbers 21 to 29, the letters fc? to 13 are placed to the 
 left of 3 ; thus, tO 21, 33 22, J3 23,... H3 25,... D3 29. So for the Numbers 
 between 30 and 40, 40 and 50, 50 and 60, 60 and 70, 70 and 80, 80 and 90, 
 90 and 100, the letters N to 13 are placed to the left of t> 30, O 40, 3 50,... 
 V 90. Similarly the Numbers between 100 and 200 are expressed by p with the 
 letters for 1 to 99 [in descending order of magnitude from right to left ; thus 
 TDp 1C7. And so the Numbers between 200 and 300, 300 and 400, etc., etc.
 
 68 NUMERALS. NOTES (J;) TO (f?.). 
 
 (6.) For 500, 600, etc., to 900, either two or more letters (together making up 
 the sums) are used, or the Final Letters "| for 500, D for 600, \ for 700, P| for 
 800, Y f r 900 Then (beginning again) X with some mark (thus, 'K) was used 
 for 1000. 
 
 (c.) Since the 22 letters of the Alphabet, with the 5 final letters, together 
 give Twenty-seven forms of figures, we have three groups of 9 letters each, 
 S to D for units, ' to X for tens, p to Y f r hundreds. [This is mentioned in the 
 Masoreth ha-Masoreth of Elias Levita ; see Dr. Ginsburg's ed., with Translation 
 and Notes, p. 136]. 
 
 (d.) There is a very common mode of expressing Numbers by means of a word 
 or expression, of which the letters (or certain selected letters) make up the Num- 
 ber. For instance, in a certain well known place, the letters of the word |*3n 
 (.<?., n 5 + 3 50 + Y 900) stand for 955 ; those of the word JPI (i.e., 8 + 3) 
 for 11; those of the word TJ* (i.e., 10 + 3 + 10 + 4) for 27, etc. ; and those 
 
 dotted in 6fyf\V "itiS NDD (i.e., 16 + T4 + MO + 350 + n8 + 10 
 + *? 30 + D 40) stand for 158. 
 
 Obs. The Final letters do not always stand for hundreds: thus D in the last 
 example stands for 40, not 600.]
 
 69 
 
 SECTION XI. 
 VERBS. (I.) VOICES. 
 
 115. The Hebrew Verb has Seven Voices. The Outline 
 FORMS of these may easily be remembered by means of Seven 
 well-devised names for them which we will try to explain : 
 
 116. (.) Most Hebrew words are reducible to three 
 ' Root'-letters (as they are called), and 
 
 (/3.) DEF. These three letters, in their proper order, stand 
 for what is called the ' HOOT ' of the word : 
 
 (y.) Thus, (1) of &-&*. [words], the Root is the set of letters 111 , (2) of 
 n37S? [to the queen] the Root is ^D ; etc. 
 
 117. The Verb being contemplated as expressing ACTION, 
 Past, Present, or Future, the Hebrew name for it is 7^3 
 from the Root 7^3 (which expresses acting, working, etc.). 
 These THREE LETTERS 7^3 are used as representatives of 
 Root-letters generally, 5 for < First Root-letter,' $ for 
 1 Second Root-letter,' and 7 for < Third Root-letter.' 
 
 Thus in 'Q'n, T is the B, 3 is the JJ, "I is the V ; so in fD^D, the D is the B, 
 the h is the JJ/the T is the ^.*] 
 
 118. The ' 3 s. m.' of the Past Tense, in all the Seven 
 Voices of the Full f Verb, has no letters besides those 
 which either BELONG TO THE ROOT or are CHARACTERISTIC 
 OF THE VOICE. Hence these '3 s. m.' forms of the Past Tense 
 in the several Voices, when expressed in the general form by 
 the letters 7 J? ), may be said to give the general Outline 
 
 As in Note t to Rule vii., 56 (p. 36, above) M3pD is of the form !"6jJB; 
 (having a O Preformative) is of the form ?^?p. So the two Nouns in 
 74 (e} (2), are of the forms n'pj/ipn, n?^DJ|l ; and the three in 74 (e.) (i) are 
 of the forms ^3, nb^S, ri ./ ) ^? respectively. 
 
 t The term Full ' is here used of a Verb which, in all its forms, has its Three 
 Root-letters each of them in Full Consonantal value, and so HAS ITS WHOLE 
 ROOT FULLY BROUGHT OUT ahvays. [We should prefer the term 'Complete,' if 
 we might use it in this sense']. The term 'Regular Verb' is often used for this.
 
 70 
 
 VERBS. VOICES. 118119. 
 
 forms of the several Voices. For instance, of the Root 
 the Seven forms of the Past Tense 3 s. in, are : 
 
 (D) Reflexive. 
 
 93nn(vii.) 
 
 (C) Causative. 
 
 ten (v.) 
 
 (B) Intensive. 
 
 33 (iii.) 
 
 nj53 (iv.) 
 
 (A.) Simple. 
 
 j23 (i.), ACTIVE 
 
 lti (ii.), PASSIVE 
 
 (a.) 
 
 119. (i.) This will perhaps be more clear if we put 1, 2, 
 and 3, for the First, Second, and Third Root-letters ; thus, 
 
 2inn (vii.) 
 
 1H (v.) 
 
 321 
 
 ,321 i. 
 
 32]p| (vi.) '321 (iv.) /321J (H.) ) 
 
 (ii.) Or, with 3, $?, and 7, instead of 1, 2, and 3, 
 
 (70 
 
 or, in descending order, 
 
 ( Pau-al 
 / Niph-al 
 ( Pi-el 
 Pii-oil 
 ( Hiph-il 
 
 Hithpa-el 
 
 (i.) 
 
 he visited 
 
 he was visited 
 
 he diligently visited 
 
 he ivas ... visited 
 
 he 
 
 (v.) 
 
 ^T (vi.) 
 &nn (vii.) "1|52nrT ho visited himself 
 
 [Obs. Here diligently ' is used for expressing the Intensity of signification 
 of the Pl-il Voice. Other means of expressing this may be required for other 
 Roots. Other forms of rendering may be required also for other Voices. Some 
 Roots require different English Verbs for their different Voices ; thus (from 
 TW) 1P^> he learned, TE^ he taught, (ft. JDl?) J?3!n he sware, JP3^n he 
 atljured. Further remarks on the meaning of the Voices are reserved at present.]
 
 VERBS. VOICES. 120. (i.) TO (vii.). 71 
 
 120. (i.) The First Voice is not generally called Pau-dl but 
 Kal (*7p light, i.e. not burdened}, because this Voice has no 
 prefix belonging to it, and no Doubling Dagesh [Pt. I. 49]; 
 for, 
 
 N.B. The dot in the First Root-letter 3 is merely Dagesh Lene [Pt. I. 47], 
 and cannot stand when the Verb does not begin with one of the 
 D 3 3 I 3 3, as, for instance, in "Sj^'O he drew, fl?^ he sent. 
 
 But, excepting the First one, the words to the left of the 
 column of Numerals in ($) give the Names by which the 
 Voices are known; thus, 
 
 (ii.) The Second Voice is called Niph-til (7^1)3), because 
 } is prefixed, the First Root-letter has , the Second has ; 
 
 (iii.) The Third Voice is called Pi-el (7^3), because the 
 First Root-letter has and the Second one ; 
 
 [N.B. A Dagesh Forte belongs to this Voice and the next one, in the 
 Second Root-letter.] 
 
 (iv.) The Fourth Voice is called PH-al ( /&&), because the 
 First Root-letter has and the Second one ; 
 
 (v.) The Fifth Voice is called Hiph-il (7^551), because H 
 is prefixed, the First Root-letter has and the Second one 
 has *; 
 
 (vi.) The Sixth Voice is called Hdph-dl (7^!!), because 
 n with -- (o) is prefixed, the first Root-letter having and 
 the Second one ; 
 
 (vii.) The Seventh Voice is called Hithpd-el (l^ri), be- 
 cause HI! is prefixed, the First Root-letter having and the 
 Second one . 
 
 [N.B. A Dagesh Forte belongs to this Voice, in the Second Root -letter.] 
 121. There are a few other names and forms, which belong to modifications
 
 72 VERBS. (L) VOICES. (II.) TENSES. 121 
 
 of some of the above rather than to special Voices. It is best to reserve the 
 mention of these at present, with the exception of one, viz.: 
 
 Some Verbs take (2) instead of () in the Sixth Voice, giving thus the 
 form !?ysn Huph-al, instead of TJJBn HOph-al. But, as there is no need of a 
 special "name for so slight a variation, it is usual to include both sets of forms 
 under the one name HOph-al. 
 
 122. For practice, the Student may name the several 
 Voices of the following : 
 
 ( 10 > ' iao (9) Ta.Dn (8) / "1303 (?) i rbti 
 
 The Student may now compare the several PERSONS OF THE 
 TENSE-FOKMS in the different Voices, as follows : 
 
 (II.) TENSES. 
 
 123. The Hebrew Verb has forms for expressing PAST, 
 PRESENT, and FUTURE Action ; but only two TENSES or 
 TIME-FORMS viz., PAST and FUTURE. 
 
 124. PRESENT Action is expressed in Hebrew by means 
 of a Participle, as in the English expressions / [am] writing, 
 thou \art\ writing, he [is] writing; but, the 'am? 'art, 'is,' 
 etc., not being expressed in Hebrew, those three English 
 expressions without the words within [ ] give the form of the 
 corresponding Hebrew expressions for Present Action, thus, 
 < I writing? 'thou writing,' 'he writing* [see 140].
 
 VERBS. (II.) TENSES. 125127. 
 
 73 
 
 125. The distinguishing Person-forms of the Past Tense 
 are the same for all Voices*; so that when once these are 
 known well for one Voice, they are known for all the others. 
 
 The same is true of the Future. 
 
 (i.) PAST TENSE. 
 
 126. The PAST TENSE Kal ( 120, i.) of TJ53 he visited, is 
 
 Singular. 
 
 he 
 
 
 JTTJ53 
 
 Plural. 
 
 she 
 
 \ visited. 
 
 we 
 
 m. 
 
 they 
 
 [Obs. In Past Tenses, the 3 pi. and 1 s. & pi. are common to both Genders.] 
 
 127. From this it is seen that in place of the 1 , in "Ip 
 
 * I" ' /l-T 
 
 he visited, we have for the other Persons, 
 in the SINGULAR, the endings 
 
 m- 
 
 and in the PLURAL, the endings 
 
 == 
 
 128. If we put these several endings in place of the *T 
 
 * Except the 3 s. /. and the 3 pi. m. &/. in the Hiph-il (see 130). 
 
 t For the forms ^3 and /fys, see below 138. 
 
 I N.B. In the 2 Plu. m. & /. of the Past Kal the First Root-letter is seen to 
 have . Its Vowel is dropped in accordance with 59. This is so only in the 
 KAL; in other Voices, something in 55 interferes. But, in all Voices, the 
 Second Persons Plu. (Past) m. & /. have the Accent on the syllable DPI m. t and
 
 74 VOICES. (II.) TENSES. 127131. 
 
 in "Tj2|5? he was visited, we get the several Persons of the 
 PAST of the ii. Voice Niph-dl [see Tab. XIV.]. 
 
 129. So, by putting those endings in place of the *! in 
 1(93 he visited diligently, and of the "1 in 1i53 he loas dili- 
 
 y," ' 99* i- Ji- \ 
 
 gently visited, the *T in ^l^v' he was caused to be visited, 
 and the "I in TjpjSJin he visited himself, we get the several 
 Persons of the Past Tenses of the iii. Voice Pl-el, the iv. 
 Pii-dl, the vi. H6ph-al, and the vii. Hithpa-el, respectively 
 [see Tab. XIV.]. 
 
 130. The same is seen to hold for the v. Voice, Hiph-tt, 
 excepting only the 3 s. /. Pn^SPl and the 3 plu. m. &/. 
 }Tj!n. In these two forms the * of this Voice appears 
 with the Second Root-letter in place of the in all the other 
 Voices. 
 
 131. For practice, the Student may parse* the following : 
 
 * In this manner: irn!??^'!' is 2 pi./. Post HithpS-el [or (as some prefer) 
 thus, HitkpX-el, Past, Plu.', 2 /.], of the Root npD.
 
 t & ** ^ *3 "^I nM II <3 
 
 cJ^j^3jic33l3^~}lw 
 
 UF 'I3T 'I3T '|i| 'I3T 'I3T Illy 'U? '& ^ a 
 ..^J ..^J ..^J ..*J ..^f ..^f 5 "^f "^J I* ^ 
 
 U II II II II U II II II I 
 
 3 t< 
 
 z ^ 8 
 
 ...S ^-t ..J _-J 
 
 -II H H^f li^f 
 
 O HlJ .11 H 
 
 
 
 TvJ 
 Cr 
 II 
 
 5 :3 ::3 3 
 
 tr -I5r 
 If II 
 
 :3 -.3 
 
 3 
 
 cr 
 =!if 
 _f 
 
 Tvif 
 
 .-ter 
 
 
 
 ^ .^r ..^y H^r ii | 
 
 __i ^j ^_i l ^-1 _J | 
 
 v-f 
 I3T 
 
 -III 
 
 p 
 -I3T 
 
 3 
 . i 
 
 'I3T -UJ 
 
 ? ^ 
 D 
 
 :3 
 
 1ST 
 
 re/ 
 
 I3T 
 
 .3 j 
 
 TT^J 1 \J' 
 
 i|2T -UF 
 
 
 r
 
 II 
 
 , !3 j 13 -5 J J _J _J . 
 
 -^=i TvJ "\J : \J =1 : ^ ~ : ^ =vJ =1 
 
 ; j^ :.? $ .:^ :>? .:^ ..^ :gf 
 
 -^ "^ . 
 
 .^ ^ _j - 
 
 H 
 
 'U s 'U '!* 'li 'li* -^f si 
 
 ..*= 'UI .."-f ,.T ..-f ..-f 'U? ? 
 
 B :3 :H i i ^ :3 I 
 
 ii 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 '!j 
 
 j. .d ^ 
 
 ^f 
 
 ..to ? -pr 
 31 H^ 
 
 N^ -=! 
 
 *3 n3 
 
 *3 ^ 
 
 j? ^ ^ ^ ^ -i 
 
 vJ .'in- \y -\y ~\y -\J 
 
 \y ^A ,\m .-* ,+f "ty 
 
 I - ^ * ' -i* .1^ 
 
 I 3 
 1 S 
 
 ._i 
 
 rci 
 
 
 :g :g 
 
 ;_! -^ _| ^_I __l ^1 . 
 
 vif _=l "7\-J \J' i\if i\J * 
 
 IJT -Vif ...^ ...^ ..-Ity ,-lry ,\J 
 
 ,.tf y UF ,^ .."Tf ,.^f . Tf x|5T 
 
 '^ ..*i -'.^ -J "-ii J ;.r} 
 
 -1 
 vJ 
 
 HCJ 
 
 -J J 
 
 T^f rp 
 
 "isr "Isr 
 
 I 
 
 
 N 
 
 ie 
 
 t -! 
 
 -. * - t-f T77- 
 
 -B 
 
 iii 
 
 j ^j 
 
 ~vJ* ^xJ 
 
 . ; g ^ 
 
 I* 
 
 I 
 
 r 
 
 ~U S. 3 
 
 5' 
 
 It* 
 
 
 _J .._ - t 
 
 \J "n3J J 
 
 -I .^J -=t -I 
 
 ^5f TCI Tvl 
 
 <I9 <I9 -vJ iir >isr >|*r i|v :vJ 
 ..tf ,.^ iisr ,^ ,.^f -rt ..t* i|r 
 
 ^ * f, ** ^ '" ~J ~M ^^ 
 
 S' 
 
 Q i-i * 
 
 S' ^ t- 
 
 a to 
 
 B 5 ? f 
 
 ! ? ^ 
 
 ^
 
 VERBS FUTURE TENSE. 132,133. 
 
 75 
 
 (ii.) FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 132. The FUTURE TENSE of the First Voice Kal has two 
 forms the one with j_ or i as ib^i 1 or *lipS* he will visit (etc.) 
 
 fr. TpS, the other with as W& he will clothe (etc.) fr. $&. 
 
 N.B. (a.) Verbs that have the (-L)-form may be called 
 ' Verbs Fut. (-1),' and 
 
 (/3.) Verbs that have the ( )-form may be called 
 Verbs Fut. (-).' 
 
 [The ( )-form of Fut. K.~] 
 he will clothe 
 
 she will 
 thou (ro.) wilt ... 
 thou (f.) wilt ... 
 I will 
 
 they (m.) will ... 
 they (f.) will ... 
 ye (m.) will ... 
 ye (f.) will ... 
 tec Witt 
 
 [The (J_)-fonn of Fut. K.J 
 he will visit 
 
 she will 
 thou (m.) wilt ... 
 tlwu (f.) wilt ... 
 I will 
 
 v ; Y 
 
 1P9J they (m.)will ... 
 tey (/.) will ... 
 Vlp9J|l ye (m.) will 
 
 ye (f.) will ... 
 we will 
 
 [Obs. In Fut. Tenses, only the FIRST PERSONS (Sing, and 
 Plu.) have forms COMMON TO BOTH GENDERS.] 
 
 133. Here, (a.) the only added terminations are 
 'for the 2 s./, 
 !) for the 3 & 2 pi. m., 
 fij for the 3 & 2 pi./; 
 
 but, (/3.) there are Four prefixed letters JJV& viz, 
 * for the 3 m., a. & pi., 
 K for the 1 s., and J for the 1 pi., 
 n for all the other forms. 
 
 Or lij^ and so nii?5n etc., with 1 instead of . 
 t See 134 (e, 1). J See 134 (e, 2).
 
 76 VERBS. (II.) TENSES. 134135. 
 
 134. As may be seen by one glance at the Futures in 
 Tab. XIV., 
 
 () What has just been stated ( 133) holds for all the 
 
 Voices; but 
 
 (fr) the prefix-letters JJVK have the following Vowel- 
 points in the several Voices 
 (1.) in Kal, Niph-al, Hithpa-el each one of the three 
 
 JJV has , K has , 
 N.B. (2) in Pi-el, and Pii-dl, the ] H ' have , X has , 
 
 (3) in Hiph-il all the four | fl * K have , and 
 
 (4) in Hoph-al, all the four j J"l * tf have (6), [or 
 (#) sometimes] ; 
 
 (7.) in Niph-al, the 3 (Characteristic of the Voice) is 
 dropped, and instead of it Dagesh Forte is put in the 
 First Koot-letter, as in *!j53* [for TJ53J*] Cp. Pt. I. 
 53. So too in "IpSH Infin., & Imper. 2 s. m., etc. 
 
 (8.) in Hiph-il*, there is (instead of '-) in 3 & 2 pi. /. 
 Also 
 
 N.B. there is often instead of * in other Per- 
 sons, as in 151! Ps. xlvii. 4 [instead of *V2n*L 
 S^nObad. 12 [instead ofT^JFQ, etc.; 
 (e.) in all the Voices the forms are the same for 
 (i.) the 3 s. /. & 2 s. m. (marked f in 132), 
 (ii.) the 3 &2pl. /. (marked J in 132). 
 
 135. For practice, the Student may parse the following 
 (with the help of Tab. XIV.) : 
 
 * N.B. The n of Hiph. is generally dropped in Future and Partic. forms, 
 as in Tj?^ & Yj?? (instead of 1^r\\ & T l i??DP), etc. So also the n of 
 Hithpa-el. For instances of the n of .HTpJi. STANDIKO see 201. Barely the 
 n of Hoph. appears, as in rrty$?nr? Hoph. Partic. pi. /. fr. y Vp.
 
 VERBS. INFIN. 133137 (1) (a d.). 77 
 
 III, ARRANGEMENT OF THE TABLE OF THE FULL VERB. 
 
 136. In Table XIV. the Seven Voices stand in seven 
 columns beginning "with (i.) KAL on the right, so that all 
 the corresponding forms in the several Voices may be read 
 from Right to Left in horizontal lines. The order in the 
 columns is as follows : 
 
 (1) Infinitive, (2) Past Tense, (3) Participle, (4) Impera- 
 tive, (5) Future. 
 
 137. The Infinitive forms are (1) 'Absolute,' (2) 'Con- 
 struct,' (3) 'With the Prefixes ^33,' (4) 'With Pronoun- 
 Affixes.' 
 
 (1). (a.) The <!NF. ABS.' forms* of *TpJD have the following 
 values in the Seven Voices: (i.) KAL, \to\visit; (ii.) NIPH-AL, 
 [to] be visited; (iii.) PI-L, [to] visit (Intens.); (iv.) PU-AL, 
 [to] be visited (Intens.); (v.) HIPH-!L, [to] cause to visit; 
 (vi.) HOPH-AL, [to] be caused to visit ; (vii.) HITHPA-EL, [to] 
 visit oneself. 
 
 (b.) Besides the 7^3 form of the Inf. Abs. Kal, there is 
 also the 7^3 form, as 7"J3 to be great. 
 
 (c.) The Inf. Abs. Niph. is sometimes of the form 
 (with Past Tenses Niph.), as in SlSt^ V&KO 1 S. xx. 6. 
 Tab. XIV., Note d. 
 
 (d.) The Inf. Abs. Hiph. has sometimes * , as in Tttfcyn 
 Am. ix. 8. 
 
 [Obs. The INF. ABS. is often used for expressing abstractly the 'Action' of 
 the Verb. Thus 
 
 * For the Hebrew words, see Table XIV. 
 
 I
 
 78 VERBS. INFIN. 137 (1) [Obs. 
 
 (a.) Hos. iv. 2, < [There is] r>X cursing, Wni] and lying, Pl'V)] (Pt. I., 60) 
 and murdering, 3331 and stealing, Sj'KH and adultery." So Job xv. 35, ^DW iTiri 
 conceiving- trouble, |1K *lV) and bearing mischief." And where an Inf. may be 
 required in English, as, Is. vii. 15, "D1KO to refuse the evil, "lini-1 and fo choose 
 the good." Also, 
 
 , 
 
 (/3.) before* a 'kindred' Tense, for Emphasis, as in "ippOFl ?D, 1 S. xxiv. 21, 
 thou shalt surely reign ('lit., to reign thou shall reign) ; ''flEHpn BHprt, Ju. xvii. 3, 
 / had wholly dedicated (E.V.), etc. ; and 
 
 (y.) Without the kindred ' Tense, for brevity, a short Emphatic expression 
 where the context conveys and supplies the Tense-value ; thus, "lh3, 1 S. ii. 28 
 [in "ini-l and did I choose? E.V.] after an Emphatic expression in ver. 27. So, 
 Nu. xv. 35, The man shall SURELY be put to death ; D3T stone him with stones 
 [shall] all the assembly." And, without any preceding Emphatic form, as, 
 Gen. xli. 43, < And he made him ride in the chariot of the viceroy [HJK'ISn, lit., 
 the second] which he had; and they cried before him, Bow the knee (E.V.): 
 pfl31 and he fully set him over all the land of Egypt." And so, Deut. xiv. 21, 
 Ye shall not eat any carcase; to the sojourner who is in thy gates shouldst 
 thou give it, he would indeed eat it (i.e., although, if thou shouldst give it to him, 
 he would not mind eating it), or [which] "DO thou couldst sell even to the 
 foreigner (i.e., which he would not mind even buying from thee: but thou shalt 
 not eat it ), for a holy people art thou, etc." t 
 
 (fl.) Sometimes there are two Infinitives, ^i/'H to go, and another, in certain 
 phrases for going on continually, either (i.) with a 'kindred' Tense and Inf., as in 
 Gen. xii. 9, And he journeyed TO GO and to journey (i.e., he went on continually 
 journeying);" Gen. viii. 3, < And the waters returned TO GO and to return (i.e., 
 went on continually returning)"; also, Gen. xxvi. 13, "And he went TO GO and 
 to be great ; or, (ii.) without any kindred Tense, as in Gen. viii. 5, And the 
 waters were TO GO and to decrease (i.e., went on continually decreasing)." The 
 Student cannot parse the Tenses in these four examples, at present.] 
 
 * (i.) And sometimes after the Tense, as in BISB' DBS?'.} Gen. xix. 9, etc. 
 Also, 
 
 (u.) after a 'kindred' Imperative, as in yiE> -iyi?B> (Pt. I., 60), Is. vi. 
 9, and after a 'kindred' Participle, as in "VlK DnO'X, Jer. xxiii. 17. 
 
 N.B. (1) The term 'kindred' is used here for 'from the same Root'; (2) the 
 Voice is sometimes not the same, as in ^\)Q\ "Plpp, Ex. xxi. 28, |Vltpj?l "IB, 
 1 S. ii. 16. (Pt. I., 12. The ] is added, 146.) 
 
 t These are usually said to be instances of The Inf. for a Finite part of the 
 Verb ' (i.e., for a part limited to Time, or Person, or both). The Student should 
 not confuse this usage with what may, at first sight, seem like it in English ; as 
 in Jer. xxxii. 44, "They shall buy fields for money, and write (11031.) in the 
 book, and seal (Dinni.), etc. ; " where the English "write" and "seal" correspond 
 with the buy," all of them being governed by the auxiliary shall." There is 
 no such correspondence in the Hebrew.
 
 VERBS. 1NFJN. 137 (2) (3, C.). 79 
 
 (2). The < CONSTRUCT ' form of the INF. [*Tlp3 or 
 (of *1pS) in Kal, etc.] is used when it is in close structural 
 connection with what follows (cp. 52); thus, [Gen. v. 1] 
 " In the day of [D*IT?X 5O3] God's creating (lit., creating-of 
 God}" so t25fc? [the'] judging-of [the judges], Ruth i. 1, etc. 
 
 (3). (a.) The INF. WITH THE PREFIXES 3733 has the 
 Construct ' form ; thus, with the /, 
 
 ( ' 'p5? ) to visit, or for visiting, or for [the] visit- 
 (0 EAT, 
 
 MtMJL 
 
 (ii.) NIPH-AL ipiprpt fo ie visited, or /or Jem^r visited, 
 
 or /or [tfAe] 5^w<7 visited of; 
 (iii.) PI-EL, ^jr?^r (Intens.) fo cesiY, or for visiting, 
 
 or /or [the~\ visiting of; 
 (iv.) PU-AL, *^JP?? (Intens.) to oe visited, or, 1 /or 
 
 0ezVz<7 visited, or, /or [<Ae] iez'w^ 
 
 visited of; 
 (v.) HIPH-IL, ^pSDrt #o cawse to visit, or, /or causing 
 
 to v.. or, ybr [^Ae] causing to visit of; 
 
 [I'^f D. xxvi. 12]; 
 
 (vi.) HOPH-AL, *lp$v'/ ^ ^ e caused to visit, or, /br ie^ 
 
 caused to visit, or, for [the] being 
 caused to visit of; 
 
 (vii.) HITHPA-L, "1J53JT17 TO VISIT ONESELF, or, for visiting 
 
 oneself, or, for [the']..., etc.J 
 
 (b.) So with the 3, and the 3, we have for the Kal, 
 "Tlpin (or "Ip^5) i n visiting, (T ) "TipS3 as, or like, visit- 
 ing, (or, visiting of, in each case). 
 
 (c.) But the fi has either followed by Dagesh [as in 
 
 * -, as in 33^ 2 K. xiv. 22, is rare. So 33^ [p. J 33^]. 
 
 f The PI is sometimes dropped and its vowel given to the Prefix 3, or 3, or 7 ; 
 thus, *lt3y3 (for 51tDyn3, Niph., cp. p. 6, Note J ; the instead of because the 
 ]} cannot have Dagesh), Lam. ii. 11; ?Bp?1 (for ?S?n>l, Hiph., Nu. v. 22), 
 nOtp^ (for n^p^n^, Hiph., Is. xxiii. 11), Vbtjh (for ^b^n?, Hiph., Ps. xxvi. 7). 
 For'the , see Pt.'l., 12 ; and for the y, see Pt. I., '60.' 
 
 J Other renderings of these are sometimes required, as we shall see.
 
 80 VERBS. INFIN. 137 (4) (i. iv.) 
 
 32p, Ps. cxviii. 8, than to trust (lit., from trusting}, 
 Ex. xxxiv. S3, from speaking], or for compensation (Cp. 5). 
 
 (d.) (i.) For other Voices, see Appendix (A) to Tab. XIV. 
 (ii.) For the Inf. with endings PI , fi , see (4, iii.). 
 
 (4). (i.) In the forms of the Inf. with Pronoun Affixes,' 
 mentioned in Tab. XIV., and more fully given in Tab. XV., 
 the Pronouns involved are the POSSESSIVE * my, thy, his, etc. 
 
 (ii.) These Infinitive forms may have the prefixes 733; 
 thus, ij?2p3 in (or on) his reigning, ^S^S in (or on} thy (m.) 
 lying down, *Pl7?3 in (or on) my sending, D3"l?y3 in (or on) 
 your (m.) passing over, O"OT3 in (or on} our remembering, 
 TJSy?$3 in (or on) thy (m.} hearing, etc.; Dyfife?3 at their (m.} 
 hearing, ^(^7 to (or with reference to) his reigning, iTE^p} 
 and from His keeping, etc. 
 
 So in other Voices: thus, itDip&J'TlS (Niph.} on his being 
 judged, iS^33 (for WJPI3, Niph., comp. p. 6, Note $); 
 rn^n3, Dp")3 t l3f (Pi-<>l) on her speaking, on your (m.).../ 
 iTSfiPia (Hiph.} on His..., Djyipn? on your (m.)..., etc. 
 
 (iii.) The Infinitive has sometimes the accented termination 
 PI, like a Feminine Noun, as in PlTlp? to draw near, 
 
 tr n' T :|T: , 
 
 (iv., below) to have compassion, POHX/ to love, 
 
 to fear. This H is replaced by H in ' direct Con- 
 struction,' as in D^JlNt " n5L)^??+ because the LORD loved you 
 (E.V.) D. vii. 8, [lit., from loving of, etc.]; and by T\ when 
 the word has a Pron. Affix, as in Dn3*)p!3 in (or) on their (m.) 
 approaching, Ex. xl. 32, Lev. xvi. 1. So iH& irQ!"]N3 through 
 his loving him, 1 S. xviii. 3; and so iniO* 2 S. iii. 11. 
 
 [(iv.) The to the first Root-letter is 6 in Tab. XV (i.). 
 There is also , as in the Pause-form ^nVP?> an d in 
 
 * The Affixes for Objective Pronouns, me, thee, him, etc., will be mentioned 
 hereafter. 
 
 t The of (3) is a Slight '-vowel ; see Note * *, p. 89. 
 
 J Here the is because of the i"l, and the under N is because of the .
 
 VERBS. PAST TENSE, 138 (A). 81 
 
 Lev. xxiii. 22. There is also , as in n}??* on 
 her lying down, *nnS3 on my opening, Difp3 their (m.~) cleaving; 
 and -, as in HD, T\, Ez. xxv. 6," D&rtBty, xxiii. 39.] 
 
 N.B. The forms in (ii.), U-)> V here > are those of Tab< xv> with 
 rather than those of (3), p. 79, with Pron. Affixes. The reason for this remark 
 will be seen hereafter. Suffice it here to state, merely, that the under the 
 first Root-letter after the ?, as in 3 (a, i.), is generally Quiescent. 
 
 138 (A), (i.) The Past Tense Kal, in the first column of 
 Tab. XIV., is of the 7^2 form. There are two other forms 
 of it, viz., the StfS and the 7#3. 
 
 (ii.) The full Past Tense of the 7J73 form need not be given ; all the Person- 
 forms are THE SAME as those in the first column (i.e., those of the ?JJ3 form), 
 except only that the 2 d Root-letter has in 3 s. m., and in the Pause-forms of 
 3 s. /. and 3 pi. ; thus fJ T t he was old, and J HZnj?, 5 l~Of , + the Pause-forms of 
 ri2"!i? *h e drew near, -111!! they were mighty. 
 
 (iii.) The ^3 form of the Past Tense is printed in smaller type in the second 
 column of the Kal Voice. As may be seen there, the j_ of the Second Root-letter 
 is retained in the 2 s. m. & /., and the 1 s. & pi. (in place of in the ?VQ 
 forms) ; but this l_ is shortened into (3) in 2 pi. m. & /., in accordance with 
 Pt. I. 55 (9, &.) The _l appears also in the Pause-forms of 3 s. /. and 3 pi. 
 See Tab. XIV., Note t /3. The ordinary 3 s. /. and 3 pi. are the same as in the 
 first column. 
 
 (iv.) The terms Verba Med. A,' <Med. E,' <Med. 0,' (used by some for Verbs 
 of the three Classes in i., ii., iii.), are rather awkward ; and Verbs Middle A,' 
 * Middle E,' Middle 0,' (given by others), are not better. Taking ]} as general 
 representative of the 'Second Root-letter' ( 117), we may say 
 
 ( i ) Verbs JJ' for the Verbs in (i.), of which the 2 d Root-letter has 
 
 here ; 
 
 (2) 'Verbs JJ' for those in (ii.), of which the 2 d Root-letter has ; 
 (9) "Verbs V' for those in (iii.), of which the 2 d Root-letter has _._. 
 (v.) Rarely the 2 d Root-letter has , as in ESK' he judged, 1 Sam. vii. 17. ,. 
 
 * As well as (0) in 113^*5. It may be observed that, in the above Examples, 
 the Short vowel of the first Root-letter is generally a 'Slight '-vowel, wherever the 
 following it can be Moving. But where this (being followed by another -7) 
 must be Quiescent, the Slight '-vowel is made to become a real Short-vowel. 
 
 t The ?J?3 form being the same for the Kal 3 s. m. Past, and the s. m. 
 Participle, the context alone decides which of these a word is. Some Verbs 
 have the 7j?3 form as well as the 7V3. [In a few instances the Inf. Abs. K. has 
 this form, as ^Tl| Gen. xxvi. 13, 3"1|? 2 S. xviii. 25]. 
 
 J The 3 s. m. Past, of each of these Verbs, is of 7^3 form; viz., IHp he drew 
 near, "Q| he was mighty.
 
 82 VERBS PAST TENSE, 138 (B). PARTIC. 139 ( a .). 
 
 138 (B.) (i.) At the end of the 2 s. m. Past, there is some- 
 times an additional H, as in PIJJO^C' 2 S. xiv. 13, nFl^P^J 
 Gen. xxxi. 30, HmgN Ps. Ixxx.'W, H^HP^D Ps. xxxi.' 8 
 (for the #H see 178 (ii.)), etc. 
 
 (ii.) (a.) Rarely at the end of the 3 s. m., as in ("HOB* Am. i. 11 (about 
 which, however, opinions differ) ; and 
 
 (/3.) at the end of the 3 s. /. (the H of which is then replaced by J"l), as 
 in nnK^5>3 (from i1K^p3) 2 S. i. 26, nnSl^n (from flN^n, for 
 the n see' 178), Josh. 'vi. 17. 
 
 (y.) The 3 s. /. has sometimes D in place of the usual !"!, as in 
 D. xxxii. 36 (for 
 
 (iii.) Also we find nttirn, Am. iv. 3 (for JFin^n). 
 
 (iv.) (a.) Rarely the 3 pi. Past has K at the end; thus, S-13^n Josh. x. 24 
 
 [with H who prefixed there, 98 and 6 (d., ii.)]; and 
 (/3.) sometimes J, as in J-11TP, D. viii. 3, 16 (for -IVT). 
 
 (v.) (a.) In such a word as "1QK, 1 S. xiii. 19, the ~ is for Shurik [Pt. I., 
 14], the full Shurik cannot be given because there is no 1, the 
 Kthiv being "IDS, so that the ~ is the only means of marking the u 
 of the Kri which is n??S [Pt. I., 76]. So in HD^, Ps. Ixxiii. 2, 
 the ~ marks the Shurik of the Kri, which is lb$K', the Kthiv 
 being mat?. So D. xxi. 7, rDDB> Kthiv, 13SBJ Kri. " 
 
 (j3.) So in such a word as flVl*, Ps. cxl. 13, the -7- [Pt. I., 12] is the 
 only means of marking the f of the Kri 'riJHJ upon the Kthiv Djn\ 
 
 (y.) * is superfluous ' in *n"QT 2 s. /. [Jer. iii. 5], etc. In Jer. xxxi. 
 21 (or 20) ^roVn is Kthiv for J;P^n Kri, etc. \n Ruth iv. 5 >JVJp 
 is Kthiv for JVJ.j? /frr (2 s. m. Pas^k', Tab. XXIII.). 
 
 139. (.) Of the PARTICIPLES the Sing. m. forms only are 
 given in Tab. XIV. The Sing. /. and the Plu. m. & /. are 
 seen in the following list of the Participles signifying : 
 
 'Owe' (or 'more') (i.) (1) visiting, (2) visited; 
 (ii.) being visited; 
 (iii.) visiting (Intens.); 
 (iv.) visited (Intens.) ; 
 (v.) causing to visit; 
 (vi.) caused to visit; 
 
 (vii.) visiting himself, or herself, or them- 
 selves.
 
 VERBS. PARTICIPLES. 139 (#.) (7, iv.). 83 
 
 (). PARTICIPLES [TAB. XIV., APP. B.] 
 
 Plu. /. 
 
 rvnpis* 
 nnipa 
 
 nnpap 
 
 nnp t ap 
 niTpap 
 
 rvnpano 
 
 Plu. m. 
 
 i.e.) DHp'13* 
 
 i.e.) Dn-ipa 
 
 i.c.) 
 i.c.) 
 
 Sing. /. 
 
 (trnpjB* or) rnpi3* 
 (rnjipB i.e.) rn-ipa 
 
 (Hpap i.e.) 
 OTpap i.e.) D'Tp^p 
 
 i.c.) 
 
 i.c.) 
 
 1J5B3 or) rnp T B3 
 (rn.i?Bp or) rnpap 
 
 1|9ap or) 
 
 1J5.BP or) HTp?P 
 
 nnp^ap or) 
 (nnpanp or) mpsnp 
 
 Sing. m. 
 
 l-I^B (2) 
 
 (i.) Kal. 
 
 np. B_P (iii.) Pi-el 
 (iv.) PH-Sl. 
 (v.) 
 (vi.) 
 
 npanp (vii.) mthps. 
 
 [N.B. In the above, (1) the of any Sing. m. form is seen to be dropped 
 (and replaced by ) in one form of the Sing. /., and in the Plural forms ; 
 (2) forms ending in "I , or T~, are UNCHANGED i. c-,' 53 ; (3) those ending 
 in "1 have "J i. c.' ; (4) those ending in H have J"l (and those in HI 
 have JTVr) i- c.' ; without further change.] 
 
 (7.) There are two Participles in Kal, viz., (1) *I|53 which 
 is of the form 7lfiB, and (2) "flp3 which is of the form 7^3. || 
 The First expresses Action in progress, and refers to an 
 Agent (/ri3), and is therefore sometimes called the ACTIVE 
 Participle Kal. The Second expresses Action wrought (7iy3) 
 and refers to an Object acted on, and is therefore sometimes 
 called the PASSIVE If Participle Kal. 
 
 Obs (i.) For the 1 of (2) there is often [Pt. I., 14], as in T^ m., 
 
 ., rm? /. (i.e.), &srw pi. m., etc. 
 
 (ii.) The Construct form of 
 
 as in 
 
 Nu. xxiv. 3. 
 
 (iii.) Participles of the Passive Voices (II., IV., VI.) generally retain the of 
 the 2 d Root-letter (except when i.e.,' and in the form), as in (/3.). 
 
 (iv.) The Hiph. Partic. sometimes drops the ' See Sect. XIII. 
 
 * Or with _u for 1. This need not be noticed hereafter, 
 t In Pause, sometimes the same (thus, ' njjp.&, ^ A ?3); and sometimes ! f\ 
 as in J DIIK'V, ' TlTDiy. 
 
 I Also,' some few' times without the D; thus, ^3, Ex. iii. 2, HJ57; 2 K. ii. 10. 
 Also D instead of 10 (<5). 
 
 II These S are often called (1) Po-el, and (2) Pa-ul, from (1) ^13, (2) >1J?3. 
 
 1f The term * PERFECT Participle' is perhaps not unsuitable to it as expressing 
 FINISHED Action. The Niph-3l Particip. is, rather, a PRESENT Passive Participle. ;
 
 84 VERBS. PARTICIPLES, 139 140. 
 
 (S.) (i.) The Participle Vs* able (Sing, m.) given in Tab. XIV., is the Participle 
 Kal of &B form/ [Jljb* Sing. /., D^b Plu. m., fiTOJ Plu. /.], 
 whence 
 
 (ii.) ( i. c.') ?y9 s. m., [n?y3 s. /., vyS pi. m., ni?y5l pi. /.]. 
 i i- : i ; 
 
 (iii.) There is also the Participle Kal of ?y.B form, as 133 
 (Sing, m.), [nJ$B Sing./, D$J|B PI. m., nfyjB PI./.], whence 
 
 (iv.) (i.c.') jbya s. ., [r6y.f s./., *^y.B pi. ., r69 pi./]. 
 
 (e.) The Singular Participle sometimes receives an added ' *, as in 
 binding (Sing, m.) [from ION], Gen. xlix. 11; so in v^BB'Bn [from 7^L- -__. 
 Ps. cxiii. 6; FI?n'K [from h^n'K] Hos. x. 11, and *pX>p [from n^P, Constr. 
 form of H!s6p (^iii.)] Is. i. 21;' ^3| [from ni3| (for nb-13| Pt. !.' 14) Constr. 
 form of rn-UJ] Gen. xxxi. 39. 
 
 f"140. (.) The Present Tense, I am visiting, Thou art 
 visiting, He is visiting, etc., is expressed by the Pronouns 
 /, Thou, He, etc., with the Participle ; thus, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 rnp'13 f S'H She [is] 
 
 or ) JjlS Thou/, [art] 
 
 S or ^S I /. [am] 
 
 T -: ' L J 
 
 He [is] 
 
 tjTiat < nriX Thou m. [art] 
 
 \ *D3S or *3N I m. [am] 
 
 Plural. 
 
 rinpb 
 
 They 
 
 Ye 
 
 We 
 
 /. 
 
 [are] 
 
 DH or nH They 
 Ye 
 
 We 
 
 m. 
 
 [are] 
 
 [N.B. ^Third-Person Pronouns are often not expressed. Cp. (5.) below.] 
 
 (j3.) Similarly for other Participles. 
 
 (y.) The Hebrew expressions in (a) are, of course, the same whatever be the 
 form of the so-called Substantive Verb ' or ' logical Copula ' to be supplied 
 such as, was, may be, might be, etc. Hence the above may not be called the 
 PRESENT TENSE in Hebrew. It is a means of expressing Present Action, and 
 may stand for the [strictly] Present Tense in English; but it may stand for 
 much more also, and therefore MUST NOT BE LIMITED to Present Tense.' 
 
 ^" (S.) The Participles are often used 
 
 (i.) With Nouns Substantive : as in 
 
 His Righteousness [is] remaining for-ever, D 1te ]3Dp D'jCfcpH the 
 heavens [are] telling, T^y T?$^ the king was standing, etc. : 
 
 (ii.) with Prefix Pi, cp. 98, as in ^SDH Ktfl, Gen. ii. 11, 
 
 * Also [ 56 (i.)] n"| s./. & $ pi. ro., (fr. TJ); so nVi? & "$?. 
 
 f The S is often without its Dagesh Lene, in accordance with Pt. I., 48. 
 
 t And Vy?, thus Kra whea the 3^ Rt-letter is N, as tfV fr. Nnj.
 
 VERBS, PARTIC. 140. IMPER. AND PUT. 141. 85 
 
 lit., it [is] the [one] compassing, i.e. (as in E.V.) that [is~\ it 
 which compasseth, DHDJJPl DH, Nu. vii. 2, lit., they [were~] the 
 [ones] standing, i.e., they [were] those who [were] standing; 
 so -|JbyPl D. i. 38, xvii. 12; D^ftpPl, Josh. vi. 22, 23; etc.; 
 
 (iii.) as Nouns;* thus, T&2? one keeping, watching, for a 
 keeper, a watchman, *")$ one helping, for a helper, etc. ; 
 
 (iv.) < i. c.' ; thus, IfoW [the] keeper of, ^fcW [the] keepers 
 of, etc. ; 
 
 (v.) as Adjectives, 79, etc. 
 
 (e.) Often a Hebrew Participle is used as a Noun where 
 the corresponding Noun does not exist in English, as *l?y 
 one standing, where we cannot say, " a stander," H^Jl the 
 [one'] cutting, where we cannot say, " the cutter."f So 
 Ps, 1. 5, *JV*n TH3 (lit., cutters-of My Covenant) those that 
 made a Covenant with ME. 
 
 () Participles may receive Pron. Affixes as Nouns ; thus, 
 ^K my enemy, etc., from 13^ (Partic. Kal of ^K), etc.~j. 
 
 141. (.) Two forms of the IMPERATIVE and FUTURE, 
 Kal, are given in Tab. XIV. (I.), one with $ to the 2 d 
 Eoot-letter in "Ip3 (or *lip9) cwt'J ^ow (TO.), "Tp$* (or Tipfty 
 Ae tm7/ visit ; (ii.) one with to the 2 d Eoot-letter in 
 5O / jowi <Aow (m.) aw (as clothing), 2^5?! he will put on, etc. 
 Some Verbs have the one, and some the other. Some few 
 have both forms, as we shall see. 
 
 [Note. Sometimes the 2 d Root-letter has (i) [ 167], as in 1JJD (Imper.) 
 Ju. xix. 5, rby. (Fut.) Ez. xvii. 15; (2) -1, as in 1B-1BB'' (Fut.) Ex. xviii. 26]. 
 
 * An interesting example of the double use of a Participle, D 1 1DtJ', (1) as a Noun 
 watchers," and (2) as a Present-Tense-Participle are watching," or do watch," 
 occurs in Ps. cxxx. 6, which may be rendered My soul [looks with watching] to 
 The LORD [1j?3^ Qnpfc' nj53^ QnpB'p] more than WATCHERS for the morning 
 DO-WATCH for the morning. So in the former Grammar, Vol. II. p. 72. 
 
 t The word 'feller' is, however, admissible in Is. xiv. 8 (E.V.). 
 
 J Verbs of this class are called, by some, Verbs Fut.-(O).' Better, 'Fut. (J_)'. 
 
 Verbs of this class are called, by some, Verbs Fut.-(^).' Better, <Fut. ( )'.
 
 86 VERBS. IMPER. AND PUT. 141. 
 
 In the IMPERATIVE there are only Second-Person 
 forms, viz. for thou (m. & /.) and ye (m. & /.'). The 2 s. f. 
 and 2 pi. m. & f. have the added terminations * , } , PO 
 [cp. 133 ( a .)] attached to the fundamental IpJSD or $3? 
 for the Kal. So for other Voices. But, in the Kal, 
 
 [Obs. : the Vowel of the 2 d Root-letter is dropped and 
 replaced by on the addition of the * (2s. /".) and of the 
 } (2 pi. m.); the of the 1 st Root-letter must then be 
 changed into a < Slight-Vowel ' (Pt. I., 56). This ' Slight- 
 Vowel' is generally -, as in nf5B, nj53, 'Bfr?, j7, (Cp. 
 57, Obs.); but sometimes another short-vowel is adopted, 
 as in 'TP]N (or 'IHK) and in (8.) below.] 
 
 (7.) The Imper 2 s. m. often has an additional PI ; thus, 
 (i) PH# (fr. Tb0 &eep thou (m.), JtTTj? (fr. ^p) approach 
 thou (m.), (2) rnpa (fr. "D!?) W0 thou (m.\ Plgab> (fr. ^ 
 Aear <Aow (m.}* etc. Sometimes, also, in other Voices; thus, 
 (3) Niph. TWyifo swear thou (m.) ; (4) Pi-el PHSD relate 
 thou (m.); (5) Hiph. Pli^pPI hearken thou (m.\ etc. 
 
 (5.) Sometimes the Imper. aJ has () to the 1 st Root-letter in the 2 s. /., 
 and 2 pi. m. ; thus, *?7D, Ju. ix. 10. [This is also Kri, in v. 12, 
 for 3^D X/Aiw. So,' in v. 8, H^O (2 s. m.) is Kri, for n31^>D 
 JOAfo.]t So -I3in, Jer. ii. 12, and' O^D, Ez. xxxii. 20, as well as 
 IDK'D, Ex. xii. 21. Cp. (y. 1), and see more hereafter. 
 
 (t.) I^P^, Gen. iv. 23, is an instance of the fl of 2 pi. /. Imper. being 
 dropped. The word stands for njyiOK'. The of the J? is given to 
 aid the enunciation of the }J7. 
 
 (.) Sometimes, we find the 3 rd Root-letter with Dag. Lene, as in *SDX, 
 Jer. x. 17, 'SBTI, Is. xlvii. 2 ; the vowel beneath the 1 st Root-letter 
 is then a Real Short-vowel, having the -7- after it Quiescent. [Each 
 of these is 2 s. /. Imper. Kal.~] 
 
 (q). (i.) In HOyj, Nu. xxiii. 7, Imper. Kal 2 s. TO. [with H, see (y)], the 
 
 1 st Root-letter has the Long Vowel _^. 
 
 (U.) In rma (i.e. TS}, Imper. Kal, 2 s. m., with PI) Ps. cxli. 3, the 
 Dagesh in is Euphonic. Pt. I., App. C. 
 
 (0.) For n^VD-l, nQ1, and rniri, n ^?. ri T \?1 ) see Index. 
 
 * And with _, as in 
 
 t Cp. *01Df?, with 1 superfluous'/ 1 S. xxviii. 8, for 't?D|? [Pt. I, App. D.].
 
 VERBS. IMPER. AND FUT. 142 143. 87 
 
 142. The FUTURE is connected with the IMPERATIVE. Thus, 
 ( a .) In Eal, (i.) the forms Hj^fi thou (/.) wilt visit, 
 
 ye (m.) will visit, HJIp^fi ye (/.) (or they (/.)) will 
 visit, consist of ft and '"lf?l? ^l? 1 ,?; n }1p?- 
 
 [Ohs. In the Imperative forms HpS, VlpS, the T of the 
 D is of course replaced by a Slight'-vowel, in order that there 
 may not be two Moving Shvas together ; but in the Future 
 the stands after the formative fl, after which the may 
 be (and is) Quiescent.] 
 
 (ii.) So in the case of HpS 1 (Fut.) and VtpS (Imp.). 
 
 (iii). The remaining Fut. Tense forms, viz., "Ip? 1 . 3 s. m., 
 Ip^n 3 s. /. (& 2 s. m.), np^K 1 s., and HpM 1 pi., aU 
 correspond with the fundamental "1p?. 
 
 (iv.) Similarly in the case of the Verbs <Fut. ( )' [p. 85]. 
 
 (T.) The Imper. has generally in Verbs 'Fut.(-^)', &() in Verbs 'Fnt.(-)'. 
 
 (.) In Niph. the Future forms HpSft thou (/.) wilt be 
 visited, np3PI ye (m.).. and np3* they, (m.).., PlJ*lp3J;lye C/"-) 
 or ^ey (/.).., correspond respectively with the Imper. forms 
 
 Hpsn 2 s. /., npsn 2 P i. m., njnpsn 2 p i. // an d the 
 
 other Persons of the Future Tense, viz., "Tpf^. 3 s. m. y *Tp3n 
 3 s. / (& 2 s. m.), npSX 1 s., and 1j5M 1 pi., with the 
 fundamental "1D3H : the H being extruded between the prefix 
 letters | H * X and the first Root-letter. 
 
 (7.) Similarly in the case of the other Voices; thus, the 
 
 Fut. 2 s. /., njpgj^ pi-ei, Tpsj? Hiph., njparin 
 
 correspond with the Imper. 2 s. /. Hjp3 Pi-e/, 
 Hiph. } n[pS^ri ITzM/7. 
 
 (S.) In Pu-dl and Hoph-dl, which have no Imper.,* there is 
 the corresponding analogy with imaginary Imperative forms. 
 
 143. The PI of the H}, in pi. f. Fut., is sometimes 
 
 * We find, however, once [Ez. xxxii. 19] H33K'n, Imper. Hoph., 2 s. m., be 
 thou laid (lit., caused to lie) ; and [Jer. xlix. 8] -USn, Imper. Hoph, 2 pi. m. be ye 
 made to turn, from HJDi see hereafter.
 
 88 VERBS. FUTURE, 143 146. 
 
 dropped, and the given to j, as in p5'Jft ? Ez. iii. 20, 
 xxxiii. 13, they (/.) shall not be remembered. So |^57^ ( as 
 
 given by many) S. xiii. 18, for nj$2/^ which is found in 
 several editions; etc. 
 
 144. A H T" i 8 often found at the end of the 1 s. and 1 pi. 
 of the Future ; thus, 
 
 (.) First Person Sing. : rnp#K (fr. *lb$K) Ps. xxxix.2, 
 ftaS^J* (fr. 330K) Ps. Ivii. 5/HJ33K (fr. T33N) Ex. xiv. 4, 
 etc.! ' riyajK l (fr.' T3TK) Ps. xlv'/is, n^fi&K (fr. S^HJJ) 
 Dan. ix. 4; and 
 
 (0.) First Person Plu.: Hfi^3 (fr. &p?0) Gen. xi. 3, etc., 
 
 naanro (fr. Dsnrti) EX. i. 10, etc. 
 
 (y.) Rarely at the end of the 3 s. m. as *PIBn Is. v. 19 [B^PP Tab. XX.], 
 and 3 s. /.f as !"Q|yn Ez. xxiii. 16 (Xrt), & 20; also, perhaps, 2 s. m. HSUO 
 [S]-iyri Tab. XX.] Job xi. 17 ; 
 
 (5.) And with before it, as in n3B>-p Ps. xx. 4. 
 
 (e.) In (a.), (/?.), etc., above, the vowel of the 2 nd Root-letter is seen to be 
 dropped when the additional n appears. [Cp. for the Imper. 141 (7.)]. But 
 
 (.) it will be found hereafter [ 166 (ii.)] that, in PAUSE, the vowel which 
 was so dropped is either (i) restored if it be Long, or (2) replaced (if it be Short) 
 by the corresponding Long Vowel. 
 
 (j.) Sometimes the Moving Shva of the 2 nd Root-letter [in cases of (e.)] 
 has the form ; as in (i) nBlp.lpK [BJ^X] Is. xviii. 4, where the } is noted 
 as superfluous^"; () HJ^pX [VE'fN] Is.'xxvii. 4; and 
 
 
 (0.) sometimes the form ; as in (a) Hjptf M??] Jer - xxxii - 9, etc. 
 See Pt. I., App. D. 
 
 145. An additional | is often found after those Future 
 forms which end in }, viz., the 3 & 2 pi. m. ; thus, P"]^?* 
 D. iv. 10, P"Wft D. vi. 17. So |rpjp 1 S. ii. 15, 16, 
 
 * For Pimp* Kthw Lev. xxi. 5, -innp* is Kri (whence the of PIPT^, cp. p. 
 85, v.). 
 
 t Some give as 3 s. /., with H3 added, POpfap'ri Ju. v. 26 ; (also 2 s. m., 
 Obad- 13).
 
 VERBS. 145147, AND ' NOTE ' (I). 89 
 
 . iv. 16, etc. (the standing for the * of the 
 Eiph-tl,'Pfut I, 12). And so JMfcM 1 S. ii 22, JJPBh^ 
 Ex. xxii. 8, (the standing for !), Pt I, 14). 
 
 146. Also | is found some few times after the 2s./ Future. 
 
 Thus the 2s./ Fut. Kal. HpSfi would, with this T, be IHpSfi. 
 
 VK : ' ' **! : 
 
 So we find ppnn* Ruth ii. 8 (& 21) [for pnfi]. So the 
 
 1 Jv'T : I'lT ; 
 
 2 s. /. Fut. Hithpa-tt p13W>l 1 S. i. 14 [for 'TDWft, the 
 Pause-form of H3ft&?Jjl comp. Note (h, a) on Tab. XIV and 
 %* below there], 
 
 147. The } of 145 & 146, as also of 138 (B) (iv, /3), is called by some 
 ' | PAHAGOGIC '. So the H of 144, and that of 138 (B), is called by some 
 1 H PAKAGOGIC'; and so the K of 138 (B) (iv, a), and the of 139 (e). Some 
 however consider that to be a mark of CONNECTION the ' * Compaginis,' as 
 they call it, Comp. p. 232 (lines 610). 
 
 NOTE I. 
 
 (i.) As in the last example cited in 146, viz. P*]3F\&f\ for 
 fi Pause-form of H^ftE^! [instead of H3ETU-) ] fr. *D? 
 the 1 st Rt-letter and the fi of the JVJ of Hithpa-el change places 
 when the 1 st Rt-letter is either } &?, or ^, or D ; thus we have 
 
 * For the -7- the Student may refer to 141 'Note'; but he will understand 
 the matter better hereafter [ 167 (ii) & 166 ()]. 
 
 t With one exception viz. HJlpCiK'^n Jer. xlix. 3. For this word see 246 
 (p. 162). It belongs to a Class of Verbs to be dealt with hereafter.
 
 89() 
 
 nSWfl Infin - Hithpa-31 fr. 
 lv~ : * 
 
 Partic. s. m. Hithpa-#l fr. 
 Fut. 3 s. TO. Hithpa-#l fr. 
 
 1** "I * 
 
 (ii.) When the 1 st Rt-letter is , not only does the X change 
 places with the ft of the TH, but moreover this fi is replaced 
 by D; thus, from T3f we have ^TlDXH Past Eithpa-el 1 pi. 
 
 [instead of tfTOnn], and so fr. pTX we have ,TltDW Fut. 
 
 ;-- : I I T- ; 
 
 Hithpartil 1 pi. Pause-form [instead of 
 
 (iii.) When the 1 st Rt-letter is 1, or ft, or n, the n of the 
 Tin is dropped, and Dagesh F. is put into the 1 st Rt-letter to 
 
 represent it. 
 
 This matter is briefly mentioned and illustrated in ' Notes on 
 Tab. XIV ' ( V) [p. xv of the Tables]. The whole matter will 
 be dealt with a little more fully hereafter, as soon as we shall 
 have gone through all the Great Classes of Verb-forms [see 
 'Note' on pages 315318].
 
 NOTE (II). 
 
 In Tab. XV (Infinitives with Pron-Affs.) it may be seen that, except in the 
 Hiph. forms, 
 
 (a) When the 3 d Rt-letter- has a VOWEL, the 2 d Bt-Letter has Shva; 
 () When the 3 d Et-letter has SHVA, the 2 d Et-letter has 
 
 (a) sometimes [necessarily Quiescent, Pt. I, 55 (13, a)], 
 
 (b) sometimes a ' Slight' -vowel. 
 
 Obs. The Slight-Vowel in (b) generally agrees with the Vowel which 
 the 2 d Bt-letter has dropped ; thus we have 
 
 (1) the 6 of the Kal forms Tlp3 D^p3 I3np3 Tab. XV 
 
 1 ;'T : J v :'T ; j i y i^;? 
 
 Notes (*) & (t), where the Vowel which the 2 d Bt-letter 
 has dropped is the of 1p3 ; 
 
 (2) the of the Niph-al forms llP^Sn etc., from Hp.SH 
 
 and of the Pi-el forms ^1(53 etc., from *TJ33 and of the 
 Hithpa-el forms ^fliPBnn etc., from "Jp.Bnn, where 
 the Vowel which the 2 d Bt-letter has dropped is ; 
 
 (3) the of the Pu-al forms ^nj?3 etc., from TjPj^ and of 
 
 the Hoph-dl forms ^"Ip.Sn etc., where the Vowel which 
 the 2 d Bt-letter has dropped is . 
 
 (7) Instead of the -5- of 031(53 (Comp. /3, b, 2), there is sometimes 
 as in DS^nMI Is. i. 15 from bn.3 (Infin. Pi, like "TJ53, but with 
 Compensation for the Dagesh which the T cannot receive). 
 
 (6) In place of the ' Slight '-Vowel, a Long real Vowel is sometimes given 
 to the 2* Et-letter before a Guttural 3 d Bt-letter, as in ^p^? D. xv. 18 
 from 0;?B>. [For the ' Furtive' -^, see Pt. I ( 60)].
 
 90 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 (To be translated into English.} 
 
 * * For the plan of the Exercise, see 11 (a e). 
 
 jnn " 
 
 ! inh 
 
 1 Israel. 2 2nK to love. 3 Joseph. 4 J?D*J> to hear. 5 now, or I pray. c Di?H 
 a dream. ' "|7D to reign. 8 behold. 9 D?n to dream. 10 again, i 1 1DD to 
 sell. 12 H3J? a slave. * 3 "7pS to visit (Hiph. to-make-visitor, to-appoint-as- 
 officer). 14 h^3 a house, Tab. XIII. (3). I 5 ^>nj to possess (Hoph. to be made- 
 to-possess, to have-as-one's lot). 16 for myself. '7 months of. 18 vanity. 19 and. I. 
 20 IDS to say. 21 tan to be-in-haste. 22 f"lj to cut off. 23 from before. 
 24 \]y an eye, Tab. XIII. (3, j3). 25 but. 26 voice, voice of. 27 my supplications. 
 28 y\y Pt. to cry. 29 JB3 ( 56, vii.) a womb, figur^u. a hidden depth. 30 gh'ol, 
 pit, grave, hell. 31 fixerc. IX. (). 32 ^-|p to call. 33 |-pf to rise (as the sun). 
 3 * ^T! darkness. 35 light. 36 ^ to be able ( 138 A, Hi.). 37 p aN //i<Ap. to 
 restrain oneself. 38 Tab. XIII. (2). 39 to answer. 40 rh& t o send. *! hither. 
 42 12T ^T. to speak. 43 2]T\ to huneer. 44 soul, soul of. 4S a righteous-one. 
 46 since. *7 -^p^ to be precious. 48 *723 JVipA. to be honoured. 49 13JJ' to 
 break. 50 rV")f3 a city. 51 emptiness. 52 for. 63 yp^ to cleave (Niph. to be 
 let break forth). 64 j n the wilderness. 55 wa ter. 66 the turtle-dove. 5 ? ^"ISl a 
 land, Tab. X. (1) -- * See 137 (1, Obs. /3.). t See 137 (4, i., ii.j.
 
 91 
 
 [N.B. Henceforth the following, and words marked in the Notes with *, need 
 not be given in Notes to the Exercises: 
 
 1. D'PPX GOD, a Noun 
 of Plu.'form Tab.V.(ii.). 
 
 2. DK if. Also Interrog., 
 
 and = or? after n 
 
 (7). 
 
 3. TV? (m.), Tab. XIII. 3. 
 
 4. H3 (/.), Tab. XIII. 5. 
 
 5. '13 (m.) a nation, pi. 
 
 D'13 nations, Gentiles, 
 heathen. 
 
 6. D3 a/so, eren. 
 
 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 7. ~lin (m.) a word, 
 
 thing, Tab. IX. 
 
 8. Nin Tab. I. (1), & 
 
 32 (II.), 94. 
 
 9. Exerc. XI. (i). 
 
 10. '3 for, because, that. 
 
 11. D*D (m.) water, a 
 
 Noun of Dual form. 
 
 12. D5O saith[E.V.], lit., 
 
 [is] said o/. 
 
 13. ''H? wailing. 
 
 14. DJJ (m.) a peopte (Ex. 
 
 XV., No. 34), w. aff . 
 
 isy, etc., pi. D'BJ;. 
 
 15. npS to visit. 
 
 16. Bnp (m.}holiness, Tab. 
 
 XI. 1 & :. 
 
 17. Tip (m.) a roicc ( 43), 
 
 i c. the same. 
 
 18. DK ; (m.) a name, Tab. 
 
 XIII. (Note , a.), 
 and 43. 
 
 19. VV there, nVthither.] 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 (To be translated into English.') 
 * The VOCABULABY on pp. 383 388 may be referred to, if necessary. 
 
 ir n 
 
 1 by, on, on account of. 2 rivers of (fr. IIT)). 3 Babylon.* 432'* to sit, 
 dwell. 5 we wept. 6 ")3T K. to remember, HipA. to mention. 7 Zion.* 8 [with a] 
 breach, breaking. 9 great (m.). 10 ~\1W to break. H virgin of (88). 
 
 12 woe ] 13 IY^ Pi-e/ to devastate [Tab. XIV. Note (f, Obs. 1)]. U 133 
 to deal treacherously. 15 3 against. lfi Israel.* 17 34, is Qpj Hithp. to 
 avenge one-self. 19 K'Q:* (/.) soul Tab. X- 1, PI. niETS? Tab. XII. 1. 
 to cut, cut off. 2i' TiO to rebel. 22 Alas ! 23 Q Lord.* T 24 pt. I., 79 (2). 
 
 * Words marked thus (*) need not be given in the Notes again. 
 + See 137 (1, Obe. /3).
 
 92 
 
 HK " 
 
 HJIK 
 
 78 yhr 
 
 w jn 
 
 HipA. to destroy. 26 remnant, remnant of. 27 110!^ JfipA. to destroy (with 
 perdition). 28 Jacob.* 29 Tab. VII. 30 ynp to hear. 31 Tab. XIII. 1. ^ "\ZDPi. to 
 tell, recount. 33 a wor k. 34 ^ys to work. 35 49 ( t ). 36 ^S WipA. to be 
 wonderful (p.60, No.14), Partic. a wondrous work. 37 look ye. 38 a rock* [supply 
 " from which "]. 39 3 ^n Pi- to hew. by myself. *1 JHG5> 2V . to swear. 
 42 "?^D Pt. to tell, speak of. 43 rnn| might.* ** His glory. 45 ^fl pj. to 
 praise, Hithp. to glory [Dagesh Forte often dropped from the ?]. 46 Righteous. 
 47 IXK' M'pft. to remain, to be left. 48 a remnant (that escapes). 49 j n 
 Egypt. 60 "?2B> Hiph. to regard. 51 "lX to say. 52 3^ to be hostile. 
 Partic. an enemy. 53 P|"TT to pursue. 54 1 will overtake. 55 p?n Pt. to divide, 
 66 spoil. 67pjeo to blow. 58 n-n Spirit (also wind).* 59^ to sink [^ for ^>, 
 Pt. 1. 72 (/3.)]. 60 like the lead [ 6 (e.), 8 (a.)]. 61 g ran d (pi. w.j. 
 62 the mighty one (m.). 63 py^ to cry out (in pain). 64 Tab. XIII. 5. 
 65 Rabbah. 66 "un to gird on. 67 sackloth.* 68 the city (/.). C9 the joyous 
 (/.) 70 securely. 71 }1JJ iniquity ( 43). 72 Edom.* ? 3 a nd the booty of. 
 74 a terrible one (m.). T 75 vbft jv. to be delivered. 76 p^ to put on 
 (as clothing). 77 strength. 78 Q arm of. 79 I Q ! 80 120 t o sell. 
 
 * Words marked thus (*) need not be given in the Notes again. 
 t See 137 (1, Obs. /3). 
 1 See Tab. xin. (Note , a).
 
 93 
 
 i ny 1 ? 91 ntoy : rn "TV "jro 
 
 siyK'S* (m.) a trespass, Tab. X. 2. 82 n^ to send, put forth, Pi. to send 
 away. 83 your ( m .) mot her (ON). 84 e?-n to seek, search for. 85 XSD to find. 
 86 /X3 to redeem, Partic. Redeemer. 8 ? from everlasting. 88 NET) to heal, Partic. 
 Healer. 8 heart. 90 }H3 to give. 91 and power- 92 -pa K. & Pi. to bless. 
 
 Obs. I. The Negative Particles K? not, and ?X nor, PRECEDE the Tense which 
 is Negatively affected. 
 
 Obs. II. K? with a Tense expresses an ordinary Negative ; thus 1DJJ SO he 
 stood not, or did not stand, or has not stood, etc. ; also, 
 
 Obs. III. SO is used with a Future to express PROHIBITION as in 33331 SO 
 thou shalt not steal, ?"'D? #} he shall not ride, etc. ; but 
 
 Obs. IV. ^St with a Future expresses the DEPRECATIVE 'do not' 'let him 
 not,' as 131J;! *?S! (Is. xxxvi. 11) do not speak, 13T ^>N (Ex. xx. 19) let him not 
 speak, etc. 
 
 Obs. V. Never use a Hebrew Imperative with a Negative Particle (cp. IV.). 
 
 Obs. VI. The prefix 7 is to be used generally for to, unless ?S, or some 
 other word, be given, in these Exercises. Also, 
 
 Obs. VII. Personal Pronouns are to be expressed in the Hebrew, if not con- 
 nected by (') with the next word in the English. 
 
 Obs. VIII. The Interrogative n ( 7) is to be prefixed to the first word of the 
 Interrogative sentence, ( as in *Fn2' ! l w?n spake I not [to thee, saying, etc. ?] 
 Nu. xxiii. 26 ; np?X &6 i"frx ^H 'for these things shall I not visit ? Jer. v. 29. 
 
 Obs. IX. For expressing what has been and still is going on, use the PAST 
 Tense. 
 
 Obs. X. For expressing what is not only going on now but also is expected 
 to go on, use the FUTURE Tense. 
 
 Obs. XI. LET him do," LET her do, etc., are expressed by the FUTURE, 
 He, she, etc., SHALL (or WILL, do)." 
 
 Words marked (*) need not be given in the Notes again.
 
 94 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 [* # * See Glossary,' for words not in the Notes.] 
 
 (To be translated into Hebrew. 11, /*.) 
 
 Ye (m.) observed. 1 Thou (/.) hast-observed. 1 They (/.) 
 have-observed. 1 We observed. 1 Observe-ye (/.). She shall 
 observe. 2 They (m.) will-observe. 2 Ye (jQ will-observe. 
 Observe-thou (/.) this-thing (/.) [ 96 (i.)]. Thou (/.)- 
 shalt not observe 2 [Obs. III. above]. Did-she-not-observe 
 [Heb., Whether-not observed l -she~\ the matter * ? If [Vocab. I. 
 ( 2 )] ye (w.)-have not observed, observe-ye now. 4 
 
 Thou (m.') hast not kept ' the covenant 5 of thy GOD. 
 They (m.) kept l His testimonies. 8 Keep-ye (m.) My com- 
 mandments. 7 "We will-keep Thy (m.) commandments. 7 I 
 kept Thy (m.) ordinances. 8 In-order-that 9 I-might-keep * 
 Thy (ro.) word.' The Preserver I0 of Israel. 11 Thy (m.) 
 visitation " hath-preserved l my spirit." The-LoRD " is thy 
 (m.~) Preserver. 10 HE-will-preserve 2 thy (m.) soul. 1 * 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew. 11, /*.) 
 
 Thou (m.) shalt not come-near 18 [Obs. III., p. 93] to 17 
 them (m.*). And a stranger 18 shall not come-near 16 [Obs. II.] 
 unto 17 you (m.). Come-ye (m.)-near 18 to Me. Fearers" of 
 THE-LORD," trust-ye w (m.) in THE- LORD." Who among 21 
 you (m.) is a fearer 1 * of THE-LORD?, ... let-him-trust 80 
 
 IPast Kal of TOB>. 8Fut. Kal of nB? Fut. (_^)' [p. 85 (J)]. 
 
 * nny. 5 nn?. p. 45 (*). 7 niyp, pi. nivp. 8 DH-ips (pi.). 9 
 
 10 Partic. (1) /of IDB' [ 140 (5., iv\ and 139 '(j3., N.B. 2)]. Up. 91 (16). 
 
 12 rn|. 13 74 (a). H [Thus the E.V. for The NAME given in Pt. I. 79 (2). 
 
 13 fc^Y comp. Tab. X. 1 (for the Sing.). 16 31p Fut. ( ) [141 (a, )]. " b$. 
 18 IT. w XTJ (i. c. ST s. m. & N^ pi. m.). 20 Ht32 Fut. (^r-). 3.
 
 95 
 
 [Obs. XI.] in The Name 22 of TnE-LouD 14 and lean 23 on 21 his 
 GOD. Cast-ye 24 (m.) him into 17 this pit. 25 Only 26 [as regards] 
 the throne* 7 will-I-be-greater-than-thou (Hebr., Witt-I-be- 
 great from thee (m.}, cp. 82. i.). His little 29 brother 30 [|81 
 (3)] shall-be-greater than-he. Over 31 Edomwill- 
 
 I-fling 24 my shoe. 32 They (m.}- shall-fling 24 each-one 3 * his 
 stone. 34 Thou (m.)-hast-been flung 35 from thy grave. 36 Upon 31 
 THEE (m.) have-I-been-flung. 85 Into 21 Thy (m.) Hand [ 46 
 (ctv i)~j will-I-commend 37 my spirit. 13 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew. 11, /*.) 
 
 My GOD be-not-far 38 [Obs. IV.] from me. I-am-weary 39 
 [Obs. IX.] in my groaning. 40 How-long 41 wilt-Thou-hide 42 Thy 
 face 43 from me? Hear-Thou 44 my prayer. 45 All 46 the day 47 
 my disgrace 48 is before 49 me. Fallen-hath 50 the crown 51 of our 
 head. 52 Many-and-mighty-are 53 [Obs. IX.] my destroyers/ 4 
 my enemies 55 for-naught (Hebr., a lie}, Thou-hast-made- 
 men-to-ride (Hebr., Thou-hast-caused-to-ride* weak-man} 
 over (/) our head. 52 
 
 Athirst-is 69 [Obs. IX.] my soul 15 for GOD. For 60 Thou 
 [art] the GOD of my-Might/ 1 ... ; why 82 in-mourning-garb 83 
 should-I-have-so-to-go 64 amid 21 an enemy's 55 oppression ? M Thou- 
 wilt-destroy 66 the talkers 67 of falsehood. 68 Vanity 69 they (m.)- 
 
 22 Voc. I. 18. 23 JJJB? JSfiph. 24 Hiph. 25 ^3 ( m .). 26 p-j. 27 
 
 28 ^|J Fut. ( ). 2 9 }bjX 30 Tab. XIII. (2). 31 ^V. 32 ^ 33 
 
 34 }2N Tab. X* (1). 3 & "$& Hoph. 36 ^ Tab. X. (2). 37 ipa Hiph. 
 
 as p'rin Fut.( ). 39J7JS. 40 nm^ w. aff. irimx' (59). 41 njx ny. 42 nnD Hiph. 
 
 43 Exerc. XIV (19). 44 VKV* Fut. ( ). l n^DJjl. 46 >Sp3). 47 Q\\ 
 
 48ns 1 ??. naa 62 (m.). 5ot ?s3- 51 n-ipy T (/.). 52^x1. 
 
 Partic. ' HipA. " 55 Exerc. XX (52). 5 ^"l^'. 57 231 #1^. 58 
 59 N1DV Past K. 60 3. 61 v|yo. 62 n^. ''63 -np. 64 Fut. Hithp. of 
 65^. 66 i^ pr-e^. 67 p i'."m. i.c.' of inM ( 139, /3.).
 
 96 
 
 will-be-speaking/* each-one 33 with" his fellow. 72 Thou-hast- 
 destroyed 68 a-wicked-one. 73 And [as for] transgressors 74 they 
 (m.)-have-perished" together. 78 For 60 not 77 a God 78 taking- 
 pleasure-in 79 wickedness 80 [art] THOU. And they-sh all-trust 80 
 (m.) in THEE, that-know 81 Thy Name ; w for 60 Tnou-hast not 
 forsaken 82 [Obs. II.] those -that-seek-to-Thee 83 [O] LORD. 
 
 For-ever 84 shall-they (m.J-sing-gladly 8 * [Table xiv. Note (c.)]. 
 Of" The Name 22 of our GOD we-will-make-mention. 86 For 60 
 exalted 87 (m.) [is] His Name 22 alone. 88 And [to be] praised 89 
 exceedingly. 90 [WHO] maketh-great 91 the salvation 92 [Piu.] of 
 His King. 93 Blessed 94 [is] the man 9 * who will-trust 10 in The- 
 LORD. For 60 Thou [expressed] wilt-bless 98 a righteous-one.* 7 
 [As for] those (m.) -planted 98 in the house of the- LORD, in 
 the courts" of our GOD shall-they-flourish. 100 As a tree 101 
 planted 98 by 102 rivers 103 of water. 
 
 I-will-hymn 104 Thy Name, 22 [0 Thou] Most-High. 105 Sing- 
 ye (w.)-hyrnns 104 to The- LORD [Who] dwelleth 106 -in Zion. 
 We-will-sing-gladly 8S [w. n, 144 (/3.)] through 21 Thy salvation* 2 ; 
 yea (1) in The Name 22 of our GOD will-we-triumph. 107 In 
 The- LORD my-soul-shall-glory (Hebr., shall-glory m my soul). 
 
 (2) * (1) 
 
 Hallelujah. 109 [O] my soul praise-thou 110 The-LoRD. 
 
 70 im Pi-el. 71 Tab- III. (2). 72 jn w . the aff . !)n- , Tab. VIII. [See also 74 
 (a)]. 73 yen . 74j^3 Partic. (1) Kal, pi. m. [ 139 (y, 1)]. 75 -jjotjj N iph. 
 76 H 1 ?-' 77 K '- 78 ^?- 79 r sn Partic - of the form mentioned in 139 (5., iii.). 
 80 yen. 81 y-p Partic. (l) K., pi. m. i. c.' 2 UP- 83 'yVf-fH. 84 &$. 
 &5 ]F\' Pi-el. 86-, 3T Hiph. 87 3J{*> Niph. 88 nn^. 89 ^n ' Partic. P-^/. 
 90 n'Sp. 91 ^5U Partic. HipA. 92 nj>-1B. 93 Tab. X. (l). 94 -J-Q p ar tic. (2) 
 ^ai ['l39 (y., 2)]. 95 -)3|. 96 -|-Q pr-e/. (Compensation to be made for the 
 Dagesh F.). 97 pnv. ' '98 ^r\W Partic. (2) Kal. 99 n'nVQ [the dropped 
 i. c.,' 56 (i.)]. 100 cn D Hiph. 101 fJ? (m.). 102 VjJ. 103 J^g a r iv er [Tab. X. 
 (1)]. 104 -| D f pf.#. 105 jvjjj;. 106 2&i p ar tic. (1) ^. "i07 ^ F ut . (j_). 108 ^ n 
 Hithpa-el. 109 PI* preceded 'by 2 pi. OT. Imp. of ("). " 9^n Pi-eJ [p. 92 (45)]. 
 
 (1) (2) are put to mark the order in the Hebrew.
 
 97 
 
 SECTION XII. 
 VERBS (continued). CERTAIN USAGES. 
 
 148. As said above ( 123), there are only two Tenses in 
 Hebrew. These two are the only Tense-forms for expressing 
 such various modifications as "had," or "may" or "might" 
 or " should" or " would" or " may have" might have," etc. 
 Also there are no ' Auxiliary ' Verbs. From among the 
 somewhat multitudinous forms of modern expression by which 
 one of these old Tenses may be rendered, very great care 
 is sometimes required for selecting that particular one which 
 is the one for bringing out (so far as may be possible) the 
 sense of the original passage. Through neglecting to observe 
 the underlying thought of such a passage, a wrong Mood, 
 or a wrong Auxiliary Verb, may give a wrong turn and 
 lead to an altogether wrong view of the passage. And care- 
 ful attention to the 'Mood of Thought' (if one may say so) 
 not seldom furnishes a very useful clue, by the help of which 
 the intricacies of some very difficult passages may be safely 
 tracked. 
 
 149. Again, the SUBORDINATION of Time and Mode of 
 Action is sometimes marked with great accuracy and nicety 
 by the use of different Tense-forms. 
 
 [Through neglecting to attend to this, or through mistakes respecting it, some 
 Moderns have succeeded in introducing much strange confusion and misappre- 
 hension with regard to the usage of the Hebrew Tenses- The leading principle 
 has often been quite lost sight of. Some have fixed their attention on one set of 
 the usages of a Tense, some on another ; and so one-and-the-same Tense has been 
 called by some a 'Present,' by others an 'Imperfect,' by others an Aorist' etc. 
 It is amusing to see how happy some appear to be when, not content with an 
 Indefinite ' name, they succeed in giving an indefinite rendering. To be sure, 
 this seems to betoken too often the absence of definite notions about any Mean- 
 ing to be conveyed by such a rendering. 
 
 Controversy, however, would be out of place here. This only shall be said 
 now: ]
 
 98 USAGE OF TENSES. 150, 151. 
 
 150. (1) It is surely not unreasonable that in a Language 
 which, has but two TENSES, these two should have reference 
 to the TWO MAIN DIVISIONS OF TIME. We say MAIN divi- 
 sions ; for, such the f FUTURE ' and the < PAST ' are : the 
 ' PRESENT ' is (strictly) but an everchanging instant a con- 
 necting link between 'the Future' and < the Past.'* 
 
 () Such is not at all unlikely to be the case in the 
 language of a people who were looking forwards from a 
 great Past of Wonders to a Future (in store, reserved, 
 prepared) of Good and of Glory such as " eye hath not 
 seen, nor ear heard," and who recognised their ( Present ' 
 as transitory. 
 
 (3) Moreover, the usage of the Language is found to be 
 in accordance with this : as we hope to shew in the proper 
 place. 
 
 151. This, too, ought not to be lost sight of, viz. that 
 There is a MODE OF RECKONING Past and Future, which is 
 differentf from that which may perhaps seem to us to be the 
 only natural one, so long as we refer all to ourselves as if 
 each one were the Centre of all Time and Space. Familiarity 
 with that which is strange to us quite foreign, even, to our 
 modes of thought, can only be acquired after some time, 
 and from much experience of the usage which is thus 
 strange. It would be unwise, therefore, to attempt to enter 
 further into this matter just now. Perhaps we have antici- 
 pated too much in venturing to allude to it as we have 
 done. 
 
 * What is often called the Present Time " consists really of an undefined 
 portion of Past and Future Time, gathered about the instant Present. Some 
 interesting remarks on the 'Tenses' will appear in Dr. Chance's Notes on Job,' 
 pp. 543 & 544. 
 
 t Consequent, to some extent, on what was said at the opening of 9 (o.).
 
 USAGE OF TENSES. 152 (I. a. III. ft.) 99 
 
 152. Speaking generally, it may be said that, in Hebrew, 
 (I.) (.) the Past Tense and the Future Tense, 
 respectively, are used with reference to Ac- 
 tion before, and after, some implied POINT 
 OF TIME, which is 
 
 ($.) to be looked out for, and may be recognised 
 by means of due consideration of what is 
 being spoken about, but 
 
 (7.) which may or may not be the * Present ' of 
 a speaker, or narrator; 
 
 (II.) (a-) such modifications of PAST-Action (and 
 Contingent-Past Action) as we can express 
 by means of did, was, were, have, had, may 
 have, might have, would have, etc., are all 
 expressed by the Hebrew PAST-TENSE; 
 (&) such modifications of FuTURE-Action (and 
 , Subsequent, and Conditional, and Dependent 
 Future-Action) as we can express by means 
 of will, shall, and may, might, should, 
 would, etc., are all expressed by the He- 
 brew FUTURE-TENSE; 
 
 (III.) (.) that which has been, and is still going on, 
 is expressed by the Hebrew PAST-TENSE ; 
 and 
 
 (/3.) that which is now going on, and is expected 
 to go on in future, is expressed by the He- 
 brew FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 [Obs. An Indefinite Tense, or Mode of Expression, in a 
 Modern Language, may (by reason of its indefiniteness) be often* 
 used perhaps in rendering a Tense of an ancient Language. It 
 does not follow that the Tense of an ancient Language is Inde- 
 finite.] 
 
 * But also, very often, such an indefinite expression cannot fairly be used for 
 the Hebrew Tense without great loss of meaning ; and sometimes could not be 
 used at all.
 
 100 USAGE OF TENSES. 152 (IV.) 154. 
 
 (IV.) The SEQUENCE and CON-SEQUENCE of Actions 
 and Events is sometimes marked by a simple use 
 of the Hebrew Past and Future Tenses, where 
 we (in English) require a different mode of ex- 
 pression. But in order to bring out the point 
 of the Hebrew expression, so far as this is at all 
 possible sometimes in English, either some Par- 
 ticle must be introduced, or a Periphrasis must 
 be adopted, which contrasts unfavourably with 
 the terse, simple elegance of the Original. 
 
 [Obs. (.) Some may prefer to regard this as 
 a deduction from (I.), as is 
 
 (/3.) the use of a Hebrew Future-Tense 
 sometimes after certain Particles of 
 Time, to be mentioned hereafter.] 
 
 153. The Principles thus stated will receive illustration 
 as we proceed. We must be content with the bare statement 
 of them at present, and now pass on to the following im- 
 portant Rules. 
 
 154. Rule I. A PAST-Tense, with the prefix "I* of 3, 
 often occurs where the most natural English rendering is by 
 means of a FUTURE or some oblique form of expression. 
 This is said to be a Past with 1 CONVERSIVE.' Thus, for 
 example, from |H3 he gave, we have jrO 1 ! and he shall give 
 [or make, as in E.V.] Ez. xxvi. 8 ; from "tfSW he poured-out, 
 "ij)^1 and he shall pour-out, [or cast, as in E.V. (#.)], and, 
 he shall even pour-out, Lev. xvii. 13. So ^Ofi^l an d they 
 shall pour-out, Lev. xiv. 41, etc. 
 
 * In any one of its many values and, even, that, etc. This ^ is, of course, 
 subject to the same changes of punctuation here as in 3. [See more in 155.]
 
 TENSES W. 1 PREF. 154, RULE II. 155 (c). 101 
 
 Rule II, This prefix 1 before a FuTURE-Tense is simply 
 CONJUNCTIVE, as in 3, the Future-Tense being unaffected 
 by it; e.g., "Ip^'j and he shall (or will) visit, ^pftl an d s ^ e 
 shall (or will) approach, etc. But, 
 
 Rule III. a FuTURE-Tense with the prefix 1 followed by 
 Dagesh F., is rendered as a PAST, with and (or some other 
 value of the \ of 3), and is said to be a ' Future with 1 
 CONVERSIVE.' Thus, for example, from ^s$&\ he will pour- 
 out, ^2^*1 and he poured-out, 2 S. xx. 10. So, from ^Ipft 
 she shall draw near, llpftl and she drew near, Esth. v. 2 ; 
 etc. But, 
 
 Obs. (1) the tf, of 1 Sing. Fut., requires this 1 to have : . 
 - (instead of the ), in order to compensate for the Dag. 
 F. which K does not receive [cp. 6 (#.)]. Thus, from 
 *"lp3K / icill visit, HpSfcO and I visited, etc. 
 
 I : v I : v T * 
 
 (2) The Dag. F., belonging to this prefix, is NOT given } 
 to * (i.e. a * which has ). Thus, I^T.l and he spake, 
 ^HST} and they (m.) spake, etc. 
 
 155. As need scarcely be said, 
 
 (a) the prefix \ of Rules I. & II. (in 154) is subject to 
 the same changes of punctuation as in 3 ; viz., 
 
 (#) before a word which (when without the prefix) begins 
 with *, we have ^1., as in D^O^I and ye (m.) shall dwell, 
 Lev. xxv. 18 (from ZtW\, Rule I.) ; IftS^ and He will 
 teach, Ps. xxv. 9 (from ITS/ 1 . He will teach, Rule II.); etc. 
 
 (c) i. before any other letter with , we have } as in 
 
 DJjinp/l and ye (m.) shall take, DrP^tpl and ye (m.) 
 shall dip, Ex. xii. 22 (from ^Hp'?, Dfi'pSD); 
 ^"inni and Thou wilt renew, Ps. civ. 30 (from 
 Vhr\$); etc. 
 
 ii. also } (not ^) before 13, or ft, or S, even when 
 having a Vowel , thus, feJ^iO} and it [viz., the river] 
 shall stink, Ex. vii. 18; |*H^ and he shall smite 
 Nu.xxiv. 17; "1H31 and he shall fear, Is. xix. 16; etc. 
 
 (d) before any one of the letters J7 PI H 5< with a Compound
 
 102 USAGES OF TENSES. 155 (d) 157 (7.). 
 
 Shva, the 1 takes a * Slight '-vowel agreeing therewith; as in 
 DJVDin and ye (m.) shall serve, Ex. xxiii. 25; DrDflN} and 
 ye (m.) shall love, D. x. 19; *l31^fl a ^d I will speak, Ez. ii. 1, 
 etc. 
 
 [156. Our avowed endeavour being to familiarise the student with facts and 
 usages of the Language, rather than with speculations regarding them, we hardly 
 venture to say what may, however, be allowed perhaps just in passing, viz. that 
 
 (1) careful attention to the Sequence of Events and Actions spoken of (or 
 merely understood, it may be) in connection with a Past with 1, as in Rule I., 
 enables us sometimes to perceive what may be termed a Relative Past and 
 Future," which accounts (possibly) for some Past-Tense forms so employed. Some 
 of the instances above cited may be so explained, we think, in accordance with 
 principles stated in 151, 152. But, of course, one may easily deceive oneself 
 in such Speculations. We ought to add, that 
 
 (2) sometimes a Future form of expression is NOT wanted in English, the due 
 Subordination of clauses being marked by means of some introduced Conjunc- 
 tions, etc. And, moreover, that 
 
 (3) there are instances of } before a Past Tense which do not fall under Rule I., 
 inasmuch as the most natural rendering is by means of a P<w/-Tense rather than 
 a Future. In several of such instances a possible rendering (although not, super 
 ficially, the most natural one) might be offered, in accordance with what was said 
 above in (1), which would favour the extension of Rule I., so as to embrace these 
 instances also. For practical purposes, the Student had better take the prefix "\ 
 before a Past Tense to be Conversive, generally. The matter must be treated of 
 more fully in the Syntax. 
 
 (4) We have a theory with regard to the prefix of Rule III. But this, too, 
 had better be deferred at present.] 
 
 157. It will be found practically useful to have the follow- 
 ing brief statement of some of the above and other Usages, 
 to which we may refer as occasion may arise; 
 
 (a-) the Pluperfect ' " had " is expressed in Hebrew by 
 the ordinary Past Tense ( 148); 
 
 ($.) the Hebrew Past is used also for expressing (i) I 
 would have done so and so," (2) Had I done so and 
 so, then...," and such like; [see also 152]. 
 
 (7.) The Future is sometimes used for (1) " I should, or 
 would, etc., do /' (2) "Should I do so and so, then...," 
 and such like; [see also Obs. X., XI., p. 93] ;
 
 USAGES OF TENSES. 157 (8.J 159 (3). 103 
 
 (8.) also, sometimes, where we must say " then so and so 
 TOOK PLACE," or some such an expression, Cp. 
 151. 
 
 (e.) The Future, with the prefix 1 followed by Dagesh F., 
 is used just like a Past,* in any of the senses of the 
 Past; and 
 
 () the Past with the prefix of 3 [i.e. *), etc.] may prac- 
 tically be used as a Future,* in any of the senses of 
 the Future. Further, 
 
 158. there being only Second Persons in the Hebrew 
 Imperative, the 3 rd and 1 st Person Imperative [as sometimes 
 reckoned, i.e., "Let him do so and so," "Let me..."] are 
 expressed in Hebrew by the 3 rd and 1 st Persons Future. 
 Moreover 
 
 159. the Negative Imperative is in Hebrew expressed by 
 a Future PRECEDED by a Negative Particle ; thus, 
 
 Put not forth [thy hand], Gen. xxii. 12. So, tyfc^fi 
 
 and hearken ye not, 2 K. xviii. 32 ; Wlti&\ 7Xl_ and let them 
 
 (m.) not rejoice, Ps. xxxv. 24. See also Obs. IV., p. 93. And, 
 
 N.B. the Hebrew Imperative must never be used with 
 a Negative Particle. Also 
 
 [(1) The "thou SHALT not," such as in Exod. xx. 13 17, has K? rather than 
 h$. (Cp. Obs. TIL, p. 93.) And so, of course, Ye shall not;" as in -IJVpn N^> 
 JV"13 ye (m.) shall not make a covenant Ju. ii. 2, etc.; 
 
 (2) the Particles ?S and N? are NOT LIMITED TO the uses here mentioned. 
 Other uses of them will be found elsewhere. 
 
 (3) The Hebrew Imperative is sometimes used where we want an Indicative in 
 English.] 
 
 * With and, even, that, or some other value of 1. See Examples in Exercise 
 XXIV., etc. 
 
 t *?X1 may be rendered sometimes neither (or nor) as in E.V. of "1#? ?K1 
 pV "DTP! neither remember iniquity for ever, Is. Ixiv. 8, where the position of 
 ly 1 ? marks emphasis on the for ever, " and do not FOR EVER remember iniquity."
 
 104 USAGES OF TENSES. 160 - 16 (c). 
 
 160. When a Past-Tense form which has the Accent on the Penultima receives 
 the prefix 1, the Accent (if not a Pause-Accent) is generally thrown forwards to 
 the final syllable ; thus, Fl"O? 2 s. m. gives PH^i. [and so Fl?!?, FP^O-1], 
 J??n3 1 s. gives n?rO1, nfvV) 3 s. /. (HtpA.) gives $"$!& etc.' 1 But/ " 
 
 (1) except the I Plu. ; in this the Accent remains on the Penultima, as in 
 13nip.^ ; also, 
 
 (2) except, sometimes, cases such as in 46 of Pt. I. ; thus, PI3 rQ ;> l 
 D. xxvi. 1 ; and 
 
 (3) except some Verbs of the Classes in Sects. XIX., XX., and a few others to 
 be mentioned hereafter. 
 
 161. Obs. (I) the Past with its 1 Convers., and (2) the Future with its ) 
 Convers., always precede their Subject (when this is expressed in direct connec- 
 tion therewith); thus, DHVP WT T 1 ana [the] Egyptians shall know Ex. vii. 5, 
 TH "IpSM* and David reviewed (lit., visited) the people that were with him 2 S. 
 xviii. 1, in n^^l and David sent-forth (ib. 2), HHN H^S ^'Pllt and a certain 
 woman cast Ju. ix. 53, etc. Also (3) the Object may come between the Verb and 
 the Subject; thus, !"IK>O DP*K 1pQ*1 and Moses reviewed them Nu. iii. 16. 
 
 / v T '{. : - 
 
 162. Besides the few usages referred to in the Section above, there are many 
 others which must be reserved at present. The following may be added here in 
 Notes. 
 
 (a.) Verbs 'Fut.( )' are often said to be Intransitive,' J and most of them 
 are so ; thus, }JW he will be great, 3?lj?* he will lie down, etc. Also, 
 
 (6.) some Roots have both the Fut.(_i_)' and Fut.( )' forms, (i.) sometimes 
 in the same sense [thus, 1J3, to deal treacherously, has the Fut.(_i_V form three 
 times and the Fut.( )' form only once; r\l&, to rest, stop, cease, has the 
 Fut.(.J_)' form nine times and the ' Fut.( )' form twice]; and (ii.) sometimes in 
 different senses [thus, "lp, in the sense of 'harvesting,' etc., has the Fut.(_^) ' 
 form ten times, and in the sense of 'being short,' has the Fut.( )' form six 
 times and the Fut.(_!_)' form once; 2irii in the sense of 'being dry,' 'lying 
 waste,' has the ( ) form ten times in the Fut. and once in Imper., and in the 
 sense of 'laying waste,' \\ has the (_i.) form once in Imper.]. And, 
 
 (c.) the <Fut.( )' form sometimes has an Object; as LSE'BM 1 S. xix. 24, 
 and he stripped-off [his clothes (E.V.].^f ** But, 
 
 N.B. some of the forms referred to in (6.), (c.), cannot be understood by the 
 Student at present. 
 
 * See 162 (e, i.). . t See 162 (e, ii.). 
 
 J Also the Verbs I?.' and -Verbs V [ 138 (A) (iv. 2, 3)]. 
 
 The Imper. has generally _i_ for Verbs Fut.(_m,' and for Verbs Fut. ).' 
 Cp. 142. 
 
 II This may be supposed to be a Transitive ' sense corresponding to the other. 
 
 If The (_^) form in the same sense occurs in Ez. xxvi. 16 [lOb^ 11 , see 165 
 (II., 1)]. 
 
 ** The (_:_) form in Is. ix. 19 (in the sense of 'cutting,' E.V. margin, v. 20) 
 has not an Object expressed, but only implied, as in 1 K. iii. 26.
 
 USAGES OF TENSES. 162 (d, fi). 105 
 
 (d.) (i.) A Tense generally precedes its Subject (when this is expressed in 
 direct connection with it, cp. (f.) of 1 1), unless 
 
 (ii.) there be some Emphasis on the Subject ; thus, tJ^Xn vN 1?1 H3 
 thus spake the man unto me, Gen. xxiv. 30, and " the place IS" 5 ! "^^. 
 D^H^X DK' 'IPIK where ( 30) GOD spake with him," Gen. xxxv. 15, 
 but, Vt5HJ3? % 1| 1 n D\n^ : GOD AafA spoAen in His Holiness, Ps. Ix. 8. 
 Cp. also" WpniKJ JJT'ara ox knoweth his owner, with the N^> 7$~&\ 
 JJT /sraeJ doth not know, etc., Is. i. 3, where for Antithesis there is 
 Emphasis on Israel," and so on MY people " following it. Also 
 cp. Is. xvi. 13, 14 ; xx. 2 ; xxvii. 12, etc., with Is. i. 2, 20; xxi. 17; 
 xxiv. 3 ; xl. 5, etc. But, 
 
 (iii.) the Interrogative ^Q who? always precedes its Verb. 
 (e.) It is the RULE to have [see also, more fully, p. 222.] . 
 
 (i.) the -i_ (rather than 1) for the Fut. Kal, (a.) when with the prefix 1 
 Conversive, (8.) when with the Deprecative ?X, (y.) in the expression 
 of a positive wish (i.e., as in J* Ip3? Let the LORD, GOD of the 
 spirits of all flesh, set, etc. (Nu. xxvii. 16); also 
 
 (ii.) the (rather than * ) for the Fut. Hiph. in the same three cases ; 
 thus, (a.) Ipjp^ and he appointed, 1 K. xi. 28 ; (/3.) TpJS IfipP) ^K1. 
 and Aide not Thy Face, Ps. Ixix. 18; (y.) Ip.SM, and /ef him appoint, 
 Gen. xli. 34 ; but 
 
 (iii.) N B. except the 1 s. Fut. Hiph., in which either (Pt. I., 12) or 
 is generally found; thus, "^JO D. ix. 21, T^PN) ! S - xii - J 
 nn?K1 Zech. xi. 8, TJ?1^O . 'l3. T 
 
 (iv.) Some speak of the FUTURE FORMS WITH n ( 144) as the Optative, 
 because the Future is often used Optatively ' with that fl- But, (1) it 
 is unwise so to limit the < Future with n ' ; for, (2) the H is used some- 
 times where there is no Optative ' force ; and, (3) the Future is 
 sometimes used Optatively ' where there is no n. See more of this 
 in the Syntax.
 
 106 
 
 1. TX then. 
 
 2. pk (nothing), ?$ there 
 
 ' is not, Tab. XIII, 
 Note C, .). 
 
 3. BK a man, 74 (/.). 
 
 VOCABULARY II. 
 
 4. |3 a son, Tab. XIII. 4. 
 
 5. y\t f (m.) seed, Tab.X. 1. 
 
 6. \\y(f.-)aneye, i.e. pj?, 
 
 with aff. i^y, etc., 
 Dual. D^y. 
 
 7. D^S (pi. Noun) a /ace, 
 
 countenance. 
 
 8. IB' a prince, Plu. 
 
 onp, 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 (To be translated into 
 * # * For the plan of the Exercise see 11 () 
 N.B. The ... below are put where a sentence is incomplete. 
 
 4 'yD -Tia 3 r\wb bx 
 
 ... 8 d?n T nbna 
 
 ~ - 
 
 Pt. to speak. 2 Moses.* 3 in the mountain of. 4 Sinai. 5 saying. 
 6 p. 92, No. 51. 7 i n My statutes. 8 ye ( TO .) 8 h a ll go. 9 ?3S to eat (Pt. I., 24). 
 Here 1=<Aen. 10 DPI*? (m.) bread, Tab. X. (1). n abundantly. 12 p. 91, No. 4. 
 
 13 H?* P- " 47 No ' 5 > Tabs - X - J> X1L l ' 14 P- 92 > No - 53 ' 15 P- S2 No - 52 - 
 I 6 five. (This is the 'Subject' of the sentence, here.) 17 a hundred (the 'Object'). 
 
 18 "pH K., Pi., Hithp. to go, walk. I 9 in your (m.) midst (i.e., in the midst of 
 you), fr. qir) Tab. XIII. (J, .). 20 p . 90 , No. 4. 21 p . 91, No. 10. 22 the 
 pride of. 23 y Our ( m .) strength. 24 n/K' Ht^A. to cause to send, to send. 
 25 3 against. 26 the beast of. 27 74 (&.). 28 ^3^ Pi. to bereave. 29 e y #tpA. 
 to make few. 30 p. 92, No. 47. 31 (For thb and the next word, see p. 56, Nos. 
 
 * Words marked (*) need not be given again in the Notes.
 
 107 
 
 : cm 
 
 : 61 riD) 
 
 31, 32). 32 they forsook ME. 33 ^p p,., to offer incense. 34 to gods (p. 3, 
 Note t). 3 s "ins another* (m.). 36 ^^ Pi., to profane, break (a covenant). 
 37 p. 92, No. 41. 38 ^no Hiph., to hide. 39 w ith a rod. 40 flVtt (/.) a cove- 
 nant. 41 B'lp Pi. , to sanctify. 42 p. 91, No. 6. 43^3 Pt., to seek, enquire. 
 [Dagesh Forte is often dropped from the pj. 44 yrn to search. 45 behold I. 
 46 [am] coming. 47 pj> to dwell. 48 ^-p to call [often 'governs' 7], 49 a 
 city, city of. 50 p3 to suck. 81 the milk of. 52 ^D to bear. 6 3 D^>D P., to 
 deliver. 54 -)^p to be short. 55 ^J (/.) a hand, i.e., T with aff. IT, etc., Dual 
 D'.T, i.e. *1\* 56 that it cannot redeem," E.V., (lit-, from redemption) 
 57 npD to open (eyes). 58 blind (men). 59 J^T Pt., to leap. 6 like the hart. 
 61 a lame (man). 62 p . 93) N O . 8 6 [ 140 (S., Hi.)]. 63 The Holy ONE of. 
 64 p. 92, No. 76. 65 the garments of. 66 vengeance. 67 [as] clothing. 68 former 
 things (/.). 69 p1S to be righteous. 70 p. 92, No. 45. 
 
 * Words marked (*) need not be given again in the Notes. 
 
 t by [them thai are] not. 
 
 t Vocab. I (1). 
 
 p. 60 (19). 
 
 || From "qW, see No. 19.
 
 108 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11, ? /*.). 
 
 And GOD heard* 1 their groaning, 9 and GOD remembered* 3 
 His Covenant. 4 Why* will the bush 7 not burn 6 ? -And 
 Moses hid* 8 his face. 9 And Aaron 10 spake* 11 all 12 the words" 
 which The LORD spake 11 to Moses. And I will takef 14 you 
 (m.) to Me for a people," and ye-shall-knowf 18 that I The 
 LORD [am] your GOD. 
 
 And Moses wrote* 1 ' this Law. 18 In-order-that 19 they (m.)- 
 may-hear 1 [ Future Tense]^ an d in-order-that 19 they (w._)-may- 
 learn 40 [ Fut " re Tensf O, and-that 2 ' they-may-fearf 22 ... and-that 21 
 they-may-observef 23 to-do 2 * all 12 the words 13 of this Law. 18 
 And Jeshurun 25 waxed-fat,* 28 and kicked.* 27 And they (m.}- 
 forgat* 28 His doings. 29 And they (wz.)-spake* 11 against 30 GOD. 
 And HE-rained* 31 upon them (m.) Manna. 82 
 
 Hear-thou 1 (m.) !> n, 141 (y, )]^ MY people, and I-will 
 speak. 11 And I-will dwellf 33 in the midst 34 of Jerusalem, 35 
 and Jerusalem 35 shall-be-calledf 38 the city" of the truth. 38 Let 
 your (m.) hands 39 (f.) be-strong. 40 And proclaim-ye (Hebr. 
 cause-ye (m.) to hear 1 ) the sound 41 of His Praise. 42 
 
 (Put. ). Verb to precede Noun. 7 njp. 8 inD Hiph. 9 D S 3Q, a Noun of Plural 
 form. 10 pqK. n inPr. 12^3.'' 13 Tab. IX. 14 Hp!?. * 15 DJ^. 
 
 ]7 nrD Fut. (j_). 8 n-vin. 19 ]?p!?. ^no 1 ?. 21^ 22 N -,^ 
 
 (Fut.-J_). 24 J-liB^V. J^. 26 p'^ (Fut. ). 27 Bjn (Fut. ). 
 29 ni^J?^. 30 2 prefix. 31 -)B D jcffpA. 32 |jp. 33 pL % *. 31 ^lJ.J-1 Tab. XIII. (J, .) 
 35D^n':(/.) 36 K -|p ^VipA. 37 Ty. 38nX. TJ, Da. Onj. [See 59 ($.)]. 
 40 ptn (Fut. -r-). The PI has and the prefixes have in the Fut. Kai of this 
 Verb; thus, pTH*, ptnH, etc. See more in next Section. 41 *?ip (i.e., the same) 
 42 iYpnn -- * Fut. with 1 Convers. t Past with 1 Convers. 
 
 END or THE FIRST PART OF THE EXERCISE BOOK.
 
 SECOND PART 
 
 EXERCISE-BOOK,
 
 109 
 
 SECTION XIII. 
 
 VERBS. VARIATIONS. 
 
 163. For Variations from Tab. XIV. in regard to some 
 additional endings, see 147; for j instead of HJ, see 143. 
 
 There are some other important Variations : 
 I. PAUSE FORMS. 
 
 164. Changes of Vocalization [in some forms] occur in Pause, 
 i.e. at the end of a Verse, a Sentence, or a Clause, where a Stop 
 is made. 
 
 (a.) As said in Pt. 1. 49, Sittuk (t~r) and Ethnakh (~) are 
 especially the 'Pause '-Accents; but 
 
 (/3.) Pause-forms are found sometimes with other Accents 
 also [see 167]. 
 
 (7.) The 2 pi. m. &/. of all Past Tenses are unchanged in 
 Pause. 
 
 (8.) The Pause-forms of ' Infs. w. Pron. AfFs.' are given in 
 Tab. XV. [The only change is with the 2 s. m. Aff.]. 
 
 (e.) The Pause-forms of Participles are given in Appendix 
 (B) to Tab. XIV. [The only change is in the s. /. 
 form H~~ ~, which sometimes becomes \T\~ ^ in Pause. 
 Cp.139(/3,f).] 
 
 KB. All words in Tab. XIV (except the Past 2 pi. m. &f. 
 and Infs. w. Pron.-Affs.) have the ordinary Tone-accent on that 
 syllable in which the 2 a Rt-letter is involved : whether this 
 2 d Rt-letter 
 
 (I.) bears a vowel as in *lp3 or 
 
 (II.) has Moving as in PHpS. 
 
 VT | : T T.
 
 110 PAUSE-FORMS 164, 165. 
 
 The Eules for the 'Pause '-forms of words in Tab XIV (and the 
 like) may be given in regard to these two great Classes (I.) and 
 (II.) as follows : 
 
 165. (I.) When the 2 d Et-letter bears a Vowel, 
 
 (a.) if that Vowel be Long, as in *?j3*, njnSj;), etc., the 
 word is generally unchanged in Pause ; 
 
 03.) if that Vowel be Short, as TJJS, B, etc., this Short 
 Vowel is generally lengthened* into the corresponding 
 Long Vowel,f as in J^NCfr. ^), J^(fr. 31?) etc. 
 But 
 
 (7.) the ~ of a Niph. Future (Tab. XIV.) remains in Pause, 
 as in ^S3f5 "^P^fi* etc.; and, more generally, it 
 may be said that 
 
 (S.) [the simple utterance , which is given sometimes for 
 Euphony and Ease of pronunciation, instead of the 
 more precise , is found (not seldom) in Pause; thus 
 nSttpTl Imper. Hiph. 2 s. m., Ps. Ixix. 24, for nypH, 
 etc.]. 
 
 * (a). This great General Rule holds also in the forms J3S, 3$, :< ? T *?, 
 
 :-irnx, and so :rifM?3, npp T , 'j-irij^, jnpjn?, ^rnuj; '/rp^n, *$$$, 
 *twg> ; _:njrnn, -liyjin [Sect, xv.], rrinsri [Sect xvi.], ' Mp^JJDl; 
 mp^n^n, :*ri5^nrin, etc. 
 
 (b). But the is often retained [see (S)] not only 
 
 (i.) in such forms, thus fl"IDJ Ps. cii. 26, ^pJ^G. xrvii. 2, etc. ; and so in other 
 Voices as iiirOJIp 2 s. m. Past ~Pi. [ 138 (0V i.] Ps. Ixxxix. 45, r)JME? Ps. Ixxxviii. 
 14, -13^3 1 pL Past Niph. (Jer. vii. 10), -UTSn 1 pi. Past Hiph. (1 S. xxx. 22) of 
 ^3 [Sect. XVI.], etc. ; but also 
 
 (ii.) in Fut. forms ending in (113 ) as tnJl^pn 3 pi./. Fut. JT. (Is. xxxii. 3), 
 and so tru^nnri 3 pi./. Fut. K. Tab. XVI (1) [Mi', vii. 16], etc. ; and 
 
 (iii.) some others. 
 
 f For the great Leading Eules, see Pt. I. 19.
 
 PAUSE-FORMS 165, 166. Ill 
 
 II. When the 2 d Rt-letter has Shva, a Vowel is given* to it 
 in Pause. This Yowel is generally the same as either 
 
 (i) the Yowel which the 2 d Rt-letter HAS IN THE FIRST word 
 of the Tense or set [see examples below] ; or 
 
 (ii) the Yowel which the 2 d Et-letter TAKES IN PAUSE in the 
 FIRST word of the Tense or set. Thus, 
 
 (i.) (a) The Pause-form of -lip?* 3 pi. m. Fut. R. is tVTJa* ; i*. the Pause-vowel 
 for the 2 d Rt-letter is , this being the Vowel of the 2 d Et-letter in the 
 first word of the Tense (or set) viz. 1pB* 3 s. m. ; 
 
 ,i) So in Niph. Fut., the Pause-form of HpB* 3 pi. . is BI^B'., the first 
 word of the set being IgB* 3 s. m. So, in Pi., V1J2B'. 3 pi. m., p. M*ljjS. 
 
 () So, for the 1 s. & 1 pi. Fut. w. the n of 144, the forms are 
 
 Kal rnpBK 1 s., p. :rni7B, & JTlpBJ 1 pi., p. JrnjfflJ ; [also ii (ft)] ; 
 
 Niph. rnpss i s., P . :nii7.ss, & n-fgaa 1 pi., P . :rnj?B3 -, 
 
 etc., etc. 
 
 (ii.) (a) The Pause-form of }*1J33 3 pi. Past Kal is t-H^B, the Pause-rowel being 
 because the 2 d Et-letter TAKES for its Pause-vowel in the first 
 word of the set (viz. TP3 3 8. m., p. JTJ5B) ; 
 
 e>) So in the Fut. Sal of the ( )-form, the Pause-form of Wjk\ 3 pi. m. is 
 9J>?3^ , because W?h\ 3 8. m. (the first word of the set) has the Pause-form 
 BQ^. So in the 1 s. and 1 pi. w. then of $ 144,thusn^S p.'.n^^. 
 
 N.B. (iii.) Sometimes we find the of the ^$3 form of Past Tense [ 188 (A)], 
 instead of the for the -s- of the 7J/3 form in ii (a) ; thus J-ITHC 1 > Pause-form of 
 ^IH 3 pi. Past Kal of ^IP! , has the [of the unused 3 s. m. Past ^Tin] instead of 
 for the of "?in. 
 
 166. (a.) Often no further change is made by the Pause. But 
 
 (J.) If a SLIGHT- vowel precedes the Shva which is to be re- 
 
 placed by a Yowel in Pause, that SLIGHT- vowel disappears (there 
 
 being no longer any need of it) when this Shva has given place 
 
 * Except (i.) Infinitives with Affs. ; (ii.) Participles, see 164 (5) & () ; and (iii.) 
 a few words the regular Pause-form of which is NOT adopted in Pause.
 
 112 PAUSE-FORMS 166. 
 
 to a Vowel. The Shva (Simple, or Compound), which had given 
 place to the Slight- vowel, then returns ; thus, 
 
 (i.) of VJJ53 Imper. K. 2 pi. m. (fr. 1J5S) the Pause-form is 
 
 t'nfjS, and of H$? (& n the Pause-form is t 
 So 
 
 (ii.) of 1J (fr. W, p. 1J$) we have aptt And so 
 
 (iii.) the Pause-forms of "0? f ^3*?f?> [Imper. 2 s. m. w. |-j, 
 141 (7)], would be ffTfff fr. Tfa :rm(J fr. r^ 
 (P- ::r j?)> and 
 
 (iv.) the Pause-form of V^CN-l [see 171 (i.)] is &&$$ (fr. 
 
 Tbsp; and, of mr '[ 171 (ii)], :mv (fr. 
 
 (c). The Pause-forms of the Hithp. Past,f Imper., & Fut., have 
 to the 2 d Rt-letter, thus ^J^H 3 8 . m , p as t, J^'WlPl 
 
 Mi. i. 10 (Kn) Imper. 2 s. /., 'T^JlK 1 s . Fut., '^p^? 
 3 pi. m. Fut., etc. ; and consequently, [since 
 
 N.B. generally ~ is given before M for Euphony], J 
 
 (rf). when the 2 d Rt-letter is PI, the 1 st Rt-letter has Tin these 
 Hithp. Pause-forms ; thus EPOJV 3 s. m. Fut., t^PPttPlfi 2 pi. m. 
 Fut., etc. ; and so, with 2 d Rt-letter Pi, we have JifintpPT] 3 pi. 
 Past w. 1 Conv. (of T1&). 
 
 (e). The j of 145 is often found at the end of Pause-forms 
 also ; thus, in v. 28 of Ps. civ. Ppp <! (of *3jfi fr. BJT^X So v . 22 
 :p^ (of ttSTV, fr. tTf. p. iflTt), in v. 30 1^1??'. (of ^^., 
 
 fr. ^S*), & so . 29 P7^?*> 22 P?P^!! [! to compensate for the 
 
 * This Pause-form occurs Na. ii. 9 with the Accent T merely. Cp. 167 (ii, a). 
 
 t Except, of course, the 2 pi. m. &/. Past. 
 
 t As in 6 (d} ; and so VH$ fr. D'n.S Tab. XIII. 2, etc. 
 
 i Observe, the Accent is brought then upon the last syllable.
 
 PAUSE-FORMS 167, 113 
 
 Dag. F. of Wphl ; . 26 PJ9JT (of ^W, fr. ^Pty, so . 27 
 l^!, etc. So also in 146. 
 
 167. (i.) The Pause-form of a word is generally (but not 
 necessarily always)* adopted in Pause. 
 
 (ii.) In some Pause-forms a more sonorous pronunciation is 
 given to words. And, as there seems to be no reason why the 
 more sonorous pronunciation should be limited to a place of 
 Pause, so we find in the Bible several instances of such f 
 
 (a), with OTHER DISJUNCTIVE Accents (i.e. where there is a 
 stop less than that of a Pause) ; also, sometimes, 
 
 (/3). with CONJUNCTIVE Accents (i.e. where there is no stop 
 at all, but the contrary). 
 
 Thus, for example, 0) with -*- as tt3>* G. xix. 4,() w. (very 
 often) as [% Is. xv. 5, ^TO 2 K. xvii. 15 ; (s) with 
 r (often) as JT T Is. xiv. 27, ^gj ix. 9, f 37 xxvii. 10, 
 ingb*. kv. 13 ; ( 4 ) w. i as ^ Ez. xliv. 5, W&. Is. 
 vi. 10 ; (5) w. ^ (Pashtd) as $?! Is. xxxiii. 20, W&J 
 Is. li. 6, WfiB>' Dan. ix. 19 [fr. ng&P 141 ( 7> 2)], 
 etc. ; and ( 6 ) with Conjunctives, as ^5^ 1 S. yii. 17, 
 
 TV? ju. xix. 5, 
 
 * Thus ^5y I^y rt>a* Ps. cxix. 65 (instead of ?ft3y as in Ps. cxvi. 16, w. ^). 
 So n$3 [Sect. XV.] Ps. xlviii..5, and -1K|n> Ps. xciv. 5. But -I^.Ps. xlr. 6 may 
 hardly be reckoned here ; because the verse has -^- in it [Pt. I. 68], and in that 
 case not seldom occurs without Pause-form (though often also with the Pause- 
 form, as in *1OJ? Ps. i. 1, etc. 
 
 t For expressing energy, or for energy of expression, or for emphasis, or for 
 rhythmic force, etc.) 
 
 % The three last forms were just mentioned in 138 (A, v), 141 (a, Note). The 
 bare mention of them was all that could well be made then.
 
 113* PRACTICE ON PAUSE-FORMS, 
 
 The Student may now, for Practice," parse the following 
 Pause-forms. It will be advisable also to write out the SIMPLE 
 WORDS OF WHICH THESE ARE THE PAUSE-FORMS: - 
 
 PRACTICE ON PAUSE-FORMS. 
 
 ** The references (I) & (II) are to the mam divisions of 165* 
 
 w twig ,rtf ii. & Note (*)] jjsjatf ,(i, ) nay 
 
 nafofc in. i (*)] imp l 'jha& ,:vibtffi in. i ()] irtief* 
 
 A" T ' I- T ' A ' i : ' : 
 
 ,[ii. i, & 138 (A) (iii.)] :fer .vnsnn .vnsr frwri 
 :ni T 33 in. i co] snibefc I 11 - J > & 138 ( A ) (")] :nv|>n 
 [ P . 89(*), (ii.)] n- 
 
 i 166. j (ii.)]
 
 [The Student may now pass on to the EXERCISES on pp. 125-127, after looking at 
 the intervening pages sufficiently for him to be able to refer thereto for information 
 which he may require respecting the forms of certain Verbs in the Exercises. 
 References to these pages will be rendered more easy by the following INDEX.] 
 
 INDEX FOB PAGES 113-124. 
 
 167 (i.) Pause-forms generally (NOT always) used in Pause . . . . p. 113 
 (ii.) Pause-forms used also, sometimes, when NOT in Pause . . . p. 113 
 168 (i.) A Long-Towel, followed by Quiescent Shva, shortened at the 
 end of a word (a) if followed by (~) Makkeph, (j3) when the 
 
 Accent is 'turned back' [Pt. 1, 46] p 114 
 
 (ii.) ' Furtive' to be under PI , and under n or y at the end of 
 
 a word, after any Long-vowel except ...... p. 114 
 
 (iii. ). Table of 'Compensation '-vowels for an omiited Dagesh . p. 115 
 (iv.) Moving Shva takes a Compound form under any one of the 
 
 four letters y PI n K p. 115 
 
 (v.) A ' Slight '-vowel, and a Beal Short-vowel, preceding such, a 
 
 Compound Shva, adopt a corresponding form . . . . p. 115 
 169-179. Verbs having [N], n, H, or y, for 1 st Et-letter ... pp. 115-120 
 
 180. Verbs having K,n,n, or y, for 2< Et-letter p. 120 
 
 [& App* pp. 321 & 322, 368 & 369] 
 
 181. Verbs having r,H, or y, for 3 d Et-letter p. 120 
 
 [& App* pp. 370 to 374] 
 
 182. Verbs having 1 in the Eoot p. 121 
 
 183. Verbs having |, or n, for 3 d Et-letter pp. 121 & 122 
 
 184. Verbs having one of the six letters D D 3 *1 3 3 in the 
 
 Eoot pp. 122-124 
 
 185. Verb-forms may have Pron-Affs. attached to them . . . pp.124 
 186. Table of SEVEN important CLASSES of Variations . * . pp. 124
 
 CERTAIN NECESSARY VARIATIONS 168. 
 
 II. CERTAIN NECESSARY VARIATIONS. 
 168. The Student knows already from Pt. I. that 
 
 (i.) A Long- vowel, followed by Quiescent -r, is generally 
 shortened if the Accent be removed from it [Pt. I. 
 55 (9, 6)] ; 
 
 (a), for some examples of this Shortening* when 
 Makkeph (~) follows the word,t see ' [Note] ' in 
 the 'Notes on Tab. XIV.' 
 
 (/8). As examples of this Shortening when the Accent 
 is 'turned back' [Pt. I. 46] J we have D&' IHDFlS 
 for [the workers of mischief] to be hid there (Job 
 xxxiv. 22, Inf. N. for TTBTlS), and JJH ^ ^3 
 he shall not be visited by evil (Prov. xix. 23, 
 3 s. m. Fut. N. for IDS*), etc. 
 
 K" T ' 
 
 (ii.) Beneath FT (i.e. M with Mappek), and beneath PI & ^ at 
 the end of a word, -=- must be put after any Long- vowel 
 except ; and this -= is called ' Furtive Pathakh,' and 
 is pronounced before the letter beneath which it stands ; 
 Cp. Pt. I. 60. 
 
 [Obs. We need not say ' at the end of a word' (and so 
 vowelless) in the case of FT ; for the dot stands in 
 the PI to show that it is not Quiescent, and it is 
 only when ' at the end of a word' $ that Fl is ever 
 Quiescent] : 
 
 (iii.) (a). There must be variation from Tab. XIV. by the 
 omission of Dag. F. where it would have to stand in one 
 
 * For the Vowel to be chosen, in each case, see the great Leading Rules in Pt. I. 
 $19. 
 t Thus (fr. VajIPl) n3-^3J. fl Zech. ix. 2. But ^nVr^3?J Josh, xviii. 20, in which 
 
 \ is not shortened ; and so E>K'33J Ex. xxi. 37. 
 
 t But DPS Din Is. xli. 7, in some Bihles: DJ?5 D^'lH in some. 
 
 ~A T I J ~A T J 
 
 And therefore at the end of a syllable, and so vowelless.
 
 FIRST RT.-LETTER GUTTURAL 169. 115 
 
 of the five letters ^llPlX which' do not receive Dagesh 
 [Pt. I. 49] ; and, by reason of this, 
 
 OS). 'Compensation' (as it is called), for an omitted Dag. F., 
 is often made 
 
 into ~ 
 
 by lengthening 
 
 & into ~ 
 
 Cp.Pt.I. 19: 
 
 -r (6) & ^ into J - 
 
 (iv.) A Moving Shva beneath any one of the four letters 
 yn!"!K takes a Compound form [Pt. I. 24] ; and 
 
 (v.) (a). A ' Slight '-vowel, and (/3) A Real Short- vowel, pre- 
 ceding such a Compound-Shva, generally adopts the 
 form which agrees with that Compound-Shva [Cp. 
 ), &169(a, ii)]. 
 
 [Note. There are some further Variations in the case of Verbs having in the Root 
 one of the four letters ynnX mentioned in (iv.) above.] 
 
 III. FIRST ROOT-LETTER |"|, h, or fy 
 
 169. [Note, (a.) Verbs having X as l st Rt-letter (i.e. tf'fi) agree 
 in many parts with those having Pi , PI , or y, as 1 st Rt- 
 letter ; but, (#.) there are some so important differences 
 between the two sets of Verbs that it is best to give a 
 special Section (XIV.) to the Verbs fct'fi, and to pro- 
 ceed now with the others only, to 179]. 
 
 Verbs having PI, PI, or y, as 1 st Rt-letter have 
 
 (a). A Compound Shva under the 1 st Rt-letter not only 
 (i.) where there is Shva Moving in Tab. XIV. ; thus, 
 
 Dpn^ Hke En?> etc< ; lbufc also 
 
 (ii.) sometimes where Shva is Quiescent in Tab. XIV ; 
 thus *^! corresponding to *^ffi\, and so 3W. to 
 C'ST prefix-letters generally taking -* before -^r,
 
 116 FIRST RT.-LETTER GUTTURAL 169, 170. 
 
 and before ^-, and (5) before -^r. See Tab. 
 XVI (1); also 
 
 (/9). simple T Quiescent, sometimes, under the 1 st Rt-letter, 
 with a or ~ TO THE PREFIX-LETTER AS IN (a, ii.) ; 
 thus, for example, 
 
 a.) mS ipnS &rk t DhinS etc., (inf. K. w. <?),* 
 
 \ ' v : ~ * |v " ' v ; * v ; - " 
 
 and 
 [(ii.) titirh Is. xlvii. 14, for which see 137 (2, Note*) 
 
 (iii ) "W and mf> 3 s. m. Fut. K., TlStt 3 s. m. Past 
 
 \iii./ v _ K- ; v \.- : : 
 
 andD?Wt s. m. Partic. Niph. [Cp. Tab. 
 XVI (1 j], etc. 
 
 [Note. The simple -r- often occurs under H as 1 st Rt- 
 letter]. 
 
 170. The Fut. K. (except the 1 s.) has one or other of the four 
 
 forms nby^ ^V!, -0?!, l^ ' anc ^ ^ ma y ^ e 8a ^ *^ at ' as * n 
 these four words, the prefixes jfV take 
 
 (i.) generally -*-% when the 2 d Rt-letter bears, and 
 (ii.) generally when the 2 a Rt-letter bears -=- . But 
 
 (iii.) when, in derived forms, the vowel is removed from 2 d 
 Rt-letter, there is sometimes an interchange of these 
 vowels for the JJV, as in (i) !|rn/bnj (ft.. ^bH^ w . aff. 
 1H- Urn, Sect. XXII.), (2) ^TIT (fr. 7W).8 
 
 (iv.) N.B. The prefix K takes ^ as in Tab. XIV, and the 
 1 st Rt-letter takes sometimes -T-, sometimes ^ ; thus 
 
 (a) But we have also Bbrft, "IJnJ?, Ktoflb, PI^, etc., like Tab. XVI (1). 
 Also (4) with 3 we have "fatt 1 Ghr. XT. 26. 
 t For "13^3 Eccl. v. 8, some have the anomalous "13J??. . 
 
 1 With a few exceptions, as f|'^ftj Pr. x. 3, 6)'^ Ps. xxix. 9, MS'^Jp Ez. xxxiv.21. 
 $ The form ^Sqr\ (3 s./. Fut. JL of ^H) Ex. ix. 23, Ps. Ixxiii. 9, is rare. 
 | So H^riNI ^. Fut. 1 s. (^nK), w. the H of 144.
 
 FIRST RT. -LETTER GUTTURAL 170, 171. 117 
 
 (i) ^riK, ^iN, (2) apK* ["D?n, 168 (i a)], 
 IDPIK, ebns, (s) -ay* ntow, Tfaj$, etc. 
 
 . (a) Some Verbs have different senses, or shades of 
 sense, in the two forms of (i.) and (ii.) above; thus 
 KHIT he will plough, 2H1T he will be deaf (also he will le 
 silent). 
 
 (b) VSH has the form VbPP ordinarily, but the other form 
 JffirT in Pause. So 'fBSnft, WSPP, & ^SH^- 
 
 jrann tttsrv trrasrv 
 
 I IT : v> IT : :> I IT; v 
 
 171. A Compound-Shva is always Moving.* Therefore it can 
 never stand when the following letter is to have Shva, but 
 (unless it gives place to a simple Quiescent) f it must always be 
 replaced by a Slight- vowel. Thus (i.) from ibj^ 3 s. m. Fut. K., 
 we have [Tab. XVI (i)] rOSP 3 pi. m. t and so HOT 2 s./., 
 ^P^H 2 pi. m. ; the being generally replaced by as Slight- 
 vowel. 
 
 (ii.) So, from ygj we have m fr. T)^, ^T\T(\ etc. ; 
 the ^ being generally replaced by as Slight-vowel. 
 And 
 
 [(iii.) so is replaced by - before Shva, in Hoph. 179]. 
 
 (iv.) So, for 1 s. Put. K. w. the H of 144, we have PQT^ 
 (fr. a'$K), P1J^ (fr. ^JK), ngTJN (fr. ^);t [and, 
 so PITm (fr. ninK)]. But observe, for the 1 s. Fut., 
 
 , (v.) forms in which simple Quiescent occurs under the 1 st 
 Rt-letter, as H'JSlVK (fr. "Op), are the same as rnpSK (fr. 
 
 * It is only a Moving Shva that takes a compound form, 
 t As in is'py! Ps. v. 12 (-1^?! Ps. xxv. 2, Ixviii. 4), TPj Ez. xxvi. 18 
 ID five other places), etc. 
 
 J The form !"l3"in^t G. xxvii. 41, with is rare.
 
 118 FIRST RT. -LETTER GUTTURAL 171-74. 
 
 (vi,) So the 1 pi. Fut. K. witli the H of 144, has the forms (i) 
 !"niW, Plu^nX with a Slight- vowel under the 1 st Bt-letter ; and 
 (2) ITaW, n^Srii, with the Quiescent. 
 
 172. It does not follow from 171 that a Slight- vowel occurs 
 only in such cases. On the contrary, the help of the Slight- 
 vowel is sometimes given in a derived form, although the simple 
 word has Quiescent. Thus, ^fift^ occurs only with Quies- 
 cent, but we have (w. Aff. 1H ^ him, Sect. XXII.) IJTW} 
 2 Kings xvii. 4. 
 
 173. In the Imper. JT. 2 s. /. & 2 pi. m. these Verbs generally 
 agree with Tab. XIV, i.e. the Slight-vowel for the 1 st Rt- 
 letter is generally , as in **lp& 'Hptf. [But we find ^3fc?n 
 Is. xlvii. 2, where the is a real Short- vowel, (the Quies- 
 cent being followed by Dag. L.)]. 
 
 174. In all the instances mentioned in 171-173, the 
 ' Slight '-vowel is no longer needed when, the word being in 
 Pause, the 2 d Rt-letter has a vowel. The Compound Shva then 
 returns to the 1 st Bt-letter ; thus, 
 
 (a.) mfaSP (Pause-form of !HD^_), tfYlIT (of ^TlIT), etc. ; 
 
 .) jrnSytf (of rrf$), *rnhitt (of rrastt), etc. 
 
 (7.) And so in the Imperative, J^V (Pause-form 
 
 (of m.* t 
 
 * A Pause -form sometimes occurs of a word which itself nowhere occurs ; thus, 
 vynf! Is. xliv. 27, for *510 which does not occur anywhere. 
 
 [Obs. (1) The (in this word *l"in) is Pause-vowel for =-. The Imper. 2 s. m. of 
 IIP! to be dry, would be 3pQ (like 2^0.1, 3^^)- The only 2 B. m. Imper. of lin 
 which occurs is I'nn. lay waste, Jer. 1. 21. 
 
 (2) The -5T (of the n) may be supposed to belong to the same class as the 3 of J5 
 in nilp. See more in ' Appendix.' 
 
 t So Jl^in Pause-form of -iSin ( 173) fr. Vlp 2 e. m. And so we should have 
 rn^HX (p. 116, Note ||), and JHlpHX for nifinK ( 171, iv)-
 
 FIRST RT. -LETTER GUTTURAL 175-78. 119 
 
 175. Two examples from the Niph. Yoice were adduced in 
 169 (y3, iii.). Here we may add that 
 
 In Niph. (i) the prefix 3 (Past and Partic.) has generally*, 
 but (2) the prefix PI (in the Inf. and Imp.), and the prefixes JJYtf 
 (in the Fut.) have -f ; see Tab. XYI (1). Moreover 
 
 176. (i.) the 1 st Rt-letter has (a) sometimes , as in 
 and (/?) sometimes , as in TWi [Cp. 169 (/3, iii.)]. 
 
 (ii.) When, however, the 2 d Rt-letter has T , the 1 st Rt-letter 
 cannot ever have . It must then have either (i) a Slight-vowel, 
 as in Jlftm to-im, toSra or (2) a Quiescent T , as in tofcTO, 
 "But 
 
 [N.B. the ' Slight '- vowel of (ii, i) is not needed in Pause, 
 because then the 2 d Rt-letter has a vowel ; thus, we have trn^W 
 3 s. / Past N-iph. in Pause, and so rtBttW and tfSBTO 3 'pi! 
 
 IT .; IT : v " 
 
 Past]. 
 
 177. In Pi., Pu., and HITHP., these Yerbs agree with Tab. 
 XIY. 
 
 178. In Hiph. the 1 st Rt-letter has (i.) sometimes T (pre- 
 ceded by in Past, and by in other parts), as in ^TWPl, 
 p^WJb, PW*]> etc. ; but (ii.) more often preceded by in 
 Past,J as in TiyPl, ^""O^n, etc., and (iii.) preceded by 
 in Inf., Partic., Imp., & Fut. [Tab. XVI (1)] ; also (iv.) some- 
 times f preceded by in the Past, especially 
 
 N.B. in the 2 & 1 sing, and 2 pi. when with the pref. 1 ; thus 
 
 yrn, 'rn:ttni : (but wjyro, QJ$rirjpn (but Drnirn), etc.; 
 
 * Also (i) rarely in the Past, as in 0X302 2 s. in. (for the N see Sect. XIX.) ; 
 and (ii) sometimes in Partic. forms, as in Sect. XX., and so ^^3 Ps. Lxxxix. 8, and 
 nb-jqj as well as r\:T$l and 0790?, etc., and so niD^J, etc.' 
 
 t To compensate for the Dag. F., which cannot stand in the letters ynPlS?. 
 
 | A preceded hy , as in rfOy.n (2 a. m.) Josh. vii. 7, is rare.
 
 120 A ROOT-LETTER GUTTURAL 178-81. 
 
 but also Vjlpinni 1 S. xvii. 35 (where the Accent is not thrown 
 forward, 160). 
 
 [Note (). From some Roots, only forms occur. So those 
 in (i) and ppj Fut. K. And so, 
 
 (&) IBtfa (Neh. x. 39) Inf. Hiph. w. 3, as in Deut. xxvi. 12 
 IJPy*? w. h (see p. 79, Note t) ; and "ib^ Fut. JT.] 
 
 179. In Hoph. the 1 st Rt-letter has generally* agreeing 
 with the (6) of the Voice, and this is replaced by (#, as 
 a ' Slight'- vowel) when the 2 d Rt-letter has . Tab. XYI (1). 
 
 [N.B. The ' Slight '-vowel is not needed in Pause, because 
 then the 2 d Rt-letter has a vowel: thus, we have JPl^inn 3 s./. 
 
 T IT T; T 
 
 Past Hoph. in Pause.] 
 
 IY. SECOND ROOT-LETTER tf , Pi, Fl, or J?. 
 
 180. For the purposes of this Exercise-book, the Variations 
 when the 2 d Rt-letter is tf, Fl, M, or JJ, are sufficiently given in 
 Tab. XVI (2). Some additional remarks shall be given in an 
 Appendix. 
 
 V. THIRD ROOT-LETTER H, H, or y. 
 
 181. The Variations when the 3 d Rt-letter is ft, H, or ^, are 
 sufficiently given in Tab. XVI (3), with the following addi- 
 tions : 
 
 (1.) (a) The Furtive under FT, H, or ^, at the end of a 
 word, after any Long- Vowel (other than ), is dropped 
 when, by any addition being made to the word, the 
 3 d Rt-letter is no longer at the end. Thus, fr. Inf. 
 Constr. rb& (Abs. rk& or RW), we have *nS^ my 
 
 - *. ; -\.T -VT V;T 
 
 sending, etc ; and fr. the Partic. fT?^ s. m., we have 
 
 vrhw pi. m.-> & fr. rrbfe? s. m., nrrta? or 
 
 VI* - v. T \.T : 
 
 s./., etc. 
 
 * But we have also ; thus ^S^n Job xxx. 15, which is just like 1j5pn.
 
 182, 183. 121 
 
 (/S) The dot of H is no longer wanted when, by any addi- 
 tion being made to the word, the 3 d Rt-letter is no 
 longer at the end. The dot (Mappek) is always 
 dropped then ; thus, fr. P113 3 s. m. Past, NPD3 Ez. 
 xxxi. 5 (for nQ$) 3 s. /., fiPQf 2 s. m. } etc. 
 
 Further remarks will be given in the Appendix. 
 
 VI. VERBS WITH *1 IN THE ROOT. 
 
 182. (i.) Verbs whose 1 st Rt-letter is 1 agree with Tab. XIV 
 
 except that, in the N<j>., the prefixes H and jfVK have 
 (instead of followed by Dag. F.) ; thus, NSTH 
 Inf. N<f>., NSm 1 s. Fut., 1NV 3 pi. m. Fut., etc. 
 
 (ii.) Verbs whose 2 d Rt-letter is 1 agree with Tab. XIV 
 except that, in PL, Pu, & H6. y 
 
 (a) the Dag. F., for those three Voices, 
 cannot appear; and 
 
 (/3) compensation is made by lengthening 
 -r- into , into , into ~ , in 
 accordance with Pt. I, 19 ; 
 
 [for these Verbs in (ii), see " APPENDIX TO TAB. XVI (2)."] 
 
 (in.) Verbs whose 3 d Rt-letter is *l agree generally with 
 Tab. XIV ; but sometimes occurs (instead of some 
 other vowel) before the 1, as in *&V? 3 s. m. Past PL, 
 and sometimes as in *\'3ft 3 s. m. Past PL often. 
 But this is not limited to these Verbs ; see Tab. XIV 
 Note (e). 
 
 VII. VERBS WHOSE THIRD ROOT-LETTER is | OR H- 
 
 183. When in the process of word-forming, a letter would 
 occur twice together and the first one would have Quiescent, 
 this letter with Quiescent is dropped ; and Dag. F. (as imply-
 
 122 183, 184. 
 
 ing a letter with Quiescent, before it) is then given* to the 
 next letter. For example, 
 
 (a) Urti is 1 pi. Past K. of jrflt [for Q)Hi, like 
 WJ 1 pi. Past N<t>. of |y# [like W7$M]. Similarly, 
 
 () with 3 d Et-letter H, iJTO Pause-form of J-TG [for 
 
 r(n)5? Hke mjps], vra [like wjps], rnaj [likeri-jjps;]; 
 
 so fr. JW, rW, DgW, [like rnjpS, Dg7j53, see 
 Tab. XVI (2) (a, 3)], WBTI [like WjJfiPl] ; so fr. 
 
 ' >n; etc. 
 
 (7) So H;JTIS|n Gr. iv. 23, Is. xxxii. 9 [given by some with tf, 
 and by some with J"0 _ instead of PlD _ (see Note *]. 
 
 VIII. VERBS HAVING ANY OF THE Six nS^ii IN THE ROOT. 
 
 184. The Root IpS has two of these in it. There are reasons 
 for preferring this for Tab. XIV, or it might have been well to 
 choose a Root such as ifG to write (of which all the Rt-letters 
 are of those six). For, as the Student knows already [Pt. 1, 47], 
 those six letters have Dag. Lene 
 
 (i) at beginning of a word (except as in 48, Pt. I). 
 (ii) after a Quiescent . 
 
 And [N.B.] .the Dag. L. cannot stand after aught 
 else than Quiescent . 
 
 Hence the presence of these letters is useful to the Student as 
 shewing him at once where a preceding one of them is 
 
 * This Dag. F. is sometimes not put in 3 ; thus JPIJOKfl Is. Ix. 4 [for :n3(3)OSp 
 
 165 (i, y)i rmyn EU. i. is [for n^agg like nr]p>sn] ; ru-nfl PS. ix*i.'23; 
 
 [for n3(3)pj-l like rmpSfl]. So trUSt^R given in the margins of several Bibles for 
 
 jnab^ri' [*' n;(?)b^n'iike nrtj^n] EZ. xvn. 23. 
 
 t For the forms of this Irregular Verb, see ' Notes on Tab. XIX.'
 
 ANY OF nSDTIQ IN THE ROOT 8 184. 123 
 
 Quiescent or Moving. This, so far as regards the 1 st & 3 d Rt- 
 letters, is sufficiently shewn to him by Tab. XIV. We have 
 therefore to deal here with those Verbs only which have one of 
 those six letters as Second Rt-letter. See below, (a)-(S). [In (a), 
 the is seen to be (i) sometimes Moving, but also once or twice 
 Quiescent, after the prefixes 3 & 3 ; and (2) mostly Quiescent, 
 but also sometimes Moving, after the prefix 7.] 
 
 (a) Inf. K. (i) w. 3, 3irO3, tt, Hi313 [Tab. XXIII], 
 Eccl. xii. 4 [p. 79, Note *] ; but also 
 
 (ii) w. 3, pjius, ^s, ^333, , 
 
 33$3 (cp. p. 79, Note *) ; but also "1313 : 
 
 (iii) w. h, I^S 3n3 ( ? twice, Skfe four 
 times, and so at least forty others ; but also 
 fhA & ETO 1 ?, (each thrice), 11$^ and 
 N3^? [followed by K3 Nu. iv. 23, 
 viii. 24], but X3? Is. xxxi. 4. 
 
 [Note. When the 1 st Rt-letter is Jl or J^, these generally 
 have as in Tab. XVI (1). So a 1 st Rt-letter fi has 
 often , but also often [see 169 (/3, i)]. Simple ~ 
 under H is followed by Dag. L. in one of these six 
 letters [(Pt. I, 25].] * 
 
 (/9) Fut. K. 3TI3*, 3n3ft, etc., with Dag. L. in 2 d Rt-letter, 
 as in the 3 of '^3^, ^3^ etc., in Tab. XIV; and 
 so others : 
 
 (7) N$. [of 13] Past 13}, rn3W (p. Jni3$J), etc. 
 Partic. 13$!) etc. ; and so others : 
 
 (8) H$. [of E>37] Inf. VTfi (Abs.), &?37PP (with 7 pref.), 
 Past $^Sn ; T\^^>r\ ) ^$3^, etc -> Partic. I 
 
 M
 
 124 185, 186. 
 
 (the Imper. would be Bty TH, etc -), Fut 
 
 s 
 
 IX. FURTHER VARIATIONS. 
 
 185. (i) Verb-forms of the Voices Kal> Pl-61, Hiph-il, may 
 have Objective Pronouns in the form of Affixes. For these, and 
 any consequent changes of the Verb-form, see pp. 208-212. 
 
 (ii) Pronoun-forms so attached as Affixes to Verbs may serve 
 not only Objectively, but also sometimes where in English we 
 require some Preposition (or other word) after the Verb, and 
 so they occur a few times with Verb-forms of a Passive or 
 Reflexive Voice, and with Intransitive Verbs. 
 
 186. There are some important 'Variations' in the case of 
 some Verbs of the following Classes : 
 
 (1) having I 8t Rt-letter N, '3, as btf to eat. 
 
 to sit. 
 
 (3) X yfi, as fiJ to fall. 
 
 ^ 1'y, as Sty to rise. 
 
 (A\ od-D^i* 
 
 (4) 2 a Kt-letter j 
 
 (or*, ^, as Q^ to put.) 
 
 (5) 2 d & 3 a Rt-letters the same, D'TlM, as 11D ^ gro round. 
 
 (6) 3 d Rt-letter K, S, as XC&tofind. 
 
 (7) n, H7, as ri75 ^o reveal 
 
 These are dealt with in the following Sections XIV to XX. 
 
 [The above is adopted as the least artificial arrangement. "We might, however, 
 put the 3'S first. There are some advantages in so doing. But the arrangement 
 adopted above appears to be the simplest and best.]
 
 125 
 
 'VII. 
 2. "QT P/, 
 
 & /) a way, 
 
 Tab. X (1). 
 
 VOCABULARY III. 
 
 4. ^ Tab. IV (2), on, 
 upon, over, on ac- 
 count of, against, etc. 
 
 5. J?n a wicked man, 
 Tab. IX. 
 
 6. wy( (m. &/.) Sun. 
 
 N.B. Tne abbreviations JV^., H<f>., H9., are used below for NipL-al, 
 
 Hithpa-el. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI 
 \_To be translated into English, 11 (a-e).] 
 
 1 "I^O to reign. 2 [with] strength. s "ItK to gird. * why P 5 y&~\ a wicked 
 one (m.).* 6 n*PV to prosper [ 165 (II)]. 7 Exerc. XX (i*). 8 T'j; a city. men. 
 10 pS3 to groan. V^PI a wounded one (m.). 12 jnE> Pi. to cry out. 13 ^>Lip to 
 kill [ 168 (i, a)]. u a miserable one. 15 and a needy one. 16 round about. 17 "]?n 
 H6. to walk. " lSj| a young one (OT.) [Tab. X. 1]. " np"l Pi. to dance. 2 And 
 they have said. 21 to God. 22 depart. 23 and [the] knowledge of. 24 'TfTft a way* 
 [Tab. X. 1]. M Y Sn to delight in, to take pleasure. 2B until. 27 when [26 with 27 = 
 "how long?"] 2S T?y to exult, to triumph. 29 widow. 30 and sojourner. S1 3T1 
 to slay.f 32 Din* an orphan. 33 H VI K. & Pi. to murder. VD3 to plant [ 140 
 (8, iv), ()]. M yK> to hear [For lyOK' see 165 (II, iii)]. 36 HDK' to forget. 
 37 n02 to trust. 3S "If?^ falsehood. 39 V^J P- to despise. 40 [The] Holy ONE of. 
 
 Words marked thus (*) need not be given in the Notes again, t Pu. to be slain.
 
 126 
 
 41 and in their abominations. 42 }V5^ JV^. to lean. * 3 [as] a field. " B'^^ to plough. 
 45 na* H9. to breathe out [groans]. * 6 K'lQ Pi. to spread out. 47 her hands. 48 ^3N to 
 mourn [ 139 (8, iii)]. 49 H3K N$. to sigh. so her people. " 5)12^ ^V>. to swoon [ 137 
 (3,f)]. "babe, and suckling. 64 JSSJ' to roar. ** Thy foes. *s p-)j>> t o hiss. " pin 
 to gnash. 68 a tooth. 69 "110K to say. 60 y?3 to swallow up. 61 t)"in PI. to blaspheme 
 [ 1 68 (i, )3)]. 2 an adversary. 63 Exerc. XX (52). 4 f or ever . es 13^ t o remember 
 [ 168, (i, a)]. 6S the day. 67 2K>n to think, to reckon. 6 * as sheep of (or for). 
 69 slaughter. 70 pj? to cry out (in pain). 71 t^Qn to search. ;z ")pn to enquire 
 into. p. 93 (No. 86). 74 [God of] hosts. 76 before that, "mountains. 77 JDE .ZT. to 
 sink, Ho. to be founded. 78 "12y to pass, pass over, to transgress.* 79 His command- 
 ment (lit. mouth). > a bound. 81 Thou hast placed. " 2 t^VJ Pu. to be troubled 
 (E.V.). f3 the young lions. 84 f or the prey. fe s Exerc. XIX. (33). se p] D5 < to gather, 
 gather away. 87 pjyp a dwelling (here " a den"). 88 ^2") to crouch down. 89 t^p 
 to lay a snare. 9 <> 1^1? to take. 91 yT 1 to know. 2 tyyi to shake. 93 mn to 
 tremble. 94 from sea, from [the] "West. 95 [the] ends of. 96 JDB* N$. to swear.* 
 97 liveth. 98 ini K. & Pr. to bless, H6. to bless oneself. 99 Ex. XX. (45). 100 no t. 
 
 * Words marked thus () need not be given in the Notes again, f Cp. 176 (ii, 1).
 
 127 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11, -/*) 
 
 And Abram^passed-over* 1 into 2 the land. 3 And he-moved* 4 
 thence 5 towards 6 the mountain. 7 Before 8 The LORD'S destroy- 
 ing f 9 Sodom 10 and Gomorra. 11 And GOD remembered * ia 
 Abraham, ** and sent-away* 13 Lot 14 from the midst 15 of the 
 overthrow, 16 on 2 overthrowing f n the cities 18 in which Lot u 
 dwelt. 19 
 
 HE- will-bless 2 the fearers 21 of The LORD. The generation 22 
 of upright-ones 23 (m.) shall be blessed. 20 He-that-blesseth-him- 
 self 20 [HO. "Partic.] in the earth 24 shall-bless-himself 20 in The 
 GOD of Truth. 25 For as-heaven-is-high (Hebr. as leing-high- 
 o/t 26 heavens 27 ) above 28 the earth, 24 mighty-hath-been 29 His 
 Mercy 30 on those-that-fear-Him (Hebr. His fearers 21 m.). As- 
 a-father-is-merciful (Hebr. as being-merciful-of-f 31 a father 32 ) to 
 (Hebr. on) children, 33 Merciful-hath-been 31 The LORD to (Hebr. 
 on) those-that-fear-Him. And I-will-be-merciful-toll 31 whom 34 
 I-will-be-merciful-to. 31 In Thee an orphan 35 shall-find-Mercy 
 (Hebr. shall be compassionated 31 ). Look- forth 36 from Thy-holy- 
 habitation (Hebr. from the habitation 37 of Thy holiness M ) from 39 
 the heaven, 27 and bless 20 Thy people 40 Israel. For Thou, 
 O-LoRD, hast-blessed, 20 and [one is] blessed 41 (m.) for-ever. 42 
 
 1 13V. 2 3 the prefix. 3 p. 47 (*). 4 pny t Hf. Q'j'p. 71. ^ in, w. <def. 
 
 art. 1 inn. s \)zh. TIPTOP?. l Dip. rnby. 13 "or (Put. _i.). 
 
 14 tik. ls p. 108 (s*). )G HDEiq. " Han. 18 p. 56 (a). 3^. 20 
 to bless, Pu. to be blctsed, HQ. to bless oneself. 21 D*S^ (i.e., p. 84, Note ). 1'H. 
 s DnE|\ " p. 47 (*). ^ |OSI. 26 H33 (tbe PI is consonantal). 2 - D?]?t?. h$. 
 29-133. 3 IDn Tab. X. (1). 31 Dm Pi. to be merciful, to be merciful to, Pit. to be 
 compassionated. 3X. M Tab. XIII (4). "TJ^nN. ssQijV. S)?^ fff. 
 (Imper. 2 s. m., TV. PI). 37 j'iy ( 56, i). 38 B^n'?.. 39 IP. * Dy (p. 91, t*). 
 41 Pu. Partic. DViy 1 ? D-J5S. ** Dn^K. 
 
 * Fut. w. 1 Conv. t Infinitive Constr. J 178 (i). 
 
 'Compensation' is NOT made in PI. & Pu., comp. Tab. XVI (2) (y3, iii). Th 
 P. Past 3 s. m. takes -7- as in Note (e) on Tab. XIV. || Past w. ^ Cony.
 
 128 
 
 SECTION XIV. 
 VERBS tf'3, i.e. WHOSE FIRST ROOT-LETTER is tf [Tab. XVIIJ. 
 
 187. Many forms are like those of Verbs whose 1 st Rt-letter 
 
 is n, n, or y. 
 
 188. (a) The Chief Variations from Tab. XVI (1) arise from 
 some prefixes taking , as in the Fut. K. forms 
 
 (i) -OK* etc., fr. -DK, hl& etc., fr. SlDK, 1K etc., fr. 
 x * i- v i- 
 
 etc., ; and forms used in Pause, such as *DN\ 
 j etc.,* which are of the following Class (ii) nz, 
 
 (ii) TnX\ tn^fr, e ^ c< fr- fl"K*> f r some other instances of 
 which ( ) form see Tab. XVII. 
 
 [(iii) For a few forms of N<j>. and H$. see 190 ().] 
 
 (/3) Some other Variations from Tab. XVI (1) in the Kal, are 
 but slight. Thus, (i) in place of , see Tab. XVII ; and (ii) 
 some contractions, as h\T\ Jer. ii. 36 (2 s. /. Fut. K. of 7TN), 
 TIKI a. xxxii. 5.(1 s. Fut. K. of TIK, for "in^^ which does not 
 
 i- T v- 
 
 occur), and so in Pause ii"l^ Pr. viii. 17, etc. 
 
 * # * The Student's attention may be specially called to the 
 Great Rule in the following (189), Variations in accordance 
 with which will be found to occur in some other Classes of Verbs 
 as we proceed. 
 
 189. These Verbs (fc$ 3) offer us the first opportunity of bring- 
 ing forward the following very important 
 
 RULE : The 1 Convers. of the Fut. has the power of drawing 
 back the Accent from the last to the penult, syllable, as in 
 
 * The ( -= ) form also occurs in Pause ; thus J?3X*1 G. iii. 6, etc. But, 
 
 N.B. The (~) form of the Fui is always adopted when . (as in 165, II) a -r has 
 
 fc .. . 
 
 to be replaced hy a Vowel in Pause; thus -1/>D.X' fr. ibsX' 1 etc. 
 
 A** I *
 
 FIRST ROOT-LETTER N 189-190. 129 
 
 * THNJ5 2 S. vi. 6, fr. THX' (and so ")& t?. 9, fr. the unused 
 2 K. xix. 23, fr. "IfcXD) ; but 
 
 Obs. (i) KOT so in 1 Sing. ; thus "IJbfcl Gr. xx. 13, etc. ; also 
 
 (ii) NOT if there be a Shvaf between the last two Towels 
 [thus, *Ip|5*l and jX*} remain unchanged] ; and 
 
 (iii) NOT if the Accent be a Pause- Accent*? and 
 
 (iv) sometimes also NOT, if the Accent be less than the 
 'Pause '-Accents, in a case of 164 (). 
 
 Note, (a) The Accent is generally NOT drawn back if there bo 
 more than one vowel between the 1 Convers. and the last syllable 
 [thus we have "IPSPl and &DN*V], but 
 
 (b) it is sometimes drawn back in such JV<f>. forms, as in 
 G-. xxv. 8, etc. 
 
 190. (a) The form /b^H of Inf. Abs. N<j>. was mentioned in 
 'Notes on Tab. XIY (d)/ (So SjDNn 2 S. xvii. 11). The N<j>. 
 forms generally are as in 175, 176 ; and those of other Voices 
 as in the following the two just now cited. 
 
 (/?) There are a few instances of N<j>. and H<f>. forms having 
 K Quiescent in (thus K~), or lost in ^ or ; thus 
 
 (i) N<f>. Past 3 pi. S|jn& Jos. xxii. 9, ttntfJl w. 1 Conv. 
 Ku. xxxii. 30 (fr. THN) ; 
 
 (ii) //(. Fut. 1 s.S^itf Hos. xi. 4 (fr.SriN), HTi^ w. H 
 Jer. xlvi. 8 (fr. "OK). 
 
 * N.B. When, as here, the last letter of the -word has Shya (which is Quiescent, 
 being at the end of a word), a long vowel in the last syllable is shortened on the 
 removal of the Accent from that syllable [Pt. I, 55 (9, i)]. So we have the here 
 instead of the in THN\ in accordance with Pt. I, 19. 
 
 t Even if it is merely implied by Dag. Forte, as we shall see. 
 
 J Except nDN'tin Job iii. 2, xl. 3, and v. I of Job iv, vi, viii, is, xi, xii, xv, 
 xvi, xviii-xxiii, xxv-xxvii, xxix, xxxiv-xxxvi, xxxviii, xl, & xlii; but not in xxxii. 6, 
 nor in Chapters i & ii.
 
 130 FIRST ROOT-LETTER X 191-192. 
 
 191. The K is sometimes dropped in Pi. as in ^aVti Job 
 xxxv. 11 for 5|iS7Xp Partic. s. m., w. Pron. Aff. for 1 pi. ; and in 
 
 as in }J Job. xxxii. 11 for j'TM*, and |ja Pr. xvii. 4 for 
 . See more in Appendix. 
 
 192. "With the exception of (i) the special ( )-form of the 
 Fut. K. t viz. 7O^* in Pause,* and (a) the retaining of the 
 unchanged in the *")!bN* form when this is used in Pause, 
 the Pause-forms of these Verbs tf'fi) agree generally with 
 165-167. 
 
 [Note. In the above, with Tab. XVII, enough is given for our present purpose, 
 It is unnecessary to give here in detail forms which, as said in $ 187, are like some or 
 other of those in 169-179. 
 
 For the t\D$ form of Fut. K, see Tab. XVII (2, t, i).] 
 
 See Tab. XV II (2, 7) for Pause-forms of the Fut. KaL 
 
 ADDITIONAL NOTE. 
 
 The form fc (or fc) K. Put. 1 s. takes the H of 144 
 
 v- 
 
 thus PI7DN (p. trTOtf). So, with this H, the 1 pi. Fut. would 
 be pfefo (p. trfaifc). 
 
 IT : XA T i" '
 
 APPENDIX ON VERBS tf'). 130 
 
 APPENDIX ON VERBS X'). 
 
 As said in 187, many forms are like those of Verbs whose 
 1 st Rt-letter is H , Pi , or $. But 
 
 (i) The Infin. K. has not only the forms TON ^btfS and so 
 
 i -: ' i -: - ' 
 
 ""lN (with 6 on account of the removal of the Accent), but 
 also with N-T'PIK!! "ibfcO TfaK3 *^H^ 
 
 JSTote (a) Sometimes the K has as in 
 
 ($) The common word "ibJO (generally rendered 
 ' saying ') is Infin. K. fr. TbK [for -)b*6 or "ibttS] 
 
 I V VI V J ' 
 
 (ii) In the Imper. K., 
 
 (a) The X has - as in bbtf TDK, and ap|N V&N (p. trJbN) . 
 
 i v; " v: * \,- v: " } {- v: I IT v: 9 
 
 (ft) The fSlight- vowel, which the tf takes in the 2 s./. 
 and 2 pi. m., is generally as in ^"l/p^ & ^I/^X ; 
 
 (7) But before the X takes the Slight-vowel --, as in 
 J|TnX and ^HX . The Pause-forms of these are 
 :tfn and ninX [ 166 (b, i & ii]. 
 
 (S) With the PI of 141 (7) we have the 2 s. w. Imper. K. 
 forms (i) PlSD{* like r\J3& f and (2) p||DX with N. 
 
 Note (1). In '"tn.X 2 s./. Imper. JT., Euth iii. 15, the -^ refers to the of fhx. 
 
 Some however give there VHN like the 2 pi. wz. -ITnN. 
 (2). For -13nK 2 pi. m. Imper. JT., Ps. xxxi. 24, some give -12r|K. 
 (3). For the rare form *Bt?K 2 s./. Imper. JT., comp. 141 (f). 
 
 * For this some erive inN; 5 in Eccl. iii. 8. From the Root nHS we have often the 
 ,i : 
 
 form with n , thus HinSp. The form HSnK gives, in direct Construction, the form 
 rnqS _ in nanX?' n^nN?, naqSD. Comp. 137 (4, iii) p. 80. And the same 
 form with Pron- Affixes gives inanS? etc., see { 137 (4, iii). 
 
 The form D3HK? Hos. ix. 10 (Infin. K. t fr. 2HX, w. 3 pref. and Aff. their m.) 
 has T-(^)> as in Tah. XV, and the n has r^- in agreement with the o of the N.
 
 130** APPENDIX ON VERBS 
 
 (iii) (a) The Verbs which REGULARLY take to the prefixes 
 of the Future, as in 188 (i & ii) are *lltf to perish, THK to hold, 
 TOK to eat, and T&X to say, together with the Verbs rQK and 
 HSK, for which see pp. 267 & 270. 
 
 (/3) Several Verbs tf'S have Fut. K. forms such as 
 00 3TOJ, iriKfl, etc.; 
 
 (*) *\b& (as well as *bW), and so IBX* Lev. viii. 7 ; 
 00 J$ fr. ptf, SlNfi fr. ^K, etc. ; 
 00 DBW, DKWI, SlfctfiO 3 pi. m., D0O 1 pL, fr. D^K ; 
 and so "ItDKn 3 s./. fr. Ifctf, S^M-I fr. *|Stf. 
 
 00 ^ISDN* 1 3 pi. m. t etc. So some forms with \ffixes have . 
 
 * . 
 
 (7) Some Verbs have more than one of the Future forms : 
 thus, 
 
 (a) From C|DK the usual Future K. forms are *)b.N* , *l'pXR , etc. ; but we find 
 also once f]DM 3 s. m. (with 1 Convers.) for P)DX>1 , and once PjOhl 2 s. z. 
 for f)pxri , which" are of the forms THK* THNn. 
 
 (4) So from 3HS we have not only the usual Fut. K. forms 2HX* 3flXPl and so 
 J3HK (contracted, and in Pause, for 3HXX 1 s.), etc.; but also 2ffK (like 
 
 L * T * 
 
 73K), once in 3HfcO 1 s. w. 1 Convers. and three times w. Pron.-Affs. [ 185]. 
 \c) And so, conversely, from JflX we have as Fut. K. forms not only 
 
 (i) Tn&O 3 e. m., TpNFJ 3 s. /., (and tpPl! 2 S. xx. 9 for TDNJjll 3 s. /. 
 
 with 1 Convers.), TH'N 1 s. (and, with H, nrrftf), -1JQN* 3 pi. w. 
 
 (p.t-lTns*; and, with I, tJ-VPIX^), but also 
 
 (a) T'nXM 3 s. tn. with 1 Convers., and THX.n 2 s. m., like a'JX* and 3^X11. 
 (&) There may be ^ in place of ; thus, i"TO1N 1 s. Fut. Z. ^y. H , fr. 1DX, etc. 
 
 (iv) Besides the contracted forms mentioned in 191, we may 
 mention here the following : 
 
 (1) ^PtjV Infin - ^- ( Ez - xxi - 33 )> suppostd by some to be for 
 
 (2) 5i Fut. I7<^. 3 s. in. (Nu. xi. 25), for ^6J>1 or VSN.^ ; 
 
 (3) 37.' T 1 Fv t- ^- 3 s - ' C 1 s - xv - 5 )> supposed by some to be 
 
 (4) ''Dl (I s - *iii 20), which is taken (a) by some as H<(>. Fut. 3 s. i. for 
 
 ^H^i (J xxv - 5 ) an( l ( 6 ) ^7 others as PI. Fut. 3 s. wt. for 
 ?r)4O which last is possible if we may assume a Pt-el Voice of 
 the Eoot ?nX. The P?. of 7i"!N occurs nowhere in the Bible.
 
 131 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII. 
 {To be translated into English, 11. a-e.) 
 
 s nj 
 
 ** : " D333 1 ? 
 
 rust 24 
 
 to say. 2 whether not ? 3 J?n> to know. * 96 (ii, j3). 5 |ilN a lord. 
 6 Zerubbabel. 7 D1* (w.) a day. 8 render ye thankful acknowledgments, give thanks. 
 9 pTH to be strong. 10 >$ to be firm. " 3^ (>.) a heart. 12 3HS to love. 13 Be 
 will correct. 14 for ever. 15 I shall be. le a lady (-7- for -7- in Pause). 17 TPIK to 
 take hold. 18 3j5y a heel. 19 a snare. 20 and throughout all. 21 p3X to groan. 
 
 22 a wounded one (z.). 23 ?Dtf to eat. 2i thy (/) oppressors, those that afflict thee. 
 
 23 1^3 flesh. 2a "J3X to perish. 27 my place of refuge, my trust. 28 and my fortress. 
 29 thy (/.) salvation. 30 )X n$. to believe. 31 ^D to be king. 32 [the] good of. 
 33 ?]DX to gather. M the whole of thee. 35 her that halteth. 36 meek ones (t.). 
 S7 y2J>> to have enough, to be satisfied. 36 yT a companion, a friend. 3a T'Dn a pious 
 one (wj.), a saint. 
 
 * A Verb in Hiph. has sometimes two Objects expressed. So here, Nos. 24 & 25, 
 the first Object THOSE CAUSED to eat, the second Object THAT WHICH they shall eat.
 
 132 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 {To be translated into Hebrew, \ 11. -/*.) 
 
 N.B. All Verbs tf'g in this Exercise hare the Fut. K. as in ? 188 (a, i). For Pause-forms, see 
 Tab. XVII. (2, 7) and } 192. 
 
 Wicked-ones * (m.) will-perish 2 [5 162 (d, i)]. By 3 the breath 4 
 of God 5 they (w.)- will-perish 2 [Pause-form 6 ], All 7 my bones 8 
 shall say 9 , LORD, who 10 [is] like u Thee ? And Zion (/.) hath- 
 said,* 9 The LORD hath-forsaken-me 12 [ 162, (d, i)]. Say- 
 thou 9 (w.) to 13 the house 14 of Israel, So )5 have-ye-said 9 (m.), 
 saying, 16 . . . What shall- we-say ? 9 
 
 Tell-ye 9 (m.) a righteous-one 17 (m,") that 18 [there is] good, 19 
 for 18 the fruit 20 of their (m.) deeds 21 they-shall-enjoy 22 [Pause- 
 form 6 ]. Comfort-ye 23 (m.), comfort-ye 23 My people, 24 your (m.) 
 Goo 24 will say 9 [ 162 (d, i)]. And He-said,* 9 Verily 25 My 
 people 24 [are] they (w.). I will say 9 to the North, 26 Give-up. 27 
 And I-have-said : * 9 " my Father ! " 28 shalt-thou (/.) call w Me 
 (Hebr. to Me). And we- will not say 9 any-more 30 "our God ! " 24 
 to the work 31 of our hands. 32 The Glory 33 of Thy Kingdom 34 
 they (m.) shall tell 9 [Pause-form 6 ]. 
 
 i Exerc. XXVI (). * nnS. 3 D prefix. 4 n^?, 56 (i & v). 
 188 (Note , N.B.). ^3. 8 ni^3f (/.) Tab. XII. 1 (pi.). 9 TDK. 10 
 11 3 prefix. M 3.3JJ(. " ^. u Tab. XIII (>). 15 }3. ' Inf. Z"., w. b, of 
 " p*1V. M '?. 19 2113. zo *"!, i.e. the same. 21 D^gO. 22 ^3X. 23 D 
 Tab.XVI(2)[/3,iii].Vocab.I. M 1JN. flSX (/.). 27 ^n. "IK. tnp. 
 M 1 a hand. nb|. s * nl? (/.). 
 
 > 
 
 Fut. w. i Convera,
 
 133 
 
 SECTION XV. 
 
 VERBS *'3, i.e. WHOSE FIRST ROOT-LETTER is i [Tab. XVIII]. 
 
 193. Some forms agree entirely with those in Tab. XIV ; thus 
 (i) the Inf. Abs. and the Past* Tense & Participles K., (ii) a few 
 forms of particular Verbs, (iii) the Pit, PH., and HO.% forms. 
 
 The special VARIATIONS are the following : 
 
 194. The i is dropped in (a) the Inf. Constr. K., and (/S) the 
 Imper. K. ; thus, from i^\ 
 
 (a) INF. K. TflBf, fOg^l, fQgk, ragfc, but rg$ w. 
 
 and w. Pron. Affs. || ij-DS? *$$&, **%&, etc - 5 
 09) IMPER. K. H 3& ^ etc. ; see Tab. XVIII. 
 
 v > v : ' 
 
 Thus (fr. TV) 1TJ, rmj, fi^ etc. r-n } Ju. xix. 11, is given by many as 
 3 s. m. Past JT. of TV " by aphwresis." But this is somewhat doubtful.] 
 
 f Except in some instances of the loss of the * by Contraction, as in -l^^l Lam. iii. 53 
 (for 1T)1 like -l^l of rfa, cp. Tab. XXIII), and a few other words. 
 
 + (a) Thus 3-Virjn, 1VJ}\ 1$$% (2;Vnr)!Ex..4, is irreg.3s./.with1Convers.), 
 W-y:n*., and so n^W!l fy 3 pi. OT. Fut. w. 1 [of n^], and 1$JV) fr. yy; 
 
 (*) But, in some, is replaced by 1 ; as in yninnil Inf. Constr. (w. 3) of JJT, 
 :nsir3 3 s. m. Fut. of nS\ and yrJIflX 1 s. Fut. of JJT (Pause-form). 
 
 $ (a) In Pause JflDB' 
 
 \ / V IT ' 
 
 (*) From jjT, njn (p. snjn), njn?, ngw. 
 
 l| (a) But [fr. 1^] irp^, etc., forms like those in 62 (iii). And, 
 (6) from JJT, IPljn, etc., forms like those in Tab. X (1). 
 
 IT (a) w. n, rat?. So (fr. i^), $., TJ^ HD^ (p. Jn3^). Also, 
 
 (i) from JHN Vjl, 'SH, Wl. An<i . 
 
 (c) from 2iT, 3H ffive thou (m.") [HSn ('.. 2H w. H) is used as an Interjection 
 for " Come ! " " Come on !" or such like], *1H give thou (/.), -ISH give ye (m.).
 
 134 FIRST ROOT-LETTER 195-96. 
 
 195. The * is (a) sometimes Quiescent in *-r [see \ 197] as in 
 FUT. K. 3g"., Sg'fi, ^fi, etc. (or 3fc^ etc., Pt. I, 12) ; 
 
 (y3) sometimes Quiescent in *-^- as in the 
 JT<i. forms StDTl l^H I'D" etc., Tab. 
 
 V } V " > C > 
 
 XVIII. ; 
 
 (7) sometimes lost in as in the forms 
 
 FUT. K. 3&* IWft ^Wt\ etc. [*eU98] 
 v > v > *.: 
 
 (8) sometimes replaced by 1*, either 
 
 (i) Consonantal, as in the N<f>. Inf., Imper., 
 & Fut., see Tab. XVIII; and in some 
 mthpa-el forms [ 193, Note (J, *)] ; 
 
 (ii) Quiescent in \ f, as in the N<f>. Past & 
 Partic., and in the Hd>. SKftn S'Bhn 
 
 ^" * V > 
 
 yWV etc.; or 
 
 V 1 
 
 (iii) Quiescent in 5)J, in the HopJi-til; 
 (e) sometimes dropped, and Dag. F. placed in the 
 2 a Rt-letter [thus, for instance, in some 
 forms of p2P,as paftj & -fNt Is. xHv. 3 
 (I s. Fut. JT.), p-VD 1 K. vii. 16 (Partic. 
 Hoph. s. w., 'i.e.'); so, from 1^^ H^i. 
 (p. tn^) 3 s. /. Past N$. t l^n 3 sl'm. 
 Past H$., njtt s. w. Partic. #d.]. 
 
 196. Tliese Verbs may be dealt with in the three following 
 Classes : 
 
 I. those that retain the * as in 195 (a) ; 
 II. those that lose the * as in 195 (7) ; 
 
 III. those that drop the 1 st Rt-letter, and take Dag. F. in 
 the 2 d Et-letter, as in 195 (e). [But 
 
 N.B. a Verb has sometimes forms belonging to more than one of these Classes, and 
 like those in Tab. XIV.] 
 
 * Some imagine Roots 1's for forms having 1 thus. 
 
 t For which there is some few times. 
 
 J For which there may be [Pt. I, 14] as in rriTJJD Ez. xxl. 21.
 
 FIRST ROOT-LETTER "> 197 (<Z-% 135 
 
 197. Class I. (a) The forms yg f VI" } (or 3&, Bbj f Pt. I, 
 
 12), etc., are really the same as t?3T etc -> ^ n Tab. XIV. 
 
 [But the 1 st Rt-letter i becoming Quiescent in the preceding , the is not 
 required beneath it. Pt. I, 29.] 
 
 There are a few varying forms which will be given in the 
 Appendix. 
 
 (/S) In Pause the 2 d Rt-letter has , as in l&y\ f l&yfi, 
 
 :S?'TN, $&y\ (or wry t pt. i, 12). 
 
 (7) "With 1 Convers. the Fut. form itp^ retains its Accent on 
 the last syllable : thus 3tD w 1 and so It^ni etc. But, 
 
 v- -I v- -> 
 
 (8) fr. pp we have once f&*} GK ix. 24. ^J5^ however, 
 occurs four times, and T*p*T twice (* Yd*} once, 1 K. iii. 15). So 
 fr. *, t ^'1 G. ii. 7, and f "W . 19. 
 
 (e) The 1 s. & 1 pi., w. H ( 144), drop as usual the vowel of 
 the 2 d Et-letter; thus, (fr. pj) HXJT 1 s., and (fr. KH 1 ) 
 nSf'^Vi 1 pi. But, in Pause, these would become jn^V^j 
 
 :n:rn [ IGS, n, ii. 3 ]. Thus, ni^) PS. m. 6, i s . Fut. 
 
 -ff". w. 1 Convers. 
 
 () Some of these Verbs retain the * in the lT</>. also ; J thus, 
 the J7<. forms fr. Stt' in Tab. XVIII, and so (fr. pj) p*yH f 
 p*3^, pJVJl, p3*J|l (or p^n > Pt.I, 12), etc. ; and so ^H 2 s./. 
 Imper. H<j>. fr. *J7*. [But the usual H<f>. forms from T?* are 
 like 1^'in, a*tri\ etc., in Tab. XVIII.] So also, fr. 9?\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 * This form belongs to Class III. 
 
 t In the Bible, the Accent here is -2- which stands over the last letter of the word. 
 That is the place for the Accent -2- . But it affects the penult, syllable here. 
 
 J The 1 st Rt-letter * belonging to these forms is (i) sometimes dropped, as in 
 inr?3!i (D. \\xii. 13) 3 s. m. Fut. H$. of p3 w. Aff. -in him [Sect. XXII], and 
 (ii) sometimes retained consonantally, as in yW* (Jobxxiv. 21) 3 s. m. Fut. H$. 
 
 Partic. s. m., itjWD & npa'O s. /., etc. [The latter, w. Pron. Affs., has the 
 J-Ded. ( 62, ii), thus irip? 1 '!?, and [J,i] inj?30 2 K. ri. 2 & Pin^O G. xxiv. 59.] 
 
 U In the form cited in Note (J, i ).
 
 136 FIRST ROOT-LETTER * 197 (ij-l), 198 (a-S). 
 
 ^Pl (for *W 3 s. m. Past, ?T1 Imper. 2 s. w. and 'Pl 
 
 .- ,- . v 
 
 2 s./. & J|Wn 2 pi. w., P1TTK 1 s. Fut. w. Pi. But 
 
 >. T V " 
 
 (17) In some H<j>. Fut. forms of 77* the * is retained con- 
 sonantatty [cp. page 135, Note (J,ii)], thus 7v^ 3 s. w., TTtf 
 1 s., ^S" 3 pi. m., bhy* 2 pi. m. [For ^TW see 201.] 
 
 (6) When the Fut. &$. of form ^fc\* has 1 Convers., the 
 Accent is generally drawn back ; and the Long Vowel of the 
 last syllable is then shortened.* Thus, 3Q*} 3 s. m., iftW 
 3s./.; and so pyjjl fr. p^, etc. 
 
 (t) But most Verbs of this Class (I) have H$. forms like 
 those of 1W in Column V. of Tab. XVI II. For such forms of 
 Fut. JHT0. see 198 (e, etc.). 
 
 193. Class II. (a) In the forms ig^ 383^ *$?&, etc., the 
 I 8t Rt-letter i is not written, but is understood and implied in 
 
 the -TT of the Prefix-letter. 
 
 (/3) In Pause, -^- is given to the 2 d Rt-letter of Fut.f forms 
 which have -r- in Tab. XVIII; thus, ^f\ 2 s./. Fut. K. of 
 * is in Pause 'O7fi, an< l so ^7* gives Jlj?^ ^?J? gives 
 etc. Cp. 165 (II). 
 
 f 
 
 (7) So fr. jroStf & HjSi, the 1 s. & 1 pi. w. n ( 144), we 
 have in Pause JH^JSt & trO?!). 
 
 (S) With 1 Convers. (i) the Accent of 32^, iBTI, iBf^ 
 
 is drawn back; and so we have [cp. 189(*)] ^^ 3 s. m., 
 
 WJ) 3 s./. & 2s. m., im] 1 pi. [see also fa)]. But (2) the 
 
 Cp. $ 189 (Note ) [on p. 129]. 
 
 t So also in the Imper. K. ; thus, fr. "]^ we have J ^ for ^ 2 s. /. and } -13^ 
 for -"D 1 ? 2 pi. w., as ro!? 2 s. m. Imper. JT.,-w. n , is in Pause tn3^ [$ 194 (0, Note If)]. 
 J n?^8 , Mi. i. 8, with the 1* Rt-letter * standing.
 
 FIRST ROOT-LETTER ' 198 (e-0), 199 (a-<y). 137 
 
 1 Sing, remains unchanged, thus 225^1. Also (a) in Pause we 
 have JlBffl, etc., cp. 189 Obs. i & iii. See also (0) below. So 
 
 (e) the Fut. H$. (S^'V, etc.) w. 1 Convers. is *lt?1*1 3 s. m., 
 
 n&?irn 3 s. /. & 2 s. w., ^ra-j- (=1^) 1 pi. 
 
 l 
 () With H, 144, the '-r- remains ; as in PO'TlN 1 s. Fut. H<t>. 
 
 fr. -|^, and so Witt 1 pi. fr. JH\ So HSDX 2 S. xii. 8, 
 with for '} and -r- for *. 
 
 (77) The forms $& etc., of the K., and 3W etc., of the 
 
 ^" > V ) 
 
 .Ety , have the Long-Yowel of the closed Final syllable short- 
 ened into whenever the Accent is removed from the last 
 syllable [as in (8) and (e)]. Thus, KJ-3B? G. xliv. 33, 
 
 :H3 5^'* Job xxii. 8 ; so ^ ^S 1 s. (Song. iv. 6), and so 
 [H<f>. Fut. of tp] JHJ5 1 ? t)Di; Pr. ix. 9, j ft)DrrW Ex. x. 28 
 
 (^) The 2 a Rt-letter has sometimes in the Fut. K. and 
 H<j>., especially in Pause ; thus (from T? % ) TjVl Job xxvii. 21, 
 qSl G. xxiv. 61, etc., Fut. K. ; and ^} Lam. iii. 2, Fut. H<f>. 
 and so (fr. t|D*) :6)Din "^ Job. xl. 32. 
 
 199. When the 3 d Rt-letter is Guttural, 
 
 (a) the FutJ K. has instead of to the 2 a Rt-letter ; 
 
 thus yr 3 s. m., jnn 3 s. /. & 2 s. w., jn i s ., jnj i pi., 
 
 [() of these, the Pause-forms are :V1^|| jynn tJTt^ SHJ; 
 
 L * ' ~ IT'* ^ |T > ~ \T " 9 IT 
 
 (7) also, in Pause, replaces the of 2 d Rt-letter in 2 s. /., 
 
 Once 3$1'1 G. xlvii. 11, a Pause-form not in Pause. 
 
 t The 1 (for the of the Root) is implied ia the -^. So in ^jj 2 K. vi. 19, etc., 
 as well as t|VlM Ex. sir. 21. See also (6) . 
 J For which we find once ^pin"?X Pr. xxx. 6. 
 (a) For the Inf. Constr. K. Djn, etc., see 194, Note (, b). And, 
 
 (4) for the Imper. K. 2 s. m. JH, see 194, Note (H, 4). 
 g For which, once, :yT* Ps. cxxxviii. 6. 
 
 N
 
 138 FIRST ROOT-LETTER ' 199 (8-0), 200, 201. 
 
 and 3 & 2 pi. m. Fut. ; thus, t^TlFl Pause-form of tylfi and 
 
 * IT " V " > 
 
 {Win of Witt ; and so 
 
 ' IT v : 
 
 (S) the 1 s. & 1 pi. w. H, ws. PltfnX and P1SF13 are in Pause 
 
 JPBHK and jnru. c p . i65 (ii/ii!)]. 
 
 T IT" T IT" 
 
 (e) In the H<j>. Imper. 2 s. m. the 2 d Ht-letter has as in 
 
 jnin fr. yr, poin fr. PO\ yEfin fr. y&5>>. But, 
 
 (D w- Tl, 144, the '-r- appears as in PJJPfifip! (SghPl) 2 s. w, 
 (T/) In the H(j>. Fut. the 2 d Rt-letter has (i) sometimes * as 
 in yHV n^i* especially in Pause: but also (2) sometimes -^ 
 
 - v * - v > * 
 
 as in XTi1 Nu. xvi. 5, rOVI Job xvi. 21, VTV Pr. xx. 22, 
 
 v- : v- : ' ,- : 
 
 (3) especially thus, in the expression of a wish, or with 7&$ 
 Deprecative, or with 1 Convers. (as in JH_h ; H3\*1, y^\*1 & 5^1). 
 
 (0) The Rules in Tab. XYI (3) may be referred to, as for 
 several of the above, so also for other forms not mentioned 
 here. 
 
 200. The Partic. forms are sufficiently given in Tab. XVIII. 
 The s./. and pi. m. & f. endings agree with those in 139 (/3). 
 But when the 3 d Rt-letter is Guttural, the s. /. form is H- -p- 
 instead of H- -? [Op. Tab. XVI (3)]. Thus, n$H' Kal, and 
 ., of JTP ; and so JTOi Niph. of POS (in p. !fV ^). 
 
 201. The Pi of the H<f>. Voice sometimes appears, as in 
 JTBnrP (1 S. xvn. 47 & Ps. cxvi. 6) 3 s. m. Fut. H<J>. fr. y& 
 and so in Ps. Ixxxi. 6 tjDin 11 ^ where tlpiPI* is for WDV Joseph 
 (the same in form as 3 s. m. Fut. HT0. fr. hD 1 *). So in ^TUT 
 (Ps. xlv. 18) 3 pi. m. Fut. H(f>. fr. PIT [Sect. XXI] with AS. for 
 Mee (m.). So too in W$t (Is. Hi. 5) 3 pi. m. Fut. ZT</>. fr. ^ 
 for bh^ . [The forms W?^ , etc., were mentioned in 197 fo)].
 
 FIRST ROOT-LETTER * 202, 203. OBS. XII-XV. 139 
 
 202. Class III. The forms in which the 1 st Et-letter is 
 dropped and implied by Dag. F. in the 2 a Et-letter, as in 
 195 (e), agree with those in the next Section (XVI). Compare 
 212. 
 
 203. Such forms as NH (GK viii. 17 Erfy 2 s. m. Imp. H<f>. 
 fr. NX* [and so ^Pl (Ps. v. 9 Eri), w. -=- for -^ because of 
 the 1, fr. 1B>Vj agree with Tab. XIV. So hm (G. viii. 12, 
 3 s. w. Fut. .ZVfa.) is like 153*1 .e. *TD3* with the Accent drawn 
 
 )V\T'-> s"T ' 
 
 back by *| Convers. And so some others, which need not be given, 
 as they are not Variations from the forms of the Verb as given 
 in Sect. XI. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS XII-XV. 
 
 Ots. XII. The prefix <\ (and] has sometimes before a letter bearing an Accented 
 Vowel, especially if the Accent be Disjunctive ; thus, j^ and wine 
 G. xiv. 18. The Rule shall be given in the Appendix. 
 
 Ols. XIII. The Interrogative n has sometimes followed by Dag. especially where 
 it could not be mistaken for the ' Dcf. Art.' Thus, flSDSn 
 (Is. xxvi. 7) WHETHER according-to the stroke of [H3J3] ? 
 
 Obs. XIV. Personal-Pronoun forms are sometimes used with a Verb Reflexively, as 
 in D3? -137 go for yourselves (i.e. betake yourselves), PP 3^51 and 
 she sat for herself (i.e. and she sat her down). 
 
 Obs. XV. The expression "A son of so-many years" is used for "A person so 
 many years old ;" thus, D" 1 ^ JOt? |3 a son-of seven years (i.e. seven 
 years old) [was Jehoash at-his-becoming-king (i3?D2)J 2 K. xii. 1. 
 
 N.B. (i) In NIPM. of *'S Verbs, the 1 st Rt-letter * (which is but rarely retained 
 as in the Fut. form ITl^ p. 288) is mostly replaced by 1 which is 
 (a) sometimes CONSONANTAL, as in the Infin. and Imper. 
 
 and Fut. 3t?V etc. ; 
 
 (j8) sometimes QUIESCENT, as in the Past 1^13 etc., and Partic. 
 (ii) In HIPH. the * is 
 
 (a) sometimes itself QUIESCENT, as in 3D' i n (Infin. Abs., and Impcr. 
 
 2 s. m.} etc.,, and 
 
 (#) sometimes replaced by 1 QUIESCENT, as in 2K>in etc. [Tab. XVIII] ; 
 (iii) In HOPH. the * is replaced by 1 QUIESCENT, as in 2^-1 H etc. ; 
 (iv) For the HITHPA-L see 193, and Note (J), on p. 133.
 
 140 
 
 1. 2N a father, Tab. 
 
 XIII (1). 
 
 2. PIS a brother, Tab. 
 
 XIII (2). 
 
 3. 1"nn together. 
 
 4. Dl^ (.) bread, Tab. 
 
 VOCABULARY IV. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 13|J (OT.) a servant, 
 Tab. X (6). 
 
 7. 
 
 8. HS here. 
 
 9. terf tf/ 
 
 not. 
 
 10. rijT}3 Pharaoh. 
 
 11. rrri (/.) Qvt< 
 
 (Excrc. xxir. ss). 
 i . 
 
 12. ?1XK> the pit, or grave. 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 ( To be translated into English, 11. a-e.) 
 
 19 
 
 nb 
 
 21 
 
 3i 
 
 33 
 
 1 "|b to go. 2 for the'e (.) [Obs. XIV, p. 139]. 3 SV* to go forth, to go out. [This 
 Verb must be given in Sect. XXI ; the form here agrees with Tab. XVIII.] * pX 
 71 (ii). 6 Canaan.* 6 "TV K. to go down, go down to, H$. to bring down, bring 
 down to. * Abram.* 8 Qnyp Egypt.* 9 3D* K. to be good, H$. to do good, to 
 deal well, also to adorn. 10 for (or on) his journeyings. u And Melchizedech [king 
 of Salem]. > 2 } wine [Obs. XII]. 13 W K. to know, to take notice, HQ. to make 
 known. 14 a sojourner. 15 shall be. 16 theirs, [belonging] to them (>n.). !7 |2 a son 
 [Obs. XIII]. " a hundred, a year [ 106 (ii)J. 20 ^ K. to bear a child, JV>.
 
 141 
 
 6 pN 1$ w 37 rma : 36 ]^i 35 
 24 39 
 
 48 j-j ^^ 1 V-- , I 
 
 53 52 
 
 1 1 p ?o 
 
 13 
 
 to be born. 21 1JDX to say.* 2Z Abraham.* M "1^3 a youth, a young-man 
 (Tab. X. 5). 24 3B to sit, to sit down, also to dwell. - 5 Obs. XIV. 26 IIOQ an ass. 
 87 H3 ny so far, to yonder place. Eebekah.* 29 after. 30 Inf. S<p. of (9). 
 Tab. III. 32 let us take our journey. 33 before thee (m.). M two.* 23^ to lie 
 down. 36 [ty" 1 to sleep. 37 lighten Thou. 39 Pjp'V Joseph.* 39 and He hath brought up. 
 40 princes. 41 |*p* to awake. * 2 D?n to dream. 43 a second time. ** in the best of. 
 45 and shall I call ? 46 a woman. 47 pj^ K. to suck, H$. to suckle, nurse [a child]. 
 *8 n^JJ a child (m.). 49 V^ 11 H$. to save. 60 T a hand, i.e. T. M a strong one (m.). 
 62 a needy one. 63 and it shall be. M that when. 65 empty. 6$ pp* a right-hand (f,). 
 57 among the peoples. 58 His doings. 69 r\y^\ Salvation. 60 3TTI a sword. 61 
 a spear. 62 crushed ones of. 63 shew Thou the Light of. M Thy countenance. 
 
 * Words marked thus (*) need not be given in the Notes again, 
 
 t [In] death j or, as some give, ' [the sleep of] death.' 
 
 J M5. A>. to be Eaved. * Pt. I, 12.
 
 142 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11. -/*) 
 
 And the thing 1 was-good* 2 in the eyes 3 of Pharaoh. For- 
 asmuch-as-GoD-hath-shewed-thee (Hebr. after* causing-to-know- 
 of 5 God thee m.) all this, 6 there-is-none 7 [so] prudent 8 and 
 wise 9 as-thou.f And the brethren 10 of Joseph went-down.* 11 
 By this 6 1-shall-know 12 that true-men 13 ye [are] . . . . The lad H 
 will-not be-able 15 to leave 16 his father. If your (w.) little 17 
 brother 10 shall not come-down, 11 ye-shall-no-more-see (Hebr. ye. 
 shatt-not add 18 to-see 19 ) my face. 20 And-we-said s9 to our father, 
 we-shall not be-able 15 to go-down. 11 If thou (m.)-art-not 
 [Tab. XIII ({, 8)] sending, 21 we-will not go-down. 11 Could-we- 
 certainly-know (Hebr. whether to-knoio 22 could-we-knoio) that he- 
 would-say [Fut.], bring-down 23 your (m.} brother ? 
 
 And-oflspring- was-born * 24 to Joseph. And his bo w 25 abode * 26 
 in strength. 27 Come-down-thou (/.) n and sit 26 on 28 dust. 29 
 Who [is] like the wise 9 [One] ? and who knoweth 30 the inter- 
 pretation 31 of a thing? 1 And He-hath-brought-down * 23 the 
 might 32 of her confidence. 33 Save, 34 LORD, Thy people Z5 ____ 
 0-now, 36 LORD, save-Thou, 37 we-pray ! 38 
 
 i -Q-1 . a 3B (Class I, 197). 3 Vocab. II (6). * nqx. Inf. Hiph. of 
 Xn>. nT. ' ps. 8 fQJ. 9 DDn. ' 10 Tab. XIII (2). -ri> (Class II T ). 12 JJT 
 199. 13 D"33. U "IJ?2. 15 Fut. Hoph. of "?3\ 16 3ty. " |^i?. 18 Fnt.Hiph. 
 of Pp 11 (like that of lfc^). 19 n'lS^. 2 Vocab. II (7). 21 H 1 ?^ P. 22 Inf. Abs. 
 of (12) [followed by tbe Fut. of (12)]. 23 Hiph. of (11). 21 JVt>A. of n^>\ 
 
 15 fl$5 (/) decl - Uke Tab - X (O* 26 3 ^- 27 IC 1 ^- 29 ^- 29 ""?V- 3 Partic ' M 
 Kal of (12). 31 ">& ; B. 3i TV- 33 ni25P. (N.B. Put before the H when it has -?- 
 under it.) Hiph. of ])& ( 199, /).' 35 Vocab. I (14). 36 N3N. ' 199, * N3. 
 39 1DK, 188 (a). 
 
 * Fut. w. 1 Conv. f Hebr. like thee (>.), Tab. II. % 198, p. 136.
 
 143 
 
 SECTION XYI. 
 
 VARIATIONS IN THE CASE OF YERBS 3*3, i.e. WHOSE FIRST ROOT- 
 LETTER is i [Tab. XIX]. 
 
 204. Some forms are like those in Tab. XIY, viz. the Inf. 
 Abs., the Past Tense, and Participles Kal, the Infin., Imper., 
 and Fut. N<j>., and the whole of the Pi., Pu., & HO. 
 
 205. The chief Yariations are the following : 
 
 (i) the disappearance* of the 1 st Rt-letter 3 (a) in the Infinitive 
 Constr. Kal [thus, fl^ij fr. B^ 3 , the H being added as in the 
 *'fi Yerbs, 194 (a)], and (/3) in the Imper. Kal, see Tab. XIX ; 
 
 (ii) the dropping of the 3 (when it would have Quiescent)^ 
 and the placing Dag. F. in the 2 d Rt-letter,:}: as in B^ for 
 B$Q)?, B>afi for B>jlQ)J;l, etc. This is seen [Tab. XIX] to be 
 the case in Fut. K., in the Past & Partic. N$., and in the 
 Hiph. & Hbph. Yoices. Also, 
 
 N.B. these Yerbs have usually the (or ITuph-dZ) form of 
 the Sixth Yoice. Cp. 121. Thus, B^H 3 B. m. Past Hoph. 
 for ty*5(i)ri corresponding to *l3i"l etc. 
 
 206. TYhen the 2 d Rt-letter is Guttural, 
 
 (a) instead of theft Inf. form, as in HB^I we have 
 n as in rTOS Inf. K. of yttt w. ^. [See also Note (a) on 
 Tab. XIX.] 
 
 (b) It scarcely need be said that the Rules of Tab. XYI (3) 
 [cp. 181] hold for these Yerbs also. 
 
 * Only in the case of some of the Verbs -which take to the 2 d Kt-letter in the 
 Fut. [Cp. 207]. See also 'Notes on Tab. XIX.' 
 
 t Forms in which the 3 is not dropped agree with Tab. XIV, and therefore do 
 not fall under this head, viz. of ' Variations.' 
 
 t The Dag. F. is sometimes dropped when the 2 d Rt-letter has -7- ; thus, from 
 J?D3, Wp? [instead of ^|p for -lytp^J, and so -lypn, etc. 
 
 So also instead of the Jl-y s./. Partic. forms. Cp. Tab. XVI (3) (D).
 
 144 VERBS j'S 207-211. 
 
 207. Some Verbs j'fi have the ( ) form of Fut. K. ; thus 
 &X 1 etc., as in 205 (ii). And, of these, some drop the 3 in the 
 Infin. Constr. and Imper. 2 s. m. K., as said in | 205 (i). But 
 
 208. other Verhs 3*3 have the ( ) form of Fut. IL 
 These do not take the Jl form of Inf. K., and do not drop 
 the 3 in the Imper. K. [ 205, i] ; thus, fr. 7^3 (of which the 
 Fut. K. is Sb' etc.) we have the Inf. K. forms 7tf!l 7SJ3 7337 
 
 v.' . n \ :><.:> \. : I 
 
 and the Imper. V7S3 2 pi. m. ; and so EHtpi 2 s. w. Imper. K. 
 of BtoJ (of which the Fut. is {513*, etc.) ; etc. 
 
 209. Before a Guttural 2 d Et-letter, the J is generally not 
 dropped. But 
 
 (a) it is so dropped, and Compensation (for the Dag.) is made, 
 in the K. Fut. JTI* fTO and 
 
 V") V "' 
 
 (/3) it is so dropped, and Compensation is NOT made, in the 
 N<f>. Past Dm, 'ftbm, Dn&rO, and Partic. DH3, of Dm ; and 
 so in the JVfy. Past inm of 
 
 210. (a) Some Verbs have forms like those in Tab. XIV, 
 besides corresponding forms like those in Tab. XIX ; thus, 
 fr. ItM lift* and Tb also 
 
 (/S) Also some have both the ( ) and the (-=-) form of the 
 Fut. K. ; thus, fr. Tti both TJ* ^ft TIHI and also W 
 
 ' 
 
 211. The 1 s. and 1 pi. Fut. K., w. the H of 144, drop the 
 Vowel of the 2 d Rt-letter (except when the word is in Pause). 
 Thus, nVtpi * & HgW t 1 pi. Fut. K. ; n[?SN (in Pause T*?fiK) 
 1 s., & 11733 (which would be in Pause {D7B3) 1 pi. ; etc. 
 
 vr : T i ' 
 
 * In Pause the D would have , thus { 
 
 t See Pt. I, 72 (Note , e ] for (i) the help given to the pronunciation by dropping 
 the Dag. F., as in 205, Note J, and (ii) the additional help sometimes given by 
 a Compound Shva [as in Hp^K, fr. pEO, 1 K. xix. 20].
 
 VERBS }fi 212-214. 145 
 
 Similarly, in other Voices, except the H$>., in which the Khcrik 
 remains as usual (thus, P1T3K MT33 fr. *1J3). 
 
 T V ~ ) T V - > 
 
 212. As said in 202, some Verbs whose 1 st Rt-letter is 
 drop their 1 st Rt-letter and take Dag. F. in the 2 a Rt-letter, 
 and so have forms like those of the Verbs y) in Tab. XIX. 
 Thus, from 
 
 . Past [att], POJ, etc. Partic. 3ft t etc. ; 
 
 . Inf. (w. h) Wrh, Past l^H, etc., Fut. 
 
 #<J. Partic. n2fib. So, from 
 , JSfy. Inf. JgH, Past J^n etc., Fut. W (^), etc. 
 
 m Fut. ^ (p. Ji_). V So, from 
 , ^. Fut. 5^, etc. 
 
 Ho. Fut. yj* . So, from 
 
 JT. Fut. [m], mri, etc. ; 
 
 . Past n^ etc., Fut. n^ Is. xxxiii. 12 (for $SW t 
 the -7- being resolved into followed by Dag.} ; 
 
 . Past nn mn etc. ; Fut. [rw], -mi etc. 
 
 213. So ny f is given by some authorities as a Root which 
 drops its * and takes Dag. F. in the 2 d Rt-letter in H$. and H&. ; 
 thus, H^. Inf. mrh (w. *?), Past Pl^H (& hjn) etc., Fut. 
 rvr (& H3^) etc.; JK. H-Jft Partic. HH^n (Zech. v. 11) 3 s./. 
 
 - V- V. >.T .. f T V\ X 
 
 Past, is partly Hoph. and partly Hiph. 
 
 214. Besides the above, there are some occasional forms of 
 Verbs *'S which are like forms of Verbs 3'fi in Tab. XIX. 
 
 * As given by some authorities. 
 
 t Some, however, discard this Boot, and suppOe that there are two forms of the 
 S(p. & H8. of ni3, with different significations.
 
 146 VERBS J'fi 215, 217 
 
 215. The Verb Hp7 to take drops its 7 as the 3 is dropped 
 [| 205, i & ii] in the Verbs j'3. Also, 
 
 N.B. on account of the f|, this Verb has fi in the Inf. K. 
 instead of the fi of the form r\W% fr. ^3. Cp. 206. 
 
 [For this Verb hpS see ' Notes on Tab. XIX,' Column (A).] 
 
 216. The Verb JHJ to S'tw, as seen in .'Notes on Tab. XIX' 
 Column (B), also drops its 3 d Rt-letter Nun before H, and 
 before J ; and Dagesh F. is then placed in the following letter 
 (except in the case of Hfl* Inf. Constr.). Thus we have the 
 Infin. iflft his giving [instead of irOfi like iflK^l], and 'rjfttt thy 
 (m.) giving, TjPlTl thy (/.) giving^ ^J-l my giving, etc. ; and so in 
 the Past-Tense we have fiHJ [instead of n}J"0], nn^ *nni 
 
 Tv-T 1 - T : \- T J :V-T> -V-T> 
 
 DgTli, }JlW. In all these the 3 d Rt-letter J is dropped before 
 n. So in the 1 pi. Past ^fO [instead of ^(})ti] it is dropped 
 before the i of the termination ^ . 
 
 217. For the Pause-forms of the Verbs i'2, it is sufficient to 
 refer to 165 & 166. 
 
 This word has -s- instead of a Short- Vowel followed by Dag. P,
 
 147 
 
 VOCABULARY V. 
 
 1. tiaj a mighty one (m.>. | 3. 1133 (.) glory, Lc. ^33 j o. |^ (Vocab. II. 6) is 
 
 2. ^13* (m.} produce, increase. \ 4. DP3 (ro.) vengeance. rarel 7 W2<wc - 
 
 I 6. 3I? (m.) Mjtftvity 
 (i.e. the same). 
 
 EXERCISE XXXII. 
 (To le translated into English, 11, a- .) 
 
 : c T$ 5 ripl ^3 4 W# : 'sfra 3 W 2 npg) 1 npn 
 
 15 
 
 19 31 * 30 7 5 9 
 
 34 33 19 32 
 
 n.t 
 
 1 mercy. 2 DD^| truth. 3 1X3 to keep, preserve. * yCXt? to hear. 5 np? to take, to 
 receive ; N<p. & WJ. to be taken. 6 D^"1Dfe? sayings. 7 "ID-ID instiuclion. 8 \risJom, 
 intelligence. 9 }n3 to give, to set, to give forth or utter [one's voice]. 10 to simple ones. 
 subtlety. 12 ru-infl understanding. 13 ^ to go. " securely. 15 ^T (/.) a foot, 
 Tab. X (i), Du. DJ^n.* 16 6)33 to stumble [(so E. V. here) ; lit. to strike, dash, smite]. 
 17 3 1 ? (m.) a heart, w. aff. i2^>, etc., pi. nteb.* 18 straight forwards. 19 D33 IT^. to 
 look, to behold. 2 and knowledge. 21 HBb a lip, J>w. DjriB^. 22 hy> Hf. 
 to profit, to avail. 23 treasures of. 24 wickedness. K and righteousness. 28 ?V3 
 ^. to deliver. OT from death. 2S doctrine. 29 good * [Adject, m., 76 (i)]. 
 80 behold! 31 JJ33 -H^>. to pour out, to utter. 32 this one, such a one (m.). 
 83 a humble one (>.). ** and one (m.) stricken of, (or contrite, as E.V:). 
 
 * "Words marked thus (*) need not be given again in the Notes.
 
 148 
 
 s? nwnS ni'nS rts> 39 *,>^ ss p|f 33 
 
 48m * 
 
 70 >AftMS* 69 K^M<, ^^ 63 ?(** 5 n^w* 67 ^ 66 S V>>m 65 
 
 s W to pour ( 212). 38 and I will bring him near. 37 ^'J3 E. & N$. 
 to approach. 38 who is this [that] ? (cp. 96, ii. /3, and 97). -39 hath 
 engaged, or pledged. 40 2BTI to think, devise. 41 devices. 42 in order 
 that not. 4S m3 to banish, expel. w lit. master of my suit, i.e. one in 
 controversy with me. 45 from fear of. 46 D\'H (m.) life (a Noun of plural form).* 
 47 Vocab. I (16). 48 JJ33 to touch, happen (as an evil accident) [with 2 before the 
 person or thing affected]. evil (w). 60 ^Q3 to fall. 61 beside thee (m.). 
 62 a thousand, Tab. X (1). M and thou shalt be. M pS Ho^A. to be firm. 65 thou 
 shalt fear. 66 The Lord. 57 [the] commandments [of]. 59 D^Jpn statutes. 69 IV* Zfy. 
 to place, to establish. 60 [the] borders [of]. 61 133 -Efy. to declare. 62 pl (w.) righteous- 
 ness*, Tab. X (2). 63 D'V (OT.) a day, pi. D^OJ ' i.c.' W.* * a saying. in (.) 
 a mountain, 'i.e.' *1H pi. DHH ' i.e.' *^n.* 66 \&y to smoke. 67 when. 68 appointed- 
 time. 69 rightly. 70 OBK' to judge. 
 
 * Words marked thus (*) need not be given in the Notes again.
 
 149 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11. -/*.) 
 
 And Jacob vowed* 1 a vow. 2 And Jacob told* 3 to Eachel 4 
 that 16 the brother of her father he [was]. Tell-thou 5 (m.) to 
 me what 6 [shall be] thy reward. 7 Better 8 [ 82, i.] is my- 
 giving 9 her to thee (m.) than my-giving9 her to another 10 
 man 11 : abide 12 with-me. 22 And it-was-told * 14 to Laban 15 
 that 1G Jacob had-fled 17 [| 152]. And he-took* 18 his brethren 
 with 13 him. Recognize 19 for- thyself 20 (w.) what 21 [is thine] 
 with-me, 22 and take 18 [it] to thee. And he- took * 18 of 23 
 that-which-came-to-hand (Hebr. the-coming 24 into 25 his hand) 
 a present 26 for Esau his brother. And-he-bowed-himself 27 
 earthwards 28 seven w times 30 until 31 his-approaching 32 unto 31 
 his brother. And the women-servants S3 approached * 32 . . . . 
 And Leah 34 also approached* 32 . . . . And afterwards 35 there- 
 approached 36 Joseph and Rachel. 4 And they (w.) -journeyed* 37 
 from Beth-el. 38 And Jacob placed* 39 a pillar 40 over 41 her grave. 42 
 And Israel journej 7 ed* 37 . And HE-conducted * 43 , like the 
 sheep, 44 His people. 45 And a new 46 spirit 47 1- will- give 48 within- 
 you. 49 And I- will give f 48 in Zion Salvation 50 for Israel My 
 glory. 51 
 
 That-which thou (w.)-shalt-vow, 52 pay-thou. 53 
 
 1 VI3 Fut. (^). [See 210 (0).] 2 TIJ. 3 n33 H<t>. * ^>rn. 8 Imper. 
 H<t>. of 133, \v. n. 6 no. 7 rnbE?O, w. aff. irnab'O, etc. 8 210. 9 Inf. J5T. of 
 jri3, w. aff. for my. 10 inK . ti^K. 12 Imper. E. of 3E, w. n. 13 Tab. Ill (3). 
 
 uHtpfi.of (3). 15 jnb. 16 rp. 17 ma. 18 np^>. " 133 H$. M ^. 2i no. 
 so Dn?y?. S1 ny. 32 1^33. 33 pi. of nripB?. 3J n&6. ins. 36 3 s. m. Past 
 
 JV^. of E>33. ^ X?D3. s 8 Vx IV3. 39 2i 4> H<f> ( 212). *> n3-VO. * l ^y. 
 nnai?. " -2"<?> of (37). ** |NV. 45 Vocab. I (14). *s Khn (.). See 59. 
 
 Fut. (-). [See also No. 1.]. 53 D 1 ?^ P. 
 
 Fut. w. 1 Convers. t Past w. } Convers.
 
 150 
 
 SECTION XVII. 
 
 VARIATIONS IN THE CASE OF VERBS l'& AND VERBS *V 
 [Tab. XX]. 
 
 218. There are two great Classes of Verbs whose 2 a Rt-letter 
 is ^ or *, viz. those 
 
 (I) in which the 1 (or the *) is Consonantal, 
 (II) in which the 1 (or the *) is Quiescent. 
 
 219. The forms of the First Class agree with those of ordinary 
 Verbs,* and therefore do not require detailed mention here. But 
 
 220. IMPORTANT VARIATIONS take place when the 2 d Rt-letter 
 is 1 (or * f) Quiescent. 
 
 (i) The 1 is sometimes Quiescent in } ; as in [see Tab. XX] 
 
 (a) Kal, Infin., Partic (2), Imper. and Fut., 
 
 <) N<f>., Past 2 s. & pi. (. & /.), and 1 s. & pi. But 
 
 (N.B.) the defective form may occur for }, as in 
 
 tn| Ps. xii. 9 for DVT3 Inf. K. w. 3 (fr. D11), 
 
 and so }p for 1!|p 2 pi. m. Imper. K, Dp&0 for 
 
 D1J3K1 1 s.'Fut. K. w. 1 Conv., tf3p for 'i$|p> 
 
 |>. T T |,.XT KT 
 
 3 pi. w. Fut. K., etc. 
 
 * Thus, () when the 2 d Rt-letter is <\ Consonantal. we have (1) fr. ITH , F1V1 
 3 s. >n. Past JT., m_T. 3 s. >. Fut. JT., D^Pl-np pi. w. Partic. Pu ; (2) fr. HIV, 
 :-im T V* in Pause for -imy? 3 pi. >n. Fut. K. ; so (3) fr. IIH, J-II^Pj* 3 pi. w. Fut. K. 
 in Pause ; (4) fr. 13, the Inf. JT. jfa 1 ? w. ^, Past JJ13 3 s. >., t-IJ/ji 3 pi. (in Pause 
 for -1J?}!), yi| 1 pi., also the Partic. Jfijl s. f., and Fut. JW 3 s. >., etc.; (5) fr. 
 INK A Inf.'rpj> w. b, Fut. n?Jg 3 s. m., etc. So, also, 
 
 (i) when the 2 d Et-letter is Consonantal, (&) fr. 3*K, ^3*N1 1 s. Past JT. 5 
 (7) fr. D^p, the Pi. Inf. D>i2^ w. !?, Past Dp 3 s. m., .1>j? 3 pi., Fut! Jn^'^l Pause- 
 form of nD'pSO 1 B. (with H, and with t Convers.), etc. ; (8) the HQ. forms UVByn 
 1 pi. Past of TV, and nBV!l 3 pi. . Fut. (in Pause) of TV. [For the trans- 
 
 A T 
 
 position of the V and the fl of Tin, and for the change of the fl to 13, cp. ' Notes 
 on Tab. XIV ()]. 
 t See 225-228.
 
 VERBS 1'tf 220 (ii-v). 151 
 
 (ii) The 1 is sometimes Quiescent in Khoukm; as in 
 
 (a) the Inf. Abs. K. Dif^ 
 
 OS) some other Inf. K. forms, as JTlfc*, rflfcS, flto, 
 (and so tfQ^ but H^S), and with Pron. Affs., 
 inift* Ms dying, etc., from HID fo efa?, 
 
 (7) some Fut. K. forms, as *ivh ^ij^ft etc., besides 
 the more usual %]$'' y$F\ etc. : and 
 
 ^ T> V. T > 
 
 (5) throughout the -ZV<., except the forms in (i, /3). 
 
 (iii) The 1 is sometimes dropped f as in the K. Past [DD 
 3 s. m., PlftD 3 s. /., tySp 2 s. m, etc.], and 
 Partic (1) [Dp s. w,, Hibp s. /., etc.], etc. ; see 
 Tab. XX. 
 
 (iv) The 1 is sometimes replaced by *, either 
 
 (a) written, as in E^pir? Inf. H$. with 7, and D^pll 
 
 Past 3 s. m., etc., or 
 
 (/3) understood, as in the Inf. Abs. H$. J DDH and 
 the Fut. forms D 
 
 (7) the Long Vowel is sometimes shortened into as 
 we shall see. 
 
 (v) The Hdph-al Voice of these Verbs has the same form as 
 in the Verbs 'fi [see Tab. XVIII] 
 
 * This, and the like words fr. D1O, may however be (as some take them to be) 
 Declension-forms of the Noun D JD death, with Pron. Affs. as in Tab. XIII (J, e). 
 There are also Wt3 my dying, HH-ID her . . , -Up-ID (& -IJptD) owr . . , and }np 
 Mct'r (/.) . . , like the forms from Dip. 
 
 t For which a Quiescent-letter is understood, generally. But sometimes such a 
 letter appears, as the X in DNJ5 (= DP 3 s. m Past K.} Hos. x. 14, etc. So, for ^JJ 
 3 s. m. Fut. S<j), of ^13, we find^KJJ Eccl. xii. 5 (See, also, p. 295). 
 
 J Once D"j?.n, Jer. xliv. 25. 
 
 These forms are used ("rather than the * forms) in the three cases mentioned 
 in 162 (e,ii).
 
 152 VERBS 1'tf 220 (vi)-222. 
 
 (vi) Instead of Pi-el, Pu-dl, Hithpa-el forms, these Verbs 
 have y?i), SSia, 9?1Snn forms, i.e. the 2 d Rt- 
 letter is Quiescent (and therefore cannot be 
 doubled by Dag. F.), but the 3 d Rt-letter is 
 repeated. See Tab. XX. 
 
 221. The Past Tense forms in the second column of the Kal 
 in Tab. XX, HD PIHD ^Tfo and the Partic. J") correspond to 
 
 V." ) TV"' V"> V > 
 
 the SVS forms of Past-Tense and Partic. K. in the 'Full* Verb 
 
 T 
 
 [see 138 (A)]. But, 
 
 Obs. (i) the which, in the 3 s. /. and 3 pi. Past of the 7^3 
 form of 'Full* Verbs, appears in the Pause-forms 
 only, stands regularly in the forms riHtt 3 s. /., 
 ^HD 3 pi. ; also 
 
 (ii) the Partic (1) K. s./. and pi. m. and/, are Hnft * E^H/b 
 
 print?]. But 
 
 (iii) the Imper. and Fut. of niD are like those of Dip. 
 
 [(iv) The Verb nifc having n for its 3 d Rt-letter drops this 
 n on receiving an additional syllable beginning with 
 n, and this latter receives Dag. F. ; thus, fi/b for 
 
 runjD "nna for nrunjo n& for 'rvn)& Dn& 
 
 T N : ' v- * TV- T v : ' v- > -v- v : ' v- ' vv - > 
 
 for DQcnja, etc. Cp. 183 (/?)]. 
 
 222. The Past-Tense forms in the third column of the Kal 
 in Tab. XX, viz, #3, H^3, etc., and the Partic (1)^3, correspond 
 to the S^S form of the Past-Tense and Partic. in the ' Full ' 
 Verbs [see 138 (A)]. But, 
 
 * Thus D^3? Neh. xiii. 21, pi. t., fr. |1? or \h. (The corresponding s. m. wouli 
 
 be S like "IV Song. v. 2, fr. 
 \ i"
 
 VERBS ftf 222 (i)-224. 153 
 
 Obs. (i) the -^- which in the 3 s. /. & 3 pi. Past of the 3 
 form of ' Full ' Verbs appears in Pause-forms only, 
 stands regularly in the forms M^3 3 s. /. and ] 
 3 pi. 
 
 (ii) The Partic (1) IL s. /. and pi. m. & f. are 
 
 (iii) In the Imper. (the form $^ corresponds to the 
 form HpS with ). The stands regularly in the 
 forms ^3 2 s. /. and ^3 2 pi. m. ; but it appears in 
 the corresponding Pause-forms, merely, in the case of 
 f Full' Verbs. So also 
 
 (iv) in the Fut. forms Bbfi 2 s./., J|gty 3 pi. w., tlBttfl 
 2 pi. m., and in MB^tf 1 s. w. PI ; for 
 
 (v) the Fut. forms BQ^ $tt, etc -> correspond to the( ) 
 forms np^ npSn etc., of the 'Full' Verb, the 
 
 |v : > ).: 
 
 -r of the prefix-letters being lengthened into in 
 order to avoid the occurrence of the Short- vowel in 
 an open syllable. 
 
 223. Some Verbs have here and there forms such as in 221 
 or 222, as well as others like those fr. Dip in Tab. XX. 
 
 224. Some Verbs have (cp. 220, ii, 7) Fut. K. forms such as 
 DPI* (fr. D1H) Ps. Ixxii. 13, Dillfi Ez. v. 11, as weU as others 
 
 V. T X K T 
 
 such as Din 11 D^nfl. 
 
 V T> \ t ' 
 
 The forms in Tab. XX, of which the chief features are sketched 
 above, will be sufficient for this Exercise book with the follow- 
 ing additions [ 225-248].
 
 154 VERBS ' f tf 225-227. 
 
 225. Some few Verbs have i (being *'y therefore) where 
 the !| occurs in the Kal of Dip [Tab. XX] ; thus 
 
 (i) INFIN. jra (AbsoL*) of Eoot p, D^ (Constr.) of Root 
 Qfef(=Dlb). So JW, and (w.*?) JW 1 ?, and (w. Aff. 
 
 '-T- my) w r=w# Pt.i,i2] of Eoot rv#(=ni#), 
 
 " v . \- v . t 
 
 etc.; 
 (u) IMPER. D'fe? 2 s. m. (and w. PI, itD* 1 ^), % #fe> 2 s. /. (and 
 
 W Jer. xxxi. 21), ?& 2 pi. *. (also ^) ; 
 (iii) Fur. D'PJ 3 s. w. (also D^ and DB*), *Dto, etc. 
 
 226. Such Verbs have other forms like those in 220 (iii) ; 
 [thus, fr. &'& in KalJ 
 
 (i) PAST Db> 3 s. m., p|&fe> 3 s./., fi&2? 2 s. m., nbb 2 s./., 
 
 V.T T VT T : v- : : v 
 
 etc. ; 
 (ii) PARTIC (1) Db^ s. m., HD2? s./, etc. Also 
 
 V ' ^T V.T T 
 
 (iii) there are sometimes l'tf o-s we// s ''y forms having the 
 same 1 st and 3 d Rt-letters ; thus, D 5 )^ Inf. (Abs.) and Dlb> V\vh 
 
 V V ' V T t 
 
 etc., besides Q*b in 225 (i) ; and so D^ Ex. iv. 11, besides 
 the more usual D*E^, etc., in 225 (iii). So D1 W? Is. xxxv. 1 
 (3 pi. m. Fut. K. with Aff. D them m., Sect. XXII) from W, 
 although the usual Imper. and Fut. forms are from b^]. But 
 
 227. there are also a few forms, as JTQ* 1 *! (Job xxxiii. 13) 
 2 s. m. Past, WS (Dan. ix. 2) 1 s. Past, "and W-l (in DWTl, 
 Jer. xvi. 16, 3 pi. m. Past with Aff. D them m.), which are 
 like Hiph-il forms without the H f . 
 
 * Sometimes occurs as in {J?ri Job xvii. 2 (3 s. /., fr. Jv) ; and, in Pause, 
 JfSri "?$ Ju. xix. 20 (2 s. m.). But also |^J 3 s. w., \hfr 3 s. /. & 2 s. *., |^N 1 s., 
 }^3 1 pi.; and }^1, ^H ^S 2 S. xvii. 16, cp. $ 232 (iv). 
 
 t They agree generally with Tab. XX in other parts also. 
 
 J The full H$. forms would be rrirrnrj, 'flj'an, and D-IJHDl fr. WpD w. Aff. D 
 (Sect. XXII).
 
 VERBS fy AND fy 228-230. 155 
 
 
 
 [Note. Some have supposed that these forms, and also thf.se 
 in 225 (i & ii), are really H<f). forms without the Jl. This 
 may fairly be doubted, especially in regard to the forms in 
 225 (i & ii)]. 
 
 228. The Fut. K forms of D^, viz. D'bj, &W), etc., being 
 exactly the same as the H<f>. forms D^p* D^PD, etc., the 3 & 2 
 pi. /. would be HJJbta like njfcpfi. So we find * fl&Nn 3 pi./. 
 
 T : \.- r T ; |^"T T :v r 
 
 Fut. iT. from ^| of which the Fut. K. forms are W ^fi etc. 
 
 [Note. As in 220 (iv, /S), the * of these forms is often 
 replaced by ; thus Dt?* for D^, etc. Cp. Note () on 220 
 (iv. /3).] 
 
 229. Some few Verbs have forms like f D'T 3 s. m., tr\F\ 3 s. m., 
 from D*n, as well as the more usual forms DTl* D^l^lFl . So i2J^ 
 
 VT > V T V T 
 
 fr. ilfc?, as well as the more usual 3)$* etc. [cp. 220 (ii,7)]. 
 And so jin* f Gen. vi. 3, fr. JY1, but the more usual Fut. is (fr. |H) 
 ri etc. 
 
 230. Of the 3 & 2 pi. /. Fut. K. two. forms are given in 
 Tab. XX. The first of these two, viz. n3pft corresponds with 
 
 T ;|v T> 
 
 the Imper. 2 pi. /. i"l3b as I'O'lpJSJ;! with PlIHbS). And so we 
 have, (i) fr. 2\&, Pljafefel (in njiBW 1 s! vii. 14 ; cp. 
 Ez. xxxv. 9 Kri, and ptJ^ri twice in Ez. xvi. 55). Similarly 
 
 (2) fr. -IIK, njnn (m nj*i^ Kri for roaoro jnAi,'i s. 
 
 * Like n35B>n 3 pi./. Fut. jff$>. of 11EJ'; and so n^P) ia Tab. XX. 
 
 t Sometimes such forms are used where there is a positive or negative Wish. But 
 it is unsafe to limit the usage to that case. If we might assume such forms from 
 Roots which have them not, we might say that the - T - (5) of Dl ( 232) is obtained 
 from the -i- of Djp 11 [which does not occur] instead of the -1 of D-1pJ. But no 
 advantage is gained by the assumption, and some objections might be raised.
 
 156 VERBS fy 231-232 (i). 
 
 xiv. 27). And (s) fr. N1S, ntelfr * (and once PlJ&tf 1T1, onoe 
 But 
 
 231. several of the 3 pi./. Fut. IT. forms which occwr are like 
 Jjl, the second form given in Tab. XX. Thus (i) fr. fclfc, 
 fl; (2) fr. Spy, PiyStyri; (3) fr. J")S, tnjWan ; and so 
 
 (0 from y\&, n^nra once (Ez. xvi. 55) ; (5) fr. N1X PWK2FI 
 occurs once, and Pl^cS'Dfi once; but the form in 230 (3) occurs 
 about a dozen times. 
 
 232. The DRAWING BACK OF THE ACCENT by the 1 Convers. of 
 the Put. produces, in the Kal and Hiph. t some remarkable 
 changes in these Yerbs. Thus, 
 
 (i) in KAL, D'lp* has [in accordance with Pt. I, 55 (9, b)] 
 the Accent on the last syllable. But the 1 Convers., 
 as in 189, draws away the Accent to the Penult. 
 syllable. Consequently the Long- Vowel J| would then (if 
 left) be unaccented and yet followed by Shva Quiescent 
 understood with the D To avoid such a breach of the 
 great Rule in Pt. I, 55 (8), the } is shortened into 
 -T- (6) [Pt. I, 19], and so we have the form JDj5*1. 
 Similarly Dlpfl gives DjjFft. So, fr. S1#, 3MP give's 
 nfc?'*1 etc.$ And so 
 
 T VT-> 
 
 * The x being Quiescent, there is no Shva beneath it. For the Verb X13 see 
 pp. 272-275. 
 
 t Also niJMBJ-l Zech. i. 17, nan-IBl;! Ez. xiii. 19. 
 
 J In Pause, the Accent returning to the last syllable then, we have -^- instead of 
 the -7- (3). Thus (for fjj^l) je)J? T l from S|W, and (for pM) J|*V1 from JT1; 
 and so (for DV',!) D'lV*l, fr. D1V, etc. For Pause-forms not in Pause, such as 
 nb'l Nu. xxxv. 16, ibni Am. ix. 5, cp. 164 (ff). 
 
 So IttBb 1 pi. Fut. K. gives 3^31, which appears in the form 31^1 (with 1 
 'superfluous') in Neh. iv. 9. Cp. 2 S. xiii. 8.
 
 VERBS fy 232 (ii)-234. 157 
 
 (ii) in HIPH. Q 1 *^ gives Dp*1 with in the place of the 1 * 
 of D'j. Similarly D^fi gives D^fil . So, fr. 31#, 
 3*2^ gives 3E>*1, and !Tfe> 1 pi. gives 3^31, etc. 
 
 [N.B. The Pause-forms of Dp1 etc., are !Dp*1 etc.] 
 
 I WT-> I |"T-> J 
 
 (iii) The Fut. forms in 225, viz. Q^* etc., are treated like 
 those in (ii) here. Thus D^* 1 gives D?*1 etc. 
 
 (iv) Similarly when from any other cause the Accent is 
 removed from the last syllable of Dip 1 * D^p* and 
 
 KT> | V -T> 
 
 such like, the forms are as above in (i)-(iii). Thus 
 ^7 DjTI Job xxii. 28, NJ-a^ 2 S. xix. 38, 13 3T t 
 Ju. vi. 32, + 3B>fi Stf 1 K. ii. 20. 
 
 233. In the case of the 1 s. Fut., the Accent is not drawn 
 back by the 1 Convers. : and so Dlptf and D^pK remain un- 
 
 K T IV T 
 
 changed in tflpXI Kal and D'pKI ##. 
 
 K T T ). T T 
 
 234. When the 3 d Rt-letter is fi or ^, the 2 a Rt-letter takes 
 instead of (o) in the Kal, and also instead of in the 
 Hiph. Thus, fr. H1J ^o m^ ; the Fut. K. HW 3 s. m. gives m J1 
 ans? Ae rested, and the Fut. JJ<f>. H^* 1 3 s. m. gives Hi*1 and he 
 
 - \.'T -VT- 
 
 caused to rest (or and he gave rest] ; so that, the two forms being 
 exactly the same, the context alone can enable us to know 
 whether rQ*1 in any place is Kal or Hiph. 
 
 * If we might say that D*J5* would have the * replaced by on receiving the 1 
 Convers., and in the other two cases mentioned in 162 (e, ii), then it would be the -s- 
 of Dp.? T which is shortened into in DpJ T l. [But, as in 189 (i), the IT- itself 
 remains in D" 1 ^} ; and so in D^BW etc. We ha\e, however, 1UN1 as well as 
 T^KI, etc.] 
 
 t So too the Imper. Hq>. D 1 !!! 2 s. m. becomes D^H when the Accent is removed 
 from the last syllable. See 2 K. vi. 7. 
 
 J The Accent is not always drawn back so after ?X ; we find also 2^'fl ^ 
 Also fr. in, we find 2nn ^ (Krt) Pr. iii. 30 [31111 Kthtv.]. 
 
 An Accented also appears sometimes, as in Tab. XYI (S) (B, ff) ; thus PI1* 
 for nT } etc. So JJ3J (for yjl) in JJ3J ^>N 2 K. xxiii. 18.
 
 158 VERBS fy 235, 236. 
 
 Similarly ^i* 1 ! fr. JflJ may be (so far as form is concerned) 
 either Put. K., fr. Jfl^ or Fut. H<j>., fr. JpJJ. and the context 
 alone can decide which of the two it is. So, also, 
 
 235. when the 3 d Rt-letter is 1, sometimes is chosen instead 
 of (#) in the TTa/, and instead of in the Hiph. Thus, fr. 
 *T1D fo ^wrw oswfe (Intrans.) the Fut. K. *^|D* 3 s. m. gives *lp*1 
 a? Ae turned aside [to see, etc.] Ju. xiv. 8, and the Fut. H<j>. 
 TD* 3 s. m. gives ^D*1 #we? 7*e turned aside ["i.e. removed the 
 
 V T - V.T- U 
 
 ashes from his face] 1 K. xx. 41. 
 
 So too when the Accent is removed from any other cause, as 
 in -W 1 K. viii. 37, TVfJ ^ D. ii. 9, but these may, perhaps, 
 not be from 
 
 236. (a) The Fut. 1 s. and 1 pi., with !"!, are unchanged. 
 Thus Pl^ljJN 1 s., n^pi 1 pi., of the Kal\ and so 
 
 the Hiph. nyg i s. (of pa), nynj i pi. (o 
 
 etc.* And so, 
 
 09) the H(j>. Imper. 2 s. m. with H ; thus 
 
 from D1*1, etc. 
 (7) The 5T. Imper. 2 s. m. with H has not only the Accent 
 
 Penultimate as in H/b^lp from Dip ; but also some- 
 T K I 
 
 times the Accent is on the last syllable as in 
 H/b^lp which is exactly the same in appearance 
 as the s. /. Partic (2) K. [The context alone 
 enables us to distinguish, then, between the two 
 words.] 
 
 For nK'W, 3 s. m. vritli fl, see 144 (7).
 
 VERBS fy 237, 238 (ii). 159 
 
 237. The corresponding variation in regard to the position 
 of the Accent is found also in the 2 s. /. Imper. K. (*/b1p *), and 
 sometimes in the 3 s. /. Past K. (i"lftp t) ; and more often in the 
 3 pi. Past K. (12Dp). 
 
 [Further remarks on the forms in 236 (7) and 237 will be 
 given in the Appendix.] 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 238. (i) In the Past K. of the Yerb Nil, the 1 takes in 
 the place of as in Jltfl (& PinNl) 2 a. m., ''fifctt 1 s., etc. 
 This is because the K (being Quiescent in these forms) has not 
 Quiescent Shva, as the D has in Fipp, ^Pp, e * c> and therefore, 
 the syllable being now an 'open' one, the Short Yowel is 
 lengthened into -7- . Many other instances of this will be found 
 to occur. Comp. Obs. XXIII., p. 185 [For the Yerb Nil see 
 pp. 272-275.] 
 
 (ii) \Ve find (instead of ) in DW'fil 2 pi. m. Past K. 
 from t?'l) with 1 pref. This, as also the in Df)^T 2 pi. m. 
 Past K. of Bh and the in Dn^N^' 2 pi. m. Past of hti&A 
 are supposed by some to be obtained from the of the 7^3 
 form of Past Tense K. This is possible ; and thus the would 
 be in analogy with the (d) of the 2 pi. m. & f. of the 7^3 
 form of Past Tense. But the statement of 138 (A) (ii) should 
 
 * VD-lp (with the Accent on the last syllable) might be, instead, the Infin. Kal 
 with Pron. Aff. my. The context alone can decide between the two, when the 
 Imper. 2 s. /. is so accented. 
 
 t !"IEp (with the Accent on the last syllable) might be, instead, the Partic (1) 
 K. e.f. ; and the context alone can decide between the two, when the 3 s./. Past is so 
 accented. 
 
 J The T occurs also, sometimes, instead of the usual , in some forms with 
 Pronom. Affs., as will be seen in Sect. XXII.
 
 160 VERBS fy 238 (iii)-240. 
 
 be borne in mind by the Student. This matter must be dealt 
 with by and by. 
 
 (in) The position of the Accent on the last syllable of some 
 Past-Tense forms, instead of the last but one as in Tab. XX, 
 must be dealt with hereafter, as said above. But, moreover, 
 
 N.B. the Accent is on the last syllable sometimes, not always, 
 in accordance with 160. 
 
 (iv) It need scarcely be said that ^-h (i Q ^^ Ju. xix. 13) is 
 1 pi. Past K. for Vfyh fr. \k. Cp. 183 (a). * 
 
 (v) The form pijjl. Zech. v. 4 is 3 s. /. Past K. fr. \h, with 
 
 in the place of . 
 
 239. In accordance with the great General Rule of 59, the 
 
 of ^rftft* disappears when the Accent is on the last syllable 
 (by reason of the | of 145) as in prfi/y 3 pi. m. K. with (or 
 pjjb), Pt. I 14). So pmBn (or pjjbri) 2 pi. m. So also in 
 the Hiph.; thus pfc'j? 3 pi. m. Fut. H<f>. (with )) Job iv. 4. 
 
 240. In NIPH., (a) when the 1 st Et-letter cannot receive 
 Dagesh, we find Compensation made in the Infin. ""lire? (for 
 "VlNPlS) Job xxxiii. 30 fr. TIN, and so in the Fut. W Jer. 
 vi. 22, etc., fr. Ity.* 
 
 (@) Instead of the !| of Oftb'lp} 2 pi. m. Past, we have in 
 
 Dnisbi EZ. xi. 17, Dnbp^ E Z . xx . 43. 
 
 (7) Instead of the i in the Partic. ^>. we have, also, Shurik; 
 thus D513 pi. m. Ex. xiv. 3 (Pt. I, 14). 
 
 * This form is adopted, in the word "HJJJ, Zech. ii. 17, for the Past Niph. 3 s. m. 
 Once, also, we find HO3 3 s. m. Past JV>., in Pause, for 1D3 (as if fr. "HD, Sect. 
 XVIII).
 
 241, 242. SOME ' BORROWED' FORMS 243, 244. 161 
 
 241. Instead of IT! in the HIPH. Past we find (a) sometimes 
 n as in nir^n Ps. xliv. 8, Wpn Ps. cxxxix. 18; also 08) 
 
 v: T v v: v | :: 
 
 -- before a Guttural, as in TH^F! Jer. xi. 7. 
 
 . ^ - 
 
 242. Besides the long forms of the 2 s. & pi. and 1 s. & pi. of 
 the Past H$. in Tab. XX, there are also a few forms which are 
 more like to mpfiPl WpSH etc., in Tab. XIV. Thus fiSjn 
 
 T :|v- : > :| v - : . . T : v- 
 
 2 s. m. fr. Sp Ex. xx. 25, etc. ; WgPl 1 s. fr. TltD Jer. xvi. 13. 
 SimUarly, from HID, HWbn 2 s. *. with n, 'fign 1 s., *W!2T\ 
 2 pi. m., *jripn 2 pi. /.; and, from J1D, ^H 1 pi. (2 Chr. 
 xxix. 19) [cp. 183]. 
 
 243. 'BORROWED* FORMS. Some words, belonging to Roots 
 I'tf in sense, agree in form with those of Tab. XX (i'S). Thus, 
 (i) in the H$. PAST, "?pJTpn 3 pi. with Aff. ^t thee (m.} [instead 
 ofTpJVpn (or 'ri), fr. mD] Jer. xxxviii. 22; and so (2) in the 
 H(j). PARTIC. JVp/b s. m., and D^^?^+ or tyrQ + P^ m - Instead of 
 D^Dfr. llS]; (3) in the J?$. Fur. !|t^ 3 pi. m., 
 
 2 pL m. t [instead of J|T^ T , W^fi] ; (4) the SopA. Past 
 
 3 s. m. [2 S. xxiii. 1, instead of DpIH fr. Dip] ; etc. 
 
 244. As other instances of 'Borrowed' forms we may mention 
 here (i) B^iP! 3 s. m. Past H$., H^JH 3s./., n^jiH 2 s. m., 
 ^"Oin 3 pi., when used in the sense of 'being ashamed' 
 which belongs to^ the Root B^Q, but the forms belong to the 
 Root $y to be dry (Hos. xiii. 15). So, on the other hand, 
 tin^ in the sense "he or it will be dry." This sense belongs 
 to the Root $1*, but the form tf'W belongs to the Root 
 
 * Observe the here, instead of . Further remarks on these, and some other 
 forms, will be given hereafter. 
 t See Tab. XXV. J la the sense murmuring,
 
 162 SOME 'BORROWED' FORMS 245-248. 
 
 Many other instances of 'borrowed' forms will be found to 
 occur. Under this head may be classed the forms referred to in 
 212, 214. Also the usual Hoph-al forms of the Yerb fy are 
 'borrowed' from the *'fi [cp. 220 (v)]. 
 
 So, too, we find forms 'borrowed' from the Verbs dealt with 
 in the next Section (XVIII) ; as T3 (for T3 he despised] Zech. 
 iv. 10, and so JltO Is. xliv. 18 in the sense of Jib Lev. xiv. 42. 
 
 s- V T 
 
 245. The main Rules for Pause- forms [ 165] hold in the 
 Verbs ty. And, as in 166 (c), we have the in such Hd. 
 Pause-forms as ijS'QJVl 3 s. m. Past, J^iiSJin 3 plu. Past, etc., 
 nri 2 s./. Imper., iTiyn^ 3 s. m. Fut., etc. 
 
 246. The rare form POtDt21$nn Jer. xlix. 3, may be men- 
 
 T : v.- : > 
 
 tioned here. It is the 2 pi. /. Imper. Hd. from tDlS?, the $ being 
 NOT transposed with the H of HH probably to avoid having the 
 }f\ immediately before the rtitpD as would be the case if the 
 form nitDtDiftKTI were adopted. 
 
 T - 
 
 [Obs. The of the ft here is in accordance with the (f5) form 
 in Tab. XIV (vn)]. 
 
 247. The following Participle-forms with Pron. Affs. will be 
 recognized at once from Tab. XX ; vis. *Jbp Partic (1) K. those 
 rising up against me (lit. my risers up}. So t> titi i ]' m fo Partic. PL 
 one raising me on high (lit. my raiser on high], *Jb/bipn/b one 
 raising himself up against me (lit. my opponent], etc. And so 
 
 HD thy (m.] dead owes, from D'TlD plu. of Ht^ etc. But 
 
 248. as these Verbs differ so much from the ' Full ' Verbs, it 
 may be well to give here the following
 
 163 
 
 TABLE OF PARTICIPLE-FORMS. 
 
 Plu. /. 
 
 ntojj 
 
 rrin 
 
 Plu. m. 
 
 D'tfl 
 
 rtoWJb v D'bi 
 
 Sing./. 
 
 ni 
 
 n_ 
 
 n_ 
 
 n_ 
 
 i.c. Sing. in. 
 
 / (i) 
 
 Ot 
 
 * (a) As in Note (t) on 220, iii, so also an S stands in D^pSB' pi. m., and 
 nit^KB' pi. /., (which are like D*PJ5 and J"l'lOj5 in i (1, o), above); and so 
 in nifcO Pr. xxiv. 7. 
 
 (i) The Noun DT3 (2 Chron. ii. 16), is of the form D*pO in i (1, /3) ; but with 
 i standing after the . (We find *-r in -13^J5 Job xxii. 20, our adversary 
 according to some.) 
 
 (c) Instead of D'CI? pi. m. t -we find once D^p (2 K. xvi. 7) like D^3 in i (1, 7). 
 
 (d) As Partic (1) forms -with -1 (or -T-) some have taken m-ID (Is. xlix. 21), and 
 
 others such, as *2-'lti' Mi. ii. 8, D^Pl Nu. xxiii. 17. But these seem to 
 belong rather to i (2). 
 
 t With - for -1 (Pt. I, 14) we find D^tt Josh. v. 5. The word rnn Is. lix. 5, 
 for rn-1T s./., has for -r ; cp. 238 (v) 
 
 I (a) n>;i33 occurs as s./. in 2 S. xviii. 8 (HISQi EtMv.), 
 (b) For D3 see 240 (7). 
 
 For TVDO see 243 (2).
 
 164 
 
 1 . tflK. The Lord, Lord, 
 
 2. PJK (t.) anger, w. Aff. 
 
 12S his . , . etc. 
 
 VOCABULARY VI. 
 
 3. Yy* (/) earth, a land, 
 country. In Pause 
 jpix. See also Exerc. 
 XIII. 5. [See Tab. 
 X (1) for the Sing., 
 and Tab. XII (1) for 
 the Plu.] 
 
 4. p?J (/.) a right hand 
 
 [ 56 and 59]. 
 
 5. P13 (m.) strength 
 
 (f.-) prayer. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV. 
 (To be translated into English, 11. a-e.) 
 
 7 D v, 6 TN& 5 NDS 4 ro : 3 sy fe 
 
 1 Dip JT. to arise, rise; SO. Partie. one raising himself up against another, 
 an opponent. 2 ^12 K. to be scattered, JEfy. to scatter. s Exerc. XX (52). 
 4 p3 Pi. to establish, also to prepare ; N<f>. & Pu. to be established. XD3 a throne 
 (w. Aff.1Xp3 ) etc.). 6 from of old. ' D1T K. to be high, exalted; Pi. to exalt, 
 extol ; H$. to make to be high (and so to exalt, raise on high), Soph, to be taken 
 away. 8 Xb>3 (A>. Partie.) lofty. 9 p{J> to inhabit. 10 eternity. n ^DB' -5>. to 
 make low. 12 also. 13 1J?^ a gate (Tab. X, 5). u death. 15 my Glory. ^^T 
 a head (w. Aff. 1^N1, etc. Plu. D^&n). " and the reproach of. 18 11D K. to 
 turn aside, depart ; Jf<f>. to cause to turn aside, to remove. 19 for the judgment. 
 20 D11 to tread down. 21 nv a foe, pi. DnV. 22 31K> to go back, turn back, turn 
 away, return, repent. M E'll to be ashamed. 24 J1D N<t>. to be turned, turned 
 back. 25 backwards. 26 for them (m.) [Obs. XIV, p. 139]. 27 Exerc. XXIV (ss). 
 JJB salvation. 29 H^ to put, place, appoint. * fear. [To " put fear to 
 one"=to "put one in fear"]. 31 Dm Ft. to compassionate, have mercy on. 
 
 Words marled thus (*) need not be given again in the Notes.
 
 165 
 
 e 34 np 7QTI * P** 
 
 : I :]: -T: I v T 
 
 &5/? M np 7 DTi : "Drtit 
 
 *- : I v|v VT- T T ; 
 
 1 ? T DTI 43 tinb> t 42 run 
 
 T 
 
 i "ft 
 vh\ : 
 
 60 73 " " 70 ppx : 69 Trin 
 
 77 76, j 1 ^ 75 y 18 74 
 
 32 hath come. 33 an appointed time. M jni? a horn (Tah. X, 1). |H to judge. 
 36 the ends of. ^ His Anointed. 38 Thou wilt defend me. 39 D13 to slumber, sleep. 
 40 their sleep. 41 fllD JT. to die,* Pi. to kill, H$. to cause to die, (and so to kill). * 2 evil. 
 43 y^b to he satisfied, satiated, to be full. ** TIK to curse. 45 133 a man (properly, 
 a mighty man). 46 I1B3 to trust. " in man. 48 D^ to put, make. 49 flesh. his 
 arm. 51 "11D -Er<#). to change. 52 for [that which] not. 63 ?y* !T<f). to profit, be of use. 
 
 61 Vt'l wickedness* (Tab. X, *). M K. of No. 18. 66 from him. 57 J?13 to wander. 
 68 blind (pi. OT.). 59 Judah.* s ^5J/n from (lit. from upon). 6 1 My Face, Presence. 
 
 62 as. 63 ?1D ^>A. to fling, cast ; Soph, to be cast, cast away. w J7T to know.* 
 65 niJJ S^>. to testify (followed by 3 against). M "^ to go, go away. Tab. III. 
 68 among the heathen. 69 the continual [sacrifice]. 70 pIV to pour out [ 138 (B), 
 iv, &]. 71 a prayer (E.V.). 72 we have conceived. 73 7in (or ^H) to be in pain. 
 74 D'Q H$. to strip. 75 the crown of. 76 |H3 a priest.* 77 J^T an elder.* 78 "1^ a city. 
 79 J?13 to expire. M FjlX to flow. 8I our iniquities. w before Thee. 83 exceedingly. 
 
 * "Words marked thus (*) need not be given again in the Notes.
 
 166 
 
 n P 18 DmD : 
 
 v ~ I * v : 
 
 T TT 
 
 J., 
 
 |T 
 
 98 n JtMa 
 
 41 41 
 
 84 verily, but. as Adam, or man. 8* great. 87 and small. 88 ^2 5". & .Zfy. 
 to understand, IfO. to consider. 80 Nip to call *. o }lp Pi. to mourn. 91 K13 
 to come [see 230 (s)]. these two [things] (/.) s * iy until [that]. M f*Sn to 
 take delight. ^ the mountains. <* E>1D to depart (E.V.). OT and the hills. 98 I3-1D 
 Z". to be moved. "11V ZT0. to rouse oneself. 10 Jerusalem.* 101 Nl^ to fear. 
 102 and maketh-alive (E.V.). 103 Exerc. XX (*). 104 HOQ to open. 105 for my 
 Love. 106 bit? or b^ to rejoice. 107 ^3 to be glad. 108 the steps of. 109 my 
 thought. uo afar off. 1U 3 I| 1 to contend, plead. m 2 11 *! a contention, cause. 
 113 yn H<f>. to shout, make a joyful cry. m together. " 5 God. 116 11X H$. to 
 give light. n7 and former things. 118 now. n9 IAH. 
 
 * Words marked thus (*) need not be given again in the Notes. 
 t Go to ! , come !
 
 167 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11, -/A.) 
 
 % All Verbs l'y here are to be Conjugated as in Tab. XX ; and Verbs *'y as in 
 
 225-228. 
 
 GoD 1 will-arise,* 2 His enemies 3 will-be-scattered.* 4 When- 
 GoD-shall-arise-for-tlie-judgment (Hebr. on 5 arising-of 9 for 5 the 
 Judgment 1 GOD l ) . Earth 8 shall- greatly-reel * 9 like the drunkard, 10 
 and shall-shakef 11 like the night-lodge. 12 Spare-Thou, J 13 0- 
 LORD, Thy (Hebr. over 1 * Thy) people. 15 Raise-high J 16 Thy (m.) 
 foot-steppings. 17 They-have-made 18 their (m.) banners 19 tokens. 19 
 
 I-made-to-turn-away 20 from a burden 21 his shoulder. 22 And 
 Mine eye 23 spared* 13 them (Hebr. over 1 * them (m.)). And I- will- 
 make t 18 all My mountains 24 the- way (Hebr. for 6 the way* 5 ), 
 and My high- ways 26 shall-be-exalted (m.). 16 
 
 My steps 17 make -Thou (w.)-firm. 27 I -have -placed 28 in 
 The-LoRD my trust. 29 My heart 30 was-glad,* 31 and my glory 32 
 rejoiced.* ^ After-Thee 34 we - will - run.J 35 Awake C/.), 36 
 awake, 36 put-on 37 strength, 38 0-arm 39 of The-LoRD ! . . . Art- 
 
 1 D'rib& 2 Dip. 3 Exerc. XX (52). * pa K. to be scattered. 6 2 (prefixed to 
 the Infin. K.). b (tbe prefix). 7 BStpD. 8 p.X (/.) 9 y 13 [the "greatly" to 
 be expressed by the Infin. Absol. before the Tense, 137 (1, d, j8)]. 10 ni3^. 
 11 "113 HO. n H3-17P (used here for a "lodgement" slung up to a tree, or trees). 
 13 Din. " by. 15 by (ioy his . . . , etc.). I6 OH K. to be high (or exalted), 
 H$. to make (or raise) high. 17 Dy? Tab. X (*). 18 D1E'orD*b'. 19 HIS, pi. niHS. 
 20 11D H+. 21 ^p. 22 D5^ Tab. X (") w J^ Tab. XIII (a) in Exerc. XXXII (e). 
 
 K<; I^. 26 pi. ofnbpp. "IDJ^. M ntr. non : o. so 3 ^ Exerc. xxxn (ir). 
 32 Vocab.V( 3 ). ^b^. 31 TT>nx. "f'n. "iw. ^^nb. 33 ty. 
 
 * Verb to precede its Noun, or Xouns. t Past w. 1 Convers. 
 
 J With H at the end. With } at the end.
 
 168 
 
 not thou (/.) the-same 40 that 41 made 18 [3 s. / Past] the sea- 
 depths (Hebr. depths-of 42 a sea 43 ) a way 25 for-redeemed-ones- 
 to-pass-over (Hebr. for 6 passing-over-of^ redeemed-ones 45 (m.)) ? 
 And the-ransomed-of 46 The LORD shall return 47 and shall-come- 
 tof 48 Zion amid 49 glad-singing, 50 . . . ; rejoicing 51 and joy 53 
 shall- they-attain- to 53 , sorrow 54 and sighing 55 [shall] have-fled- 
 away (pi.).* 56 
 
 39 yi-|^ 40 K-.H 41 The Prefix H as in 6. Cp. $ 98. D^OJ|D. * 3 DJ. 
 Infin.>, ^K3. * 6 V.-11$. " 31^. 48 N13 . *> 3 (the prefix). M nrij " 
 
 t See Notes on p. 167, 
 
 The Student may write out for Practice : 
 
 (1) the Fut. K., and the Fut. H$., of D1T to be high; 
 
 (2) the same two Futures with 1 Conversive.
 
 169 
 NOTE. 
 
 [Those who are eager to begin to read The BIBLE itself may proceed to do so now 
 by help of the following Outline-sketch of the remaining Classes of Verbs and by 
 continual reference to the corresponding Tables. 
 
 But we strongly advise the Student not to do so, but, instead, to work carefully 
 through not only these pp. 169-178 but also the Observations XYI-L (on pp. 179, 
 etc.) and the additional Exercises XXXVI-L. It is scarcely possible to get the 
 requisite familiarity with some of the remaining Verb-forms without carefully working 
 through the Exercises upon them. "Wise Students will find themselves well rewarded 
 for this additional toil.] 
 
 (I.) SECTION XVIII has to deal with 'Variations from Tab. XIV 
 when the 2 d and 3 d Rt-letters are the same.' [As, for 
 instance, in Verbs from the Roots 21D, *Ttt .] But 
 (a) in many forms from such Roots there is NO 'Varia- 
 tion ' from Tab. XIV ; and 
 
 (/3) for the 'Variations' we may refer to Tab. XXL 
 [See also Obs. XVI-XXII, & Exerc. XXXVI & XXXVII, pp. 179-184.] 
 
 (II ) SECTION XIX has to deal with 'Variations from Tab. XIV 
 when the 3 d Rt-letter is tf.' The chief 'Variations from 
 Tab. XIV 'are: 
 
 (a) the 2 d Rt-letter has followed by K Quiescent, 
 (i) instead of followed by a letter with Shva- 
 
 Quiescent [see Tab. XXII], and 
 (ii) in a few instances, in 3" s. /. Past forms, as 
 ntflp (instead of PfeTlp), and so 
 
 M|T VT :|T' 
 
 Gr. xxxiii. 11 (instead of nK^in like 
 
 ($) in the 7^3 form of Past K., the is retained in the 
 
 2 d and 1 st Persons, as in fi^T 2 s. m., etc. ; 
 
 T l"T 
 
 (7) The tf form is the common one in the other Voices. 
 
 Obs. Some words, which belong in signification to 
 
 Roots 5O, have forms that are 'borrowed' from 
 
 Roots n 7, for which see Tab. XXIII. 
 
 (.See also Obs. XXIII-XXV, & Exerc. XXXVIII & XXXIX. pp 185-139.]
 
 170 VERBS 
 
 [See also Obs. XXVI-XXX, & Exerc. XL-XLII, pp. 190-201.] 
 
 (III.) SECTION XX has to deal with 'Variations from Tab. XIY 
 when the 3 d Rt-letter is fi Quiescent/ These ' Variations' 
 are many and great, as seen in Tab. XXIII. The Student 
 may observe 
 
 (a) the Inf. Constr. endings in HI, (we have also 
 rn*n as Inf. ABS. K., Is. xlii. 20 Krl, ttfao Inf. 
 
 . T v : 
 
 Abs. Nfa 2S. vi. 20); 
 
 (yS) the endings.JT /JV , etc., (sometimes H ^H, 
 etc.), in Past Tenses ; 
 
 (7) the endings fi-^r, and PI , in certain other parts; 
 
 (S) ESPECIALLY, the Imperative and Future forms with- 
 out the 3 d Rt-letter fi, thus 
 
 (i) Imperatives 2 s. m., as 75 for fiyZ PL, 
 
 t)Tj for fiznr\ n<f>. (& hvr\, &. rbp\ 
 bnnn (P. Annri) for rfennn m. 
 
 (ii) Futures 3 s. m. &/., 2 s. m., and 1 s. & pi., as 
 (3 s. m.) 7^ K., | htf &<!>., | T Pi., 
 ., etc. 
 
 N.B. Such are often called 'APOCOPATED forms.'* 
 
 (e) There are several varying forms, of which the follow- 
 ing may be mentioned here : (1) ^^* K. fr. Piy$, 
 (2) -in* K. and 1JT H<j>. fr. HIH, (s) ^H" JT. fr. 
 (corresponding to ^fr.niEO, (*) ^H^ (p. tTlJ) 
 
 * These forms are often used with 1 Convers. But see also p. 171, Note (J).
 
 VERBS f. 171 
 
 JT. fr. PPPI*, and so W (p. JW) fr. PM1*. " (s) Also 
 the K. forms ^ 3 s. m. fr. Pl7$, Ppfi 3 s./. fr. 
 nn^D, and so ^fifi fr. Pl^Pl, etc.; and (e) ftS* 3 s. m. 
 Fut. #$. fr. PinS, etc. [(e) For forms from M^, 
 r\Ety, and others such, see ().] 
 
 () The Fut. K. forms f^g 3 s. m., rbvfr 3 s. /. & 
 
 ,,...- v .,_. . 
 
 2 s. ?w., (l?!^ 1 pi., and their apocopated forms 
 are the same as those of the Sut. 
 
 Also the 1 s. Fut. JT. nSJN and the 1 s. Fut. 
 bytf have, both of them, the same apocop. form 
 
 The J\T0. forms n^, etc., and so 
 etc., merely lose the PI when apocopated. Thus 
 b^yni 3 s. /. (w. 1 pref.), and so n* ^1 fr. 
 
 VT : . * wv VT> 
 
 (17) The 3 s. m. Fiit. ^. nNI* ^e will see, and the 3 s. m. 
 Fut. J7(. Pl^n 11 he will cause to see, (or will sheic\ 
 
 have, both of them, the same shortened form N1*1 
 
 ^ 
 
 with 1 Convers.} 
 
 N.B. It is only the 3 s. m. which has this shortened 
 form from PIN 1 "). But we have also pS/TH 3 s./. 
 Fut. H. fr. 
 
 * From n^n to be the 2 pi. m. Past JT. Dl")\ H n w. 1 pref. becomes 
 So the 2 pi. w. Imper. K, -VH becomes -VH1. 
 But the 2 s. i. Imper. K. H^.n becomes nj'.nj. 
 Similarly fr. iTTI <o Zwe we have DH^ni, -1^1, but 
 
 t Once n&y s 8 Ex. xxv. 31 (with * instead of ). 
 
 J Sometimes forms occur, with 1 Convers., not shortened ; thus, 
 
 etc.
 
 172 VERBS n'?. 
 
 (0) A * Consonantal appears in some forms. Thus, 
 (1) .Ton 3 s./ Past J5T. and !)W 3 pi. from PlDPl; 
 and so (2) Wft and VJHK 2 pi. w. Imper. JT. ; 
 (s) JTDPIK 1 s. Fut. K. (with p| also) ; (4) V^E* 
 3 pi. m. Fut. JT., and (with |, 145) |T]^ JV3S*, 
 PS& etc ' ; < 5 ) IW??, 2 pi. m. Fut. Pi!, ete. 
 
 Obs. Such forms may be said to belong to Hoots ^7 ; 
 but more must be said on this, elsewhere. 
 
 (t) A ^ Consonantal stands in some forms, from a few 
 Roots. Thus *ftfa& I s. Past K. fr. rh&; TltpD 
 PL Partic. pi. m. (i.e.) ; etc. ; which may be said to 
 belong to Roots 1 7. For the forms fr. HH^, with 
 1 introduced at the end, see Tab. XXIII, Notes t to ^[. 
 
 (K) The ending V in VDpH Josh. xiv. 8 is Aramaean, 
 cp. Dan. v. 4. 
 
 (X) The ending H occurs sometimes where the more 
 usual ri-jr is given in Tab. XXIII; and (rarely) 
 HI?- instead of H-^- in the Table. 
 
 (/A) No difficulty will be caused by the appearance of 
 for in Pause, or by the ending JPin _ for 
 H)1 in 3 s./. Past forms. Cp. also 167 (iii). 
 In Lev. xxv. 21, we find the contracted form 
 rTOI for nnb>Stt 3 s./. Past K. with 1 pref. 
 
 vr T : vr : T : 
 
 (v] The Partic. forms will be sufficiently understood 
 from the following addition to Tab. XXIII :
 
 VERBS M 7. 
 
 173 
 
 Pin. (/.) 
 
 i.e. Plu. (i.) 
 
 n - 
 
 i.e. Sing. (m.) 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 %* In other Voices the only change from the s. m. forms 
 given in Tab. XXIII, is in the endings which are 
 
 Plu. (/.) 
 
 k ' ni-r 
 
 Plu. (j.) 
 
 DV 
 
 i.e. Sing. (/.) I i.e. Sing, (m.) 
 
 Obs. (i) The Plu. (/.) Partic. -forms are the same in Constr. 
 (ii) The Partic.-forms K. 'H (p. :'H) living s. m., !"l*n s./., 
 
 V- * IT VT - 
 
 D^Pl pi. tn., n*l*n pi-/-, are "borrowed" from a Root 
 
 *n(-JTri), being like 3D s. m., H3D s./., etc., fr. 33D. 
 (iii) Also the PAST JT. form *H (p. t^H) 3 s. m. is "borrowed" 
 
 from H (=nTl), being like 3D 3 s. *. Past K. of 
 
 33D. But 
 (iv) nVH Partic. K. pi. /., Ex. i. 19, is like ni^ from 
 
 D^(226); and so PITJ Past .ff. 3 s./., Ex. i. 16. 
 (^) To the forms in (9) above we may add here (i) D^Hpp 
 
 Is. xxv. 6 PM. Partic. pi. m. of Tl/b=i"in in the sense 
 
 of HPlft (some, however, give the ordinary sense of 
 
 nn&) ; (2) jWh Job xix. 2, which is 2 pi. m. Fut. J3ty. 
 
 of rW [cp. 195 (8, ii) and Sect. XXI (p, 174, iv, a)] 
 
 with the | of 145. 
 (o) The word 1D3, Ps. Ixxx. 11 and Pr. xxiv. 31, is 3 pi. 
 
 Past PH. of HOD with (o) instead of . 
 (TT) There is sometimes K instead of H : thus &Ofc5^ 3 s. m. 
 
 Fut. K. of rW, etc. 
 
 "With S standing for the H, N^3 s. m. 1 S. xxii. 2; DW3 Neh. v. 7 has K 
 4 superfluous.' 
 
 t nnpV fr. noy, nDia fr. nan, etc.; cp. (e) above. rnb G. ilk. 22. 
 + nVnfe, is. xii. 23, fr. nn. 
 
 -ib-y in V^yn Job xli. 25 ( 6, d. ii). In Job XT. 22 MQ is Zr for 1S JBAIr. 
 N.B. As in Pt. I, 14, we may have for <.
 
 174 TWO-FOLD VARIATIONS, 
 
 [See also Obs. XXXI & XXXII, & Exerc. XLIII & XLIV, pp. 202-207.] 
 
 (IV.) SECTION XXI is to deal with Verbs belonging to more 
 than one of the Seven Classes in Sects. XIV-XX. The 
 following few examples will sufficiently illustrate this. 
 
 (a) From r\EP to be beautiful, which is both *') (Sect. 
 XV), and nS (Sect. XX), the 3 s. ro. Fut. K. 
 would be PlS" * This with 1 Convers. becomes 
 
 IV * 
 
 fpl Ez. xxxi. 7 and he was beautiful. 
 
 03) From PlEtf, which is both j'S (Sect. XVI) and 
 r\h (Sect. XX), the 3 s. m. Fut. K. is nt^.t This 
 gives the apocopated form tO** in ft* 1 } Zeph. ii. 13, 
 etc. And so from ntSFl 3 s. /., & 2 s. m., we 
 
 have tDft 
 i" 
 
 (7) Similarly the 3 s. m. Fut. H<f). of Jlttt is JltS* which 
 
 gives tD* in 10*1 ; and so PltSfi gives tDfi and J"lL3K 
 
 .. i- t lv - o r lv - 
 
 gives tDK (p. ttDN). And so PO* 3 s. m. Fut. S"^>. 
 of n^i gives 1|^ n|n gives ^[^ and n|N gives ^ < 
 
 (8) Similarly also for other parts of the Verb ; thus, 
 
 (i) jrYGn Inf. H<f>. of JIM, and (ii) J H3H 3 s. w. 
 Past JT0., (iii) jn|fi Partic. s. i., (iv) JHjn 
 Imper. 2 s. m. ; etc. 
 [Other forms and Verbs must be reserved at present.] 
 
 * The i agreeing with that of 3O*J, etc., in Tab. XVIII, and the H . with 
 that of rhy, etc., in Tab. XXIII. 
 
 t The Dag. F. of the 13 standing instead of the 1" Rt-letter, as in B^ Tab. XIX; 
 and the Pl_. being as in Tab. XXIII. 
 J Compare Tab. XXIII.
 
 PRON.-AFFS. OTHER VOICE-FORMS. 175 
 
 (Y.) SECTION XXII is to deal with the Verb-forms having 
 
 Pronom.-Affixes. These will be sufficiently understood 
 
 from Tables XXIV-XXX, with the help of Observations 
 
 XXXIII-L which are given in connection with Exercises 
 
 XLV-L [pp. 208-220]. 
 
 It is not necessary to trouble the Student with any more 
 Exercises. The remaining pages, including the Appendix, 
 are intended to supply him with some useful help while 
 he is reading The BIBLE. 
 
 (VI.) SECTION XXIII is to deal with some other Voice-forms": 
 In 220 (vi) the Voice-forms 7^13, VpiS, and SSiSHn, 
 were mentioned. There are some other varying forms 
 of Pl-Sl, Pu-&l, and Hithpd-el, chiefly in the case of 
 Verbs such as those in Tabs. XX & XXI, but also in a 
 few forms of other Verbs. 
 
 (a) The 1 st and the 3 d Ut-letters are sometimes both of 
 them repeated, as in 
 
 (1) the Infin. hshl fr. 7lb, the Past 7^3 3 s. m. 
 
 (whence the Voice-form is called 7373) PI7373 
 3 s. /., ft^S 2 s. 01., etc., the Partic. W?3b 
 B. m., and the Fut. 727D* 3 s. m., etc. ; 
 
 (2) the Passive 7373 ( > #), corresponding to 7373 
 as Pti-Al to Pl-tt, thus the Past 7373, whence 
 
 (3) the Reflexive Ss^SJli"!, corresponding to 7373 
 as Rithp&-l to P&-<*/,--thus /nSnnn, whence 
 the Fut. ^nWlPlJ 3 s./. w. 1 Convers.
 
 176 OTHER VOICE-FORMS. 
 
 (/3) Sometimes also such forms occur from Verbs having 
 the 2 d and 3 d Et-letters the same. For these 
 Verbs, having the 2 d Rt-letter (the $, 117) 
 repeated as 3 d Rt-letter (i.e. as 7, 117), the 
 designation 'Verbs J^S* is appropriate.* Such 
 forms as those in (a), from these Hoots which have 
 the 'JJ ' in the place also of the < 7' ( 117), are $3573 
 
 (or ysys) yays (_,<*), yaysnn (or y3ysnn).t 
 
 (7) A form $syS from the Root PlP occurs in Ps. xlv. 3, 
 
 viz. n*B'B' Past 2 s. w. 
 
 T I- T : T 
 
 (8) In the case of 'Full' Verbs also, sometimes 
 
 (a) the 3 d Rt-letter is repeated in forms (i) 77^3 
 
 (or Sb , or VB, or 'jfi), and (2) 7^3; 
 (6) both the 2 d and 3 d Rt-letters are repeated in the 
 
 forms (i) Wp?B and (2) W?yS of which the 
 
 (as under the H in }*TJb*T/bn 3 pi. Past) corresponds 
 
 to the or W) of Pu-Al 
 
 (e) There are a few instances of other Voice-forms ; thus, 
 (a) Vyb (instead of Pi-el) in 'pBBtfp 1 ? Job ix. 15, 
 
 Partic. s. m., w.7 pref. and Aff. * for 1 s., fr. t3S^, 
 (5) SS3 (instead of Pz-e/) in flTSfp Is. xv. 5, Fut. 
 
 3 pi. m. fr. ^, 
 (c) ^3 (instead of P-a/) in D3DJ1I& Ex. xvi. 14, 
 
 Partic. s. m. fr. ftDM, 
 
 * < y'y " is bad. It means, rather, ' having V as Second Hi-letter.' 
 
 t We have also (1) J?BJ|B forms in $&$& Past 3 s. m. and ^fiyBfyt? 1 s. (in 
 
 Panse, (also IJ^B* Fut. 3 pi. .); (2) ySJ^S in J-iy^^Jp Fut. 2 pi. w.(in Pause) ; 
 
 and (3) ysysbb in'j^fl^t (pi. JV-^)- ^nd so the Imper. 2 pi. . W57F)t? ; n, 
 
 Is. xxix. 9, may be Imper. 2 pi. m. of this form fr. yjJK'. [Or it may, perhaps, be of a 
 
 ysygnn form fr.
 
 OTHER VOICE-FORMS. 177 
 
 (<0 Wfifl (Instead of Hiph-il) in $TgTT& Hos. xi. 3, 
 
 Past 1 s. fr. bCFl. 
 (e) Some Mixed- Voice forms, as (i) 7^3i (#< and 
 
 .p*), (0 ^snj w. and #0.), () ^srn 
 
 (J5Td. and JZ0.), belong to Sect. XXIV. 
 
 (5) The n of H<J>. t as also that of H0. t is some few times 
 replaced by X an Aramaism; thus, { 
 (for 'flbttjft, & in Pause) Is. Ixiii. 3, 
 (for 'IT!) 2 Chr. xx. 35, WfO&X (for '&>H) 
 Ps. Ixxvi. 6. The word 'UVJTfcjn Is. xix. 6 may be 
 said to belong to Section XXIV, being mixed up 
 of the two forms 1PP3TPI and 'ftf. 
 
 i- : : v 
 
 (ij) There are words in which MORE THAN THREE Et-letters 
 appear ; thus, TKHS Job xxvi. 9, Past 3 s. m. 
 fr. TBHS 5 and W%j~\ Job xxxiii. 25, Past 3 s. w. 
 fr. Bfetn ; ^aa 1 Chr. xv. 27, Partic. s. m. 
 fr. ^"D ; H3gDW Ps. Ixxx. 14, Fut. 3 s. m. with 
 Aff. Hi it (/.) fr. DD1D ; etc. Some take such 
 
 T IV 
 
 Roots as ' QuadriliteraL* Others consider them as 
 either ' reducible to 3 letters,' or as ' Composite.' 
 
 (VII.) SECTION XXIV is to deal with forms which may be 
 said to be 'Compounded' of two Ordinary forms 'mixed up' 
 together. Some instances of ' Compound ' or ' Mixed ' Voices were 
 noticed in (e, e) above. The following is a translation of 260 in 
 the 5th edition of the Hebrew Grammar [n^ th HlfcSn] by 
 
 "Sometimes there occurs a single word compounded of 
 two VOICE-FORMS ; as (i) PfTV Ps. vii. 6, which is compounded of
 
 178 'COMPOUND* OR 'MIXED' FORMS. 
 
 YJ K and CfT? P*. ; (a) Ktt Is. lix. 3, compounded of 
 btoto N4>. and ty* Ptf. ; (a) * ta l33i'| D. xxi. 8, JV</>. and HO. ; 
 (0 * D35n Lev. xiii. 55 & 56, nKfttSPl D. xxiv. 4, compounded 
 of Hoph. and Hithp. ; or perhaps they are of Hothpd-el form 
 (the PI sometimes having (o) and sometimes as in Hoph-dl); 
 and [in the last word] the f\ [of HPl] is swallowed up in Dagesh 
 before ft , and its signification is that ' another was caused 
 to do the action involved in it* (she has let herself be defiled). ^ 
 And so there is [sometimes] a word which is compounded of 
 two TENSES, as fiT?^ G. xvi. 11, J which is compounded of Past 
 and Present [or Participle (for Present)] ; and so (?) DJYIhfiGJJp 
 Ez.viii.16. Andso there is [sometimes] a word which is compounded 
 of two GENDER-FORMS ; as n3"]t^ 1 S. vi. 12, the beginning of 
 which is m. t and its end /., so that it is a word partly of one 
 Gender and partly of another (DI^ITlitf). There are also 
 many such-like abnormal forms; but this is not the place to 
 treat of them at length." 
 
 This will suffice for the present. 
 
 The D of fin is dropped here, and Dag. F. is then put in the 3. 
 t Sie hat sich verunreinigen lassen. 
 J The word occurs also in Ju. xiii. 6, 7- 
 
 i.t. compounded of J^*]^ Past 2 s. /. and rn?* Partic. s. /. There are also 
 some other opinions, somewhat different from this, 
 
 or THE SECOITD PART 6r THE EXERCISE BOOK*
 
 CONCLUDING PORTION 
 
 EXERCISE-BOOK.
 
 179 
 
 OBSERVATIONS XVI-XXII. 
 
 Obs. XVI. The statement of Obs. XII on p. 139 is a general one, viz. that 
 "The prefix 1 has SOMETIMES -j- before a letter bearing as 
 Accented Vowel, especially if the Accent be Disjunctive." The 
 cases that come under this statement may be divided into three 
 great Classes, as follows : 
 
 (1) Simple cases of Obs. XII, as jnxj Is. xxvi. 19, and so inOJ 
 (with -j- Gen. xxxiii. 13, and with -*- Deut. xxii. 24), etc. ; and 
 with a Conjunctive Accent as in K>v1 Is. xxx. 6; but this last 
 word, being the second of the 'Couple' SJ^7J N*3^, belongs 
 rather to (2) ; 
 
 (2) Cases of the second of two words (or first word of the second ? 
 group of two groups of words) forming a " COUPLE" ; thus in | 
 DfcO 3K (father and mother) Ez. xxii. 7, See more on this j. 
 particular head in Eule I on pp. 223-225 ; 
 
 (3) Cases of the third of THREE -WORDS TAKEN TOGETHER ; thus in 
 Tjn 3>3} "W (ox and sheep and goaf) Lev. vii. 23, D"1T. 3TI ^113 
 (great and numerous and tall) Deut. ii. 21, etc. 
 
 This is more fully illustrated in Pt. II, $ 94. 
 
 Obs. XVII. Verbs which have the SAME LETTER for their 2 d & 3 d Roor-letter are 
 sometimes called DV?}Q2) geminata, because their 2 d Rt-letter or 
 y ( 117) is repeated in the place of the 3 d Rt-letter or^> ( 117), 
 so that 
 
 Obs. XVIII. They might be said to have the Root-form yya, instead of bj?3, and 
 Obs. XIX. These verbs might therefore be called 'Verbs y'j?S.' 
 
 [Obs. XX. The expression ' Verbs y'j?,' by which some designate these Verbs, 
 is not a good designation for them because, 
 
 As the expression 'Verbs I'y stands for 'Verbs having 1 for 
 
 their SECOND Rt-letter,' 
 and the expression 'Verbs ">']}' stands for Verbs having * for 
 
 their SECOND Rt-letter,' 
 
 so the expression 'Verbs y'jj" would stand rather for 'Verbs 
 having V for their SECOND Rt-letter' (such as njJ3 , "iyj , 
 etc.), which is an utterly different set of Verbs.]
 
 180 
 
 Obs. XXI. (1) From these Roots (having the 2 d & 3 d fit-letters the same) there 
 are often forms in which there is no 'Variation' from Tab. XIV ; 
 thus, from 33D we have the forms 33D 3 s. m. and -133D 
 3 pi., Past Kal, agreeing with Tab. XIV, besides the special 
 forms VYI3D (or *n'3D) 1 s., and -13D 3 pi. (in ^-13D and ^3D, 
 with AS. me), and DHSD 2 pi. m. (all of which are Past Kal, 
 as in Tab. XXI). 
 
 (2) As the ' SPECIAL Variation ' for this set of Verbs we may mention 
 (o) the DROPPING of the 2 d Et-letter, and 
 (/3) the occurrence of DAGESH F. in the 3 d Et-letter (to 
 imply the omitted 2 d Rt-letter), as in 130, ^J?D, etc., 
 the Infin. K. with Pron.-Affs., and so in the Past- 
 Tense forms (except the 3 s. m.) and in the Imper. 
 forms *3D 2 s./., etc., of Tab. XXI. But 
 N.B. When the 3 d Rt-letter stands at the end of the word, 
 without a Vowel (and therefore with Shva Quiescent], 
 that Dagesh is omitted ; and so we have the Infin. 3D, 
 the Past 3 s. m. 3D, the Imper. 2 s. m. 3D, and the 
 Fut. forms 3DJ, 3'Dfi, 3DX, 3D3 ; and so in other 
 Voices. 
 
 Obs. XXII. The forms for PI, Pu., and HQ., are the same in Tab. XX (1'jJ) 
 as they are in Tab. XXI (y'j?B or D^-IS? Geminata). 
 
 [Note. For particular forms in the Exercise, the Notes there given and Tab. XXI, 
 will it is hoped be sufficient.]
 
 181 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI [on Verbs whose 2 d & 3 d Rt-letters are the 
 same ($'$&) Table XXI]. 
 
 (To be translated into English, 11. a-e). 
 
 1 how ? 2 231 to be many. 3 IX a foe. 4 nHB' to bow down, to be depressed, 
 HO. to bow oneself down. 5 unto. 6 exceedingly (N.B. 5 and 6 together signify 
 "very exceedingly"}. 7 DDK' -ST. to be waste or desolate, N$. to be wasted or 
 desolated (also to be astonied), H(f>. to waste or make desolate. 8 ?3 all, 73 when 
 unaccented. ' my an assembly. 10 |*1S land o;- earth. u for. 12 "11B Hq>. to 
 break, break off. 13 a covenant (the same 'in Construction"). u eternity. 
 [Cp. 86.] 15 WT ^>. to do badly (and, with D following, "to do worse than"). 
 !6 UN a father, Table XIII, 1. DS a mother (For the J see Obs. XVI, p. 179). 
 18 V^p K. to be of light esteem, to be vile, H$. to make light of. 19 23D K. to go 
 round or about, to turn, H$. to make to go round or turn away. 20 D*J3 a face (a 
 Plural Noun). 31 1? a heart (the same 'in Construction,' with Affs. 13? , etc.). 
 M the lion. 23 ODD Aip. to be melted. M 77*1 to be weak, low, become low. M the 
 glory of. 26 Jacob. r ' pp3 JV>. to be emptied. 28 TT1 A^. to be spoiled, plundered. 
 2S "OJJ to pass. 30 a sword. 3l Tin Hoph. to be sharpened. 3Z T)3 to purge out 
 or away. 33 the rebels. 34 and [with] destruction. M nf!3 Hoph. to be smitten, 
 pounded. 3C a gate. 37 H1O to measure. 38 their work. 39 first. 40 their bosom. 
 41 loftiness. 12 men. 43 12^0 to be few, to become few. u VK/3 trespass.
 
 182 
 
 : Diry " 53 ;m : 
 
 v -: T : ITT- 
 
 I9 nbni 1 
 
 45 D*K> heavens (.). 46 at. 47 DX to eat, devour. * 8 nW a habitation. 
 49 DC** to sit. so solitary. 51 DOT to be silent, to be quiet, to look-in-silent- 
 resignation. 5Z ?in H6. to hope, to look-with-hope. 63 pn to be gracious. M see 
 Thou. 55 my enemies. S6 for, or that. 57 mayest Thou comfort me. 58 DV3 anger, 
 vexation, Tab. X, 5. 59 D^ with. 60 be like. 61 b to or for [Obs. XIV, p. 139]. 
 62 my beloved (E.V.). 63 ^ a roe (E.V.) M why ? 5 my soul. 66 ^H* Ify. to wait, 
 look-with-waiting. D'r6$ God. 8 J31 to sing aloud. 9 Tab. XIII. 5 (Note ||). 
 70 Zion. 71 TTIV to shout joyously. 72 enemy. 73 Dion to come utterly to an end. 
 74 destructions. 75 for ever. 76 T^n Hq>. to begin. 77 ?S3 to fall. 78 before him. 
 79 ^ JE". & Soph, to be able (with S, to prevail ow). 80 D'B> to put, make. 
 81 "Op a grave, Tab. X, 2. 8S "11311 (or "133) mighty m., a mighty one. 83 to be. 
 84 wax. 85 from the presence of. 86 fire. 81 13N to perish. 88 wicked ones. 
 89 ppD N<p. to be dissolved. 90 the host of. 31 ^ K. to roll up, A>. to be rolled 
 up. 92 nap a scroll.
 
 183 
 
 EXERCISE XXXYII [Table XXI]. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11. -/*.) 
 
 * Sinners 1 (w.) shall be destroyed* 3 . Unto 3 their (w.)-coming- 
 utterly-to-an-end. 4 And ye (w.)-shall-be-consumed-awayt 5 
 through 6 your (m.) iniquities. 7 They-have-come- utterly- to-an- 
 end 8 by-reason-of 9 terrors. 10 When- once 11 I-have-sharpened 18 
 My-lightning-sword (Hebr. the-lightning-of 13 My stcord u ). 
 
 And-all-man's-courage-shall-fail (Hebr. and all 15 the heart 16 of 
 man 1 " 1 shall-be-melted 19 ). And they-shall-be-astonied f 19 one- 
 with-another (Hebr. each-one 20 and his brother* 1 ). And I-will- 
 desolatef 22 earth 23 and all- that-is-therein (Hebr. itsf. fulness 2 *). 
 Gird-y ourselves 25 and be-ye-in-consternation. 26 The stars 27 of 
 the heavens 28 and their (m.) constellations 29 shall-not-make-to- 
 shine 30 their (m.) light. 31 
 
 And be-not thou(w.)-in-consternation,J 26 0-Israel. 38 *The 
 heathens 33 will-be-in-consternation. 26 They (m.) -have- been-in- 
 consternation 2G and have-been-ashamed. 34 And-I- will-protect f ffi 
 this-city (Hebr. over 36 this city* 1 }. If 11 ye (w.)-shall-break 38 
 My covenant 39 [with] the day, 40 and My covenant 39 [with] the 
 
 H a sinner. 2 DOH N<p. 3 Itf. * Infin. K. of DDJ1 with Pron-Aff. 
 5 ppD Iff. 3 the prefix, *]ty, pi. f)% 8 DOH Kal. 9 JO. w nin^3. " DS. 
 12 pty Kal. 13 p"13 [ 56 (A/i. & ii. sj]. " ann Tab. X, 1. 15 ^3 (*?3 when 
 unaccented). 16 33^. [ 56 (A, i. & ii. s)]. " tr'i:^. 18 DD ^>. 19 
 the(-)-form. *> ^. 2 i HS Tab. XIII, 2. "DO^lTf. "^ 
 15 ITS -fffl. 25 nnn Za^. N.B. (i) The Imper. K. is like 3D, >3D, etc., in the 
 Table, (ii) The Put. JT. is like 3D*, 3DP1, etc. ; but Compensation is made for the 
 Dagesh which the PI cannot receive. 27 3313 a star [ 56 (ii)]. J8 0*0^ heayens. 
 29 D^*D3 constellations. 30 ^H Hf. (Put. like 3DJ, 3D.n, etc.). 3l "I1N. 
 32 ^K^. M D."'^. 34 5^13 in Tab. XX. M J33 Za/ (Fut. like 3D*, etc.). 
 37 -vy /. 39 i-, a _H^. (Fut. like 3DJ, 3Dri, etc.) 39 Hn.3/. 40 DV. 
 
 'The Tense before the Noun, 162 (rf, i). t Past with 1 prefixed. 
 
 I Obs. IV, p. 93.
 
 184 
 
 night 41 . . . [then] also 42 My * covenant 39 may-be-broken 43 with 
 David 44 My servant. 45 The-LoRD [God of] Hosts 46 will-protect K 
 them (Hebr. over 36 them m.}. 
 
 And I-will-be-gracious-to f 47 whomsoever 48 I-will-be-gracious- 
 to. 47 
 
 M QJ P 43 TIB soph, 44 in. 45 ^y Tab. x, 6. nixny. * 7 tan (the 
 
 Fut. is like abj, IDR, etc.)- 48 "f. H. 
 
 * The Tense before the Noun, 162 (d, i). -f Past with 1 prefixed.
 
 185 
 
 OBSERVATIONS XXIII-XXV. 
 
 Obs. XXIII. A LONG VOWEL IN AN OPEN SYLLABLE often takes the place of a> 
 SHORT VOWEL IN A CLOSED SYLLABLE ; thus, we have the K in 
 KV, rjKyO, JINXO, etc., of Tab. XXII, corresponding to the 
 n_ or ^-oi 1J3S, mi29 } J-nS } etc., of Tab. XIV. 
 
 N.B. A syllable which ends in a Quiescent letter is 'open' 
 
 [Pt. I, 21 (3), for there is no Shva Quiescent, either 
 
 expressed or understood, under a ' Quiescent ' letter 
 
 [Pt. I, 29 (3).] 
 
 Obs. XXIV. The Fut. K. forms Kt??, *?$, etc., in Tab. XXII, correspond 
 
 to the forms &&,- E^fl, etc., in Tab. XIV. 
 
 Obs. XXV. There is an important ' Variation' in the case of the ?JJS forms of the 
 Past Kal of Verbs tt'b . In ordinary Verbs, the 2 d & 1 st Persons, 
 both Sing. & Plu., are the same as the 7%Q forms [comp. 
 138 (A), ii]; thus, from fan he was witting, we have 
 
 nysn, orivsq, J-iiys" Pause-form of ^vsn. But, 
 
 N.B. byB forms of Verbs K'^> retain the -*- in the 2* & 1* 
 Persons both Sing. & Plu. ; thus, from K$? he hated, we 
 have nK3b, T\KyV t *$*&, DriNJ^, comp. the Past JT. 
 forms NT TJ HK^, etc., in Tab. XXII. 
 
 NOTE. The 3 s. /. Past of the Verbs N? have sometimes the termination DK , as in 
 (a) Kal nfcOj? instead of rtK^, and so (0) Niph. Jltf!??: instead of ."IN 1 ???, and 
 so in the Soph. flKirj instead of nS^H (or HN^H) p. 275, 1. 17.
 
 186 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII [On Verbs ti, Table XXII.] 
 (To be translated into English, 11. a-e.) 
 
 1 at first. * N"Q to create. s Vocab. I (1). 4 the heavens. 5 the earth. 
 6 D"1X man, Adam. 7 u?? image, Tab. X (1). 8 ?b all (73 when unaccented). 
 s |3 a son, Tab. XIII (4). 10 see No. 6. n S35? to hate [Past .Zaflike that of KT 
 in Tab. XXII]. 12 ^J?S to work [Partic (1) Kal = " a worker.' '] 13 Vanity, mischief. 
 14 "IDS to say. 15 N1* to fear [the Past Kal is given in Tab. XXII; the Future Kal 
 is like KVO% KVn, etc., in Tab. XXII, but the 1 st Rt-letter combines with 
 the of the prefs. JJVK, and so we have KT* 3 s. m., N*Vri 3 s./. and 2 s. m. t etc.]. 
 16 Esau. " how ? 18 rkv to put forth. 19 1 a hand. * nnt^ Pi. & Hf. to 
 destroy. Il ITE'D an anointed one [ 56 (A, i)]. 2Z KDt3 K. to be unclean, N$. to 
 be denied, Pi. to defile, pollute. 23 S^D to find (also to come upon), J\ r <f>. to be 
 found. M evils (pi./.). 25 0^3 idols. 26 ^pD a sanctuary. J7 thou /. didst 
 make.' 29 one (/.) full of [this word is for DsSp the Construct form of HX^D s. /. from 
 K?O K. Partic. s. m. ( 139, 8, iii), with 1 added (comp. 139, ) ; this is by some 
 called the '* Compaginis,' for an example or two of which see p. 232, lines 8-10. 
 29 judgment. 30 who ? 81 NST to heal, give healing. 3? KB>J to take up. 
 
 * A List of forms from this Root is given on pp. 286-288 below. But this form 
 will be understood sufficiently from what is said in No. 15 here. 
 t For the J see $ 143.
 
 187 
 
 :nm 
 
 43 TIN-ID : 41 
 
 T : v : - : ( 
 
 rrrirv 
 
 51 
 
 a lamentation. M a sword. 35 NU -ff<^. to bring. 36 ND JT. to be full of (also, 
 sometimes, to Jill), Pi. to fill, to fulfil. 37 "IIH a word. 38 [see No. 36, and Note (1, 6) 
 on Tab. XXII]. 39 seventy. 40 a year [see '106, ii]. 4l a ransom. * 2 JMp Pi. to 
 be jealous. * 3 fi'V Zion. w K'pl Pi. to seek. * 5 of you (lit. TO you m.). 46 NS1 
 to heal [comp. Note (7) on Tab. XXII]. * 7 your m. backslidings. 48 and the sins 
 of. 49 Judah. 50 Kip to call. 5I ih a heart, w. Affs. ^3^ TJ? 1 ?, etc. 52 clean. 
 53 behold us. M [instead of IJSnX from XJ1X to eomt, see Note (2) on Tab. XXII]. 
 55 JSV to hide, treasure up. 56 Thy word. 57 in order that. 58 Kt3n to sin [for 
 the compare the forms 2^*., etc., in Tab. XVI (1)]. 59 against Thee. eo see 
 No. 15 above. 
 
 * See Note (*) on page 186.
 
 188 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX [TABLE XXII.] 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11. -/*.) 
 
 O-LoRD, I-have-heard 1 the-report-of-Thee (Hebr. Thy report), 2 
 I-was-afraid. 3 And as-for-me (Hebr./), [I have] not been-called 4 
 to-come-in 5 unto 6 the King. 7 Call 8 -ye (/.) not [Obs. V, p. 73] 
 me (Hebr. to me) Naomi, 9 cal! 8 -ye (/.) me (Hebr. to me) Mara 10 ; 
 for 11 bitterly-hath-dealt 12 The- Almighty 13 with- me (Hebr. to 
 me) exceedingly. 14 I-have-adjured 15 you,* O-daughters 16 of 
 Jerusalem, 17 if 18 ye-shall-find * 19 my Love, 20 what 21 ye-shall-tell * 22 
 
 Him (Hebr. to Him) I-will-call 8 to God 23 Most-High. 24 
 
 Lo 25 Thou-hast-been-indignant 26 seeing-that 27 we-have-sinned.f 28 
 "We-have-sinned, 28 we-have-done- wickedly. 29 Unto 6 Thee have- 
 I-lifted-up 30 my eyes. 31 I-have-called-on 8 Thy Name, 32 O-LoRD. 
 0-Grod, 33 lift-up 30 Thy Hand. 34 Thou-didst-go-forth 35 (m.) for 
 the salvation 36 of Thy people. 37 Thy (m.) Right-hand 38 shall- 
 find-out 19 them-that-hate-Thee (Hebr. Thy haters 39 ) . Thou (m.)- 
 hast-loved 40 righteousness, 41 and hast-hated f 42 wickedness. 43 
 My-soul 44 went-forth 35 at (i) His speaking. 45 
 
 (continued.') 
 
 1 yDK>. 2 yK> (declined, with Pron.-Affs., like V?3 Tab. X. 4). 3 K*V (see the 
 Past Kal of this in Tab. XXII). * N<f>. Past 1 s. of Kip. 5 Sbb. 6 "?. 7 ^. 
 
 s top. 9 ^py.?,. 10 s*io. n '3. 12 no H$. Past. is ^w. " nsp. is yn^ H$. 
 
 is n3 a daughter, Tab. XIII, 5. D^n (p. D ). )8 DS. 19 N^O. 20 n'T 5 !. 
 
 21 no. 22 naa ^. Tab. xix. & D*r6$. ji^y. 25 jn. p|vp. n i the 
 
 prefix. 28 K13H [ia the Fut. JTa^ of this the prefixes JIVK take and the 1<* 
 Et-letter H takes - , as in 3^ inyn, etc., Tab. XVI (1)]. 29 Jh. 30 KBO . 
 si J>y an eye (Dual D^y). sa'ag?^. Affs. 'iD'f, etc., comp. Tab. XIII, 4. 
 33 ^ si ^ a hand. 35 SVV 3S y^ ( 56, vii). 37 DJJ w. Aflts. isy, etc. 
 38 Jip* /. ( 59). 39 $yy p art i c (i) Jf. p l u . m , 40 ^HS. p^. 42 Nib'. 43 y^) . 
 44 B?B3 /. [Tab. X, 1]. 13T />i. Inf. w. AflF. for 3 s. m. 46 n'3. 47 "IDN. 
 
 * The masculine form is used here. t Future with 1 Couvers.
 
 189 
 
 Thus 46 hath-said 47 The-LoRD, I-have-given-healing 48 to fhese 
 waters. 49 And the waters 49 shall-be-healed. * M And thou (/.) - 
 shalt-go-forth* 35 amid (}) the dancing 51 of those-that-make- 
 merry. 52 And thy (/.) daughters 16 on ptf) shoulder 53 shall-be- 
 borne. 54 Morning 56 hath-come 55 [ 162 (d, i).] Thou-hast-been- 
 taken, 57 0-Babylon 58 (/), and thou-thyself 59 didst-not (X?) 
 know, 60 thou-hast-been-found-out 61 and also 63 hast-been-caught. 63 
 From The-LoRD hath-been 64 this (/. ) , it (/.) hath-been-wondrous 65 
 in our eyes. 31 
 
 48 NET! Pi, [Note (5) on Tab. XXII]. DJD. w KSH N<f>. [The K to be 
 'elided' here, as in Note (3) on Tab. XXII.] 51 ^H ( 56, i). 
 53 ' z. Partic. pi. w. P)ri3. M KB>3 2\>. SJ1N K. Past 3 s. . 56 -|j?3. 
 
 ). 68 33. 5 ^SI. 
 
 65 sbs A^. Past 3 s./t 
 
 * Past with 1 Convers. t As in ' NOTE' on page 185.
 
 190 
 
 OBSERVATIONS XXVI-XXX. 
 
 At the risk of some repetition of what has already been said in Note (III) 
 [pp. 170-173] we may perhaps add here the following remarks : 
 
 Obs. XXVI. In the case of Verbs which have for their 3 d Rt-letter a 
 NON-CONSONANTAL (i.. QUIESCENT) il, there are certain forms which are liable 
 to lose this* H by ' Apocopation.' 
 
 The forms that are thus liable to ' Apocopation' are 
 
 (o) IMPERATIVE 2 s. m. in the following Voices : 
 Pi-el, Hiph-il, Hithpa-el, 
 
 (0) FUTURE 3 B. m. &/., 2 s. m., 1 s., and 1 pi., in 
 
 Eal & Niph-al, Pt-el [& Pu-al~\, Hiph-il [& Hoph-al], and Hithpa-el. 
 
 Obs. XXVII. (a) The 'Apocopated' IMPERATIVE forms are 
 
 PL thz for H^l, and so hft for rkn fr. rWl, 
 
 HQ. j^jn for r6jn, and so pjnn for ns^n fr. nsn, 
 so. t^lfln for njjipn, and so t"?nrin for n^n^n, 
 "fr. rhn. ' 
 
 (/8) The ' Apocopated ' FUTURE forms are 
 
 Eal (a) h 3 s. m., "?3P1 (or ||"?iri) 3 s. /. & 2 s. m., 
 
 || ^ Is., D^a IpL, also 
 (l>) 3^ for ftStfc fr. H3^, and 
 () 1|1 <I . for H53 fr. H33, ^f) for H3?ri, 
 
 i^i^s for n^ii^s fr. nncj' ; 
 
 JV^. ^>4* 3 s. ., b|n 3 s./. & 2 s. m., etc. [see Tab. XXIII] ; 
 PL f ^ 3 s. ., ^JJ-l 3 s./. & 2 s. m., etc. [see Tab. XXIII] ; 
 
 * N.B. It is only a H Quiescent that is thus dropped. When the 3 rt Rt-letter is 
 H Consonantal, this is not dropped ; but we have the forms 
 
 KAL Past H2| 3 s. m., P1H3| 2 s. m., etc., Fut. PI3^ 3 s. m., etc., 
 HIPH. Fut. PP?^ 3 s. m., etc., 
 
 and so others. 
 
 t There may be in Pause, instead of the . 
 
 J For a ' Variation' when the 1 st Rt-letter is ' Guttural,' see Obs. XXVIII (0). 
 Comp. Tab. XXIII & Obs. XXVIII. 
 
 || This is merely a Form- word, as also are some few others of the words here 
 given for illustration. 
 IF The may be lengthened into in a Pause-form [comp. 167 (i) & (ii)].
 
 191 
 
 Jfy. (a) y 3 s. ., 3ri 3 s. /. & 2 s. m., etc.' [see 
 
 Table XXIlf, also Note (:), p. 190], 
 (6) $&_ for nn?>! fr. nnQ, and so p? for H^ fr. 
 !W, i5tpn for np.t?n, etc. ; 
 
 Hd. *^l^\ 3 s. m., *^J|J}fi 3 s. /. & 2 s. m., etc. [see 
 Table XXIII]. 
 
 Note (i) n&O to see has (with 1 Conversive) N"! f r b tn 
 nS"lM JT. & flfcjntl #<., in the 3 s. m., besides the Kal forms 
 Nl> 3 s. m., fcOFl (& STJjn) 3 s./. & 2 s. m., SIS (& NnKJ) 1 s. 
 
 Note (ii) JiriB' .Z70. to bow oneself, to worship, has the following 
 Apocopated Future Forms: 
 
 *-inri^ for niqn^ 3 s. ., *-inri^n for mnn^ri 3 s./., 
 
 comp. Note (t) on Tab. XXIII. 
 
 N.B. linri^M. Gen. xivii. 29 is Kri for innE1 ZifAzV. The - (which 
 the Student may see under the "\ in linriB'*'! there) is put as 
 a Defective Shttrik, Pt. I, 14. This is unavoidable, because the 
 Full Shurik (}) could not be written without the 1 . 
 
 Obs. XXVIII. When the I** Rt-letter is H, or H, or JJ, there are some 
 'Variations' from Tab. XXIII (corresponding to the 'Variations' in Tab. XVI (1)), 
 as might be expected ; thus ; 
 
 (a) From H^V, the Fut. K. formsf are nSj|* } H^fl, ^Fl, rh$$ 1 s., etc., 
 
 nby : 3 1 pi., 
 
 and so from H3H, the Fut. K. forms J are n.Jn*, n^qPI, etc., Hjq? 1 pi-, 
 like lbj, ibj^Fl, etc., in Tab. XVI (1) ; 
 
 (3) From Tim, the Fut. K. forms are Pim?., mnn, ^mri, nm.K 1 s., etc., 
 
 njm i pi., 
 
 and so from nn , the Fut. JT. forms are non 11 ntSHD nn nHN 1 s., 
 
 v v: v > v v: v ? v: v ) v v: v 
 
 etc., nonj i pi., 
 
 like iny.^ nnyn, etc., in Tab. XVI (1), 
 
 (7) From run, the Fut. K. is Pllf!*, H^Pl, etc., like |^ & nDH* in Note (*) 
 on Tab. XVI (1), and so, fr. HHH, fVHE, etc. 
 
 Note. From HVT <o *e & i1*n <o e the Fut. K. forms are HVP & 
 etc., see pages 277 & 279. 
 
 * The may be lengthened into in a Pause-form [comp. 167 (i) & (ii). 
 
 t For the apocopated forms, see () below. 
 
 i For before PI in apocopated forms, see (, b) below.
 
 192 
 
 (5) When the 2? Rt-letter is fl, or n, or y, the only 'Variations' (besides the 
 Compound form adopted by any Moving Shva under one of those letters) 
 are in the Apocopated forms ; thus, 
 
 in the K. Fut. 3 s. m., we have ytJ for njfl? (fr. IW), and so 
 n; for nnp* (fr. nriD),- corresponding to t^. for HT^ (fr. HT3), but 
 
 (e) when, by reason of Apocopation, the 2 d fit-letter H is made to stand at the end 
 of the word, and without a Vowel after it, this n has Mappek [Ft. I, $ 31], 
 because it is not a Quiescent but a Consonantal PI ; thus, 
 in the K. Fut. 3 s./., we have 
 
 rlDRI and PlbFIl (fr. HHD and nnb), 
 
 Note. The forms rDfl and FPfi correspond to the forms X"V f JOR, 
 etc., in Tab. XXIII, and these correspond to such forms as 
 
 be?., beto, etc., for nbsp% nbi?>n, etc. (fr. nbB>). 
 
 () "When the forms in (a), (0), (7), lose by Apocopation their 3 d Rt-letter 
 (H Quiescent*), then their 1 st Rt-letter takes and the prefixes }JVK take 
 (a) sometimes as in 
 
 bjP t 3 s. m., hyF\ t 3 s. /. & 2 s. m., by*< t 1 s., bjtt f 1 pi., 
 and so bnMn bn^ 3 s. m. Fut. J5T. of nbn, 
 Tnrj 3 s./. Fut. K. of mn, etc., and 
 
 nnFi in nnni 3 s./. Fut. K. of mn, and 
 
 (d) sometimes - (before n for the 1 st Rt-letter), as in 
 
 ;n fr. rm, |*m fr. nxn, in* fr. mn. 
 
 Note. The apocop. form "HIT (3 s. m. Fut. /ST. of mn) belongs to the same 
 Class as ?^ for r\^\ (fr. n3K>), the n taking for Euphony 
 as in the 2 s./. Past forms Jjing^, ^D?^ etc., Tab. XVI (3) (C). 
 
 (rj) In the ^^. also there are ' Variations ' like those in Tab. XVI (1) ; thus, 
 INFIN. n^.H, (Absol.), Di^H, n'^yn?, etc., 
 PAST n^H 3 s. m., n^H (orb) 2 s. w., 'JV^n 1 s., -l!?yn 3 pi., etc., 
 
 and 
 nn'pyni 3 s. /., Jvby.ni (orb) 2 s. ., etc., with I, comp. 
 
 Note (t) on Tab.' XVI (1). 
 PARTIC. nbj^O (i.e. nbj[) s. m., etc., 
 IMPEK. nby.n 2 s. m., ''by.n 2 s./., etc., 
 FUT. nbj 3 s. m., n^H 3 s. /. or 2 s. M., ^Pl 2 s. /., nby.N 1 s., etc., 
 
 * It is only the Quiescent n that is dropped, not n Consonantal. 
 t The prefixes (JVK may have in Pause-forms.
 
 193 
 
 (0) (a) The apocopated form of nj?yn H$. Imper. 2 s. w. is 7j7n (corresponding to 
 
 P)nn in Tab. XXIII, for 'nann, fr. HSn), end 
 
 (ft) The apocopated forms of the H$. Fut. (corresponding to ?i\, etc., in 
 Tab. XXIII) are . 
 
 hyi 3 s. m., 7y,n 3 s./. or 2 s. w., ^S 1 s., 7y,J 1 pi., 
 and the Pause-forms of these are 
 
 :7j 3 s. m., j^yn 3 s./. & 2 s. ., 6yx i s., jbya i pi. 
 
 N.B. These forms of the Fut. Hq>, in (0, ft) are the same as the forms 
 of the Fut. K. in (, a). 
 
 (j) In the N$. the Past forms are with -=- (rather than with the in, 
 Tab. XVI (1)) ; thus, 
 
 from n^y, n'pjja 3 s. ., (but nn^yp. 3 s./., p. :nnby : 3), -1^5 3 pi. ; and 
 so from nay, *)V3y_j i s. ; 
 
 but, from Ppn, we have *nv03 1 s., -17113 3 pi., (with the Partic.-forms 
 
 n^: & r6m s. /., niVm pi. /. ; also, from nan we have nam 
 
 Partic. s./., and from mn* we have D^rW pi. m.}. 
 Note. For the N$. of n*n see p. 278. 
 
 (K) The only Soph, forms of n?y which occur are irregular, viz., 
 i"6y.h 3 s. m., :nr6y_n 3 s./. in Pause ; 
 
 but, from n'pn, we have Tlvnn 1 s. with (5) under the n as in 
 Tab. XXIII. 
 
 Obs. XXIX. For the Participles it is sufficient to refer to p. 173. But we 
 may append here the following general remark : 
 
 Obs. XXX. A word may occur in the CONSTRUCT form before a Preposition, as in 
 12 *Qin 73 all that-trust in Him (Ps. ii. 12), where ^Din is Kal Partic. pi. m. 
 ' i.e.' fr. nDn , etc. Comp. 52, N.B. 
 
 * From mn we have also the N$. Past 3 pi.
 
 194 
 
 EXERCISE XL [On Verbs PI , Table XXIII.] 
 
 ( To be translated into English, ivith the help of the Glossary at the 
 end of the book.) 
 
 jprruv 
 
 : 8 njvn nana : 7 D Turn 
 
 n:in 
 
 2T. to see, Afy. to be seen, to appear, H<j>. to cause to see, to shew. 
 2 1333 H$. to behold [ 141, 7 (a)]. 3 H^3 JT. to depart, go captive, A>. to be 
 revealed, to be uncovered, Pi. to reveal, to uncover, Hq>. to cause to go captive, to 
 take captive, Eoph. to be made to go captive, to be taken captive. 4 nit? (with 
 ' added ' * , ^flTE?) a princess. 5 H^HP a province. 6 HTI * 1C. to be, also some- 
 times 'to become,' comp. p. 254 (4, b), especially when followed by 7, for an 
 example or two of which see the Footnote on p. 255, Nty. to be done (also to be 
 done for, or destroyed], to be brought to pass. 7 DO tribute (Du? JVH to become 
 tributary. For the ;> comp. Rule II on p. 225). 8 time. 9 HD1 to weep. 10 by 
 day. and [by] night. 12 bny a couch, Tab. X, 1. ls HDD Htf>. to dissolve, 
 make to melt. u HQV Pi. to watch, look eagerly. 15 what. 16 "1ST Pi. to speak. 
 [For the comp. Pt. I, 70, and for the comp. 168, i.] 17 in my case [or, 
 perhaps, "against me," "unto me" (E.V. " in me," in the margin)]. I8 n'pD 
 K. to come to an end, to fail (when used of the eyes), Pi. to finish. 19 }?V (/.) an eye. 
 20 nont to make a noise, to roar. 21 Tn a bear (root 321). - 2 ^3 all, every, the 
 whole (?3 when unaccented), with Affs. i?3 the whole of Mm, etc., as in Tab. Ill, 2. 
 23 and like the doves. 24 !"!3n f to make a murmuring or moaning noise, to moan. 
 25 n3t? to take captive, N<f>. to be taken captive. J 6 jiy iniquity (pi. 
 
 * The forms from this Root are given on pp. 276-278. 
 t See Obs. XXIX, p. 193.
 
 195 
 
 n*! : M jnn 37 nifc>yS Wife" 
 
 -.- r- ^_ T - : - 
 
 ny *nni. : 49 PMfcO 
 
 nn 
 
 27 nil -ZT. to be many or great, H<f>. to multiply or make many (or great). 2S 7JJD, 
 followed by the Noun ?J?D perfidy, 'to act very perfidiously' (compare the Note 
 within the [ ] on p. 228, v. 11 there). N.B. ' to-multiply to-act-very-perfidiously' = 
 1 to act over-and-over-again very-perfidiously,' or some other such strong expression. 
 For the (o) comp. 168, i, the 1 is here ' superfluous.' 29 rQyh an abomination. 
 31 D*ia nations, heathen. 31 nD3 Pi. to try, tempt. 32 !T1D JT^>. to provoke, rebel 
 against. M H3B to turn (followed by ?K , " to turn to" =" to regard "). M because of. 
 35 His covenant. 36 P)D* H$. to add (used sometimes with a Verb following it 
 to express "doing so again," thus "to add to do evil" =" to do evil again." 
 37 nt?y* K. to do, make, act, N<p. to be done, made, also to be executed (as punish- 
 ment). 38 the evil, or that which was evil. 39 mn * K. to burn or be kindled (used 
 of anger), H$. to make to burn, to kindle [wrath] transitively. * provocations (E.V.). 
 *> great, pi. /. No. 32 [comp. 137 (3), Note (t)]. No. 19, a is 
 dropped here. "as. 45 a horrible thing (/.) 46 decreed-punishment. 47 fl3 a 
 daughter (the same 'i.e.'). "lamentation. * 9 and mourning. w ftf'V sheep, a flock 
 (a plur./. Verb may be used with this as Subject). 61 for food. 52 beast of, beasts 
 of. M niVt H$. to pervert. M ^ a way (Tab. X, 1). 65 r6y* ^". to go up, 
 H$. to cause to go up, take up, bring up. 56 Chaldees (with a * ' superfluous' here). 
 17 the covering of. B8 nSl? /. a carcase. M torn (E.V.) , " like the dung" (others) . 
 60 Nebuchadnezzar. 61 nt33 to stretch out, extend, incline, to slip (of the feet). 
 
 * See Obs. XXVIII, p. 191, etc. t See p. 309.
 
 196 
 
 ni 6s ? 6 w : 7; 
 
 ' 5<i n& : "irtpys 6 n;riK 
 
 : n-n Dyn 98 ^ 1 ?** 
 
 101 n : 10 SN ^H* wa : " W B^N ^y TIT 6<> nn 
 
 62 HIT Pi. to scatter. 63 in the lands. 64 on account of. 65 these things. 66 HH3 
 to be weak, to fail (used of the eyes). 67 by reason of vexation. 68 73K mourning. 
 69 nj?n to err, wander (Partic. pi. m. 'i.e.' =erring of). 70 heart. 7l nj^p H<p. to 
 harden. 7Z *\~$ neck, back of the neck (Tab. XI, 1). 73 H1K HO. to lust. 74 [with] 
 lust. N.B. to lust [with] lust=to lust greatly. 75 HH^ H6. to bow oneself, to 
 worship [Tab. XXIII, Notes f to IT]. 76 to gods. 77 other (pi. m.). " K. to be 
 low, Pi. to humble, to bring down, HO. to humble oneself, to become low. 79 woe ! 
 80 rVCTl Nq>. to be cut off. 81 like a shadow. 82 *pn N<f>. to be gone. 83 severity, 
 hardship, hard-things (E.V.). 84 nt3JJ* H<p . to cause to cover as with clothing (and, 
 when followed by 7J? , " to clothe one with :> ). ^ shame. 86 like the unclean thing. 
 87 nD3 Pi. to cover, to hide, HO. to cover oneself. 8S *?% over. 89 with the 
 shadow of death. w "OT to remember. 91 H3H Pt. to wait for. 92 IN a 
 father. 93 (^) for (HD^) why? 94 Ht3V K. to be veiled [p. 173, Note (t)]. 
 95 when ? % shall I come ? 97 before. 98 the obduracy of. " Thy Eight-hand. 
 100 nST\ K. to be weak or slack, H<j>. to make slack, to stay (also to let-go-one' s-hold-of, 
 
 * See Obs. XXVIII, p. 191, etc.
 
 197 
 
 EXERCISE XLI [Second Exercise on Verbs nS, Table XXIII. ] 
 
 (To be translated into English, with the help of the Glossary 
 at the end of the book.) 
 
 aan 
 iNib? wn+ite ^ n&rKn 'aoni : 
 
 T - - . | .. T . T T ...... 
 
 39ta irn : inn Si 1 ! Sin 
 
 m 37 
 
 and so (o forsake). 101 H1X Pi. to command, Pu. to be commanded. 102 salvation of 
 (plu. /.). 103 it is enough. 104 now. 105 HV3 to inquire [page 172 (0)]. 
 106 niB> to return. 107 HHN (page 271). 108 1OK to say. 1M HDV to stand, stand 
 fast. no nyiJ' to look, have regard (or respect). m nHQ H$. to give enlargement, 
 112 to Japheth. m pB> to dweU. 1U Vn'K a tnt. 115 Shem. 116 Canaan. l17 71. 
 118 mil* to conceive. 119 ~fa to bear (a child). 12 at the time of his old-age. 
 121 -|^ to go. m in the wilderness of. 123 Kbj t to lift, lift up. 124 npt? ff<p. to 
 
 * See Obs. XXVIII, p. 191, etc. 
 
 t The 1 st Et-letter 3 is dropped in the Put. JT., as in Tab. XIX, thus 
 Kt^ (for N^*), etc. For the forms from this Root see pp. 302-304.
 
 198 
 
 i : m Din m<t ^h tq 1M rnf>n : 
 W& tr^m : I3 rn SN ma 
 
 - - T T : T : |v v T- 
 
 6 : IM n^ nib : ^ 37 rwj SPIT nin 1 87 D|nrn 
 18T ni : n'pir Si pmr W Dma SN 'JONI : 136< ip 
 
 T v - I -: - v : | T : v T T : - v T T T | 
 
 m : "nfcna m 139 rnDm pmr tpr >a 6 m : 138 mb:an 
 
 ..... ... T .. | ... . . . | T . . ||.. T ... T : - 
 
 : -nniisn 
 
 give-drink-to, to water. 125 H"lp JT. to happen, to occur, Hq>. to cause things to 
 occur, to direct events. 126 before me. 127 to-day. 128 HHO Pi. to hasten. 129 Tn$ 
 Pi. to pour out. 13 the drinking-trough. m nKK* He. to be amazed in oneself. 
 132 n\h to take, Tab. XIX (A). the veil. 1M HB** E. to be beautiful, ^. to 
 beautify oneself. [For the Dagesh after ilO comp. Pt. I, 70.] 135 fc?13 to be 
 ashamed, Tab. XX. 136 Hip JT. & Pi. to wait, wait for, look with waiting for [the 
 K. Partic (1), in the Plu., with Pron.-Aff. signifies " those waiting for so and so."] 
 137 PIT2 to despise. 138 the birthright. 139 HH3 to be dim, or dull. 110 HKI to see 
 [the pref. D here signifies " so as not" or " so as not to"]. U1 K^J3 K. to approach, 
 H<p. to cause to approach, to bring near. m ?3K to eat. 143 and he brought. 
 144 iin^ to drink. 146 HIH to be (p. 276). U6 blessed (sing. m.). " 7 and for thee (w.). 
 118 nnpK? a woman-servant ( 67). U9 1^ a child (m.), Tab. X, 1. 1SO DVV to be 
 numerous, to be mighty. 151 almost, nearly. 152 Dip to arise. I53 n?l to draw- 
 water. 154 mn to rejoice. 155 VD3 to journey. 15 DH^ N<f>. to fight. 157 
 
 * In the Fut. K., fiJ^, HBVl, etc., the 1 st Rt-letter * becomes Quiescent in , 
 as in 20^ aD^ri, etc., in Tab. XVIII (1).
 
 199 
 
 : DPiS "flhwn vh\ i ""Dtf Da 1 ? "ti 
 
 : w 
 
 n;n 
 : n& nhaa 13M 3W -ci an 
 
 H nan 
 
 I -s 
 
 take captive [this, followed by *5^ (? **5^) a captivity, stands for " to take a body 
 of captives"]. 158 idols. 159 afar off. 16 nmp grayes. 161 JH3 to give. 16J iTn to 
 live. 163 to my Beloved. 164 grapes. 165 bad-grapes. 166 my* to put on as an 
 ornament, to adorn oneself with. 167 n?n to be sick, or ill. 168 yDB' to hear. 
 169 nDn*to trust. 17 HDT PH. to liken. 171 stubble. 17 133 ^. to tell. 
 173 nyK' -fffl. to look at oneself (also to become afraid). 174 n?^ to prosper. 
 175 3i"!K to love. 176 HIT K. to have dominion, to subdue, ff<f>. to cause to subdue. 
 177 HIT to be abundantly satisfied. 
 
 * See Obs. XXVIII, p. 191, etc.
 
 200 
 
 EXERCISE XLII [Table XXII]. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11, -/*.) 
 
 Look- with- waiting 1 (s. m.) to (7X) The- LORD. I-have-looked- 
 with-waiting-for 1 The-LoRD, my soul* 2 hath-looked-with-wait- 
 ing, 1 and for (7) His word I-have-hoped. 3 Well 4 hast-Thou- 
 dealt 5 with (Dtf) Thy servant, 6 0-LoRD, according- to (3) Thy 
 word. 3 Make-distinguished 7 Thy loving-kindnesses. 8 In (2) 
 Thy doing 9 tremendous-things 10 [which] we-could-not-look-for 
 (Hebr. not we-could-look-for 11 ). 
 
 jf 12 The-LoRD shall-not build 13 a house, 14 in- vain 15 [will] its 
 builders* 17 have-laboured 16 in (i) it. A-spreading-place-of 18 
 nets 19 she-shall-be 20 in the midst 81 of the sea. 22 And-she-shall- 
 become (Hebr. and-she-shatt-be^ for) the spoil 23 of heathen- 
 nations. 24 She-shall-not-be-built 25 any-more. 26 Thy (/.) builders 27 
 had-perfected 28 thy beauty. 29 Thy (/.) shame* 31 shall-be-dis- 
 covered, 30 yea 32 thy disgrace* 34 shall-be-seen. 33 Despised 35 [art] 
 thou (m.} exceedingly. 36 According-as 37 thou-hast-done 38 (m.) 
 shall-be-done 38 (m.) to thee. Heaven* 40 shall-disclose 39 (plu.) 
 his iniquity. 41 The increase* 43 of his house 14 shall-go-away. 42 
 
 1 nip PI. 2 Bfea (/.) Tab. x, i. 3 W HQ. 3112. 5 nb>y. 6 lay Tab. x, e. 
 
 7 r6a Jfy. 8 nori loving-kindness, Tab. X, 1. 9 Infin. JT. of No. 5.' ' 10 ni^nij . 
 11 Fut. Pi. of No. 1. 1Z DK. 13 H3n. u TV? (m.), Tab. XIII, 3. 15 K]^. 
 " boy. " Partic (1) of No. 13 (with Pron.-Aff. his). " HD^D. 19 D^O^q. 
 
 ^iijn. 2i ^n,i.c. -jjin. 22 Dj. 23 t?. Djia. 25 A>. of NO. is. 2 niy. 
 
 17 Partic (1) of No. 13. 28 ^3 Past K. 29 'BJ (w. Affs.^BJ, etc.). 30 fb) Mf>. 
 
 Fut. apocop. 31 nny. *D|. M n&n. M nann. 3 ' 5 ma s. Partic (2). 
 
 86 "I'M?. 37 "I^S3 . 38 nb^ K. to do, JV<^. to be done. 39 H^J JV. * DJDK'. 
 )iy. n*?J JT. Fut. apocop. 43 ^3* m. tT^K. DV (w. Affs. 1BJ?, etc.). 
 
 * The Verb to precede the Noun. t Past with 1 prefixed.
 
 201 
 
 Each-one 44 to (7K) his people 45 they-shall-turn 46 (m.). And 
 I-will-give-drink-to* 47 the land 48 of thy (m.) inundation 49 from 
 thy blood. 50 And I -will-cover* 51 . . . heaven. 40 [As-for] that 
 night 52 . . . let-it-not rejoice 53 among the days 54 of a year 55 : . . . 
 let it-look 56 for (7) light 57 and there-be-none, 58 and let-it-not- 
 behold (Hebr. not let-it-look 59 at 60 ) the eyelids 61 of a morning- 
 dawn. 62 
 
 And they-shall-build* 13 the-old- waste-places (Hebr. the 
 desolations* 3 of old-time 6 *). For-Zion's-sake (Hebr. because o/ 65 
 Zion 66 ) I-will-not-be-silent. 67 And thou-shalt-be 20 (/.) a crown 68 
 of beautiful-glory 69 in the hand 70 of The-LoRD. 
 
 0-come 71 let-us- worship 72 and fall-down f 73 ; let-us-kneelf 74 
 before 75 The-LoRD our Maker. 76 
 
 46 H3D. 47 npL? ff<(>. * 8 jn.K. HQV (w. Affs. ^flSy, etc.). 50 D 1 ^ w. Affs. 
 iD^, etc.). 5l HD3 Pz. 52 r6 (.). s3 HIH -T. Fut. apocop. [p. 170 (e, )]. 
 64 Di (see Vocab.). 55 rut?. Hip Pi. Fut. apocop. "IIS. }*S. 89 HKT 
 JT. Fut. (full form). 60 2 the prefix. 61 DJSJ^^ . 62 "IHB'. s nhnP| [see 69 (0)]. 
 
 [the Fut. K. has the ( -:r)-form; thus, 
 
 [see 'NoxB' on page 315]. 73 JTO Fut. ( ), Pause-form. 74 TI3. 75 V.?. 
 76 nb^ i: Partic (1). 
 
 * Past with 1 prefixed. t "With the H of 144.
 
 202 
 
 OBSERVATIONS XXXI & XXXII. 
 
 Obs. XXXI. A List of Verbs belonging to more than one of the Seven Classes 
 mentioned in 186 sometimes called 'Doubly Irregular' Verbs, 
 is given on pages 267, etc., below. 
 
 Obs. XXXII. A few examples of two-fold 'Variations,' in some remarkable 
 instances, are given in Note IV (page 174).
 
 203 
 
 EXERCISE XLIII. 
 
 ( To be translated into English, with (he help of the Glossary at the 
 end of the book). 
 
 : onto pxfc TOP nK 2 n&in *\m wrh* ' 
 
 - : I v v | : - v T 
 
 3 ion hx 
 
 1 Lord. 2 XV* K. to go out, H<p . to bring out. 3 i"lt33 K. to incline, to extend, 
 Hip. to cause to incline or extend, to bow, to bow down, also to make to turn away 
 (or send away, dismiss). 4 yOt? K. to hear, Hip. to proclaim. 6 N13 to come, 
 H<p. to cause to come, to bring. 6 before Thee. 7 NBO JfT. to lift up, to bear, to 
 raise, also to forgive (followed by 7). 8 HXT to see.f 9 my sins. 10 "H* to come 
 down, go down. u As for Thee. 12 XI* K. to fear, Nip. to be feared. 13 nip Pi. 
 to wait, wait for. u H33 (the n Consonantal) to shine, to be bright, Hip. to make 
 bright, to lighten. 15 my darkness. 16 H2K to be willing. 17 ?DN to eat, to enjoy. 
 18 my Pi. to afflict. 19 HJ: H$. to grieve. M iy unto. This together with the 
 next word PI3S " when ?" = " how long ?" 21 in vain. 22 D3J iT<^. to strike, to smite, 
 Hoph. to be smitten. 23 on, upon. This followed by the word no (what] ="why?" 
 "wherefore?" comp. Xu. xxii. M riTTI to be sick, to be ill. " ?3* K. & Hoph. 
 to be able. 26 J"IN7 -S". & N<p. to be weary. 27 K33 Nip. to prophesy. 
 
 * For the see Pt. I, 72. t Also " to look" followed by 3 "at." 
 
 R 
 
 >* * 
 
 *
 
 204 
 
 
 
 nnan : T*?y *T n 3 &N1 : 28 Dns 22 nan 
 
 DHN " 3o nn inn 
 
 nan : 
 
 nrn ir 
 
 n in 
 
 47 ^i t jnt 
 
 28 Ephraim. 29 their young men. 30 in the battle, or war. 31 133 to be heavy, 
 H<j>. to make heavy.* 33 ?]} a yoke, w. Affs.i?J?etc. 33 luxurious one (/.). 3i two(/.). 
 This with the next word = " these (wo tilings." 35 bereavement. s6 and widowhood. 
 37 Assyria. 38 \tfb Lebanon. 39 HD 11 to be beautiful. 40 the angel of. 41 corpses. 
 42 niD to die, Tab. XX. 43 il?3 to come to naught, to be consumed. 44 "]^ to go, 
 or to come. 45 HTI to live. 46 the Amorite. 47 113 to move away. 49 Chaldeans. 
 49 fl3 a daughter. so a bride. 51 the calamity of. 53 E^lp UO. to sanctify oneself. 
 63 at the sacrifice, 64 nb*y to make, to do, to act. 5S nnt? H9. to worship (followed 
 by *?). 5 6 before Thee. 57 Lord. 58 HT ff<j>. to teach. 59 m HQ. to praise, to 
 render thankful acknowledgments. 60 a wonder, a wondrous thing.
 
 205 
 
 EXERCISE XLIV. 
 (To be translated into Hebrew, 11. - /it.) 
 
 I- will-lift-up 1 my eyes 2 to Otf) the mountains 3 : 
 
 From-whence 4 shall-come 5 my help 8 ? 
 
 My help [is] from The-LoRD, 
 
 The Maker 7 of heaven 8 and earth 9 . 
 
 Many* 11 shall-see 10 , and shall-fearf 12 , 
 And-shall-put-their-trust 13 in The-LoRD. 
 
 To-be-feared t 12 [is] He above (7^) all 14 [that are called] God". 
 
 [It is] time 16 to seek 17 The-LoRD, 
 
 Until-that 18 He-come 5 and rain 19 righteousness 20 unto (7 you. 
 
 Tnou-hast-brought 21 [the] day 22 Thou-hast-called-for 28 . - 
 
 Sit-thou 24 (/) still 25 and enter 5 into (3) the darkness 28 . 
 And there-shall-come 5 (3s. f.) upon thee (/.) suddenly" 
 Destruction 28 [which] thou-shalt-not know-of 29 . 
 
 [It is] good 30 to-give-thanks 31 to The-LoRD. 
 
 1 tfa, pp. 302304. 2 {jy, Tab. XIII (t, /3). * Dnn. * }^D. ! X13, pp. 
 272275. 8 "Ijy. m. [ 62 (iii)]. 7 n'KV Partic. (1) K. 'i. c.' 8 DJOB>. " p, 
 Tab. X (1). 10 ntn. " D^n. 12 r, pp. 286-288. TO3. " "?3 
 
 15 D^n^K. w ny.. " srn. 18 nfi. 19 m* H^, pp. 288 & 289. so pix. ! 
 
 of No. 5. 22 DV. 23 Kip. 21 3B Tab. XVIII. " DO-H. 26 ^^n. 
 
 28 nKB>/. " yi^ Tab. XYni, Note (3). 30 110. 31 nT H<f>. pp. 281 & 282. 
 
 " The Tense before the Noun. t Pause-form. 
 
 i N<J>. Partic. Future tense. 
 
 #***
 
 206 
 
 When-Israel-went-forth (Hebr. in going -forth- of \\ u Israel**) 
 
 from Egypt 34 , 
 
 And He-smote 36 all 14 [the] firstborn 36 in their (m.) land 9 , 
 Egypt was-glad 37 at (i) their (m.) departing || 32 ; 
 And He-brought-out 32 Israel 33 from among-them (Hebr. their 
 
 m. midst 39 ), 
 And there-went-forth 32 from trouble 89 a righteous-one 40 (m.); 
 
 Lightnings* 42 gave-light-to 41 the-world 43 , 
 And He-bowed 44 heavens 8 and-came-down* 5 . 
 
 We-will-not fear 12 though-the-earth-be-moved (Hebr. in One's- 
 
 removing* 6 earth 9 )'. 
 Let-us-lift-up 47 our heart 49 . 
 
 Hear 49 -thou, [O] daughter 60 , and see 10 , and incline 51 thine ear 82 ; 
 Forget 53 also" thy people 65 and the house 56 of thy father 57 : 
 And the King* 69 shall-delight-Himself-in 58 thy beauty 00 : 
 For 61 He [is] thy Lord 62 , and worship 63 -thou Him (Hebr. to Him). 
 
 Open^-ye (TO.) to me the gates 65 of righteousness 20 , 
 I-will-enter 3 by (1) them, I-will-give-thanks-to 31 The-LoRD 68 . 
 
 32 NV pp. 284286. 33 fcW*. '* Dn^P (') K n33 H <t>- Fut - apocop., pp. 
 298 & 299. 36 -VD3. 37 nob K. Past 3 s. m. 38 ^F\ w. Affs. bin, etc.,-comp. 
 Tab. XIII, Note (:, e). 39 n~)V. 40 p^ il 11^ H<f>. 42 plu. of pn3, Tab. IX. 
 43 ^3R " HtS3 K. Fut. apocop., p. 297. 4S TV [with ^ to the 3 d Kt-letter, as in 
 165 (I. S)]. 4e 11D H<(>. Infin. 47 K. Fut. 1 pi. of No. 1. 48 llh, w. Affs. 132^ 
 etc. 49 JJJDK'. 68 n3. 61 H<t>. of No. 44. c2 )?, w. Affs. ijTS, etc., Tab. XI. 1. 
 3 n3K ;. 54 ^ ( to ^ e prefixed to the word "Forget"). D^, w. Affs. iy etc. 
 86 JV3 Tab. XIU. 3. 7 3X Tab. XIII. 1. S8 H1K H6. Fut. apocop., p. 267. 
 " ^9- 60 *?) w. Affs. VpJ etc, (Comp. 63. 7). 61 '3. 62 JHS ( 59). 
 
 Infin. K. * The tense before the Noun.
 
 207 
 
 We-give-thanks 81 [Obs. ix, p. 93] unto () Thee, [0] God 87 , we- 
 
 give-thanks 31 [Past]; 
 Yea 68 now 69 , our God 67 , giving-thanks 31 [Partic.] we [are] unto 
 
 6) Thee; 
 And Thy Name 70 for-ever 71 we-will-celebrate sl . Sela 72 . 
 
 And heavens* 8 shall-celebrate 31 Thy wonders (Hebr. wonder 13 ), 
 [0] LORD. 
 
 I-will-praise 31 The-LoRD with ) all 14 my heart 7 *. 
 Come 5 -ye before-Him 75 amid (1) glad-singing 76 . 
 
 [0] give-thanks 81 unto (?) The-LoRD, for 61 [He is] good 77 , 
 For 61 for-ever 71 [endureth] His Mercy 78 . 
 
 see Note () on Tab. XXIII. w HHS. M 1^ (m.), Tab. X. 5. " a. 
 
 67 Vocab. I. 1. 6S 1 the prefix. 69 T\R$. '" Dg?, Tab. XIII, Note . 7l D^. 
 72 nfo. 73 N^, Tab. X. 2. 74 n|?, w. Affs. 13^ etc. VJB^. w HJJl. 77 nitD 
 
 78 ^5^, Tab. x. i. 
 
 * Tense before Noun.
 
 208 
 
 OBSERVATIONS XXXm L. 
 
 OBS. XXXIII. The following is a List of the Tables of Verb-forms with Pron- 
 Affixes : 
 
 Tab. XXIV. Infinitives. 
 
 Tab. XXV. Past-Tense Kal. 
 
 Tab. XXVI. Participles. 
 
 Tab. XXVII. Imperative Kal. 
 
 Tab. XXVIH. Future- Tense Kal. 
 
 Tab. XXIX. Some Pl-el and Hiph-U forms. 
 
 Tab. XXX. Forms of Verbs IO. 
 
 A few CHANGES OF FORM adopted by Verbs on receiving Pron-Affs. may be 
 mentioned here : 
 
 Obs. XXXIV. In accordance with the Great Rule of 59, "the vowel which 
 ,. would stand NEXT BUT ONE BEFORE, or THIRI> FROM THE 
 
 ACCENTED VOWEL is generally dropped" (if it can be dropped) 
 and is replaced by Shva : thus, 
 
 (a) the of "7j53 is dropped and replaced by Shva in 
 n|53, etc., and so in other Past K. forms, see 
 Tab. XXV, [for the of the p, see Obs.XXXVm]; 
 (]8) the of such forms as D^T etc., Tab. XX, is thus 
 dropped in such forms as }3E^ and ^np'j?* and 
 i'i?% etc. But 
 
 Obs. XXXV. The vowel which would be thus dropped CANNOT be dropped if 
 it is followed either 
 
 (a) by Shva, as in Ip?*, etc., JhjT, etc., or 
 (/3) by Dagesh F., as in "JgSi etc., I^S etc., *1J5D? etc.; 
 (y) but in order to shorten the word the NEXT VOWEL 
 is THEN DROPPED (if it can be dropped) ; and so we 
 have the forms, 
 
 133.!??!, etc - Tab - xxviH; and inrjrj!, VTTinn, 
 
 etc., in which the -^ of iVP ; i">nR, is replaced 
 by the Slight-vowel [Pt. I, 56]; and so 
 ?n;nn$ etc, with -5-, from JinK; 
 
 etc., Tab. XXIX, and liTTpS, etc., and 
 !, etc., Tab. XXIX (II, a). 
 
 (5) For 'Fut. ( )' forms such as ^3^3^., etc - see 
 Obs. XXXIX below. 
 
 Obs. XXXVI. Sometimes no vowel can be dropped, and so we have the H<t>. 
 * forms "VVppn, etc., and 13n i| p?J!, etc., of Tab. XXIX (I, /S) 
 jfi, and (II, j8).
 
 JL of npa* I 
 
 icn the 
 
 209 
 
 Obs. XXXVII. In PI<f>. forms of some Roots there is no Shva after the first 
 Vowel, and this Vowel can then be dropped; as in such 
 forms as iD'pn, etc., from O^H, (Tab. XX), and so in 
 Obs. XXXIV 03) above. 
 
 Obs. XXXVIIL The of the 'closed' syllable in 1J2S, etc., is lengthened into 
 when the syllable in which it is becomes ' open ' [comp. 
 Obs. XXTTI, p. 185], Thus we hare from 1J59 such forms as 
 Vlg9 f etc. f Tab. XXV. 
 
 Obs. XXXIX. Verbs 'Fut. ( )', instead of dropping the (as the JL 
 etc., is dropped in Tab. XXVIII), generally lengthe 
 into v as in Obs. XXXVUI; thus, 
 
 from E&, 'J$& with Aff.. me, DE>3^ with Aff. 
 
 them (m). 
 Obs. XL. The in such forms as WVljJa, etc., is the v of Obs. XXXVIU 
 
 in an 'open' syllable, being derived from the of 1j3S. 
 
 Obs. XLL The ^ of the ^ga form (of Past A'.) remains with Affs. ; thus 
 
 (a) From SHS, UrKjj, *|?n ;) etc., and 
 () In such forms as ^-12(1$ they (m.) have laved thee (m.), 
 the of 3HX is given to the 2 d Et-letter in the form 
 for the 3 pi. (42nK) when with the Affix as here. 
 
 [See also Notes (a) and (/3) on Tab. XXVH, and Notes (a) and (/3) on Tab. 
 XX VIII. ] 
 
 Obs. XLIL In some instances Verb-forms w. Affs. occur with the of the 
 
 ^#9 form of Past K., although the 3 s. m. Past K. in use is 
 of the ?J7Q form; thus, 
 
 from EH' the 3 s. m. Past K. in use is tTV, but we have also 
 of the ?J?a form hi 
 
 rHKn'1 K. Past 3 pL with 1 Pref. and Aff. her, 
 ^trn K. Past 3 pL with 1 Pref. and Aff. thee m., 
 and from this it is possible that the of the following forms 
 may be obtained, viz. 
 
 A'. Past 2 s. m. with 1 Pref. and Aff. her, 
 . K. Past. 2 s. m. with } Pref. and Aff. them m. 
 Note (i.) The occurs also hi 
 
 Dn^W K. Past 2 pi. m., with 1 Pref., [comp. Tab. 
 
 XXV, Notes (a) and (|3)], 
 
 but the other parts of the K. Past (from this Root ET) which 
 occur agree with the forms from IpQ in Tab. XIV; thus, 
 (p. : r>?rV) 2 s. m., UE*T 1 p l. (and w. Aff. her 
 
 - 
 
 (ii.) There are other instances of Roots from which both 7^9 and 
 forms occur.
 
 210 
 
 Note (iii.) The of a 7J7B form, when followed by -r- Quiescent, is shortened 
 into 6 on the addition of an Affix removing the Accent from the syllable which 
 contains that ; thus Vl^bj gives Itf)^* K. Past 1 s. w. Aff. him, fr. ^3. 
 This is done in order to get rid of the UNACCENTED LONG Vowel before the 
 QUIESCENT Shva under the 7 [Comp. Pt. I, 55 (8)]. 
 
 Obs. XLIII. The Pron. Affs. for the 2 s. m., and the 2 pi. m. and 2 pi. f.,viz., 
 
 ^| (or H3 ), and D3 and |5 , 
 
 require a Shva under the last letter of the word to which 
 they are affixed, therefore any MOVING Shva under the pre- 
 ceding letter must be replaced by a Slight-vowel (but a 
 QUIESCENT Shva may of course stand). The Slight Vowel 
 generally agrees with the Vowel that was dropped ; thus 
 
 (i.) from npj we have T7i?5, D 5"!^- 13"]^. > in 
 Tab. XXVIH, etc., where the p has the 
 Slight-vowel (6) corresponding to the 
 which is dropped in IDlpQ*, etc. ; and so, 
 
 (ii.) from IpS we have ^"]i?S (Tab. XXIX, I. a), etc., 
 
 and 
 
 from "IJ9B* we have ^]|3D> (Tab. XXIX, II. a), etc., 
 where the p has the Slight- vowel corresponding 
 to the which is dropped in HJ5S etc., and 
 etc. 
 
 (iii.) Instead of the in (ii.) there is sometimes , 
 as in D3VDK&? (fr. fg>K$) Job xvi. 5. Comp. 
 Note II (7) on p. 89. 
 
 Obs. XLJV. Before a Guttural letter, as n, the of the Pl-el is generally 
 NOT DROPPED except in Pause. Thus we have 
 
 Tjn^^ I will send thee (TO.) away, from n?^K ; , etc. 
 But in Pause the is dropped as in ;]0?K'S. 
 
 Note. A as Slight-vowel, before -=- under a Guttural, requires no remark ; 
 as that is what the Student would expect of course. 
 
 Obs. XLV. The Pause-form of the Aff. ^[ thee (m.) is not only J TJ fr , but 
 also S "*! -js , as seen in the last-cited example. Comp. Note e 
 (ii.) on Tab. XXVHI. 
 
 Obs. XLVI. This is often so in the case of Verbs If? with this Aff. in Pause ; 
 as in : 3 ; W&? Pause-form of ^|VH (Put. PL 1 s., fr. 
 And so in the forms J fftfo an ^ * 33^ on P' ^^' 
 Note. But the form t ^ -& (without the Dagesh) also occurs, as in J ^ 
 p. 282.
 
 211 
 
 Obs. XL VII. Verbs having for their 3 d Et-letter H Quiescent drop this Pt on 
 receiving Pron. Affs. , as seen above and in Tab. XXX. 
 
 Obs. XL VIII. By reason of the loss of a syllable thns there is no room for the 
 operation of the great Rule of 59 [comp. Obs. XXXTV, above], 
 and therefore such forms as infc$, -ini^S?, etc. [Tab. XXX], 
 retain the vowel of their 1 st Et-letter instead of its being 
 dropped as in -inn,?? ^niVlj^, etc., Tab. XXV. 
 
 Obs. XLIX. For other forms we may refer to the Tables and the Notes 
 thereon. 
 
 Note (i.) Verbs H"S in the 3 s. m. Past take the full Affix 1H him, rather 
 than i ; thus, 
 
 he made him (fr. rK2]) he made) Ps. xcv. 5, 
 [5 he bought it m. (fr. !"!3J5 he bought) Lev. xxvii. 24. 
 (ii.) The 3d Rt-letter H is dropped even with an Affix having Shva 
 before it ; thus, 
 
 *^|b>JJ He made thee m. (fr. nfe'JJ) Deut. xxxii. 6, 
 ^jn31 and He will guide thee m. (fr. i"in3 he guided, 
 
 with 1 pref.) Is. Iviii. 11. 
 
 (iii.) Special attention may be called to the 3 s. /. Past forms with 
 Affixes, such as 
 
 inrjbj; and HnE'V, tnn'g^, etc., in Tab. XXX; and 
 so in 
 
 '}jyjfy (3 s. /. Past K., with Aff. me, Pause- 
 form) Job xxxiii. 4, 
 DrftgH (3 s. /. Past H<f>., with Aff. them m.) 
 
 Josh. ii. 6. 
 
 The student will see at once the similarity between the form of the Verb in 
 these words and the shortened form of the 3 s. /. Past viz. JIB'JJ. instead of 
 
 nnl-jj (like nn>3). 
 
 * ^|3|5 Deut. xxxii. 6, is the Pause-form for T|3j?, 167 (ii. a). 
 
 t And so in IDj'DI. PL Past 3 s./. (nn^3), with 1 pref. and Aff. him, Zech. v. 4, 
 
 and nP)5V Pi. Past 3 s. /. (nJViy), with Aff. her, Ruth iii. 6. 
 t This shortened form was just mentioned in Note III. fj. (p. 172). It is not 
 limited to the Kal ; for not only do the Pl-el words in the preceding Note (t) 
 seem to refer to it, but we have also the 
 
 H<f>. Past 3 s. /. nyi.rM. (fr. nyi), with 1 pref. Lev. xxvi. 34, and nN<>n 
 (fr. H&6), with for as in H^H 3 s. m. Tab. XXII, Ez. xxiv. 12, 
 and 
 
 Hoph. Past 3 s. /. rPJH twice in Jer. xiii. 19. 
 These examples are cited by R. D. Khnkhi in the Michlol.
 
 212 
 
 Obs. L. The Rule of 162 (e, ii.), viz. that "the rather than the * 
 
 form" of the Fut. H(p. is used in certain cases, must not be 
 supposed to hold when Pron-Affs. are attached. In this 
 case the the Long-Khirik is preferred, and is either 
 (a) Defective (Pt. I, 13), as in such forms as 
 
 1!"n.i?9!l, D !i??^, -liTli??, etc., or 
 (/3) Full, as in such forms as 
 
 etc. 
 
 Note. Defective Long-Ktiirik and Defective Shurik* [Pt. 1, 14] occur often 
 in long Verb-forms especially when there would otherwise be more than one 
 Quiescent letter in the word. Perhaps it may be said that 
 (L) This is a matter of TfO [Pt. I, 74], and 
 (ii.) The Student had best use the FULL spelling always. 
 
 As in in3' l ^n Ex. i. 22, D3"6^1 Josh. x. 27, -I^P?" Is. xliii. 9, etc.
 
 213 
 
 EXERCISE XLV. 
 
 (To be translated into English, with the help of the Glossary at 
 the end of the book.) 
 
 x ova 
 
 v T| ; v T T : 
 
 1 IDT to remember. 2 S)1X to try (as silver and gold, by melting). 3 See 
 the preceding Note. (The word being unaccented here, the ^ (6) stands instead 
 of the of spy?; com P- 168 (i)-) 4 "> ox to Ba y- 5 3W to forsake. 6 rot? 
 to forget. [The Past K. is found with the of the ?J?9 form in the following : 
 (a) the 3 s. m. with Aff. me in Pause, (/3) the 3 s. /. in Pause (nnpfc?, Prov. ii. 
 17), and (7) the 3 pi. with Affs. me CJirQtp and ^rq0, and thee /. (^1!W); 
 Comp. Tab. XXV, Note (a)]. 7 p3V to adorn (as with a chain, or necklace). 
 9 HD3 PI. to cover. ' f|QX to encompass. 10 33D K. to come round, to go 
 about, PL to take about, lead about. u JVK' to put, place [comp. 226, and 
 183 (y3)]. ia lit. places-below, i.e. low-depths. (This word, with the ~I13 before 
 it, is an expression for "a pit of low-depths" = "a very deep dungeon pit." 
 13 N12 to come, to come upon (p. 272). u Sip to call, to call upon. w f13J? to 
 answer. 1B n3?p a wound, Tab. VI. " NQ"I to heal. Ie [with] love of, see 
 86. '" 3HN to love. 20 ppn PI to engrave. 2l H33 K. to build, iV0. to be 
 built. " |'np P. to collect. * from the recesses o*. " "$> K. to go, II<j>.
 
 214 
 
 10! n:o:i 
 "vmna : "riy WSTK nbi : *$?& "DW 
 
 | . . - . v . . ... T f . . _ 
 
 : pmn 
 : Dp nrm "wyx ^^^n^i 14 nN*ip nxa 
 
 r - T :. I :'' Tl v : -- :T T T|T r - 
 
 nr : 
 
 to cause to go, to conduct. " HIT PI. to scatter. M IDB' to keep, to guard. 
 " njTl to act as a shepherd. N.B. The K. Partic(l) s. m. is used for a shep- 
 herd. NVD to find. |13 or pn iT. to understand, P?. to instruct. so 1VJ 
 to preserve. n as the pupil of. 32 Httb A', to be glad, Pi. to gladden. * pj* 
 sorrow. 31 "IH2 to choose. M my lf<^. to rouse up. M "J"l3 ^.f and Pi. to 
 bless. 37 jriJ to give. |K> a tooth (Dual. D'W). M f^n Pr. to deh'ver. 
 40 DD1 to trample. 4l HlDn hot anger, wrath. 42 nt3 to be sprinkled, p. 296. 
 43 ny?. used here for life-blood, strength; Tab. X. 2. " *]OD to uphold. }JH 
 to be gracious to. 46 HW (see p. 293). 47 DH JiT. to be high, Pi. to exalt, to 
 extol. M See No. 8, and Tab. XXX [Note j3 (8)]. *" m* H<f>. to praise, etc., 
 pp. 281 & 282. 40 yt33 to plant. " 11K A', to shine, H<f>. to make to shine. 
 42 !"QT A', to be many, H<f>. to make to be many, to multiply. M in the day- 
 
 * For the prefix & icho, which, that, see the latter part of Note (d) on p. 24. 
 t N.B. The KAL in this sense is used only in the Tartic (2) of 139 (7), & Iniin.
 
 215 
 
 *vin> : p aa "ipae " : rs rrvi "naa* 
 
 - T :~: T T I : T : T : T : T ~ - "T: TV- 
 
 war 
 
 TT : T : 
 
 tri-n 
 
 I v v -; r 
 
 PSALM XXIII. 
 
 (To be translated into English, with the help of the Glossary at 
 the end of the book). 
 
 time. " H3J H0. to smite, to strike, pp. 298 & 299. w H Pt. to praise 
 (Dagesh F. is often dropped from the *?). 5e Sn to fear, p. 287. " n to be 
 becoming, fitting, suitable, p. 280. s8 1OT PI. to hymn. s9 HT H0. to teach, 
 point out to, pp. 288 & 289. " nPU K. and 11$. to guide, lead, (p. 296). 
 61 right, rectitude, see 86. es "IW to help. e3 DH3 Pt. to comfort. " "OH to 
 lack. M in pastures of, see 86. e6 |*31 A', to lie down, H<t>. to cause to lie 
 down. " rest (lit. rests). "" ^H3 Pf. to lead gently. 6 " 31tr K. to return, 
 Pr. to restore, and to refresh. 7tl in the paths of. 7I for the sake of. " ^ to go.
 
 216 
 
 K '3 p M K 
 
 T- ' T T 
 
 73 with me. " 4 Tiy to set in order, array, prepare. 75 TlV to distress, to be an 
 enemy to. 76 JBH Pi. to anoint-richly. 77 fulness; [a cup of] fulness = the 
 [cup that] "runneth over" of the E. V. 78 P|T) to pursue, to follow. 
 
 * There are various opinions respecting this word : 
 
 The translation "my abiding, or dwelling, [shall he] in the etc.", corre- 
 sponds to the word iJR^ (K. Infin., r\3W f with Aff. 1 s.) from 2C Tah. XVIII, 
 instead of ^55^. Some suppose that the Eoot 21K> to return is used here in 
 the sense of the Eoot 3^ to abide or dwell. And some suppose that the word 
 should stand thus VOBM (K. Past 1 s., with 1, from 2^) and I will abide or 
 dwell. The strict sense of VW^I as ^ s ^ n ds is and I will return.
 
 217 
 
 ** The following Exercises are partly taken from the Exercises in the former Grammar. 
 
 Note (i.) Help required for rendering the English into Hebrew is here given UXDBB the 
 
 several words, 
 (ii.) Words connected by hyphens are all comprehended in the Hebrew which 
 
 stands under them, 
 (iii.) Some additional help required is occasionally given in Footnotes. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVI. 
 
 ( To be translated into Hebrew?) 
 Aud he- returned into the house and took the child and restored him* 
 
 IIE> (71) Ira np^t "fe 
 
 to his mother. And he-turned tkis-way-and-that and saw that 
 
 ^K QS (see vocab.) P133 ilbl D3 
 
 there-was-no man, and he-killed him* and hid him* in the sand. 
 
 JOB Vin 
 
 And the kingt said 'Fetch-ye (m.) me a sword and cut him* into two, and 
 
 r\\h 'h anrj ntJ h 
 
 give the half to one (/.) and the half to the-other.' And 
 
 inn vo nnK *VH nn 99, Note (t). 
 
 I-cried-out and said, 'In-no-wise kill-him' (Hebr. to kill kill-ye m. 
 
 . Abs. HID H<i>. 
 
 him* not), and they (m.)-gave him* to me. And she-took the child 
 
 (Obs. IV. p. 93.) }H3 rip 1 ? 1^ 
 
 and kissed him *, and she-lifted-up her voice and wept. 
 
 Tab. XIX. Nb>3 ^ip H33 (Apocop.) 
 
 EXERCISE XLVII. 
 
 And I-asked him* saying 'What mayest-thou-be-seeking?' 
 
 t Tab. XVII, Note (t, ii). &Tp2 P. Put. 
 
 * Affix. t Fut. ( ). Tense before Noun. Fut. ( ).
 
 218 
 
 and he answered me* that his brethren he [was] seeking. And 
 
 n:y a nx Tab. XTTT. e?pa PL Partic. 
 
 they-said to-each-other (Hebr. a man to Ms brother), 'Come-ye and 
 
 BK ^K HK ^ Tab. XVIII. 
 
 let-us-slay him*, and let-us-cast-him* into one-of the pits, and-we-will-say 
 
 nnt ~frv H<t>. 3 inx rim Pastw. ipref. 
 
 An evil beast hath-devoured him*.' But Beuben* delivered him* from 
 
 njn njn/. bx i p-i&n ^WH^. 
 
 their hand and said 'We-will-not smite him* mortally, cast-ye 
 
 T "JDS H3J H<j>. (p. 299) PBJ -J^l? H<j>. 
 
 him into this pit,' in-order to-deliver him from their hand to restore 
 h* 113 
 
 him* to his father. And they-stripped him* as-regards his coat 
 
 ^K 2K Tab. XIH. 
 
 and they- took him* and cast him into the pit. And Judat said'Let-us-sell 
 
 np'pir 71 rrpn* 
 
 him*, and our hand let-it-not be upon him.' And they-sold him* to 
 
 n/. obs.iv.p.93. n-'n ^y b 
 
 the Ishmaelites, and they-took-him*-down to Egypt. A king* sent 
 
 n^xyt?^ mH0. 71 nnyp ^9 
 
 and loosed him *. 
 
 in3 H<f>. Tab. XIX. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVIII. 
 
 And he-finished charging-them (Hebr. to ^charge them*), and he-expired 
 
 rhiPt. mvp?.** yi3^ 
 
 and died. My father adjured me * saying ' In my 
 
 grave which I-dug for me in the land of Canaan, there (Heb. thither) 
 
 "OJ3 Tab. X. 2. H13 ^> is? y33 
 
 * Affix. t (Fut. ( ). : Tense before Noun. Infin. w. h prefixed. 
 
 || With Affs., *R?ri3 etc. ^ Fut. (-^-). 
 
 ** The 1 is Consonantal here.
 
 
 
 21.9 
 
 shalt-thou-(m.)-bury me*.' Go-up and bury-thou (ire.) thy father as 
 
 upt rby 
 
 he-adjured thee*. All that I-shall-command thee* (HI.), thou-shalt- 
 
 certainly-do (Hebr. to-do thou-shalt-do) it* (ire.); and I- will-bless thee*, 
 Infin. Abs. nb'JJ f TO Pi. 
 
 and I-will-preserve thee* in all thy ways. JAH hath-indeed- 
 
 TDB>t ^ Tab. X. 1. a; 
 
 corrected (Hebr. to-correct, He-hath-corrccted) me*; but to the death 
 
 PL Infin., () form. ID 11 PI. 1 HIO 
 
 He-hath-uot given me*. And T-took 11 them (m.) and I-passed-them-over 
 
 jna np^> 
 
 (Hebr. and I-caused-them* -to-pass-over) the brook; and I-was-left 
 
 -ay H<t>. b -irp A>. (Tab. xvnij. 
 
 by-myself, and there-wrestled one with me until the-going-up-of the dawn. 
 
 j3^> p2KAV. t^tf ny *iy n^y nn^ 
 
 And-when he-said 'Let-me-go (Heb. Send-away -tlwu m. me*) for the dawn 
 1 IT^B? PI. >3 
 
 hath-gone-up,' then I-answered-him* 'I-will-not let-thee*-go except thou- 
 
 rby i my nb^ PL nx ? 
 
 hast-blessed me*.' 
 
 EXERCISE XLIX. 
 
 And these words which I [am] commanding thee (m.) to-day (Hebr. 
 W (m.) 
 
 the-day) shall-be ^ on thy heart. And thou-shalt-impress tf them* upon 
 
 (Hebr. to) thy sons. And-thou-shalt-write^ them* on the posts of 
 
 3 Tab. XIH. HDD 
 
 thy house, and at (2) thy gates. I will-bring you (ire.) * into the land of 
 
 rva W KU H0. ^ fix (/.) 
 
 the nations which (Hebr. which it*) I-have-given to you to possess it*. 
 
 cnMw.) |na Bh^Tab.xvni. 
 
 And I- will-give ^-them* -up before-you, and ye-shall-smiteH them. 
 
 JD3 D^S w. b pref., & Aff. H3J H^>. 
 
 * Affix. t Fut. (-^-). * The ) is Consonantal here. 
 
 Tense before Noun. || Note (A) on Tab. XIX. fi Past with V
 
 220 
 
 The king* of Jericho sought the men whom* Joshua sent. And 
 
 s^p inn* & ; pn PI. P. 46 (i.) y&w rhw 
 
 the woman I said, Pursue-ye (m.) quickly after- them that ye-may-overtake 
 
 ntrs SITI -inp onnqx *a xn H<t>., Tab. xix. 
 
 them*. And she had-taken-them*-up to the roof; and she-hid 
 expressed \k$H$. 71. ii. (a) J| JDD 
 
 them*, and the mischief* did-not come-upon them*. Ye (m.) have- 
 
 !"ljn XE expressed 
 
 preserved-my*-life. Flames of fire have-devoured them (m.)*. 
 
 rpn n<t>. 
 
 EXERCISE L. 
 
 Draw-Thou me*, after-Thee we-will-run. The king* hath- 
 
 H^ ^n.D^ pi (w. n at the end.) ^p 
 
 brought-me*-into His chambers. Let-me*-see thy (/.) countenance, let-me*- 
 
 n n<t>. Tin nx-i pi. of n- 
 
 hear thy (/.) voice. I-have-taken-hold-upon Him*, and I-will-not let- 
 
 rns 
 
 Him* -go. 
 
 nsn H^.. 
 
 The watchmen found t me*...; they-smote me* they- wounded 
 
 Partic. (1) JT. of 10K ; K^D n33 H^.. y^D 
 
 me*.... Whither turned thy (/.) Love? for we-will-seek Him * with thee. 
 
 m rua nil (m.) i e>pn PI. ny 
 
 Daughters* saw her*, and they (m.) called-her *-happy. Many 
 
 ro Tab. xiii. nxn nt^K PI. 
 
 waters shall-not be-able to-quench Love II, and floods shall-not 
 
 DV? h^Hdph. naaPL nnnx (/.) ninna (m.) 
 
 overwhelm it*. Lo! THE-LOKD thy Godt hath-loved thee*twi.)*: 
 
 (the form.) 
 
 be-strong, yea (1) be-strong. 
 pin ( form.) 
 
 Affix. + Past with 1 prefixed. I Tense before Noun. 
 
 5 Fut. ( ). , II With the ' Def. Art.' and HK.
 
 APPENDIX.
 
 221 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 I. SIGNIFICATIONS OF THE VOICE-FORMS. 
 
 We may give here a few instances of what was mentioned 
 briefly at the foot of page 70, viz that other English ' forms of 
 rendering' more or less different from the main significations 
 of the Voices in general are sometimes required. Thus, 
 
 (a) In Gen. i. 4, the HIPH-IL 7^1*} (Fut. 3 s. w.) may fairly 
 be rendered "and Se divided" (or by some such expression, as 
 " and He made separation"). The expression "and Se caused to 
 SEPARATE" is not English, and English expressions must of 
 course be used in an English rendering. 
 
 () So, in Gen. i. 11 KH pNH KBHn is fairly rendered 
 "let the earth bring -forth grass" The Hebrew expression 
 my*y N^*Tri in which the Verb is from the same Root tf E5H as 
 the Noun, cannot be rendered exactly in English. Similarly in 
 the case of $HT ^Hl/ft in the same verse, some such expression 
 as "producing seed" or "yielding seed" must be given. 
 
 (7) In the case of some Roots, as observed at the foot of 
 page 70, altogether different English Verbs are required for 
 their several Voices. 
 
 (S) TVe must be content, at present, to refer the Student to 
 his Lexicon for the renderings of the several Voices of various 
 Roots. 
 
 (e) Also the Lexicon must be referred to as a means of finding 
 what Voices of particular Roots are used. For 
 
 N.B. (i) Verbs are not necessarily used in all the Voices ; but, 
 
 on the contrary, 
 (ii) most Verbs are used in certain Voices only, and not 
 
 in others. 
 
 s
 
 222 
 
 (II). CERTAIN TENSE-FORMS, AND APOCOPATED FORMS. 
 
 (1) As said in 162 (e), it is the Rule to have, in the Future 
 
 Kal, the (rather than the i) form, i.e. "1p* rather 
 
 than TlpS* in the following three cases : 
 
 (a) with 1 Convers., thus "lpJ*1 and he visited, 
 
 (/3) with 7tf Deprecative, thus *lpS* 7tf let him not visit, 
 
 (7) in a, positive wish, thus IpS* let him vvdt. 
 
 (2) So also it is the Rule to have in Hiph-il the (rather 
 
 than the * ) form, i.e. *TpS* rather than TpS*, in the 
 
 same three cases, thus 
 
 (a) with 1 Convers., TpS*} tfc? A0 caused to visit, 
 
 (/S) with 7K Deprecative, "IDS* 7K &2 Am notf cawse to visit, 
 
 (7) in a positive wish, "Ipfil* /^^ Ae; cause to visit. 
 
 (3) The same holds for other than 'Full' Verbs ; and, further, 
 
 (4) Verbs H 7 generally* have the 'Apocopated' forms in 
 
 these same three cases, thus : 
 
 (a) with 1 Conversive, _ 7^\ from Tv)^ (Kal}, 
 
 hM from PlW (PI.), 7^1 from rfep (H<j>.), etc. ; 
 
 and so *H^_ from nW,_K^1 from HW, etc.; 
 
 and so in other Persons, as "TlFfi from PVP1J;) 
 
 ynrn from nynn, etc. ; 
 
 () with S Deprecative,__7^ Sx from H^H (Pi), 
 
 and n^nri, etc. ; 
 
 (7) in a positive wish, _ 7^ /e^ it m. go captive, from rh^ _ 
 
 ^H* let it m. be (or let there be), from !"ViT, etc. 
 [Further remarks on Verb-forms had better be reserved for 
 a subsequent Section of this Appendix. Now we may not delay 
 any longer to give the following] 
 
 * Not always, see the Note (J) on p. 171.
 
 223 
 
 (III). ANALYSIS OF SOME VERB-FORMS. 
 
 When the Student first attempts to read the Hebrew Bible, 
 he is likely to find his progress somewhat slow and perhaps 
 wearisome by reason of his inability to analyze at once the 
 Verb-forms with which in such great variety he will meet at 
 every step. It is therefore advisable to offer him some little 
 help, at first, to enable him to recognize more easily the various 
 forms, and to familiarize him (by references) with the several 
 Tables and Sections in which such forms are classified and 
 spoken of. To some extent the Exercises will have already 
 familiarized him with these, class by class. A very little help 
 now will enable him to combine them all. The following 
 ANALYSIS of the Verbs found in the first three, and the twelfth, 
 chapters of the Book of Genesis, will doubtless be amply suffi- 
 cient for him. "With the Prefixes and Affixes to Nouns, etc., 
 he will be sufficiently familiarized already by the Exercises ; 
 he will need no help for these now, with the exception of a 
 word or two, here and there, perhaps. It may however be well 
 to give now the following Rules : 
 
 RULE I. When the Conjunctive 1 stands between words, or 
 groups of words, which form a COUPLE, if the second word 
 of the COUPLE, or the first word of the second group, is either 
 
 (1) MONOSYLLABIC, or 
 
 (2) DISSYLLABIC WITH THE ACCENT ON THE PENULTIMA, 
 the 1 generally takes -7-, 
 
 [N.B. unless the first letter has , in the word to which 
 the 1 is prefixed] ; thus,
 
 224 RULE FOR THE PREFIX 1 WITH . 
 
 (i) in Gen. viii. 22 we have 
 
 awe? harvest, and cold and heat, and summer and winter, and 
 day and night, etc. 
 
 Here the Nouns are arranged in COUPLES, two and two. And 
 
 f V 
 
 (a) T'Vpl jnt seed-time and harvest, the first Couple, has for 
 its second word the Dissyllabic *Vp which is accented on the 
 last syllable (not on the Penultima) in accordance with Pt. I, 
 55 (8, ii) and (9, a). Hence this word does not fall under 
 Rule I above. For the Accents T'lishd and Pdzer, see 
 Pt. I, 66 (15 & 13). As said in Note (J) there, the Accent -*- 
 stands " always over the first consonant of its word." It affects 
 the last syllable here. 
 
 f r .% 
 
 (/3) DHI *lp cold and heat, the second Couple, has for its second 
 word the Monosyllabic DPI ; before which the 1 takes in 
 accordance with Rule I above. For the Accents Geresh and 
 Kadma, see Pt. I, 66 (16) & 67 (3). 
 
 (7) tpPlI f^p summer and winter, the third Couple, has for its 
 second word the Dissyllabic STin accented on the Penultima ; 
 before which the 1 takes as above. For the Accents T'vir 
 and Dargd, see Pt, I, 66 (11) and 67 (4). 
 
 (8) So also PPvl DV day and night, the fourth Couple, has 
 for its second word the Dissyllabic n/v accented on the 
 Penultima ; before which the 1 takes as above. For the 
 Accents Tiphkhd and Me-r'khd, see Pt. I, 66(6) and 67 (6). 
 
 But (ii) it is not necessary that the Couple should consist 
 of two words only. We have, for instance, in Gen. iii. 22 
 
 * This 'iDI signifies " etc." It stands for \^} and the whole of it.
 
 RULE FOR THE PREFIX 1 WITH . 225 
 
 and eat and live for ever. Here the COUPLE 
 consists of two parts (1) 73N1 and eat, and (2) D7SP Til and live 
 
 ~ T : T ^ : - T 
 
 for ever ; and the first word of this second part has -r to the 1 
 prefixed to the accented Monosyllable Tl. For the Accents 
 ( ) Silluk Soph-pdsuk, Me-r'khd, and Tiphkhd, see Pt. I, 
 66 (1), 67 (6), and 66 (6). 
 
 This great Rule is not indeed always attended to ; but it is so 
 much attended to in the Bible, especially in the case of TWO 
 WORDS so ' coupled ' together, that it is best to observe the Rule 
 in Composition in this case of a COUPLE OF TWO WORDS. 
 
 This Rule was stated in a very concise form in Obs. XII 
 on p. 139. There the Rule itself, with even the few examples 
 given above, would have been out of place. In a Couple con- 
 sisting of two words, the second word will mostly have a Dis- 
 junctive Accent by reason of the Stop (greater or less) made at 
 the end of the ' Couple.' It was necessary, as seen in (ii), 
 not to limit the occurrence to the case of the Accent being 
 Disjunctive. 
 
 [This Rule will be found more fully stated and illustrated in 
 Pt. II, 94.] 
 
 RULE II. The prefixes 733 also sometimes take before an 
 Accented Vowel, as seen in Pt. II, 95 ; thus we have JD*/b7 
 instead of DW at the end of Gen. i. 6 ; and so :HI&7 at the 
 
 T : '" T 
 
 end of Deut. xiv. 1 ; etc.
 
 226 
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. i-iii. 
 
 Gen. i. 1. N^|* He created. KAL Past 3 8. m. from 
 
 Tab. XXII. 
 v. 2. nrVPl t it /. was (or existed in a state of}. KAL 
 
 Past 3s./. from PIT] . Tab. XXIII. 
 HSrnp [was] $ moving (al. brooding). Cp. Deut. 
 xxxii. 11. PI-EL Partic. Sing. /. from &m . 
 For the Partic. forms see App T B to Tab. 
 XIY, and for the retained before PI see 
 Tab. XVI(2) [& iii. page xx.]. 
 
 t'. 3. 12DK*5 am * ^ so ^- KAL Fut - 3 8 - m - with 1 Con - 
 
 versive, from -|&N . Tab. XVII (2, 8). 
 VI* let there be. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. apocopated for 
 nVl% from PIVI. Tab. XXIII (Note 3), 
 also page 170 (e, 4). 
 
 *n*1 w^ ^Aere ^as. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. apocopated 
 with 1 Conversive, from JVP! (see the pre- 
 ceding word W). Cp. p. 222 (4). 
 v. 4. iO*1 anc? -He saic. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. apocopated, 
 froml-lKY Tab. XXIII, also page 171 (17). 
 *1 and He divided (or fwaofe separation}. HIPH-IL 
 Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from 7"^ . 
 Tab. XIV. [For the -=r see 162 (e, ii) 
 p. 105, and p. 222 (2).] 
 
 * The Tense here precedes its subject. Cp. 162 (d, i), p. 105. This need not be 
 mentioned after this page. 
 
 t The Tense here follows its Subject. This marks EMPHASIS on the Subject, as 
 stated in 162 (d, ii). The Emphasis here might perhaps be brought out in English 
 somewhat thus : " Now [as for} t/te earth, it was a confused and formless mass .... 
 And GOD said, etc." 
 
 J The 'logical Copula' was is to be supplied in the English. Cp. 124. This 
 need not be mentioned again. 
 
 See $ 161 (2), page 104.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS TN GEN. I. 5-7. 227 
 
 r. 5. NTp*1 * and He calkd. KAL Fut. 3 s. in. with 1 Con- 
 |j - 
 
 versive, from NTp . Tab. XXII. 
 
 Nip He calkd. KAL Past 3 s. m. from Nip . Tab. XXII. 
 
 T i r i 
 
 *PH *. See the third Verb in v. 3. 
 
 [Note. The literal rendering of the last six words in v. 5 is, 
 as the Student will see at once, " And there was evening, and 
 there was morning, one day." This literal rendering seems 
 plain and clear enough. It tells that, after that great moment, 
 when 
 
 " GOD said ' LET THERE BE LIGHT, AND THERE WAS LIGHT," 
 time went on ; and, in due course of time, the light of the day- 
 time declined towards departure, "and there was evening." 
 And time went on still continually ; and, in due course of 
 time, day dawned " and there was morning." And so there 
 was "ONE DAY": -viz. from the first breaking forth of the light 
 "offspring of heaven firstborn," to the time when there was 
 light again at the breaking forth of the light of the morning. 
 
 Obs. Some give "the first day" for 1MN DV. For this see 
 'Note' at the end of 0. 31.] 
 
 v. 6. TDK*!*. See the first Verb in v. 3. 
 VV . See the second Yerb in v. 3. 
 pn and let it be. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. (TV) 'with' 
 1 Conjunctive prefixed [ 3 (6)], from DTI . 
 Tab. XXIII. See also v. 3. 
 Vl^D one m. dividing (or making separation}. HIPH-IL 
 
 Partic. Sing. m. from Sll. Tab. XI Y. 
 v. 7. 2W*1 and He made. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 from PlB>y. See p. 171 (), and Supp* to Tab. 
 XXIII. 
 
 See 161 (2), page 104.
 
 228 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. I. 7-11. 
 
 v. 7 (contin.) 7;p*1- See the second Verb in v. 4. 
 
 TP1 . See the third Verb in v. 3. 
 r . 8. fcnp|1 . See the first Verb in v. 5. 
 7H. See the third Verb in v. 3. 
 r. 9- *tbK*l- See the first Verb in v. 3. 
 
 5|!p <t let them be gathered together. NIPH-AL 
 
 Fat. 3 pi. m. from Hip. Tab. XXIII. 
 and let iff. be seen. NIPH-AL Fut. 3 s./. 
 with 1 Conjunctive, from PlN*1. Tab. 
 XXIII. The is instead of followed 
 by Dagesh, as in 182 (i). 
 . See the third Verb in v. 3. 
 r. 10. NW . See the first Verb in v. 5. 
 
 K*lp . See the second Verb in v. 5. 
 
 T|T 
 
 &n*1. See the first Verb in v. 5. 
 v. 11. T&N'I. Seet-. 3. 
 
 [NBH] NBHfi ^< ^ / bring-forth [grass]. HIPH-!L 
 Fut. 3 s. /. from KBH. 162 (e,ii), 
 p. 105 ; & p. 222 (2). 
 
 [Note. This use of a Verb and Noun together, from the same 
 Root, is often found especially where the repetition of the 
 Root implies abundance, multitude, greatness, or emphasizes that 
 which the Root expresses. Cp. "THS ^flllS Ps. xiv. 5 they were 
 greatly afraid (lit. they feared a fear], etc. ; and so], 
 
 yielding seed. HIPH-IL Partic. Sing. m. 
 
 from JHT . 
 
 yielding (or producing, lit. making}. KAL 
 Partic. Sing, m. from PlEty. Tab. XXIII. 
 W. Seer. 3.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. I. 12-15. 229 
 
 v. 12. fcflnrn and it f. brought forth. HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. /. 
 with 1 Cpnversive, from fcfl^ . This Verb is both 
 *'S like 1W in Tab. XVIII, and $b like Nttb 
 in Tab. XXI. The instead of * is in 
 accordance with 162 (e, ii), and p. 222 (2). 
 STITfi . See v. 11. nfcty . See v. 11. tiff] . See v. 4. 
 v. 13. Vn. See 0. 3. 
 
 v. 14. -Ifc&n . See v. 3. TV . See v. 3. 
 [Obs. (i). The Verb 'IV is in the Singular, but fhfop %Afc 
 in the Plural. This is often the case when the Verb comes 
 first, especially when the Verb is used as here in a somewhat 
 Impersonal manner. Cp. HIDi \iH5 VV 1 ) 1 Kings xiii. 33 
 that there-might-be priests of high-places. So in Gen. x. 25 
 D^3 13$ Tp* "liy 7^1 w^ ^o ^5er there-were-born two sons, cp. 
 Gen. xli. 50. 
 
 N.B. A Singular Verb may occur with a Plural Noun in 
 certain other cases also, to be mentioned elsewhere. 
 
 Obs. (ii). The Plural of the Masculine Noun ni^tt has the 
 Feminine form. Cp. 43. 
 
 Obs. (iii). The word *)itf/b signifies a light, i.e. a light-giver 
 
 (LXX). In vv. 3-5 the word is ^liX (<w9 LXX).] 
 A^H 7 to divide (or make separation). Hiph-il Infin. 
 
 with 7 prefix, from 7"!^ . 
 
 Vni and they shall be (or let them be). KAL Past 
 3 plu. with 1 prefixed, from JVPI . Tab. XXIII. 
 t?. 15. VH1 See v. 14. 
 
 to give light (lit. to cause light). Hiph-il Infin. 
 
 . 
 
 with 7 prefixed, from *Y)K . Tab. XX. 
 See r. 3. 
 
 T
 
 230 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. I. 16-21. 
 
 v. 16. E^**) . See v. 7. 
 
 [n7^2pJp7 i fi a Noun with 7 for prefixed, "for the govern- 
 ance of."] 
 v. 17. jfi*} owe? Se set (lit. $we). KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 
 
 Conversive, from JJ"0 . Tab. XIX (B). 
 See v. 15. 
 
 v. 18. 7fey/b7l wc? fo rule. KAL Infin. with 7 prefix, from 
 S&?Jb. Tab. XIV. 
 
 j^Tt^?"! )^( SAA ?/ 14- M^^ SPA w 4 
 
 X I Jl I XI * K_/O\7 c _L i %^ | | KJOU EF Tt 
 
 t\ 19. TH. Seer. 3. 
 t?. 20. < TDN*1. Seev. 3. 
 
 /e^ ^em bring-forth-abundantly [moving creature 
 that hath life], lit. let them swarm-with \_a 
 swarm of creatures that have life]. KAL Fut. 
 3 pi. m. from pP. Tab. XIV. 
 [that] mayfly (E.V.) PI-EL Fut. 3 s. m. from 
 
 6)iy. Tab. XX. Cp. 31. 
 
 [Note. Many prefer to render thus: "And let fowl fly." 
 The word " Fowl " should then be read with EMPHASIS, because 
 it precedes its Verb.] 
 
 v. 21. &O1*1 and He created. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Con- 
 
 T : *~ 
 
 versive, fromfcOn. Tab. XXII. 
 
 [Note. The Root tf*n has not occurred since v. 1, "In the 
 beginning (or at first) GOD CREATED the heavens and the earth." 
 It occurs again now in v. 21, at the introduction of ' animal 
 life'; it does not occur again till v. 27, "And GOD CREATED 
 DIN!! HK etc." which is subsequent to the " Let us MAKE (or 
 
 T T T V > 
 
 We will MAKE) DIN etc." in v. 20. The making of man in 
 the image of GOD is an act of Creation.]
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. I. 21-24. 231 
 
 v. 21 (contin.) fiB>ftTl that moveth. KAL Partic. Sing./ (App x 
 B to Tab. XIV) from BW, with the H 
 of 6 & 98. 
 
 !)^2^ brought forth abundantly (or swarmed with}. 
 KAL Past 3 pi. from pB> . Tab. XIV. 
 *nn. Seet?. 4. 
 v. 22. Tpyi flwrf jETe blessed. PI-EL Fut. 3 s. m. with 
 
 P v T : - 
 
 1 Convers., from "111. [App x to Tab. 
 
 XVI (2) ] . The is for the , because 
 
 the Accent is removed from the last 
 
 syllable. Cp. Pt. I, 55 (9, ft). 
 saying. KAL Infin. with 7, from "IJbtf . 
 
 Tab. XVII [Note f (ii)]. 
 ie ye fruitful. KAL Imper. 2 pi. m. from 
 
 PITS. Tab. XXIII. 
 wc? multiply. KAL Imper. 2 pi. w. with 
 
 1 pref., from PQT Tab. XXIII. 
 awe? ^//. KAL Imper. 2 pi. m. with 
 
 1 pref., from &$? belonging to Tab. 
 
 XXII (but the same here as in Tab. 
 
 XIV). 
 i")* let it multiply. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. apocop. 
 
 from nil. Tab. XXIII. 
 v. 23. W . See v. 3. 
 
 Seec. 3. 
 
 ^^ ^ (/) * r % forth. HIPH-IL Fut. 
 
 3 s. /. from K^ which is a Verb both 
 
 'Q and S. Cp. KXini in . 12. 
 [The word iJVF! is for JlT! which is the Constr. form 
 
 -
 
 232 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. I. 25-27. 
 
 as in V*]tfn rVPl in the next verse (25). Some speak of the form 
 irVPl as an Archaic form. Discussion of this matter must be 
 deferred at present. We may just mention (i) the similar 
 tffc tyMb in Ps. cxiv. 8 for '& J ^ and *TJD m Nu. xxiv. 3 & 15 
 (in which last, however, some have thought that the Rt-letter H 
 comes out in the 1) ; and (2) likewise the additional * which 
 is attached sometimes to a word (this * is termed by some 
 1 ^ Compaginis ') as in p"T ^7p Melchizedech Gen. xiv. 18, 
 
 -.-..:- 
 
 instead of p*T ^7/B *M0 o/ righteousness ; and so 13DK ^21 ^e 
 
 I v v I v v -: ; 
 
 colt (lit. son} of his ass Gen. xlix. 11, instead of fafiK |3, etc.] 
 v. 24 (contin.) 7H . See v. 3. 
 
 *. 25. toft. See v. 7. fcTVI. See . 4. 
 
 v. 26. ta J&NV See v. 3. 
 
 ^ MS wcrA'e (or We will make). KAL Fut. 
 
 i pi. from r\wy- See p- 171 () nd 
 
 Supp 1 to Tab. XXIII. 
 
 and let them have dominion (or and they shall 
 have dominion}. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 
 
 | 
 
 Conjunctive, from PH*!. Tab. XXIII. 
 [Note. The word nJH3 consists of fi,n ^ e ^^ / (Construct 
 form of rDTt fish collectively) and the prefix 5 over. Since there 
 may never be two Moving Shvas together, the of the 3 has 
 to become a ' Slight- Yowel.' Pt. I, 56. Cp. 4 (c) of the 
 Exercise-book. The Dag. L. is removed from the 3 here in 
 accordance with Pt. I, 48.] 
 
 EW1 that creepeth (E.Y.) [Cp. WJbTl in v. 21.] 
 
 T V V T 
 
 KAL Partic. Sing. m. from Wt2T\, with the 
 PI of 6 & 98. 
 . 27. Nil* 1 !. See v. 21. K13. See r. 1.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. I. 28-30. 233 
 
 v. 28. ^_. See v - 22 - *TN*1- See v - 2 - 
 IIS . See *. 22. 
 
 and subdue it, KAL Imper. 2 pi. m. with 
 prefix 1 and Aff. p| it (/.), from PM. 
 
 Tab. XXYII. 
 awe? Aat-e dominion. KAL Imper. 2 pi. m. with 
 
 1 pref., from mi. Tab. XXIII. 
 
 . See v. 21. 
 f. 29. TftN'1 . See v. 3. 
 
 / ^#0 given. KAL Past 1 s. from JH}. 
 
 Tab. XIX (B). 
 bearing (lit. seeding) [seed~\. KAL Partic. s. m. 
 
 from^T. Tab. XIV. 
 
 [Note. J/'IT (a little later in this verse) is merely the Pause- 
 form of JHT. Cp. Tab. X, Note (*).] 
 
 rVIT it shall be. KAL Past 3 s. m. from PlTl. 
 
 Tab. XXIII. 
 
 [Note, n/3^7 for food is best taken to be a Noun of the same 
 form as HDpn wisdom, with 7. (The in the first syllable is 6). 
 Some however take ri7p? to be the ' KAL Infin. of 7^^ with PI 
 added' as in 137 (4, iii) [p. 80] ; its meaning then would be 
 ' to eat:'] 
 
 v. 30. b>yn [73 every] creeping [thing]. KAL Partic. 
 
 Sing, m., from E>fcY Tab. XIV. Cp. v. 26- 
 
 [Note (i). SSW p*V /3 HJSt all green herb (lit. all greenness-of 
 
 herb). Cp. 88. 
 
 (ii). The '/ have given' of v. 29 is carried on in thought 
 to ' govern' also the words in (i).] 
 See 0. 29. W . See v. 2.
 
 234 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. I. 31. 
 
 v. 31. ar?}. Seefl. 4. 
 
 Plbty .He made. KAL Past 3 s. m. from nfc?y. Tab. XXIII. 
 
 T T 
 
 7M . See v. 3. 
 
 [Note. *BP2^n DV lit. a day [which teas] the sixth. 
 
 Obs. (a) The ' Def. Art.' Pi has not appeared thus in the case 
 of the preceding "days." The Numerals in connection with 
 DV day in vv. 5, 8, 13, 19, and 23, are respectively "one," 
 "second" (or "a second"), "third" (or "a third"), "fourth" 
 (or "a fourth"), "fifth" (or "a fifth"). Whereas in v. 31 we 
 have " day THE sixth" literally. 
 
 (/3) Many suppose that 1P1K DV in v. 5 may be rendered, and 
 is to be rendered, " the first day" although the Numeral is 
 not the word for "first" (viz. jiBW) but the word for "one" 
 (viz. *iriN). They suppose that the word may so be rendered 
 because the expression *1HN T?2? one king in Is. xxiii. 15 has 
 been rendered by some " the first king." But this last rendering 
 is, to say the least, not certainly admissible. Consequently we 
 are not thereby convinced that the preceding supposition is 
 correct. A little more support for that supposition may be 
 claimed from the phrase KHPP 1P15SI3 which occurs several times 
 (as Gen. viii. 5 & 13, etc.), and which stands short for 
 fcSHrn intf DV2 in day ONE to the month, literally (Ezra 
 x. 16 & 17, etc.). But we must bear in mind that it is usual 
 to employ the CARDINAL Numbers with the day of the month, 
 and ORDINALS for the number of the month itself, as in 
 Gen. viii. 13 BHflS TINS jiBWa in the first [month] in [day] 
 ONE to the month. So we have the Ordinal *"V2Jty3 in the 
 tenth [month] Gen. viii. 5 ; but the Cardinal *fib>y]3 in [day] 
 TEN (not nW3 in the TENTH) in Lev. xvi. 29
 
 NOTE. OBS. ($) CONTINUED. 235 
 
 t ^ se>#A wo^ w ^e [day] TEN to the 
 month, etc. Such a use of the Cardinal Numbers is not quite 
 the same as this of "one," and then " second," "a third," 
 " a fourth," " a fifth," and " THE sixth" in Gen. i. 
 
 Nor is this quite the same even as the " year-of * ONE" (fit.), in 
 Dan. i. 21 (& ix. 1, 2, etc.), which last is in accordance with the 
 " year-of THREE" in Dan. i. 1, and "the year-of FOUR" in 
 1 K. xxii. 41, and so the "year-of TWO" in 1 K. xv. 25, etc. 
 Nor is it the same even as the " year-of THE FOURTH (J"V i y <t !nn)" 
 Jer. li. 59, the " year-of THE SEVENTH (7^1^(1)" Ezra vii. 8, 
 and the "year-of THE NINTH (JVy^JTl)" 2 K. xxv. l.f 
 
 It has indeed been said that "the first" is properly repre- 
 sented by " one," and then " second," " third," etc., follow as 
 bearing reference to the first mentioned, and some have 
 thought that " first " could not be said when as yet there was 
 no other. 
 
 Perhaps it may be well to have just mentioned here that the 
 word actually employed in Gen. i. 1 is NOT the ordinary word 
 for "first" (viz. |it?&n). 
 
 It may, however, be thought to be beyond the limits of our 
 proper business here to mention thus the few facts stated above. 
 And we ought perhaps to add that the amount of ' authority ' 
 which may be claimed, from the opinions of 'learned' men, 
 for rendering the words *inK DV (Gen. i. 2) " the first day" is 
 
 * Perhaps we may be allowed the use of this expression here, for a moment, 
 although it is not an English expression. "We give "year-of" as an equivalent of 
 the Hebrew word DSC', in order to call the Reader's attention to the fact of this 
 word being in the Construct form. 
 
 t The 'English' for these would be "the first, third, fourth, etc., year."
 
 236 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. II. 1-3. 
 
 simply overwhelming. But, nevertheless, these facts remain : 
 (i) the words "HlK DV strictly signify " ONE DAY," 
 (ii) the ordinary Hebrew for "the first day" is a very 
 
 different expression.] 
 
 Gen. ii. 1. VPp^ and they were finished. PU-AL Fut. 3 pi. m., 
 with 1 Conversive, from PI 7D . Tab. XXIII. 
 v. 2. 73*1 and He ended [or HAD ended, or finished, 
 157 (a) & (e)]. PI-EL Fut. 3 s. m. apoco- 
 pated, with 1 Conversive, from PPD [like 
 htf in Tab. XXIII]. 
 
 He had made. KAL Past 3 s. m. from PlfcS^. 
 Tab. XXIII. 
 
 and He rested (or stopped, 'ceased'}. KAL 
 Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from 
 Tab. XIV. 
 
 [Note. It need scarcely be said that the word 'Sabbath 
 is from this Root. But the word is used also in the Bible for 
 other than * Sabbath '-cessation, sometimes.] 
 v. 3. ^1*1 . See ch. i. 22. 
 
 p^l and He sanctified (or hallowed). PI-EL Fut. 
 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from fcJHp. 
 Tab. XIY. 
 He had rested (or ceased). KAL Past 3 s. m. 
 
 See v. 2. 
 
 He created. See ch. i. 1. 
 to make. KAL Infin. with 7 pref. See 
 Supp 4 to Tab. XXIII, and 169 (a). 
 
 [Note. The literal rendering of these last two words is given 
 here. There is some rather needless controversy about the 
 sense of them. We may not enter into that here. The literal
 
 XOTE. 237 
 
 rendering seems to bear a sufficiently clear and simple sense. 
 Another rendering is however possible, as will be seen a little 
 further on in this Appendix (vi. 2, /u,).] 
 
 v. 4. [Note. A slightly different arrangement in the printing 
 of the Analysis may perhaps be admitted now, as a means of 
 marking more distinctly what many suppose to be the com- 
 mencement of a new sub-division of the Book. It will be 
 seen that the NAME of The Almighty (for which the E.V. 
 gives generally " the LORD," cp. Pt. I, 79 &)) occurs for the 
 first time in this verse. And it is followed immediately by 
 D^ri/tf , throughout this chapt. ii. and in vv. 1, 8-24, of chapt. iii. 
 Some Moderns have made what is really a serious mistake in 
 
 imagining both these alike to be merely Appellative Nouns. 
 f > 
 
 The word QVl^K may be so termed. But the other is the 
 NAME the ' Proper-NAME,' if the expression may be used. 
 Here, however, we may but just state what has been said above, 
 and add a caution to the Reader against adopting too hastily 
 certain plausible theories. The thoughtful and unbiassed 
 Student, who can afford to think for himself and to delay 
 his adhesion to other people's theories until he has sufficient 
 education in the subject to be able to form a fair opinion 
 about it, will find too many instances of modern theories 
 resting on a fundamental misconception, which are nevertheless 
 accepted by some as * latest results of Biblical Criticism.' "We 
 would urge the Student to labour for a knowledge of the 
 facts and usages of the language, and we say to him boldly : 
 "Work your work honestly and carefully and thoughtfully, 
 and resolve to know for yourself the truth of the matter, so far 
 as in you lies, by THOROUGH Work."]
 
 238 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. II. 4, 5. 
 
 v. 4 (contin.) DfcOHiriil when they were created (lit. on their 
 ' being created). NIPH-AL Infin. with ^ pref. and Pron.-Aff. Q 
 their (w.), from iCQ. Tab. XY. 
 
 JTlbty [the] making of. KAL Infin. Constr. from r\W$ . Tab. 
 XXIII and Pt. I, 24. This word is here 'in Construction with' 
 the NAME ** (which is followed by the^epithet D^n/K), and the 
 'Object' of it is Q'fcBh ptf . 
 
 v. 5. HVT [D"1tp before] it was. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. from !TP1 . 
 Tab. XXIII. 
 
 lbX* [DTO fo/ore] Y grew. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. from rtBtf (like 
 ? Tab. XIV), in Pause, 165 (I, /3). 
 
 [Note. When the word D'lD has a Tense after it, this Tense 
 is generally the Future in Hebrew ; probably because the time 
 of the event referred to in the Tense is later than (and therefore 
 jet future with regard to) the time to which attention is directed 
 by the word D*"ltp before, or before-thai. But in English, events 
 are regarded as Past or Future from the point of view of the 
 writer or speaker rather than from consideration of relative 
 order. Hence we have sometimes a FUTURE Tense in Hebrew 
 even where some form of PAST is generally given in English, 
 as in the case of the two Yerbs above (and so in PPIT v. 6), 
 which may best be read on in connection with v. 5 thus, 
 "and [before that] a mist went up etc." So in Gen. xix. 4 
 before they lay down, and Josh. ii. 8, etc. 
 
 N.B. (i) A Hebrew Future after D*]D may of course be also 
 rendered sometimes, in other places, by a Future in English, as 
 in Is. Ixv. 24 ! !N ta lp <> D*lD before they shall call, and 
 
 (ii) A Past occurs a few times after D"ltp 5 it may be rendered
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. II. 5, 6. 239 
 
 by the Pluperfect form 'had' (as well as, sometimes, by an 
 ordinary Past) ; thus, Gen. xxiv. 15 n?3 D^lD before-thai he had 
 finished* for "which the man in his own account says, v. 45, 
 "as-for-rne [it was] before I finished (J"lpDtf)t, that behold, etc." 
 See also 1 S. iii. 7 J?T D*}tD [it was] before-thai he had knoicn, 
 followed by (< and before-thai it-was-revealed or manifested (F\\.t.)"if." 
 And so also with D'lDil as in Ps. xc. 2 " before- that mountains 
 had -been -brought -forth (5|*T?* PU-AL Past 3 pi., in Pause), 
 Prov. viii. 25 " before-that mountains had-been-founded (ty^tpn 
 HOPH-AL Past 3 pi., in Pause). 
 
 (iii) In some instances the Future with D""ltD may (perhaps) be 
 rendered in English by means of the Auxiliary " could" ; thus, 
 Gen. ii. 5 "before it-could-be" and "before it-could-grow," 
 and so in Gen. xxiv. 45 "before I-could-finish," etc. But in 
 some instances a direct Past form of rendering seems to be the 
 most natural in English. 
 
 (iv) Gesenius' treatment of the word D^ltD is unsatisfactory.] 
 
 v. 5 (contin.) ^ppH He had caused rain. HIPH-IL Past 3 s. m., 
 from ItDfc. Tab. XIV. 
 
 "liyS to till KAL Infin. with h pref., from "Dp. Tab. 
 XVI (1). 
 
 v. 6. rfap it went up. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. from rfay, p. 171 (^). 
 
 [Note. This verse seems to be best taken in connection with 
 
 * The Narrative treats his " finishing to speak" as a Past event. 
 
 t He marks his " finishing" as suhsequent to the act of her coming out. 
 
 J The "Revelation of the "Word of The LORD to him" is marked as subsequent to 
 the child's having-knowledge-of The LORD. That Revelation implying an advance 
 in knowledge, the first ' knowing ' is expressed in the Past form, and the ' being 
 revealed ' in the Future.
 
 240 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. II. 6-9. 
 
 v. 5, as remarked above. So the emphatic position of the 
 word *TN mist, before its Verb, is allowed for in the rendering.] 
 
 v. 6 (contin.) Hp^T! 1 ) and watered. HIPH-IL Past 3 s. m. with 
 1 pref., from P!p^ . Tab. XXIII. See the Note on v. 5 above. 
 
 f. 7. 1^*1 and He formed. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Convers., 
 from W. See 197 (S). 
 
 r\P\ and He breathed. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 fromHSJ. Tab. XIX. 
 
 VT1. Seech, i. 3. 
 
 [Note. The Verb JVPI with 7 after it, as here, is often used 
 for to become. ~\ 
 
 v. 8. Jft3*l and Replanted. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Convers., 
 fromjfltt. Tab. XIX. 
 
 Db^l and He put. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from 
 D^. See 225 (iii) and 232 (iii). 
 
 [Note. Some consider such words to be forms of the Hiph-il 
 Future from the corresponding 1 y Root, D1E? here. Perhaps 
 the Student's- safest plan will be to give, when asked, both of 
 these two : thus, KAL Fut. from Q^, or HIPH. Fut. from Dlfc?. 
 "We prefer the former.] 
 
 *W He had formed. KAL Past 3 s. m. from "fif* , in Pause. 
 
 T T 
 
 165 (/S). 
 
 v. 9. n/b^ and He caused to grow. HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. m. 
 with 1 Conversive, from Hfc. [Tab. XVI (3) (B, /3), p. xxn.] 
 
 *T^ni pleasant (E.V.). NIPH-AL Partic. s. m. from *JftPl (to 
 covet}, like D^ in 169 (/3, iii). 
 
 nXTin the knowing. KAL Infin. H^ (Tab. XVIII, Note 1) 
 with 'Def. Art.' H prefixed, from ^T . This strictly Infin.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. II. 10-15. 241 
 
 form is often used for the Noun "knowledge. 1 " Here it governs 
 the Object jni lib. 
 
 v. 10. tf^ [was] going out. KAL Partic. s. m. from 5W (like 
 HpS in Tab. XIV). 
 
 DippTP fo water. HIPH-IL Infin. with 7 pref., from P!pK>. 
 Tab. XXIII. 
 
 it icas parted. NIPH-AL Fut. 3 s. m. from Yl3 . Tab. XIY. 
 
 [Note. The Future Tense here marks that the "being parted" 
 was subsequent to the " going out." Cp. 152 (I). So also in 
 the case of the next word.] 
 
 '"7 PPm and it became. KAL Past 3 s. m. with 1 pref., from 
 
 T T : 
 
 PI7I. Tab. XXIII. Cp. the Note at the end of v. 7. 
 
 v. 11. 11DP1 that which compasseth (lit. the one-compassing}. 
 KAL Partic. s. m. (like *IpiD in Tab. XIY) with PI prefixed as in 
 98, from 3SD . 
 
 v. 13. ISiDn . The same as IDfen in v. 11. 
 
 f. 14. TjVnn it-which goeth (lit. #/;e one-going}. KAL Partic. 
 s. w. (like *Tpb in Tab. XIY) with Pi prefixed, as in 98. 
 
 v. 15. Hp*} f -H"^ ^00^'. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 from np 1 ?. Tab. XIX (A). 
 
 ^Pini* 1 ! and He put him (with 'Defective' Zow/-Kherik, 
 
 Pt. I, 12). This word consists of r\W HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. m. 
 with 1 Conversive and the Objective Affix Vl 7ww. 
 
 [Note. There is a difference of opinion as regards the Boot of 
 this word, as said in 213 and Note (f ) there. If the Root is 
 Hi 1 * , the * is dropped as in 212 ; and so we have forms from 
 this Root like those in Tab. XIX. But Moderns generally take
 
 242 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. II. 15-17. 
 
 the Root to be hi} and suppose the of IT} 11 is resolved into 
 followed by Dagesh so as to give ITiP , and similarly in other 
 forms thus JT3PI Infin. (for n^fl), PP3PI Past 3 s. m. (for n\tfl), 
 PISH = PISH Imper. 2 s. m. (for mn = mri). This may be. But 
 so may the other, which the Student will we think find reason 
 hereafter for preferring. And we think also that he will easily 
 see that the objections which some urge have not much weight.] 
 
 v. 15 (contin.) n*py? to dress it (or till it, as in v. 5). KAL 
 Infin. with 7 prefix and Objective Affix H M /> from *1^ . 
 Tab. XXIV (p. xxxv). 
 
 fitbty^l and to keep it. The same as the preceding word in 
 form, with *| prefix, from *l?. 
 
 v. 16. [75?] V^l and He commanded (or laid-a-charge upon). 
 PI-EL Fut. 3 s. m. apocopated, with 1 Conversive, from fi1 (like 
 ^ in Tab. XXIII). 
 
 Seech, i. 22. 
 
 tf to eat. KAL Infin. Absolute from 73X, as in Tab. XIV. 
 thou mayest eat. KAL Fut. 2 s. m. from 73tf . Tab. 
 XVII (2, 7). 
 
 [Note. The Infin. Abs. is here used before the Tense to give 
 emphasis, " thou mayest freely eat" as in E.V. See 137 
 (1, Obs. /?).] 
 
 v. 17. rar-jn. see*. 9. 
 
 /5NH [^7] thou shalt [not] eat. The Dag. L. is removed from 
 n here, (see Pt. I, 48). KAL Fut. 2 s. m. from 73K. 
 Tab. XVII (2, a). 
 
 7D^ thy eating. KAL Infin. with Pron. Aff. "?J ^y wz. from 
 Tab. XV, Note (*).
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. II. 17-21. 243 
 
 v. 17 (contin.) ni to die. KAL Infin. Absolute from 
 Tab. XX. 
 
 n thou shalt die. KAL Fut. 2 s. m. from fllD. Tab. XX. 
 
 [Note. The Infin. Abs. is here used before the Tense to give 
 emphasis, " thou shalt (or WILT) surely die" or " terribly die." 
 See 137 (1, Obs. /S).] 
 
 v. 18. TbK'1. See ch. i. 3. 
 
 [D"7NPl] nVPI ^tf A6 man should be (lit. the-being-of the man). 
 KAL Infin. Constr. from JTH (like niSa in Tab. XXIII, the 
 Moving Shva of the H taking the Compound form ). 
 
 |"!&!W I will make. KAL Fut. 1 s. from T\W$ (like pfatf in 
 Tab. XXIII, the having as in Tab. XYI (1). 
 
 #. 19. ")*] awe? jff<? formed (with 'Defective' Long-Kherik, 
 Pt. I, 12). KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from *fif*. 
 See 197 (8). Cp. 0. 7. 
 
 5O*1 f? .He brought (lit. and ZTe caused-to-come}. HIPH-!L 
 Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from Nil (like Dp in Tab. XX). 
 w*. KAL Infin. with ^pref., from n1. Tab. XXIII. 
 WOM/C? ca//. KAL Fut. 3 s. w. from Nip. Tab. XXII. 
 
 f . 20. Nip*! w^ ^ called. The same as the preceding, with 1 
 Conversive. 
 
 N3 [N /] ^er<? ?as [o^] found (lit. /fo found not). KAL 
 Past 3 s. m. from Nfc. Tab. XXII. 
 
 v. 21. 7JS*1 fi? ^Te caused to fall. HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 
 Conversive, from ^ . Tab. XIX. [ 162 (e, ii).] 
 
 |^*1 awe? Ae slept. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from 
 jt?. See 197 (a & ). 
 ni5>1. See v. 15.
 
 244 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. 11. 21-25. 
 
 v. 21 (contin.) *lj|p*1 and He closed. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 
 Conversive, from 13D Tab. XIV. 
 
 v. 22. ji*1 (/ ZTe TWflefe (lit. built). KAL Fut. 3 s. m. apoco- 
 pated with 1 Conversive, from Pl3i [like 7^ in Tab. XXIII.] 
 
 Plp7 He had taken. KAL Past 3 s. m. from Hp7. Tab. XIV. 
 r T I 
 
 ntO* 1 *! <me? .fle brought her (with 'Defective' ion^r-Kherik, 
 Pt. I, 12), HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from 
 [K'aj being like D*j5* Tab. XX.] 
 
 t>. 23. T&X'I. See ch. i. 3. 
 
 &O15* * Aa# e ca/fo?. NIPH-AL Fut. 3 s. *w. from 
 Tab. XXII. 
 
 t"inp7 she was taken. PU-AL Past 3 s./. from Hp7 [like !Tlp3 
 Tab. XIV. To help the pronunciation the Dag. Forte is dropped 
 from the p, and (corresponding to the preceding , see 
 Pt. I, 22 end) is also given. Cp. Pt. I, 72, Note (*, e).]. 
 
 v. 24. in^ ( 6) he shall leave. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. from ^ty, 
 like "fbir Tab. XVI (1) but with (o) instead of because the 
 Accent is- removed from the word (and therefore Makkeph 
 follows in the Bible). See Pt. I, 37 (2) & 55 (9, b). 
 
 plT) and he shall cleave. KAL Past 3 s. m. with 1 prefix, from 
 pm. Tab. XIV. [This Verb is often followed by 3 as here, 
 where we want "to" in English.] 
 
 Vni and they shall be (or, with the following 7, and they shall 
 become, see the Note at the end of v. 7). This word is the 
 same as ^ITTI and let them be (or and they shall be) in ch. i. 15 
 where the rendering may also very well be " and let them BE- 
 COME" (or " and they shall BECOME.") 
 
 v. 25. Vn*1 and they were. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from rVPl. Tab. XXIII.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 1-5. 245 
 
 v. 25 (contin.) 1$$3JY [K /I] and they were [not] ashamed. 
 
 HITHPA-EL Fut. 3 pi. m. from fcTQ [like IfifiipJV in Tab. XX]. 
 
 For the in Pause, see 245. The Future Tense here marks 
 
 'Sequence' or ' Con- sequence.' 
 
 Gen. iii. 1. PlTl he icas. KAL Past 3 s. m. from flTl . Tab. XXIII. 
 
 T T 
 
 riUW He had made. KAL Past 3 s. m. from nBty. Tab. XXIII. 
 *} and he said. See ch. i. 3. 
 
 He hath said. KAL Past 3 s. m. from "Ifctf . Tab. XIY. 
 tih] ye shall [not] eat. KAL Fut. 2 pi. m. from ^K. 
 Tab. XVII (2, a). [Pt. I, 48.] 
 
 v. 2. ^iD^fil and she said. KAL Fut. 3 s./. with 1 Conversive, 
 from T&tf . Tab. XVII (2, S). 
 
 S:?M ^ way eat. KAL Fut. 1 pi. from ^K . Tab. XYII (7) . 
 
 <?. 3. T&tf. See v. 1. fotfn [K 1 ?]. See v. 1. 
 
 ^H [^ /I] w(? ye sA// [wo^] touch. KAL Fut. 2 pi. m. from 
 JttJ. Tab. XIX. [Pt. I, 48.] Note. This Yerb generally 
 ' governs' a 1 as here. 
 
 j'lnpJ 7 ) ye die. KAL Fut. 2 pi. m. from J"Tl/b; '.e. ^rYli&fi with 
 the | of 145 (see 239). 
 
 [Note. The Future here marks the 'Subjunctive' after " lest' 1 } 
 
 v. 4. *tbK1. See*. 1. 
 
 HID- See ch. ii. 17 and the Note there. 
 
 pnari. See . 3. 
 
 t>. 5. y*l* c?o^A A-wo?^ (lit. is knowing}. KAL Partic. s. m. from 
 JTT. Tab. XYI (3) [A]. 
 
 D;P^ y ur eating. KAL Infin. with Pron. Aff. D^p yoz^r (m.) 
 Tab. XY, Note (+). 
 
 ^inpSi 1 ) then they shall be opened. NIPH-AL Past 3 pi. with 1 
 prefix, from npS. Tab. XIY.
 
 246 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 5, 6. 
 
 v. 5 (contin.) DH^ni and ye shall be. KAL Past 2 pi. m. with 
 1 prefix, from IT!"!. See p. 171, Note (*). 
 
 *JTl* knowing (lit. knowers of}. KAL Partic. pi. w. 'i.e.* 
 [.. the Constr. form of DW, Kke HP^ from DHJ5S 
 (App* C to Tab. XIV).] 
 
 v. 6. JOPfi and-when she saw. KAL Fut. 3 s. /. apocopated, 
 with 1 Conversive, from PIXI . Tab. XXIII. 
 
 The same as "t&rti in ch. ii. 9, with 1 pref. 
 to w&e ww (E.Y.). HIPH-IL Infin. with 7 pref., 
 from ?D^. Tab. XIY. 
 
 [Note. Some give "to contemplate," or "look at," "adspicere," 
 for this. And they may claim the support of some ancient 
 Versions. But we may perhaps observe that the Root occurs 
 nowhere else in this sense throughout the Bible. The Hiph-tl 
 occurs indeed in the sense of "considering," "applying the 
 /DSJ' (thought, intellect}," but not in the sense of "looking." 
 Also this sense is somewhat unsuitable here, the "looking at" 
 being already expressed by the D^S7 eyes. There are three 
 members of the statement, viz. that the tree was 
 
 (a) good for food, 
 
 (/3) an-object-of-desire to the eyes, 
 
 and ( 7 ) ^appiSnam. 
 
 If there were no (a), then indeed (/3) and (7) might be sup- 
 posed to be alike, if there were no other objection. But, 
 with (a) for the first of the three, " delightful to look at " would 
 not add much to D^y? HINIJ^ of (/3). And, moreover, "to 
 give understanding" is a strictly admissible signification of 
 It is not often wanted as here, but it occurs in
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 6. 247 
 
 / will give thee 7D2? (understanding) Ps. xxxii. 8, and 
 in the sense " to instruct" elsewhere. And of the (a), (/8), (7), 
 above, this is the only one that expresses the effect of the 
 seductive promise of v. 5 upon the woman, viz. 
 
 " ye shall be as God, knowing good and evil." 
 
 If the meaning "to look at" be assigned to (7), then there is 
 nothing in all the three members (a), (/3), (7), to express the 
 effect upon her of this tempting promise of v. 5. The above- 
 given strictly admissible signification of the word connects v. 6 
 with v. 5 ; and the signification objected to, and which seems 
 to us really inadmissible,* and of which there is no other 
 instance throughout the Bible, deprives v. 6 of any connection 
 with what appears to be put forward as a main article of per- 
 suasion in v. 5. 
 
 "We are therefore unable to adopt what we nevertheless know 
 very well to be a widely accepted and indeed very fashionable 
 opinion. ] 
 
 v. 6 (contin.) HDJ;ft and she took. KAL Put. 3 s. /. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from PIpS. Tab. XIX (A). 
 
 and she ate. KAL Fut. 3 s. /. with 1 Conversive, from 
 See 188 (a, i, Note *). 
 and she gave. KAL Fut. 3 s./. with 1 Conversive, from 
 
 Tab. XIX(B). 
 
 and he ate. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from 
 SDK. See 188 (a, i, Note *). 
 
 * We are quite aware that Gesenius gives this as the fundamental sense of the 
 Root. And so some others also.
 
 248 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 7-10. 
 
 v. 7. POnpSlfil and they (/.) were opened. NIPH-AL Fut. 3 pi./. 
 with 1 Conversive, from MpS). [Like !"D"1p3n in Tab. XI V.] 
 
 I T : |- T 
 
 tyTl an ^ they knew. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 from pT. Tab. XVIII. 
 
 ^nSn* 1 ) and they seiced. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 fromlejn. Tab. XIV. 
 
 !)>y*1 flwe? Aey maefe. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 from r\V?y. [Like ^ in Tab. XXIII, but with g because of 
 the y, comp. Tab. XYI (1).] 
 
 v. 8. tyftBfy wc? they heard. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from y/bE?. Tab. XIY. 
 
 TpriHp walking (or going}. HITHPA-EL Partic. s. m. from "I?!! . 
 Tab. XIY. 
 
 NSfin*} and he hid himself. HITHPA-EL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 
 Conversive, from fcOH . 
 
 v. 9. N15*V See ch. i. 8. "lN ! "l. See ch. i. 3. 
 
 [n3*K where art ^OM ? consists of the Particle Pl*tf where and 
 
 U T v _ .. _ 
 
 the Prori. AS. H3 2 s. m. [Pause-form of PD (=*[); see 
 Tab. VIIL] 
 
 v. 10. 1N*1. Seech, i. 3. 
 
 / A^arrf. KAL Past 1 s. from y&fc?. Tab. XIY. 
 
 wc? / was afraid (or and I feared). KAL Fut. 1 s. 
 with } Conversive, from &TlV [This word has ^ like ItD'X 
 in Tab. XVIII by reason of the 1 st Rt-letter , and ^ like 
 in Tab. XXII by reason of the 3 d Rt-letter tf.] 
 
 and I was hid. NIPH-AL Fut. 1 s. with 1 Conversive, 
 from fcOn [like KK in Tab. XXII, but with K to compensate 
 for the Dagesh which the PI cannot receive.]
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 11-14. 249 
 
 v. 11. Tbtf'V See ch. i. 3. 
 
 TSri he told. HIPH-IL Past 3 s. m. from 7tt . Tab. XIX. 
 
 TJV^ / commanded thee. PI-EL Past 1 s. with Objective 
 Affix T| thee m. [W is Hke *flb$ in Tab. XXIII.] 
 
 bOK(-H9 to eat. KAL Infin. from S^X, for Sbtf, the 
 being shortened into (6) because the accent is removed from 
 the word (and therefore Makkeph follows in the Bible). See 
 Pt. I, 37(2) and 55 (9, b). 
 
 fl/lDX hast thou eaten. KAT. Past 2 s. m., in Pause ffor f\~>3# 
 
 T : T T T ; _ T 
 
 like rnp3 Tab. XIY]. Cp. 165 (I, ). 
 
 v. 12. *fo&\. Seech, i. 3. 
 
 nnrO Thou gavest. KAL Past 2 s. m. from [HO . Tab. XIX (B), 
 and 138 (B). 
 
 r\m she gave. KAL Past 3 s. /. from ]HJ. Tab. XIX (B). 
 7O&1 and I ate. KAL Fut. 1 s. with 1 Conversive. Tab. 
 XVII (2, 7). 
 
 v. 13. "Ittftfy. See ch. i. 3. 
 
 HTO thou (/.) hast done. KALPast 2 s./.of nBty Tab. XXIII. 
 
 1NnV See r. 2. 
 
 ^S^n Ae beguiled me. HIPH-IL Past 3 s. m. with Objective 
 Aff. *i me, from KfcJ'J. [The word ^J^n he beguiled is like 
 P''an. Tab. XIX.] 
 
 SDV Seer. 12. 
 
 ** T 
 
 t?. 14. nfcK'V See ch. i. 3. 
 
 rVbty ^AOM Aos^ <ton. KAL Past 2 s. m. from n&ty. Tab. XXIII. 
 
 T * T 
 
 *VnK cursed. KAL Partic. s. m. [like 11p3 (2) in App x B to 
 Tab. XIV, see 139 (7) on p. 83] from TIN .
 
 250 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 14-17. 
 
 v. 14 (contin.) Tpft thou shatt go. KAL Fut. 2 s. m. from "17* 
 [like y&ft in Tab. XVIII.] 
 
 T^Kfl. Seech, ii. 17. 
 
 v. 15. rV?K I will put. KAL Fut. 1 s. from JW, see 225 ; 
 or HIPH-IL Fut., as some say, from H\$. Comp. the Note on 
 tim in ch. ii. 8. 
 
 TT1^ it shall bruise thee. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with Objective 
 
 I : : J 
 
 Affix TJ thee m., from tp{?. Tab. XX. 
 
 [Note. The of fflfcT (like DID* in the Table) is removed 
 when the Affix is put on ; cp. 59.] 
 
 toSfl^fi thou shalt bruise him. KAL Fut. 2 s. m. with Objective 
 Affix to him, from f|1B?. Tab. XX. 
 
 [Note. The of tf|#JJ (like Dlpfi in the Table) is removed 
 when the Affix is put on ; cp. 59.] 
 
 v. 16. l&N. See v.l. 
 
 - T 
 
 Pl^nn to multiply. HIPH-IL Infin. Absolute from PQ*1 . Tab. 
 XXIII. This is an unusual form of the Infinitive. It is 
 given in column V of the Table. The Infin. Abs. is here used 
 before the Tense to give Emphasis : " I will greatly multiply," 
 as in the E.V. 
 
 P1SHK / will multiply. HIPH-IL Fut. 1 s. from PQ1 . Tab. XXIII. 
 H^fi thou shalt bring forth. KAL Fut. 2 s. /. from IT . 
 Tab. XVIII. 
 
 (0) he shall rule. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. from 7^, like 
 in Tab. XIV but with 6 instead of because the Accent 
 is removed from the word. See Pt. I, 37 (2) & 55 (9, b). 
 v. 17. *lJbN See v. 3. 
 HV^ thou hast hearkened. KAL Past 2 s. m. from 
 
 T : - T 
 
 like DIPS in Tab. XIV.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 17, 18. 251 
 
 v. 17 (contin.) 7DNFV1 and thou hast eaten. KAL Fut. 2 s. m. 
 with 1 Conversive, from 7^K . Tab. XVII (2, a). 
 
 TJY^ / commanded thee. PI-EL Past 1 s. with Objective 
 Affix ^| thee m., from H1X. [TM^ being like ^JV7;l in Tab. 
 XXIII.] 
 
 See ch. i. 22. 
 [fcwL See ch. ii. 17. 
 
 cursed. KAL Partic. s. /., of the Masc. ^VHK in v. 14. 
 thou shalt eat \of] it. KAL Fut. 2 s. m. with Objective 
 Affix nU it /., from 7^K . [Without the Affix, the form is 
 /DXfi which has occurred already. For the ' Compound Shva ' 
 see Pt. I, 72 : the here may be said to allude to the of 
 AD^n . In Ezek. iv. 12 some copies have PlUTO^M (i Q which 
 word of v. 12, and ^7^^^ once in ?. 9 & twice in v. 10, some 
 copies have ^) other copies have p).] 
 
 v. 18. JTtt^n it shall bring forth (lit. shall cause to grow). 
 HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. /. from H&X. Tab. XVI (3) (A). 
 
 [Note. This word is generally taken thus as 3 s. /. " it shall 
 cause to grow." There is an old difficulty, as some know, with 
 regard to the word TP to thee or for thee (or thyself} ; it has 
 been urged that "it would have been enough to say merely 
 IT/p^n" without the Tp. But, as every one must always have 
 
 seen, this word ITplW? ma y a ^ so ^ e ^ s * m " " ^ ou s ^ a ^ cause to 
 grow." The T? with this would signify his being himself the 
 cause of hindrances and troubles to himself: and so the two 
 Verbs in v. 18 would each have the same Subject " thou (m.)" 
 This however is not necessary, as there are many instances of 
 change of Subject. Also the rendering " Thorns and thistles
 
 252 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 18-22. 
 
 thou shalt (or wilt) cause-to-grow (or bring-forth, as in E.Y.) 
 for thyself," although in itself possible, seems unnatural, and 
 has not the support of Authorities, but it ought perhaps to be 
 mentioned in passing.] 
 
 v. 18 (contin.) ft 75X1 and thou shalt eat. KAL Past 2 B. m. 
 with 1 pref., from f?ltf. Tab. XIV. 
 
 r. 19. ^INfl. See ch. ii. 17. 
 
 "SQIE? lit. thy returning. KAL Infin. with Pron. Aff. "JJ thy m., 
 from 11B?. [11$ being like Dip in Tab. XX.] 
 
 F\T\i;h thou ivast taken. PU-AL Past 2 s. m. from Hp7, in 
 
 T : |T -. 
 
 Pause. [ 165 (I, ).] 
 
 11^'n thou shalt return. KAL Fut. 2 s. m. from 11B>. Tab. XX. 
 
 T 
 
 v. 20. &Op*1. See ch. i. 5. P17VPI. See ch. i. 1. 
 
 t\i'- T : T 
 
 *n a living one. KAL Partic. s. m. (in Pause) from "Pl = rVP!. 
 See p. 173, Obs. ii. 
 
 v. 21. W1. Seech, i. 7. 
 
 De?!jl 7*1 and He clothed them (for ' Defective ' Long Kherik, 
 see Pt. I, 12). HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, and 
 Objective Aff. D them m., from B?! 1 ? [#'3^ being like TJ5S* 
 in Tab. XIY.] 
 
 f>. 22. TbK1. See ch. i. 3. HH. See r. 1. 
 
 [Note. (1) From the fulness of meaning of Hebrew words 
 it follows that, in the use of a translation (however good it may 
 be), we should be continually on our guard against a possible 
 limitation of the sense of the Original by a rendering which 
 gives but one view of the passage. The greatest care and skill 
 are often required for selecting a form of rendering from among 
 several forms by which the Original might be rendered. We
 
 NOTE. 253 
 
 have here an instance of this. A great difference will be at 
 once perceived between two such renderings as 
 
 (a) "Behold! the man HAS BECOME as one of us, with-regard- 
 
 to-knowing, etc.," and 
 (/?) "Behold! the man WAS as one of us, with-regard-to- 
 
 knowing, etc." 
 
 "Without adopting either the one or the other of these two 
 possible renderings, we may perhaps use this passage in 
 illustration of what was just now stated. 
 
 (2) The word rPPI (KAL Past 3 s. m. from PlTl to be) is 
 rendered in the English Authorized Version by several forms 
 of expression. We find 
 
 (i) "he (or it) WAS," in Gen. iii. 1, and in many other 
 
 places ; * 
 
 (ii) " he (or it] HATH BEEN," in Gen. xxxi. 5, etc. ; 
 (iii) " he (or it] HAD BEEN," in Gen. xiii. 3, xxxi. 42, etc. ; 
 (iv) " he (or it) is," in Nu. ix. 13, Ps. xxii. 14 (Hebr. v. 15)t, 
 
 Ps. Ixxxix. 41 (Hebr. v. 42), Is. xxxiii. 9,f etc. ; 
 (v) " he (or it) is become," in Gen. iii. 22. This sense 
 
 agrees with (iv). 
 
 There are also some other renderings of JTP1 , with which, 
 however, we need not trouble the Reader just now. And with 
 regard to the renderings in (i) (v), it is enough perhaps here 
 to observe that 
 
 * When followed by D, too; as in 2 S. iv. 10 (margin), 1 K. iii. 12, etc. [See 
 Note (*) on page 254.] 
 
 t In this passage the iTn is followed by D. But of course the 3 merely expresses 
 the ' Comparison," and does not at all affect the sense of the Verb as to whether the 
 Comparison is spoken of as (a) ' having been, in the Past,' or (b) as ' having been, and 
 still continuing,' or (c) as ' yet to be.' 
 
 Y
 
 254 NOTE. 
 
 (3) as the word "7p3 (from IDS to visit] may signify, either 
 
 (a) " he visited " (or " he has visited" i.e. the Past of 
 
 'Finished Action,' or "he had visited" or "he 
 might have visited" etc.), as in 152 (II, a), or 
 
 (b) " he has visited and is still visiting," as in 
 
 152 (III, a) ;- 
 
 (4) so the word JTP1 (from JTPI to be) may signify, either 
 
 (a) "he was" (or "he has been" or "he had been" or 
 
 " he might have been" etc.), as in 152 (II, a), or 
 
 (b) " he hath (or is) become," as in 152 (III, a). 
 
 (5) Hence we see that, of the renderings in (2), 
 
 (a) those in (i) and (ii) and (iii) are included under 
 
 152 (II, a) ; and 
 
 (b) those in (iv) and (v) are included under 152 (III, a). 
 
 (6) It may therefore be said that each of the two renderings 
 (a) and (8), in (1) above, is admissible so far as the word PlTl 
 
 T T 
 
 in itself is concerned.* But as far as each of them is admissible, 
 
 * Some have fancied that the JVil here is to be rendered "is (or has) become," 
 because it is followed by 3 . But '3 !"pn must not be so limited. There are passages 
 in which that expression stands for "was as ... ," not " has become as..." For 
 instance, in 2 S. iv. 10 David says that the man who told him ' Saul is dead! ' 
 V3\y3 "I&P5P3 i"l*n WAS as one-telling-good-tidings in-his-own-eyes ; he was so no 
 longer as soon as he heard the king's warrant for his execution. There are indeed 
 several passages in which the Past of PlTl is used as above [in 1 (iv and v)], when 
 followed by 3 . But the Student may be warned here of the mistake which some 
 seem anxious to make of tying down a Hebrew expression too much. Even if there 
 were as much of the phrase-value "to become" in '3 rpfl as there is in '? fpn, yet 
 it would be incorrect to LIMIT the former expression to any such phrase-value. There 
 is certainly much less of this phrase-value in '3 fVH than there is in '? !"Pn . Even 
 the English Reader may to some extent perceive this by observing that in '3 iTi! 
 " to become AS so and so," the 3 of 'Comparison' retains its full value "AS"; 
 whereas when / i"l\"l is used for " to become so and so" (lit. " to be to or for or into 
 so and so"), the 7 is swallowed up and lost in the English phrase. Thus,
 
 NOTE. 255 
 
 so far the adoption of the other (to the exclusion of that one) 
 may involve the loss of an admissible rendering. This should 
 not be lost sight of. As we are not concerned here to advocate 
 either of them, we need not trouble ourselves to argue at all 
 about them from the context or from general considerations. 
 But we may just observe, in passing, that man's being said to 
 have been made and created in " the image" and "likeness" of 
 GOD (Gen. i. 26 & 27) may to some not unreasonably appear to 
 correspond with the rendering (ft) rather than with (a) in (1). 
 And, further, that the rendering 
 
 " Behold ! the man WAS as one of us, with regard to knowing 
 
 good and bad ; whereas now " he was NOT TO TAKE 
 
 OF THE TREE OF LIFE, 
 
 may to some appear consonant with the warning (ii. 17) 
 " thou shalt surely die'' 
 
 (7) We may perhaps add that advocates of (a) cannot surely 
 intend their rendering to signify (what it certainly seems to 
 signify) that Man became in some way, or in some sense, or in 
 some regard like GOD, through his disobedience and experience 
 of evil ! 
 
 D^ nnTTl G. xvii. 16 and she shall become nations, DUTO 35J^> WH G. xxxii. 11 
 
 :T:T: - ; _ t; . . . . T 
 
 (E.V. v. 10) lam (or have) become (wo bands, etc. But although we must fully allow 
 this phrase -value of / PVH to become, yet we would also warn the Student most 
 emphatically against supposing for a moment that the expression is limited at all to 
 that phrase-value. ' ? iTTt may have other values : for instance " to be to so and so," 
 as in Gen. xxx. 30 " It was little that ?Jp !"Pn was to thee (or thou hadsf)" and 
 "to be to" in the sense of " happening" as in 1 S. vi. 9 "An accident it [was that] 
 }j? rPn was to us (or happened to us)," and " to be for" in the sense " to he on 
 ones side" as in G. xxxi. 42 " Unless the God of my father ... V? rPH had been for 
 me (i.e. had been on my side}... ," etc. "We cannot too strongly urge the Student to 
 be on his guard against attempts to limit the sense where it ought not to be so limited.
 
 256 NOTE. 
 
 Also we cannot suppose any one to argue seriously that the 
 false tempter's promise "ye shall be as GOD (E.V. gods)" in 
 Gen. iii. 5, must needs be true in this instance. 
 
 We are aware however that Dr. Kalisch says on this : " The 
 serpent was degraded, the human pair was ennobled by the 
 glory of intelligence ; the former was pressed down nearer to 
 the earth, it was condemned to go upon the belly ; the latter 
 rose heavenward on the youthful wings of the mind ; the one 
 eats dust, the other became capable of imbibing the dew of 
 eternal truth. Thus man has made a gigantic step beyond 
 the limited sphere of his primitive existence." This is a 
 grandiloquent account of what must have been therefore (if Dr. 
 Kalisch is right) a "Rise"* rather than the "Fall." The 
 Narrative seems to us to be not quite in agreement with it. 
 It cleverly mixes up the opinion expressed by the LXX in 
 
 'IBov 'AScifj, yeyovev f o>? efc e rjfAwv rov yivwa-icetv /caXoi/ ical 
 TTOvypdv Kal vvv /c.r.X., 
 
 with some such a one as that expressed by Maimonides J in 
 
 iS nan *w po pfl aSiyi TH* rvn tn hw nr p p 
 niton jnv ira^n&m injra i&xy& KIPI *w pyn nn. 
 
 'IDIII fsn wn^ na ^ nenjn jnni 
 
 As some fancy. 
 
 t The following words of Fagius : 
 
 "Ironia est ... Vide quam vera promiserit serpens, quam factus sis par Deo 
 
 sciens bonum et malum. Imo nihil minus es," 
 
 may commend themselves to some ; but to others they may perhaps seem rather 
 forced, or even (to some extent) evidence of an effort to escape from something that 
 he could not approve of. 
 
 t See Tad ~kh<*zdkd (Hi-Vkhoth Tshuvd, T. I). See also Dr. Bernard's Selections, 
 pp. 55 & 262. 
 
 The word -13t|P (G. iii. 22) may mean either "from us" or "from him." Cp. 
 Tab. II. 4. 
 
 || For '131 see Note () on p. 224.
 
 NOTE. 257 
 
 " Lo ! this race (lit. kind) of man has become unique in the 
 world, and there is not any other race (lit. kind) like to it in this 
 regard, viz. that it is, of itself, by its own mind and by its own 
 thought, knowing the good and the bad, and doing all that it 
 likes, etc." 
 
 This latter is supposed by many to derive authority from the 
 Targum of Onkelos, viz. : 
 
 trsi ib yra 1 ? rwa aa^a TIT mn D-JN xn 
 
 which is taken to mean " Lo ! man has-become unique in the 
 world, from himself to know good and bad"', in which, we may 
 observe, there is nothing whatever about " DOING " or " doing 
 ALL THAT HE LIKES," and no mention of " his mind " and " his 
 thought" (which may, however, be supposed to be implied). 
 "We may also mention that there are some objections to such a 
 rendering of the Original passage, as was pointed out long ago 
 by Aben Ezra. We may not here dwell on this. 
 
 (8) But it is only fair to mention that there is some ' Hebrew' 
 authority for understanding the Pi* 1 !! of Gen. iii. 22 in the sense 
 "he was." Thus, in the Midrash Rabba, "R. Berechiah" in the 
 name of R. Khanina said 
 
 DTOS "i*n PPPI vh PIT CJK ma Dy& Dy& xb nr na in^n 
 
 nia DSHD 
 
 " < like Elijah.' ' What is this [Elijah'] ?'' He tasted not the 
 taste of death:' also this \_Adam~] was not by-rights to have 
 tasted the taste, of death." . . . . " All the time that man was, 
 he WAS as etc." * 
 
 * We are merely giving a few evidences of the word rpn having been understood 
 in the sense " was" in Gen. iii. 22 rather than in the sense " has become." We 
 may omit aught which we do not want for our immediate purpose.
 
 258 NOTE. 
 
 On which we read in the Commentary nJIPG fYOfift " When 
 man was D/B^' complete [i.e. in the state in which he was 
 created], he was by-rights to have remained alive, as one who 
 died not, like Elijah ; etc." 
 
 And similarly a little earlier in the Midrash Rabba we find 
 
 jva rvn rbtjh rvb JIBUTI onxn ra'pn \r\w spin 
 ... B>m h& injn IHK fm m'pn SB> injn mnB> 
 
 " Might which The Holy One, Blessed be He, imparted to the 
 first man was-to- have-been for ever and ever : when he left the 
 Mind of The Holy One, Blessed be He, and went after the mind 
 of the serpent " [then the latter half of the verse Job xiy. 20 
 expresses what resulted to him]. On the " was-to-have-been for 
 ever" we read in n31i"O J"fi3nb " By-rights he was to have 
 been so for ever, etc." And a little earlier still in the Midrash 
 we read "When He sent him away He began lamenting over 
 him [in the words of Gen. iii. 22]," on which we read in the 
 Commentary D^3Slb ^rO3 " It means that He said, by way 
 of lamentation and bewailing, " Ah ! how he ' WAS * from the 
 first ' like one of us ' in the highest attainment : whereas now he 
 hath- gone-back ward ' in-regard-to-knowing good and bad/ and 
 he is expelled from his high-estate, for [it is said] ' lest he put 
 forth his hand and take also of the Tree of Life,' etc. Therefore 
 [it is added] ' and The LORD sent him forth from the garden of 
 Eden.' " 
 
 (9) We may add that there are several interpretations given 
 of the words ^lUSft ^ftK3 an( ^ ^hat, as a possible rendering * of 
 
 * Some may think that The "inX" referred to in the Midrash, and by E. Juda 
 b, Simon in D^iy ^B> HIITD, points to the -13ED 1HN? as taken together thus; 
 though others dissever the two words.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 22-24. 259 
 
 the words, some might perhaps choose such an English expres- 
 sion as "like T/ie*-OyE from-Himself," "Behold! man was 
 like The-OxE from-Himself (i.e. The Self- Originated ONE) in- 
 regard- to-knowing good and bad; whereas, now, etc." Cp. 
 Gen. i. 26 & 27. What was said in (2-8) above is seen to be 
 quite independent of this remark in (9). 
 
 But we must return to the ' Analvsis of Verb-forms.'] 
 
 v. 22. (contin.) HIT]? to know (or for knowing, with-regard-to- 
 knowing). KAL Infin. with 7 pref., from ^T. Tab. XVIII 
 (Note 1). 
 
 nfajH he put forth. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. from rh& [like Tb^ in 
 Tab. XIV.] 
 
 Plp7l and take. KAL Past 3 s. m. with 1 prefix, from Hp7. 
 
 /pfcO and eat. KAL Past 3 s. m. with 1 prefix, from /DK . 
 
 % rn find live. KAL Past 3 s. m. with 1 prefix [p. 173, Obs. iii.J 
 The 1 has before the ' Accented Syllable ' to which it is pre- 
 fixed, see p. 225. 
 
 v. 23. WTWJI and He sent him forth. PI-EL Fut. 3 s. m. 
 with 1 Conversive, and Objective Affix !)PI him, from PPfc?. 
 Tab. XXIX (II, a) [p. XLII.] 
 
 "C8JS. See ch. ii. 5. 
 
 Hip? he was taken. PU-AL Past 3 s. m. from HpA Tab. XIV. 
 
 v. 24. VrW\ and He drove out. PI-EL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 
 Conversive, from BM3 [like ^\y in App x to Tab. XVI (2), but 
 
 * The 'Construct' form marks that the word "1IHK3 is to be taken in close con- 
 nection with the following word -131319. As it is in ' Construction,' it may not have 
 the H for the 'Def. Art." "We may therefore supply "the" in English, if this be 
 wanted, before the English word which stands for it.
 
 260 ANALYSIS OF VERBS IN GEN. III. 24 AND XII. 1. 
 
 with for the because the Accent is removed from the last 
 syllable, cp. Pt. I, 55 (9, b)]. 
 
 v. 24 (con tin.) |3K^ and He placed (lit. earned to dwell). 
 HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from pgf . Tab. XIV. 
 
 rOBPlfiSn which turned every way (E.Y., lit. which was turn- 
 ing-itself}. HITHPA-EL Partic. s. /. with the Pi of 98 (or merely 
 that of 6), from "TSPl [like rnj5Snp in App* B to Tab. XIV]. 
 
 ) * 
 
 to keep. KAL Infin. with 7 pref., from Tbgf . Tab. XIV. 
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERB-FORMS IN GEN. xn. 
 
 Gen. xii. 1. TbK'V See ch. i. 3. 
 
 "P go thou. KAL Imper. 2 s. m. from *lV . [Like y& in 
 Tab. XVIII, but with for because the Accent is removed 
 as signified by the ( - ) in the Bible. Cp. Pt. I, 55 (9, b).] 
 
 [Note. The word Tn here is the word signifying to thee (m.) in 
 Tab. II, and it is used here Reflexively as in Obs. XIV (p. 139).] 
 
 'H^NI / will skew thee (lit. / will cause thee to see). HIPH-IL 
 Fut. 1 s. from J"KO. [The full form of the Hiph. Fut. 1 s. is 
 PlNHK. This, on receiving the Pron.-Aff. would give regularly 
 "?|Nntf (the 3 d Rt-letter T\ being dropped when the Affix is put 
 on). For this latter we have here J^Nptf in Pause. For the 
 J^_ see Tab. XXVIII, Note (e, ii) on p. XL, and cp. ^^TQNI 
 Gen. xxvi. 3 and I will bless thee (which is PI-EL Fut. 1 s. with 1 
 Conjunctive and Objective Affix thee m., in Pause, from *p3) ; 
 and njONI 2 Kings iii. 14 / would see thee (which is KAL Fut. 
 1 s. with Objective Affix thee m.). The Hiph. ^JSHK occurs in 
 Zech. i. 9 with the Accent merely, a Pause-form not . in 
 Pause, cp. 167 (ii, a).]
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERB-FORMS IN GEN. XII. 2, 3. 261 
 
 v. 2. ^rosn and I will make thee. KAL Fut. 1 s. 
 with 1 Conjunctive and Objective Affix TJ thee m., from 
 Tab. XXX. 
 
 ^SK} and I mil bless thee. PI-EL Fut. 1 s. (^3K App x to 
 Tab. XVI (2)) with 1 Conjunctive and Objective Affix "?| ^ee (w.), 
 from *pS 5 like ^"TjjSN in Tab. XXIX (II, a), but with before 
 the "1 to compensate for the Dag. F. which the *1 cannot receive. 
 
 [Obs. This word has the simple form for which the Pause- 
 form is ^liniNtt (mentioned just now in v. 1). But in our word 
 the 1 has whereas in the Pause-form the 1 has . The *) of 
 our word agrees with the p of "'Hj^S^ in Tab. XXIX (II, a). 
 In each, the is a Slight-vowel (Pt. I, 56) masking the 
 Moving-Shva which the 2 d Et-letter would have but cannot 
 have when the 3 d Rt-letter also has . (The adopted here 
 as the Slight- vowel agrees with the of the 2 d E-t -letter in the 
 form *lj53K without the Affix). But in Pause, the 3 d Et-letter 
 receiving then a vowel, and there being no need then for the 
 Slight- vowel, the Shva drops its mask ( ) ; and thus the 
 2 d Et-letter has as seen in v. 1, and so in ^D^IK Ps. cxlv. 2.] 
 
 T|AV : T -: 
 
 flhnjN} and I will make great. PI-EL Fut. 1 s. with 1 Con- 
 junctive and the Pi of 144, from 7*13 . 
 
 n^H) find thou shalt be (lit. be thou). KAL Imper. 2 s. m. with 
 1 pref., from PTn . See p. 171, Note (*). 
 
 v. 3. ilinatO and I will bless. PI-EL Fut. 1 s. with 1 Con- 
 junctive and the Jl of 144, from *pl- 
 
 '^J^'li/p those blessing thee (lit. thy blessers}. PI-EL Partic. 
 pi. m. with Pron.-Affix TJ thy (m.), from *TH- [This, with- 
 out the Affix, would be D^^^p pi. m. of *n*"Qp in App* to 
 Tab. XVI (2). For the - see Pt. I, 72.] 
 
 z
 
 262 ANALYSTS OF VERB-FORMS IN GEN. XII. 3-5. 
 
 v. 3 (contin.) ^\7^tS\ and him that curseth thee (or, thy 
 reviler*). PI-L Partic. s. m. with 1 pref. and Pron.- Affix "TJ 
 thy (m.), from 77p. [The form without the Affix is 77p/S like 
 "Tj5fia in Tab. XIV. The beneath the ^ is a Slight-vowel, 
 Pt. I, 56.] 
 
 *)KN / will curse. KAL Fut. 1 s. from "HK [like SON in 
 
 T T 
 
 Tab. XXI]. 
 
 !|3*l!3i1 and they shall be blessed. NIPH-AL Past 3 pi. with 
 
 1 pref. from "TO [like JpTpSJ in Tab. XIV]. 
 
 i 
 #. 4. "HI 7*} so >fo departed (lit. wc? ^e 0ew). KAL Fut. 3 s. m. 
 
 with 1 Conversive, from *p\ See 198 (S). 
 
 ISn .He had spoken. PI-EL Past 3 s. w. from ^i"l . [For 
 the see Note (e) on p. xv back of Tab. XIV.] 
 
 inX^lS when he departed out (lit. on his going-out or forth}. 
 KAL Infin. with 3 pref. and Pron.-Affix i his, from KXV 
 
 [Note. Instead of HV like Hl^ from njy*, Tab. XVIII, the 
 Inf. Constr. of NX* 1 has the contracted form HNX which takes 
 Pron.-Afis. thus : iHNX his going out, ^HN^ thy (m.) going out, 
 etc.] 
 
 v. 5. n^V See ch. ii. 15. 
 
 J|KO1 ^Aey Aao? gathered (or acquired). KAL Past 3 pi. in 
 Pause, from t^DT 
 
 5|2J^ ^Aey had gotten (lit. made). KAL Past 3 pi. from PlfeJ^ 
 [like ifa in Tab. XXIH]. 
 
 !)X^*1 anc? ^ey went forth. KAL Fut. 3 pi. ?w. with 1 Conversive, 
 from NTT [like !Q#1 in Tab. XVIII]. 
 
 Even this word is a little stronger than the original, which might be rendered 
 " any one speaking-lightly-of thee"
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERB-FORMS IN GEN. XII. 5-7. 263 
 
 v. 5 (contin.) FO 77 to go. KAL Infin. with 7 pref., from *p* 
 &Vjh in Tab. XVIII]. 
 
 *^ and they came. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 from Nil. 
 
 [Note. The KAL of this Verb has the following forms with 
 Klwulem, [see more on pp. 272 & 273] : 
 
 (a) Infin. (Absol. & Constr.) &fl3 ; and (with 
 
 Or with -, thus N^ M, ^^3, Nl (tf? i.c.), N3D. 
 09) Imper. fcflS or N3 (and, with Pi, PHJ3) s. m., W3 or 
 
 (7) Fut. KT 3 s. m., fctori 3 s./. &2 s. m., 'Nlfi 2 s./., NIK 1 s., 
 
 3 pi. m ., rufchri ( T }N3Jj or nyjsbro, 3 pi. /, 
 2 pi. m., ^ni i pi. 
 
 Obs. These may have i in the place of the ; thus, 
 Kfr , and so tftafc, eto. 
 
 T T 
 
 (8) So, with the PI of 144 we have both H&1K & PltftaK 1 s., 
 
 T T T T 
 
 and rub: & riNtaa i pi.] 
 
 T T T T 
 
 v. 6. *lhy*1 wc? he passed over (followed by 3 m^o). KAL Fut. 
 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, from ^y. Tab. XVI (1). 
 
 v. 7. 8<^**j rf .Se appeared.* NIPH-AL Fut. 3 s. m. apocopated 
 from fltf 1 [like 7^ in Tab. XXIII ; but with to compensate 
 for Dag. F., and with tf instead of 7, cp. p. 169 (II, a)]. 
 
 TtiN*}. See ch. i. 3. 
 
 p JJ / will give. KAL Fut. 1 s. from JJ-0 . Tab. XIX (B). 
 
 ji*^ and he built. KAL Fut. 3s. m. apocopated from T\fo 
 [like D* in Tab. XXIII] . The full form of the 3 s. w. Fut. K., 
 
 * From ntO <o see ; the JV<f>. <o ie *cm is used for " to appear."
 
 264 ANALYSIS OF VERB-FORMS IN GEN. XII. 7-11. 
 
 v. 7 (contin.) 11X^3(1 Who appeared (lit. The One appearing or 
 seen). NIPH-AL Partic. s. m from HK1. Tab. XXIII. 
 
 v . 8. pJFiy*5 and he removed (or moved). HIPH-IL Fut. 3 s. m. 
 with. 1 Conversive, from pHJ^. This is like IDS' 1 in Tab. XIV. 
 Cp. 178 (i).. 
 
 [Note. This expresses a TRANSITIVE "removing" or "moving," 
 viz. his goods and things. The English Reader will find no 
 difficulty in this, because the English Verb to move is often used 
 for ' to move one's goods and chattels.'] 
 
 tD*1 and he pitched (lit. and he extended). KAL Fut. 3 s. m. 
 apocopated, with 1 Conversive, from HtOi . The form PltD^ (like 
 rbtf in Tab. XXIII) becomes Pl^, cp. 205 (ii), and this by 
 apocopation becomes tD* . 
 
 J51. See v. 7. 5Oj7V See ch. i. 5. 
 
 v. 9. ^D*^ tfw<# he Journeyed. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from J?D3 . Tab. XIX. 
 
 to go. KAL Infin. Absol. from -J^Pl . Tab. XIV. 
 wc? ^o journey. KAL Infin. Absol. with 1 prefix, from 
 Tab. XVI (3) (A). 
 
 [Note. The phrase yiW) *ni?n J?D*1, lit. one? he journeyed to go 
 and to journey, stands for awe? he went on continually journeying, 
 cp. 137 (1), Obs. (8).] 
 
 v. 10. W. See ch. i. 4. 
 
 1*1*1 awd he went down. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 from TV. Cp. 198(8). 
 
 "Vlj? fo sojourn. KAL Infin. with 7, from ^i]^. Tab. XX. 
 ;. 11. 7^. See ch. i. 3. 
 
 he drew near. HIPH-IL Past 3 s. m. from 1*1D . Tab. XIV.
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERB-FORMS IN GEN. XII. 11-15. 265 
 
 v. 11 (contin.) JOT? to come. KAL Infin. with 7, from Nil. 
 [See Note (a) on Ufa*) in v. 5.] 
 
 T!bNl. See ch - i- 3 - 
 
 J|WT J know. KAL Past 1 s. from JJT . Tab. XIV. 
 
 v.12. ITrn therefore it-shatt-come-to-pass (E.V.). KAL Past 
 3 s. w. with 1 pref., from PlTl . 
 
 }K"V *% *Aa# see. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. from JINI [like TO in 
 Tab/XXIII]. 
 
 ^Jptfl Ma /foy sAa// say. KAL Past 3 pi. with 1 pref., 
 from ^5* . 
 
 ^TT) awe? /foy HttY/ kill. KAL Past 3 pi. with 1 pref., from J^PI . 
 
 VIT ^/^ 7/ sae aftro (E.V.). PI-EL Fut. 3 pi. m. from H^H 
 [like !fa; in Tab. XXIII]. 
 
 t?. 13. **TypJJ sy ^AoM. E!A.L Imper. 2 s. /. from "Tfi^ [like 
 HJ53 in Tab. XIV]. 
 
 ip^ Y w^ 6e ire//. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. from 3t^ [Tab. XVIII]. 
 
 PlJVrn and it shall live. KAL Past 3 s. /. with 1 pref., from 
 rvn [like Pirta in Tab. XXIII]. 
 
 v. 14. ^JTI *? Y cawe to pass (E.V.). See ch. i. 5. 
 
 N1i3 on the coming of. KAL Infin. Constr. with 3 pref., from 
 XII. [See i\ 5, Note (a).] 
 
 ^"1*1 that they beheld. KAL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Conversive, 
 from ntfT 
 
 i: 15. IS 1 !*^ and they saw. See v. 14. 
 
 YTppn wc? they commended. PI-EL Fut. 3 pi. m. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from 7/Pl . The Dagesh F. is often dropped from the 7 . 
 For the comp. Pt. I, 72 (Note (*, e)}. 
 
 T\ffF\\ and she was taken. HOPH-AL Fut. 3 s. /. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from Hp7. [Note (A) on Tab. XIX (7, vi).]
 
 266 ANALYSIS OF VERB-FORMS IN GEN. XII. 16-20. 
 
 v. 16. S^PI he did good. HIPH-IL Past 3 s. m. from ItD* 
 [Tab. XVIII]. 
 
 *JV1 am? there were. See ch. i. 5. 
 
 v. 17. yaj'1 a^ He plagued. PI-EL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from $ft [Hke PlW) Tab. XVI (3) (B, )]. 
 
 0. 18. Nip*} 0'>wJ ^ called. KAL Fut. 3 s. m. with 1 Convers., 
 from&Tl. ' 
 
 V See ch. i. 3. JVEty. See ch. iii. 14. 
 
 OM ^'as fe//. HIPH-IL Past 2 s. m. from *U3 [like 
 ri^H in Tab. XIX]. 
 
 v. 19. fllDN tkou saidst. KAL Past 2 s. m. from Itttf . 
 
 T ; -\T 
 
 ni5X1 so I might have taken (E.V.) [or, lit., and I took']. KAL 
 Fut. 1 s. with 1 Convers., from PlpS [Note (A) on Tab. XIX]. 
 
 np take tkou. KAL Imper. 2 s. m. from Pip? [Note (A) on 
 Tab. XIX]. 
 
 T?l and go. KAL Imper. 2 s. m. with ^ pref., from *jT [like 
 SB? in Tab. XVIII. For the see p. 225]. 
 
 v. 20. 1^1 and he commanded. PI-EL Fut. 3 s. w. apocopated, 
 with 1 Convers., from Pitt [like ^ in Tab. XXIII]. 
 
 }Pn>&5fy awe? ^ey sew2 away. PI-EL Fut. 3 pi. w. with 1 Con- 
 versive, from
 
 267 
 
 IV. LIST OF VERBS BELONGING TO MORE THAN ONE OF THE 
 SEVEN CLASSES MENTIONED IN 186 [SOMETIMES CALLED 
 * DOUBLY IRREGULAR' VERBS]. 
 
 [The Student will perhaps have some little difficulty, at first, 
 in analyzing some of the Verb-forms from Roots belonging 
 simultaneously to more than one of the Seven Classes mentioned 
 in 186. Many of such forms may be recognized without 
 much difficulty, by allowing for each set of 'Variations' sepa- 
 rately. But in some of them there are special Variations, and 
 some few of them are irregular, and some apocopated forms 
 may well seem strange to him. It will, without doubt, be use- 
 ful to him to have these Verbs all collected together. We 
 therefore give him here the following LIST, in the Alphabetical 
 order of Roots, with the Verb-forms which occur in the Bible.] 
 
 used only in Kal (to be willing). 
 KAL 
 
 PAST and PARTIC (1) like those of rfa Tab. XXIII, but for 
 WIN (Is. xxviii. 12) 3 pi. Past cp. 138 (B) iv, a. 
 FUT. PON* 3 s. m., nSNfi 3 s. /. & 2 s. m. (once 
 Prov. i. 10), JQK* 3 pi. m., ttNn 2 pi. m. 
 
 used only in Pi and HO. (to desire, lust). The 1 is Con- 
 
 sonantal always in Verb-forms from this Root. 
 PI-EL 
 
 PAST HJN 3 s. m., PirfiN 3 s./., TON 1 s. ; 
 
 FUT. [rW 3 s..], HJNfi 3 s./ 
 
 HlTHPA-EL 
 
 PAST PfiNnPI 3 s. m., TONnn 1 s., tfiNnn 3 pi. ; 
 PARTIC. PfoNflb s. m., D^NHD pi. m. ; 
 FUT. PttNJV 3 s. m. (apocop. 1NJV), PtiJWl 3 s. /. 
 (apocop. INnri), tiWV 3 pi. m.
 
 268 
 
 (or ptf) used only in the HO. (to complain}. Partic. D^Jfctflb 
 pi. ., and Fut. piKJV 3 s. m. 
 
 used only in the Past and Participle (1) of Kal (to haste), 
 and Fut. Hfy. (to cause to haste, to urge] The forms 
 are like those of Dip in Tab. XX. 
 
 used only in Kal, to be light, N<j>. to be lightened, and Ha. 
 
 to enlighten. 
 KAL 
 
 PAST -titf 3 s. m., JHfc 3 pi. (like #12, ?3, cp. Tab. XX). 
 PARTIC. *liK s. m. ; 
 IMPER. ^1K 2 s./. (like *#te) ; 
 Fcr.nj'Tkn 3 pi./. (likem&pfiinTab.XX). See230(i). 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 INFIN. "ll S Job xxxiii. 30 (for ^tjf , cp. 137 (3) Note t) ; 
 PARTIC. "lifcO s. m. ; 
 
 T 
 
 Fur. 11*0 3 s. m. 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. ^XnS; 
 
 T : 
 
 PAST ^KPI 3 s. m., m;NPl 3 s./., Wja 3 pi. ; 
 
 PARTIC. l^lb s. w., HTXp Ps. xix. 9 (Constr. form of 
 
 IMPER. *1^n s. . and with H added PlTNil ; 
 FUT. ^K and -)N 3 s. m. (with 1 Convers. 
 
 T " T V T - 
 
 3 s./. & 2 s. m., n^N 3 pi. m., >HWl 2 pi. m. 
 
 (or ST^) only in the JT^. !|##Nnn Imper.2 pi. m. in Pause, 
 Is. xlvi. 8 " shew yourselves men."
 
 269 
 
 used only in the Future Kal {to consent). 
 KAL 
 FUT. niX> 3 s. m., HIM 1 pi. (and r\rf\M with n> 
 
 [Note. The forms which are thus like ffiy etc. in 
 Tab. XX, are by some taken rather as N<j>. forms 
 i.e. like D15* or ^ etc. in Tab. XX.] 
 
 , 
 If. to be an enemy, or hostile to, only used in ^fil^N 1 s. 
 
 Past, and in the Partic (1) forms, viz. Titf or 
 y# s. m. (an enemy), with Affs. (his) l^N, 
 (%. m.) T|TN, etc.,-D^iN (or 'fc) pi. m., 
 i.e. ^N (or 'IN), with Affs. (Aw) V^fo, etc. 
 *fl!l^ ffw enemy (Mi. vii. 8 & 10) is the Sing. fern. 
 form nyfc with \ like Mn^ in 139 (e). 
 
 used only in K. to swear, etc., H$. to adjure. 
 KAL 
 
 INFIN. Abs. rfa and n^N ; 
 
 IMPER. 2 s./ 
 
 HIPH-IL 
 
 INFIN. niS^n^ (in irfc^riS, with Pron.-Aff. \ him) ; 
 
 FUT. Sw (in h&\ 1 S xiv. 24). [This is usually taken 
 thus, as Hiph. ; but the form might very well be 
 Fut. KAL apocop., the being like the in ^iftX"} . 
 The DyJl MN following must however be allowed 
 
 T T 
 
 for, of course.] 
 
 A A
 
 270 
 
 (I.) to mourn, used only in Kal ^X\ Past 3 pi. w. 1 ; and 
 (II.) to occasion, in Pi. Pliltf Past 3 s. m., PH. (to be occa- 
 sioned, to happen), riSK* 1 & ""13NFI ^ u ^ 3 s. m. &/., 
 and Hithp. Partic. PtiJXnp (one making occasion, or 
 seeking occasion) s. m. These forms agree with 
 Tab. XXIII. 
 
 (seeptf). 
 
 used only in Kal (to bake], N$. (to be baked}. 
 KAL 
 PAST nfiN 3 s. m., JVSK 2 s. m., WSK 1 s., IfiN 3 pi. ; 
 
 T T , T T T T 
 
 PARTIC. PlSK s. m. (whence Dllfitf, with Pron.-Aff. DH their t 
 Hos. vii. 6), D'Sfc pi. m., niSN pi./. ; 
 
 IMPER. J|fiX (Ex. xvi. 23) 2 pi. w., instead of IfiN ; 
 
 FUT. JinShl (1 S. xxviii. 24) 3 s./. w. 1 Conv. and Aff. A 
 
 " or for him instead of ^i 
 fo& 3 pi. m., JlfiNft 2 pi. m. 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 FUT. r\ZKF\ 3 s./., nyfiKJ? 3 pi./ 
 
 only in ^Ta/ (#o compass) ^IfiS^ Past 3 pi., like HJ53 in 
 Tab. XIV, and w. Aff. me as in Tab. XXV. 
 
 only in /Ta/ (to pluck) Past yVIK 1 s., n 3 pi. (in 
 
 with 1 pref. & Objective Aff. H ^ (/.), Ps. Ixxx. 13). 
 
 to curse, used only in 7T., N<f>, PL, and 
 
 KAL 
 
 . 
 INFIN. Abs.
 
 271 
 
 PAST 'HiTO 1 (also PPniTO with Objective Aff. H her} ; 
 PARTIC (1) T|fc pi. w. (i.e.), ^pT|K pi- . w. Aff. thy m. 
 
 [For the - see Pt. I, 72 (/3).] 
 PARTIC (2; TITO s. m., PTtlTO s./., D'TlTO pi. w. ; 
 IMPER. [*&] 2 s. m. -p|TO with PI . (The of the K is 6, 
 
 there being no Accent on the word, Pt. I, 37), 
 
 nfc and HIK 2 pi. m. ; 
 FUT. nfcn 2 s. m., "INK 1 s. 
 
 T 
 
 JN"lPH-AL 
 
 PARTIC. D*1W pi. m. Mai. iii. 9. 
 
 T * 
 
 Pl-^L 
 
 PAST ['nX] in M^K 3 s. m. with Objective Aff. H Aer 
 
 Gen. v. 29. For the comp. Pt. I, 72. 
 PARTIC. D'TTNO pi. m. 
 
 HOPH-AL 
 
 FUT. TOP 3 s. m. (in Pause, for 
 
 (or tf HK) ^o come, used only in Kal and in Imperative H<f>. 
 KAL 
 
 PAST nn (and Nfl** Is. xxi. 12), JI3JTK 1 pi. from NHN ; 
 
 T T T T T T 
 
 PARTIC. ninpl./.; 
 IMPER. JpHN 2 pi. m. ; 
 
 T " * 
 
 FUT. njJN* 3 s. m. (KJV} Deut. xxxiii. 21, HX* 1 ! Is.xli. 25, 
 
 and with Aff. ^- we, ^*n^1 Job iii. 25), 
 nrWl 3s./. (Mi. iv. 8), 
 VJW 3 pi. w. (|Vn;i Is. xU. 5), with j, and 
 
 1 Conversive ; 
 HIPH-IL 
 
 IMPER. VflH 2 pi. m.
 
 272 
 
 used only in Kal (to come, come upon, enter, etc.), H<f>. (to 
 
 cause to come, to bring), and Hoph. (to be brought}. 
 KAL 
 
 INFIN. N3 & Ni3 (*N33, & PIN33 1 K. xiv. 12 with H, 
 tO3 K37 K37 ^ ac tual construction, tfl-lp) 
 with Affs. 1K3 fiK3 ^|K3 & PI3K3 with n, etc. 
 
 * T > I -: T -: 
 
 PAST N3 3 s. in., P1N3 3 s./. (w. Aff. us ti)lN3 Ps. xliv. 18), 
 
 & nnN3 2 8 . *., na 2 s./. (For HNS, m 
 
 T T T : T 
 
 1 2 S. xiv. 3, see Pt. I, 29, Note (t)). 
 
 1 s., 
 
 T 
 
 3 pi. (also t^lKS, perhaps twice), 
 
 2 pi. m., 
 
 1 pi. (133 1 S.xxv. 8, with theNote 'lacking ') ; 
 PARTIC. N3 s. m., nXS s. /., 
 
 T T T 
 
 D*3 pi. w. (i.c. ^3), w. Aff. Aern^5,_ni3 pi./. ; 
 IMPER. 3 (or Kfa, and HNS with H) 2 s. ., 
 
 *3 (or Nte) 2 s./., !|N3 2 pi. w. ; 
 
 FUT. +NT (with 1 Conv. JK^, 13*1 1 K. xii. 12 Kthiv for 
 N3J1 ^>z, 13*1 1 K. xii. 3 JRAte for K3J1 ^H), 
 for the 3 s. m. ' w. Affs.' see %* next page, 
 
 * There may be \ in the place of , as in Kb?, Kb?, Nb/> & Kb^, KbtD 
 (& Vn^Dfrom the entering of), 1Kb Jfw com^ Mai. iii. 2, PIKb?, etc., and so 
 |K3 and nJK3 (also HJ^b) Ar/. ww*^. 
 
 t -1N3 Jer. xxvii. 18 is generally taken as Past 3 pi., like -15^3 in Tab. XX. 
 Some propose to read -1K'3J (Fut. 3 pi. m.}. But the Infin., not the future, is mostly 
 used after ^3^ . The Future is rare. The Past is also rare, but it occurs in 
 Jer. xiiii. 14 (-135^ *ri^3?). [If any must emend, they had better propose to read 
 
 . XT*:*:/ _ ., 
 
 K3 omitting the -1 . They would thus have the Infin. N3 after ^?3? as usual.] 
 Some have taken }tf'3 Jer. 1. 5 also as Past 3 pi. 
 J There may be 1 in place of here.
 
 273 
 
 *fcOfi 3 s. / (this with PI would be PINlFl, from 
 which is fPiriKSn Deut. xxxiii. 16 with a re- 
 
 T T 
 
 duplicated PI , and TJfltfiU-l Job xxii. 21 with Aff. "?| 
 thee m.), 
 with 1 Conv. *&Ott1, 
 
 T ~ 
 
 for 3 s. /. ' w. Affs.' see %* below, 
 *X$r\ 2 s. m., 3T| 2 s. /. See also Note (f) for 
 
 1 S. xxv. 34 (and Ez. xxii. 4), 
 *K3N 1 s. (and, with P!,*PUShN), with 1 Conv .*fcbfcfl, 
 ttfr 3 pi. m. (and, with j, 239, pn), 
 
 jn^bri 3 pi./., also IKSTI & *nyajbn f 231 (o. 
 2 pi. ., 
 
 1 pi. (and, with PI, *HNM), with 1 Conv. KM1. 
 *** With Pron.-Afls. the forms are : 
 3 s. m. *5|3N^ w. Aff. him, 'JNfr w. Aff. we; 
 3 s. /. *!HJKin & nNian with Aff. Am, 
 t^iiri [p. for ^KinTl] w. Aff. thee m., also 
 ^ntfllJ;!, see under K^ri 3 s. /. above, ^NiaTl 
 
 w. Aff. w ; 
 3 pi. w. ^y w. Aff. me (also OJO'I with 1 pref.). 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. JOn Absol., N^H CWWfc, fcwfe Jer. xxxix. 7, 
 
 comp. Note f on p. 79) ; 
 
 There may be i in place of the here. 
 
 t A similar form to this, viz. n&CPn Eri (TltOm Kthiv), 1 S. MT. 34, is 2 s./. 
 Fut. K. fr. Nil w. 1 Conv. We also find t03ni as 2 s. /. Fut. .ff". w. 1 Conv. 
 (Ez. xxii. 4). Each of these is irregular for ^SOJ;)} . 
 
 t And rWfcQn with * ' superfluous,' 1 S. x. 7. Also, with 1 Convers., Esth. iv. 4.
 
 274 
 
 [HiPH-iL con tin.] 
 
 PAST Nan 3 s. m.w. Affs. (him) itf'an, (her) 
 
 m.) Tifcran (we) 3&ran 
 
 I -I v: " - v: J 
 
 man 2 s. m. (nan 2 K. ix. 2, and nfcan m 
 Qnfran unaoan t.. 2 8 . m. w. Afis. 
 
 T -:> T l 
 
 m., s ; but there are also, fr. njOn, the 
 
 forms inan, nnacn, ^n^^n, .. 2 s. m. with 
 
 Affs. Aim, Aer, us) ; 
 
 Kttn 1 s. ('rWan Nu. xiv. 31, and Wan in 
 
 iWan & ^n^nx^an, Y^ M ?n, DT^L! 
 
 i.e. 1 s. w. Afis. him, thee m., them w.), also 
 VnJOaPI (Song iii. 4) 1 s. w. Aff. him. 
 
 *an 3 pi. w. Affs. (him) in^an, (^e/.) ^x^an, 
 
 (them m.) DfoOan & D- Pt. I, 14 ; 
 
 nxan 2 P i. m . con^an i s. xv i. 17) ; 
 
 K^an in D^^an 1 pi. w. Aff. them m., Nu. xxxii.17. 
 PARTIC. *a/b s. m. (*a& JOAte for a& JT^I four times, 
 
 and ^laan Z"^ft? for K^Efi JTrz once), 
 DK*aa pi. w. (& D'Naft, i.c. *aD) ; 
 IMPER. ^aH 2 s. m. (once fcOaH 1 S. xx. 40, and 
 
 tOan Jer. xvii. 18, which may however be Infin., 
 
 also n^an with n) ; 
 
 *N*an2s./., ^an 2 pi. . ; 
 
 FUT. Ny 3 s. m. (& aj Pt. I, 12), with 1 Conv. aj1 f 
 and once K*a*1 Ez. xl. 3, 
 With Affs., (Azw) WtW & )r\Wl\, (her) T\^y & 
 , (thee m.) WX & ^*W, etc., 
 
 - -
 
 275 
 
 afl 3 s./. & 2 a. m., with 1 Conv. 
 With Affs., (him) UN^Fl etc., (them m.) DN^fi 
 & ifcNaj-1 Ex. xv. 17, 
 
 1 s. (*a KtMv for &ratf #n' 1 K. xxi. 29, 
 *a 'lacking K' Mi. i. 15, with 1 Conv. K^NI 
 
 T T T 
 
 (& Ka&*1) PWaKI tfMfc for tfatfl JSTH Josh. 
 
 T T > T T 
 
 xxiv. 8 ; with Affs., (him) ^N'SK, etc. ; 
 y 3 pi. m. (& J|n^ J!|^ with | 239), with 
 1 Conv. 1X^ (and IK^), 
 
 With Affs., (Am) inwy & Vnxy, (me) ^1N^ f 
 (Mm w.) 
 
 2 pi. m. ; 
 ii 1 pi., w. Aff. (them m.) DNM. 
 
 HOPH-AL 
 
 PAST N^H 3 s. m., 
 
 T 
 
 n&nn .3 s./. Gen. xxxiii. 11, and nnXin (with pi) 
 Ez. xl. 4 [for Pl&Oin], 
 
 }N3in 3 pi. ; 
 
 PARTIC. 1^ s. w., D'K^Jb pi. m., niNl^D pi./. ; 
 FUT. 1V 3 s. m., ^1V Jer. xxvii. 22 Pause-form (not 
 
 in Pause) for JlfcpV 3 pi., comp. 167 (ii). 
 
 [Note. The 2 d B,t-letter is Consonantal in Verb- 
 forms from the next five roots except in the 
 case of certain contracted and apocopated forms 
 which the Student will easily recognize] : 
 
 HIT only in nrTH (Lev. xii. 2, her being weak or fain t), Infin. 
 Kal w. Aff. her [like Hrfa from h^, of TO].
 
 276 
 
 (?) used only in K. (to be). 
 
 KAL 
 
 IMPER. &0ri 2 s. m. ; 
 
 Fur. N ! )Pl (| 3 s. m. (a shortened form, Eccles. xi. 3), 
 perhaps for {OPT with } in the place of } e.e. " the 
 1 Quiescent as the 1 in infib" " for PlJPpB^ (as 
 R. D. Kimkhi says), or for PfllT or PftiT from PIP 
 as VT short for PlVV from fTPl (so the Mendels- 
 sohnian Bi-ur hammilloth}. According to this 
 latter view the X might be ' added ' as in K^QK for 
 and XIDbri for ^yyn (so Aben Ezra, who takes 
 to be plural, as R. D. K. did at first). 
 Both of the two words above might have been given 
 under the next Root HIH, as R. D. K. gives them. 
 
 n used only in K. (to be). 
 KAL 
 PARTIC (1) PHM s. m. ; 
 
 IMPER. PPf! 2 s. m., "H 2 s./. 
 
 [Note. The form 50P1 Imper. 2 s. m. with K in the 
 place of the Quiescent J"l, and MIT short for 
 JTliT or PPl!"!* 1 Fut. 3 s. m. with X added, were 
 given under &OP1 see there]. 
 
 JTPl used only in K. (to be}, and N<f>. (to be done, etc.). 
 KAL 
 INFIN. VH & PTri (Absol.), nVH (Constr.) and, with 
 
 prefixes, nVH3, nVH^, nVHp (or with - 
 thus, n^il, rVnS, n^rip), and with Pron.-Afis. 
 (Ais) invn, (her) nHVri, etc.,
 
 rvn 277 
 
 (at his being, i.e. when he was), ^JVflTl (and 
 for thy m. being, i.e. and that thou mightest be), etc. ; 
 
 PAST n*n 3 s. m., JlfVPl (p. JPlWl) 3 s. /. and (with H 
 
 Interrogative PlJTPiri) comp. 7, c, Note (f), 
 JVn (also JVPl once, and Pin^Pl once) 2 s. m., 
 
 T T T T T * T 
 
 7V71 2 s./. (WPI with * < superfluous,' Ez. xvi. 31. 
 
 T N T 
 
 For n"rn 2 S. xiv. 2, see Pt. I, 29, Note t), 
 TI"PI 1 s., 
 Dr\"Pj (& DJVH Deut. xxxi. 27) 2 pi. m., and 
 
 with 1 pref. DH^HI, 
 
 li^n i pi. ; 
 
 PARTIC (1) HH s./. (Ex. ix. 3) ; 
 
 IMPER. PlTl 2 s. m. (with 1 pref., PlVtl) ^Pl 2 s. /., 
 VPl 2 pi. w. (with 1 pref., VPP). 
 
 Fur. Pl^Pl* 3 s. m. apocop. VT (p. TP), and with 1 Con- 
 vers. VW (p. J^Pl*^), 
 
 3 s./. & 2 s. w. apocop. Tlft, & with 1 Con- 
 vers. ^nft}, -"(\7?O 
 Plfl 2 s./. with 1 Convers. "PM-H, (also apocop. ^PlJ-l 
 Nah. iii. 11, & with 1 Convers. Vlfi 1 1 Ezek. xvi. 34), 
 Pl'TnNI 1 s. apocop. T\&, & with 1 Convers. 1 PI50, 
 VPI* 3 pi. m. with 1 Convers. VPl*1, 
 PO^Ptfn or pn^l 3 & 2 pi. /. (also, twice, Pl^PlH in 
 
 Pl^HW) with ^ Convers. Pl^^Piril or 
 Pl^PO 1 pi. with 1 Convers. ^Pllfi & 
 
 B B
 
 278 rvn-irn 
 
 NlPH. 
 
 PAST JTP13 3 s. m. with H Interrog. PPfOJTI 
 
 ruvpti 3 s./. ( P . truvna), 
 2 s. m., 
 
 PARTIC. JTfl} s./. 
 
 T : 
 
 used only in Pi. (to tell, declare, shew). 
 
 Pl-fiL 
 
 INFIN. nin in fttHD with pref. D ; 
 FUT. rW 3 s. m., PMW 1 s. & w. Aff. 
 (p. J^PIN). 
 
 used in K. (to live], PL (to keep alive, let live, sustain, 
 cherish, enliven, quicken), and H$. (to cause to live, 
 
 to keep alive, etc.). 
 KAL 
 
 INFIN. PPl! & VH (Abaci.), nVH (Constr.) in DHVH w. Aff. 
 their m. and nVIrp w. pref. 7 ; 
 
 PAST PlTl 3 s. m., the forms *H 3 s. m. (p. J^Pl), and 
 with 1 pref. ^Hl (p. tTll), are ' borrowed ' from a 
 
 - T Xl " IT T 
 
 Eoot n ; 
 nn^H 3 s./., the form H^H 3 s./. (in rmi Ex.i. 16) 
 
 T I T T VT T VT T 
 
 from ^n is like KtiW from D^ 226 (i) ; 
 H M n 2 s. m., and with H at the end in PIJV)T| 
 Jer. xxxviii. 17 ; 
 
 vn 3 pi., 
 
 DH^n 2 pi. m. in Dn^H 1 ) with 1 pref.
 
 rrn 279 
 
 PARTIC (1) [borrowed from a Root "Pi] *H s. m. (p. ^H), 
 
 nn s. /., Dn pi. *., nin pi./., the form nvn 
 
 pi./. (Ex. i. 19) is like fii&G? from D'B> 226 (ii) ; 
 
 IMPER. PVPT 2 s. w. in JTni with 1 pref. (Gen. xx. 7, etc.), 
 "rt2s./. (Ez. xvi. 6), 
 VPI 2 pi. m., Vrn with 1 pref. ; 
 
 FUT. IDT 3 s. m. apocop. T]' 1 (with 1 Conjunctive 
 *rn & p. :W , with 1 Convers. P11 & p. tW), 
 n^nn 3 s. /. or 2 s. . apocop. ^n^l (with ^ Con- 
 junctive *nni, with 1 Convers. ^riJ^^), 
 
 2 s./., 
 
 N 1 s. (with PI Interrogative PPnNPI), 
 3 pi. m., with 1 Convers. VH>1, 
 
 3 P 1 -/. & wi* 11 n Interrogative !"0"nnn, 
 
 2 pi. ., & with j ( 145) jvnn , 
 n;m i pi. 
 
 Pl-fiL 
 
 INFIK. HVPI? with pref. 7, & w. Afis. (him) ifi'IT?, 
 
 (them m.) DnnS, (its) ttrvnS; 
 
 PAST Pl*Pl 3 s. m., 
 
 T " 
 
 ^n*H Ps. cxix. 50, 3 s. /. w. Aff. me in Pause, 
 
 WPl 2 s. m. with Aff. me (p. J^_), 
 
 VH 3 pi., 
 
 DH^ri 2 pi. m. in DJV*nn , with n Interrogative ; 
 
 PARTIC. n*Hp a. m. ; 
 
 IMPER. [HP| 2 s. w.] w. Affs. (tY w.) P^H, (me) yp|;
 
 280 
 
 FUT. JI'IV 3 s. 0i., with Affs. (him) VWT in JUlfPl* 1 ! with 
 V Conjunctive, (her) Pl*)1* in Pl*?1*1 with 1 Convers., 
 
 n*nfi 3 s. /. or 2 s. m., 
 
 v - ; 
 
 w. Affs. (me) ^Wl, (ws) WWl, 
 iynn in Ps. Ixxi. 20 is IRAto for yn 
 nriN 1 s. & with 1 Conjunctive PljTlNI , 
 VH* 3 pi. ?w., and with J1 Interrogative 
 
 with Aff. (Ms)J|OT, 
 
 nynri [3 &] 2 pi./, & pirn with 1 Convers., 
 !|hn 2 pi. w. in pnri with J ( 145), 
 
 nna i pi. 
 
 HlPH. 
 
 INFIN. ppnn (Absoi.), [n^nnConstr.in] ^nrh 
 
 with 7 pref., and w. Aff. him i7VIin7 ; 
 PAST rVJin 3 s. m., 
 
 rvnn 2 s. m. in 'orvnri 2 s. m. w. Aff. , 
 wnn i s., 
 nrvnri 2 P i. /. ; 
 
 IMPER. H^n/l 2 s. w. in *}^nn 2 s. we. w. Aff. me, 
 
 vnn 2 pi. m. 
 
 (or NKID) used only in the Pilpel Past 1 s. (TlNDNp) with 
 Objective Aff. Jl her, in rVJlNtpKb 1 ! Is. xiv. 23. 
 
 HltD to spin, only in Ylfc (Ex. xxxv. 25, 26) ^. Past 3 pi. 
 r\W only in nn (Jer. x. 7) K. Past 3 s./. [in Pause, 
 
 only in ll^W Ju. v. 28 and she cried out, 3 s. /. Fut. PL 
 with 1 Convers.
 
 28i 
 
 T used only in N<j>. (to be affiwted), PL and H<f>. (to afflict}. 
 NIPH-AL 
 PARTIC., with } in place of the usual i, ^1} pi. m. in 
 
 Constr. [from D^U], HUU pi./. ; 
 PI-EL 
 
 FUT. n5*1 3 s. w. with 1 Conversive, Lam. iii. 33, for 
 
 POT (cp. FM for IT'}) ; 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 PAST rUiPl 3 s. m. (Win, with Aff. n rtr) ; 
 
 PARTIC. D'JID pi. i. in ^ifi Is. H. 23, with Aff. _ 
 
 FUT. JViTl 2 pi. . with |, Job xix. 2, (instead of Uift). 
 
 [Note, n^h 2 S. xx. 13 has a form borrowed from this 
 Root, but in signification it belongs to n^H to 
 remove (Is. xxvii. 8, Prov. xxv. 4). This rOn may 
 be Hiph. Past 3 s. ?. of !"U* (according to form), 
 " one caused to remove [^';w]" = " he was caused to be 
 removed" It might perhaps be supposed to be for 
 riiinn Hoph. Past 3 s. m. of njn, or, possibly, for 
 PlUIPl with for 1 as some take ^TlH Lev. iv. 23 to 
 be Hoph. Past 3 s. m. from $H*.] 
 
 (I) (to put forth or away, Pi. to eas the lot) used only in 
 Kal Imper. H* 2 pi. m. Jer. 1. 14, and Pi. Infin. 
 nh^S Zech. ii. 4 & Fut. ^_ for ^\\ 3 pL w. in 
 W Lam. iii. 53. (But !H in Joel iv. 3, Obad. v. 11, 
 Na. iii. 10, may be supposed to be 'borrowed' fr. 
 a Root IT, like )$D Past K. 3 pi. fr. MD.) 
 PIT (II) (to render acknowledgment, confess, praise), used 
 only in H$>. and J?#.
 
 282 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. nnin, nninS, (or with as m rnina, nnnS) ; 
 pAs T rrin3pi., w-fin ipi.; 
 
 PARTIC. HTtifi s. m., DHIfi pi. m. ; 
 IMPER. Hin 2 pi. *. ; 
 
 FUT. rnV 3 s. m. (once JTTIJV Neh. xi. 17), w. Aff. 
 (thee m.) TplV & TlfV Pause-form Is. xxxviii. 19, 
 niifi 3 s./. in ^pTifi Pause-form, w. AflP. thee m., 
 PHitfls. (once n"lin in 1-niriN with Aff. !|3- Am 
 Ps. xxviii. 7), also w. Affs. (him) ^"lit^ 
 (thee m.) ^"pK (p. : ^TiW), 
 
 Th* 3 pi. m. (once rf|!T in ^Tin* Ps. xlv. 18), 
 also w. Aff. thee m. TJ^V (& ^V Ps. xlix. 19), 
 
 nnii i pi. 
 
 HlTHPA-tL 
 
 INFIN. nniHn in in^^Hnpl with prefixes D and 1 , and 
 Aff. <| his ; 
 
 PAST rninn 3 s. m., win 3 P i. ; 
 
 PARTIC. rninD s. ., DHIHp pi. m. ; 
 FUT. nWN 1 s., ^in^ 3 pi. w. 
 
 77 11 used only in H(f>. (to howl, utter a loud cry of lamentation). 
 HIPH-IL 
 
 PAST 7^n (for ^Jl) 3 s. m. ; 
 IMPER. 7^n 2 s. m., S^n 2 s./., ^n 2 pi. m. (^T\ 
 
 Jer. xlviii. 20 is KtMv for ^7^D JTrl) ; 
 FUT. 7*V*. 3 s. m., y?$f (& n^^JSt with n) 1 s., 
 
 <t( ?. < ! > ) 3 pi. w., ^.ri 2 pi. w.
 
 283 
 
 y used only in Kal and H$>. (to oppress). 
 KAL 
 
 PARTIC. PI3V s./. (in POi*Pl, with, the Pi of 6, the oppress- 
 ing one/., Jer. xxv. 38, etc.) ; 
 
 FUT. DW 1 pi. with'Aff. D them m. [forD , cp. D1*31 
 
 T * * * T - 
 
 and Note (e, vii, 2) on p. XL] according to some. 
 Others take this to be the Noun j*J progeny with 
 Q their m. Ps. Ixxiv. 8. 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. nbin? (in Dnbiri7, with Aff. D them m.} ; 
 PAST min 3 s. m., ttipl 3 pi. ; 
 
 T 
 
 PARTIC. Q^iO (in ^ifc Is. xlix. 26 with Aff. ^_ %/.); 
 
 FUT. p|ji* 3 s. t., H^n 2 s. m. (w. Aff. him 
 !)iV 3 pi. m., ttift 2 pi. w. 
 
 * used only in n^l (Is. xxviii. 17) K. Past 3 s. wz. with 1, 
 " and it shall sweep away" (E.V.). 
 
 * 1 used only in Kal (to be beautiful), and in Pi. (to beautify) 
 once, and once in ^3^3 [comp. p. 176 (7)] (to be very 
 beautiful), and once in H6. (to beautify oneself). 
 
 KAL 
 PAST [H3; 3 s. w.], JVS; 2 s./. (like JV 1 ?^ in Tab. XXIII), 
 
 is; 3 P i. ; 
 
 FDT. tp 3 s. w. apocopated for H3 M (in ft**} Ez. xxxi. 7), 
 'S'n 2 s./. (in S*ni Ez. xvi. 13).
 
 284 
 
 Pl-EL 
 
 FUT. PIS" 3 s. m. in i|plS^ (with Aff. fl- Mm) ; 
 
 PAST JVfi'fi* 2 s. m., Ps. xlv. 3. ; 
 
 T T : T 
 
 HlTHPA-i3L 
 
 Fur. 'fiWl 2 s./. 
 
 (to out, go out from) used only in Kal, H<j>., and 
 KAL 
 INFIN. *K>T Abs., JTNX Constr. (JTfc3, HX3, 
 
 but r\K^7 in actual construction H^D and 
 
 with Affs. inNX, ^nV, etc.); 
 
 PAST ^; 3 s. m., nr 3 s. /. (p. jnKT) f ny; 2 s. w., 
 
 ^nV; 1 s. (once 'H, Job i. 21, 'lacking '), 
 
 3 pi. (p. rttfr , w. Aff. we iNX* Jer. x. 20), 
 2 pi. ., !)^r 1 pi. ; 
 
 PARTIC. *XX*s. w., * HN s. /. (JWn Deut. xxviii. 57, 
 with the Note "lacking tf," comp. 98) Ny*B*, 
 Eccl. x. 1, is for HNX*^ Partic. JT. s. /. with 
 pref. t^ (p. 24, latter part of Note d), 
 *D'tf pi. w. (i.c. *^), *nKX pi./ ; 
 
 * There may be \ in the place of here.
 
 285 
 
 IMPER. NX 2 s. m. (& :PINX, with PI, in Pause), 'NX 2 s./., 
 JINX 2 pi. m., p. tfNX (1WC, Jer. 1. 8, is JTMto for 
 
 Fur. NX* 3 s. m., NXfi 3 s. /. & 2 s. m., etc. (like 
 
 etc., in Tab. XVIII, but) 
 rtiNXfi 3 & 2 pi./ (and JNXfi 3 pi. /., Ex. xv. 20). 
 
 T 
 
 "With 1 Conversive the of N remains, thus 
 , etc. 
 
 HlPH-iL 
 
 INFIN. NTlPl, N^PlS, etc., and, with Affs., 
 
 (my bringing out) 'N^XiH (this is Kri, for N^XIPI 
 
 Ethlv, in Jer. vii. 22), etc., 
 (to bring him out] ^iPlNXiPl?, etc. ; 
 
 PAST N^Xin 3 s. m. (& NXiPl Deut. xxii. 14), with Affs., 
 (thee m.} ^N'XiH & ^[NXH, (me) ^N^XiH, 
 (them m.) DN'XiH, (us) ON^XiH; 
 
 2 s. m. w. Affs. (him) inNXIPl, etc., 
 2 s. /., (for HNXIH^ 2 s. /. 1 K. xvii. 13, 
 see Pt. I, 29, Note f), 
 
 'HNXin 1 s., w. Affs. (them m.) D^HNXP, etc., 
 JlN'Xin 3 pi., DHNXin 2 pi. m. ; 
 
 PABTIC. N^XIfi s. m. (& NX1& once, Ps. cxxxv. 7), w. Affs., 
 IN'Xifc, etc., (^N^Xian The One bringing thee out, 
 Deut. viii. 14 & xiii. 11), 
 
 pi. m., & D'NXiD, i.e. 
 c c
 
 286 
 
 IMPER. Nin 2 s. m. (and PlN'TlPl with Pi), also 
 
 Is. xliii. 8 (which may however be Infin.) ; 
 **WPn Gen. viii. 17 is JTrl for tftfin KtMvw. Affs., 
 (/.) IWtf H, (me) 3^PI, (Mem m.) DKrtin, 
 WViPl 2 s./, IN'riPl 2 pi. m., and, with Affs., 
 
 (him) !)P!iWin, (for) rPlK^Pl; 
 Fox. K^r 3 s. w, (& X^ Job xxviii. 11), 
 Ju. xix. 25, also NXi*1), 
 
 w. Affs., (#/.) n^V, etc., 
 N^W 3 s. /. & 2 s. m. (and 
 w. Affs., (me) iK*V^ M 
 
 W^' 3 P L m - ( also S IX*), 
 w. Affs., (Am) f IMiW (& 'in 
 
 ^^^ 2 P 1 - m XW* 1 P 1 - 
 
 HOPH-AL 
 
 PAST [N^n 3 s. m.], HN^n 3 s./. in Pause for 
 
 PARTIC. [J!|a s. m.], nNtflfc s. /, D^tt pi. m., 
 
 used in Kal (to fear), N$. (to be feared), and Pi. (to put 
 
 in fear). 
 KAL 
 
 INFIX. Constr. NT Josh. xxii. 25, like ibfi ; also PlNT^ 
 
 I = 
 
 , with H, cp. 137 (4, iii), and KT? 1 S. xviii. 29, 
 2 S. iii. 11 from Ms fearing ; 
 
 * This form is like l^n. Similarly, in Ps. v. 9, fl JTri for l^in JBAto 
 
 ith -^ before the 1 for Euphony). 
 
 t There may be 1 in place of the here.
 
 NT 287 
 
 PAST NT 3 a. m., HNT 3 s. /. (p. JHNT), 
 
 T ;T T I"T 
 
 DNT 2 s. w., TINT 1 s., 
 
 T "T "T 
 
 INT 3 pi. OH1NT with Aff. him, 
 
 TpNT w. Aff. thee m., '2INT w. Aff. me), 
 DHNT 2 pi. m. (DHNT Josh. iv. 24), 
 UNT 1 pi. 
 
 PARTIC. NT a.m. (i.e. NT), HNT Constr. form of HNT s./., 
 D'NT pi. m. (i.e. 'NT. , and with Affs. VNT, f NT) ; 
 IMPER. NT 2 s. m., INT 2 pi. m. ; 
 FUT. *NT* 3 s. w. 
 
 (with 1 Convers. NT*1 and sometimes NT1), 
 w. Affs. (^ee m.) TINT Jer. x. 7, (me) ^ 
 
 I "S T " 
 
 NTri 3 s. /. & 2 s. w., 
 *'NTri 2s./. (p. J'NTn), 
 NTN 1 s., w. Aff. him UNTN, 
 1NT' (& INT Pt. I, 44) 3 pi. m. (p. tfNT) & :1NT 
 also :]5|NT with ]), 
 w. Aff. thee m. TpNT? & 
 
 3 pi./. Ex. i. 17, 
 
 H 2 pi. m. (p. JlNTn, & JpNTfl with ]), 
 w. Aff. them m. D1NTH and DNTfi, 
 
 T \ T 
 
 NTi 1 pi. 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 PARTIC. NTi s. m., P1NT3 s. /., HINTi pi. /. (w. Aff. 
 
 T T T T 
 
 thy m. TpHiNTJ, p s . cxlv. 6) ; 
 Fur. NTlfl 2 s. m., Ps. cxxx. 4. 
 
 , 
 
 2 s./. Is. lx. 5, but *iOPI in some Bibles.
 
 288 
 
 Pl-fiL 
 
 INFIN. NT (in "ONTy to put me in fear, DNT? to frighten 
 
 them) ; 
 
 PAST INT 3 pi. (in *3NT they frightened me) ; 
 PARTIC. D'NTjb pi. m. 
 
 PIT used in Kal, to cast (to place stones for a pillar, also to 
 shoot, shoot at, also to water), N<f>. to be shot, 
 H<j). to shoot (also to teach, to point, and to cast). 
 
 KAL 
 INFIN. HT Absol., HIT 1 ? (and once NIT? 2 Chr. xxvi. 15) ; 
 
 PAST PIT 3 s. m., >JVT 1 s. ; 
 
 TT * *T 
 
 PARTIC. *PHV & PIT s. m., DHV & D'T pi. m.; 
 
 IMPER. PIT 2 s. m. ; 
 
 Fur. PtTJ 1 pi. in DTHI and we shot at them, Nu. xxi. 30. 
 
 V * T - 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 FUT. PIT* 3 s. m. he shall be shot Ex. xix. 13. 
 
 VT 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. HTPI?, w. Aff. them m. DJVliPP ; 
 
 t T ; 
 
 PAST PHP! (in ^Pl^'pl Ae taught him, ^Tt Ae Aa^A cast me), 
 rniP! 2 s. m, in ^rniPl ^AOM Aas^ taught me ( 
 for in Pause), 
 
 TPTPl Is. (and ^H^lPI in ^plTTI Prov. iv. 11 (/ have 
 taught thee). 
 
 * This Participle is used as a Noun for the " early rain" in Deut. xi. 14, Jer. Y. 24, 
 NTI* Prov. xL 25 is taken by some as Hoph. Fut. 3 s. m. from fill (fcOi* for 
 HIT, o), and by others as Hoph. Fut. 3 s. w. from HT (Sni* for H"lV and this for 
 rnV " as yiin for jn-in," which is somewhat questionable, Lev.iv. 23 & 28). It 
 may perhaps be for the JTYi* "early rain" above, this being taken figuratively for a 
 " refreshing beneficent one."
 
 289 
 
 PARTIC. PHp s. m., D^iD pi. . (D'K")iD 2 S. xi. 24, 
 w. X ' superfluous'), w. Afls. T"Yl)b My w. teachers, 
 ***lifi wy teachers (in Pause) ; 
 
 IMPER. PTfin 2 s. w. (in ^"TJn & Wl feoc* m), 
 Din 2 pi. m. (in WiPI fcacA me) ; 
 
 FUT. rr\V 3 s. m. (lin_ flc?Ae sAo^ 2 K. xiii. 17), w. Afis., 
 & iin^V, (me) ^, (them m.) D7, 
 
 3 s. /. & 2 s. m. (in ^n, P. :^ph, / 
 
 ee, D^in ^OM w. wilt shew them), 
 1 s. (w. AS. thee Tpifcfl and I will instruct thee 
 Ps. xxxii. 8), 
 
 3 pi. m. they shall teach (TV they shall shoot, 
 and once ^l* 2 S. xi. 24 with K superfluous, 
 irrn* Ps. Ixiv. 5 they will shoot at him), TpIV they 
 shall teach thee m. 
 
 JTV (the H being consonantal) is a Root supposed by some for 
 the word ^iPI'in Is. xliv. 8, which would then be 
 K. Fut. 2 pi. m. for ^iTT^! of which they suppose 
 the meaning to be we stupeatis. A Metheg might 
 have been expected under the fi then, thus J-l . 
 Others (as R. D. Kimkhi, and so Fiirst) take the 
 word to be from a Root nPH in the sense of 
 " fearing." 
 
 (TO used only in N$. (to be burned). 
 
 NIPH. 
 FUT. Pl^n 2 s. m., Pi:P13fl 3 pi./ 
 
 . T * * T "*
 
 290 
 
 Pll? used in K. {to stick to, abide with, once, Eccl. viii. 15, 
 elsewhere to borrow), N<j>. (to be joined to, united with], 
 H$. (to lend, lend to}. 
 KAL 
 
 PAST wh 1 pi. 
 
 PARTIC. Pip s. m. 
 
 FUT. Plr in toj 1 ^ 3 s. m. w. Aff. him, 
 
 n 2 s. m. 
 
 NlPH. 
 
 PAST p|?3 3 s. m. (Pltan with the PI of 98, Is. Ivi. 3), 
 
 ?3 3 pi. ; 
 PARTIC. D*l73 pi. w. ; 
 FUT. Plf-^ 3 s. m., Yl^ 3 pi. m. 
 HIPH. 
 
 PAST rWFl 2 s. m. ; 
 
 T * : * 
 
 PARTIC. Plf?p s. m. ; 
 
 FUT. PflS' in ^fh>_ 3 s. w. w. Aff. thee m., 
 n in p 2 s. m. w. Aff. him. 
 
 PI5O fo ^6 beautiful, becoming (or suitable), used as a Verb only in 
 PlliO, Ps. xciii. 5, Past 3 s. m. (as some say), and 
 ttW Is. lii. 7 & Song i. 10, Past 3 pi. 
 These words some have taken to be Kal, others Pi-M, 
 others Pilel [the 1 being supposed to stand for the 
 repeated 3 d Rt-letter PI, and so in P!infl$Pl in 
 
 T -; - ; 
 
 Tab. XXIII, Note (t)]. The first one has also been 
 supposed to be Niph. Past 3 s. m. of PlIK .* 
 
 * So R. D. K. in his Lexicon ; but in his Commentary he connects the word with 
 tlJO , merely mentioning the other as possible.
 
 291 
 
 We might perhaps suppose !)*|{O to be ' compounded ' 
 of the two forms ^ and V)3 (fr. Pitt) 'mixed' up 
 together. And PllfcO may be a Noun " beauty ," or 
 " that which is becoming," of the same form as 
 
 Obs. PfiJO s. m., and *PfifcO s./., are Adjectives. 
 
 N<j>. and HO. to prophesy (HO. also to offer oneself for 
 prophesying}. 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 INFIN . K3JJPI in NS3PlS, iNaaP!3 (w. Aff. his, also f ^rtojJPEl 
 
 Zech. xiii. 4), 'JOJIPG (w. Aff. my) ; 
 PAST 833 3 s. w., HN^ 2 s. m. (JVStt Jer. xxvi. 9), 
 
 TO3p 1 s., !|3i 3 pi. (p. rtfctt}) ; 
 PARTIC. 33 s. m., D*N33 and D*N33 (i.e. *M) ; 
 IMPER. ^lilPI 2 s. w. ; 
 PUT. KS3* 3 s. m., Nian 2 s. m., 
 
 iay 3 pi. m., Jixaan 2 P i. w. ; 
 
 HlTHPA-tL 
 
 INFIK. ni^HH, with prefixed 1 S. x. 13; 
 
 PAST JVSDnP! 2 s. m., 1 S. x. 6, 
 
 T1N33P! 1 s. (for '3HP1) Ezek. xxxvii. 10, 
 1K|3PJ 3 pi. (for 'JHPI) Jer. xxiii. 13 ; 
 
 PARTIC. N^D s. m., D'K33n pi. w., niN^fl/b pi./. ; 
 
 FUT. N33n* 3 s. m., WttW 3 pi. m. 
 
 used only in JT. Partic (2) 1^3 s. m. "hollow," i.e 
 
 * For which we find PIJ3 , in HlSn Jer. vi. 2. 
 t Some give this as Hithpa-el, i.e. '^SH for
 
 292 
 
 used only in K. (to shine), and H$. (to came to shine, to 
 
 lighten). 
 KAL 
 PAST mj 3 s. m. ; 
 
 - T 
 
 FUT. FW 3 s. m. ; 
 
 HIPH. 
 
 FUT. PW 3 s. m. 
 
 TO iTa to move, move away, also to be driven away, as in P&. 
 & Hoph. ; H(j>. to drive away ; HQ. to move oneself, 
 move oneself away. 
 KAL 
 INFIN. TT} ; 
 
 PAST rrrti 3 s./., rrp r 3 P i. ( P . tma) ; 
 
 PARTIC. Tib (or TfO) s. w., n*inii s./., D'Tp pi. m. ; 
 
 FUT. TIT 3 s. m. Na. iii. 7, 1^ 3 s./. G. xxxi. 40, 
 
 pTI* 3 pi. m. (with J) Ps. Ixviii. 13. 
 PU-AL Tfii 3 s. m. Tab. XXI (IV). 
 HIPH-IL !PW 3 pi. m. in IPW (with Aff. }p| ^w). 
 
 HOPH-AL 
 
 PARTIC. T3D (al. 1)ti fr. Tli) s. m. 2 S. xxiii. 6 ; 
 Fur. IT 3 s. m. 
 
 HlTHPA-^L 
 
 Fur. TTi^nPl 2 s. m. (in pause, cp. 166 (c)), HTl JJV 3 pi. m. 
 
 used only in PL to remove as unclean. 
 I-L 
 PARTIC. D^JJb pi. m. (& 05*^30 with Aff. D3 2 pi. m.).
 
 rm-rro 293 
 
 used only in Kal and N<f>. to lament. 
 
 KAL 
 
 PAST fiPO 3 s. w. ; 
 
 T T 
 
 IMPER. HPO 2 s. m. 
 
 NIPH-AL 
 FUT. J|nU\ 3 pi. m. 1 S. vii. 2, where some give the Chald. 
 
 sense to be congregated. 
 
 used only in H$. to hold back, to refuse ; also (in E.Y.) to 
 discourage, and to break, to disallow, to make of none 
 
 effect. 
 HIPH. 
 
 PAST ann 3 s. m. ; 
 
 FUT. W? 3 s. TO. (*y Ps. cxli. 5), 
 
 1tn; 3 pi. m., ptfJTl 2 pi. m. (with |) JTrz' for 
 Nu. xxxii. 7. 
 
 used only in K. (to flourish, grow, abound, abound urith,} and 
 Pi. (to make to flourish E.Y. to make cheerful or 
 grow, Zech. ix. 17), like Dip in Tab. XX. 
 
 to move about, etc., used only in Kal, H<f>. & HO., like Dip 
 in Tab. XX. For "tin (Jer. xvi. 5) 2 s. m. Fut. K., 
 comp. 224. 
 
 used only in Kal (to remain at home] and H<f>. (to prepare a 
 
 home, or to glorify, niD^PttO, Ex. xv. 2). 
 KAL 
 
 FUT. Hiy 3 s. m. 
 
 HlPH-iL 
 
 Fur. HJiK in 1PI13K 1 s. with Aff. \T\- him. 
 
 D D
 
 294 
 
 PPD to rest used only in Kal, H<f>. & Hoph. (like Dip in 
 Tab. XX, but comp. also 234). 
 
 [Note. Some give as from this Root the following 
 forms (which are given as from H^ by others, see 
 213 and the Note there) ff(j). to place, allow, leave, 
 
 let alone, etc., and Hoph. to be placed, to be left : 
 HIPH. 
 
 PAST PP3n 3 s. m. (& rtiH 1 K. viii. 9), 
 
 nmn 2 s. m . t wan i s., 
 irran 3 P i., Dnnan 2 P i. m. ; 
 
 PARTIC. ITap s. w. ; 
 
 IMPER. naPl 2 s. m. (& PI!T3ri with H), 
 
 iin^n 2 pi. . (& Jimri) ; 
 
 FUT. PI^^_ 3 s. m. (HIM), 
 
 with Affs. (Am) 5|nn^. & 'inPl^, (^m w.) 
 H3n 3 s./. & 2 s. m. (short for Pl3ft), 
 
 with Affi. (me) wan, () nan, 
 
 n3N 1 s. in tt)T3N$ (Eccles. ii. 18) with pref. 
 
 and Aff him, 
 !|n*ll* 3 pi. w., and, with Affs., 
 
 (/win) Vim?, (them m.} D^lH^ & DIH^. 
 
 HOPH-AL 
 
 PARTIC. n3fi s. m. (For PDT3PI, see 213 end).] 
 
 only in D^D Kal Fut. 3 s. /. it will be moved. 
 
 to slumber : used only in Kal- [like DID in Tab. XXI.
 
 p 295 
 
 only in jiU) (Kri Ps. Ixxii. 17, it shall be continued E.V., 
 for p Kthiv}N^>. Fid. 3 s. m. like Dip) in Tab. XX. 
 
 D13 fo /ee : used only in .ffiz/ and ff<j>.,* like Dip in Tab. XX. 
 
 wove to and fro : used only in Kal, N$. and H<f>., like 
 in Tab. XX, but comp. also 234. 
 
 used in JTa/ (only 'fiSS Prov. vii. 17, / have sprinkled), 
 Pi. (only ftfiip Is. x. 32, fo shall shake), and #</>. to 
 
 wave, sift, move backwards and forwards, like Dip in 
 
 i 
 Tab. XX ; but besides the regular Infin. H<f>. ^^517 
 
 L L T : 
 
 we find also PlS^rP Is. xxx. 28 with 7 prefixed 
 
 and n at the end. The R<f>. Past 2 s. m. is flfiiH 
 ( 242). The 1 s. however is TliS^PI Job xxxi. 21. 
 Hoph. Past Win 3 s. m. it hath been waved. 
 
 only in H<j>. to blossom. 
 
 HIPH-IL 
 
 PAST 1V3n 3 pi. ; 
 
 Fur. VW (Eccles. xii. 5) 3 s. m. . [Others take this to be 
 from fX), Htj). Fut. 3 s. m. for p, in the sense 
 of "giving disgust."~\ 
 
 'Borrowed' in form from this Root we find 
 
 Ex. ii. 9 ff(j>. Fut. 3 s. /. with 1 Convers., in the 
 sense of the Root py (K. to suck, H$. to suckle). 
 
 only in HS^OSI Ps. Ixix. 21, and I am full of heaviness, 
 E.V.), Kal Fut. 1 s. with 1 Convers. & H at the end. 
 
 * For a word in Is. lis. 19, and another in Ps. Ix. 6, see DD3 rather.
 
 296 nm-nu 
 
 HT3 used only in K. (to be sprinkled, E.V.) and H<f>. (to sprinkle, 
 E.Y.) ; Gesenius gives "shall make to jump up" 
 instead of "shall sprinkle" for PIT* in Is. lii. 15. 
 Fiirst observes : " nil impedit quominus etiam hoc 
 
 loco ingenitam verbi significationem retineamus." 
 KAL 
 
 FUT. Sir 3 s. m., apocop. P (in P 1 ) Is. Ixiii. 3;, and with 
 
 1 Convers. V] 2 K. ix. 33 ; 
 HIPH. 
 
 PAST ntPl 3 s. m., JV-Tn 2 s. m., 
 
 PARTIC. f|J/b Constr. form of PVTD s. m., 
 
 IMPEK. ("fin 2 s. m., 
 
 FUT. HP 3 s. m., apocop. (& with 1 Convers.) PV 
 
 PlPO used only in Kal and H$. to guide, lead. 
 KAL 
 
 PAST [nrii] 3 s. m. (in ^H^l and He will guide thee m., 
 *yn^He hath led me, DH3 He led them), Jl^ni 2 s. m. ; 
 IMPER. HHi 2 s. m. (with Aff., ^Hi ^eac? me} ; 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. dnHiijlS to lead them Neh. ix. 19, & DJTtiS Ex. xiii. 21 
 
 comp. 137 (3) Note (f). 
 PAST PirOn 3 s. m. (in "OrOJl He led me), 
 
 JVrpn 2 s. m. (in DFVnin Thou didst lead them) ; 
 FUT. nny 3 s. w. (in !|Iim, w. Aff. him, ^m'_ w. Aff. 
 w^, DHy w. Aff. ^Aem m.), 
 
 3 s./. or 2 s. m., 
 w. Affs., (me) *3H3Pl, (^m w.) DH^, 
 
 1 s. (in !|nmN w. Aff. Aim, and H3m w. Aff. 
 her), 
 
 3 pi. m. (in ^m* w. Aff. me).
 
 297 
 
 used only in Kal (to incline, extend, pitch tent, etc.), N<f>. 
 (to be extended, etc.), and H<j>. to cause to incline, or 
 
 decline, etc.). 
 KAL 
 
 INPIN. nitDj Constr., fifeM? or nbl?, etc., 
 
 Tto (w. Aff. mjO/tatoS (w. Aff. his) ; 
 PAST Plttt 3 s. m., PintD} 3 s. /., JTtM 2 s. m., WM 1 s., 
 
 ItDJ 3 pi. (VJDJ Ps. Ixxiii. 2, tfrl for 1BJ .Mto) ; 
 
 T * X T T 
 
 PARTIC (1) !"lDi3 s. m. (or Mtpb) and with Aff. ^Aem m. 
 
 PARTIC (2) ^ s. ., H^ s. /., n^tD? pi. / JTrl for 
 niltM -ff^te Is. Hi. 16 (comp. 1 S. xxv. 18) ; 
 
 IMPER. HDIl 2 s. m. ; 
 
 FUT. nL3* 3 s. w. (apocop. 3% and "tD 4 * when unaccented), 
 nt^ri 3 s. /. or 2 s. m. (apocop. tDfl)> 
 ^ 3 pi. m., T\to) 1 pi. 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 PASTES pi.; 
 
 FUT. ntp^. 3 s. m., Itoy 3 pi. m. 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. nbn? or nitSH?, w. Aff. Aer nnfcrP; 
 PAST nisn 3 s. m., w. Aff. him in^!"!, 
 
 nnfcn in ^in^n 3 s. /. with Aff. him, 
 
 wan i s., ^itsri 3 pi., oman 2 P i. m . ; 
 
 PARTIC. HDO s. w., Dt2p pi. (i.c. *tep) ; 
 
 IMPER. ntSH 2 s. m. (apocop. tDH), ^tSH 2 s./., ^H 2 pi. w.; 
 
 FUT. ntS^ 3 s. w. (apocop. ID*), and, with Affs., 
 
 *(MM)UM; & *, 
 
 (^Aee .) :^|19* Job xxxvi. 18 (in Pause for l ?|t^), 
 Hteri 3 s. /. or 2 s. m. (apocop. tDH), 
 
 with Aff. him 1!"lt3Fl, 
 ntSN 1 s. (apocop. IDS, p. JtDK), ^ 3 pl..iw.
 
 298 
 
 *l^ to till only in ^3 Imper. Kal 2 pi. w. 
 
 -flfy. to be crushed : only in !|K3J (Job xxx. 8) 3 pi. Past N(f>. 
 [Some give this from POJ (^>. Past 3 pi., for 
 
 used in 50. (to smite), and JV<. & Pw. & Hoph. (to be 
 smitten). 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 PAST n33 3 s. m. 
 
 Pu-AL 
 
 PAST nttD} 3 s. /. (in Pause for nH3 3), 133 3 pi. 
 HIPH-IL 
 INFIN. HSH Absol., (HISH, Hi3ri2, niSnS, ni^ntt, and 
 
 with Aflfs. iron & inisn nnjsn ^nbn p. :v 
 
 T - > I : - ' | iv > 
 
 PAST n^ri 3 s. ?w., and, with Afls., 
 
 (*) Jinan, (<A m.} Tjan, M ^an, P. w- t 
 
 (them m.} D3n , 
 
 n*5n 2 s. m. (& njV3n with n, 138 B. L), and, 
 
 with Affs., (him) IH^n, (me) W3n Nu. xxii. 28 
 
 Pause-form of W3n [comp. 167, ii. (a)], 
 
 ^3n 1 s., but, with Affs., 
 
 (him) vron, (<A m.) 
 
 (1 3 pi., and, with Affs., 
 (him) ttl3n, (we) ^3T 
 DH^n 2 pi. m. ; 
 
 PARTIC. n3D s. m. (i.e. n3D, and with Affs. ^PGD owe 
 smiting him, *3/b owe smiting theef.),
 
 299 
 
 IMPER. n3Jl 2 s. m. (apocop. 1JH, and with Aff. *3_ 
 
 me 
 
 13PI 2 pi. aw. (with Affs. in3PI, D13PI) ; 
 
 FUT. PIS'* 3 s. ?w., apocop. 1p, 
 
 with 1 Convers. PI3*1 and ^ (p. t'SpJ, 
 with Affs., (him) !|33 & 1H3'. (once 13'_ 2 S. xiv. 6), 
 (her) r\y, (thee m.) nW , p. :H3|* [Pl3 for T|, 
 comp. Note e (iv) on Tab. XXVIII], 
 (them m.) D3 1 , 
 
 n3ft 3 s. /. or 2a.m., apocop. *nj-l, w. 1 Convers. 1p^ 
 ^3Jn (Prov. xxiii. 13 & 14) 2 s. m. w. Aff. to him, 
 PI3K 1 s., apocop. *!|J<, 
 
 with 1 Convers. P13N1 and 1|N1, 
 
 V - T | - T 
 
 with Affs. (Am) to3 & ^3^, (thee m.) H33 
 2 S. ii. 22 Pause-form of PO3N with the 
 
 T : ~ 
 
 Accent Pashta [H3 for TJ , comp. Note e (iv) 
 on Tab. XXVII], 
 ^ 3 pi. m., and w. 1 Convers. 5|3*1 , 
 with Affs., (him) 1P13?, (&) HISV 
 (thee m.) T|^, (^cm w.) D13*, 
 1133 1 pi., withl Convers. (apocop.) Tj3^, 
 with Affs., (him) 133} & 1H3J, (^em m.) 03} ; 
 
 HOPH-AL 
 
 PAST n3H 3 s. wz. (once rOIPl Ps. cii. 5, cp. Pt. I, 14, N.B.), 
 
 nron 3 8 ./., ^3n i s., 131-1 3 P i. ; 
 
 PARTIC. H3^ s. m. (i.e. PI30), HStt s. /., 
 
 D^3D pi. w. (i.e. *3tt) ; 
 FUT. !|3* 3 pi. m., 13fi 2 pi. w.
 
 300 
 
 only in the H<j>. Infin. ^H/iD on thy ceasing [for '3H3, 
 cp. 137 (3) Note (f). The Dagesh of the 3 is 
 Euphonic]. 
 
 PID3 used only in Pi. to tempt., try, adventure, etc. 
 
 PI-EL 
 
 INFIN. HiEfl, JTlDy?, and with Affs. ifi'DX etc. ; 
 PAST PlDJ 3 s. wz. (with PI Interrog. PID3PI Deut. iv. 34 & 
 Job iv. 2), 
 with Aff. M 
 
 7VD3 2 s. wz., in i7VD3 2 s. ?w. w. Aff. Am Deut. xxxiii. 8, 
 
 T * * * 
 
 ww i s., 
 
 }D3 3 pi. in ^!)D3 with Aff. me Ps. xcv. 9, 
 
 Drop:? 2. P i. w. ; 
 
 PARTIC. Hp3/b s. w., 
 
 IMPER. D3 2 s. wz., and with Aff. me *3p3 ; 
 FUT. npy 3 s. m. in DD^I with 1 Convers. and Aff. them m.> 
 Plp35tf 1 s., and, with Affs., 
 ' (him) !|||D3N, 
 (Aee w.) HDD^ Eccl. ii. 1 [PG for ^rt, comp. 
 
 Note e (iv) on Tab. XXVIII]. ' 
 !)D3> 3 pi. m., 
 !|D3fi 2 pi. z. (and, with J, 
 
 used only in K. Partic (1) Dpi s. m., and in PL & H0. 
 like 33D in Tab. XXI. 
 
 to fly away used only in N>{3 Infin. Absol. Kal, Jer. xlviii. 9, 
 and perhaps in !)3 (Lam. iv. 15), 3 pi. Past Kal. 
 This would then be for INtt as fe 1 S. vi. 10 for 
 , etc. But
 
 npj-mw 301 
 
 (I) is generally given as the Boot of that }3 (Lam. iv. 15), 
 
 and by some as the Root of K3 Jer. xlviii. 9 (the X 
 being supposed to stand for the Pi). 
 
 (II) is used in N(j>. & #</>. to strive (Kal once, Jer. iv. 7, 
 
 nj^fl they f. shall be laid waste, E.V.) [For 
 WJ Lam. iv. 15, see under Ntt and Pitt (I)-] 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 PARTIC. D^tt pi. m. ; 
 FUT. !)Xy. 3 pi. m. ; 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. nitfPl in inittl!! & 
 PAST !|2Cn 3 pi. 
 
 only in D^^ sparkling, Kal Partic. pi. m., Ez. i. 7. 
 
 used in JT/ (only once) to be clear or unpunished, in 
 JV<. in the same sense, and to be cut off, and in 
 
 Pi. to clear, to hold guiltless. 
 KAL 
 
 INFIN. Absol. PlpJ Jer. xlix. 12. 
 
 NIPH-AL 
 
 INFIN. np3Pl Absol. ; 
 
 |"T ' 
 
 PAST Hj53 3 s. m., nrij53 3 s. /. (p. :nn(53), 
 
 JTjvO 2 s. m., WJ53 1 s. ; 
 IMPER. *p3H 2 s./. ; 
 FUT. npy 3 s. m., Plp3fi 2 s. m., !)p3Fl 2 pi. m. 
 
 INFIX. Hpi Absol. ; 
 PAST Wp} 1 s. ; 
 
 E E
 
 302 
 
 IMPER. nj53 2 s. m. (in ^J53 with Aff. ^_ e) ; 
 FUT. p|j5^ 3 s. m. t 
 
 fi 2 s. m. (in JlPljMFl with Aff. }p| Atm, 
 
 l with Aff. *J_ me), 
 1 s. (in tOK with Aff. S fe, in Pause). 
 
 used in jBTfl/ (fo bear, lift up, take away, pardon, etc.), 
 N<j>. (to be borne, etc.), Pi. (to lift up, exalt, etc.), 
 Hfy. (to cause to bear, to bring), and H8. (to lift one- 
 self, exalt oneself}. 
 KAL 
 
 INFIN. Kib^ & NKO AbsoL, W&) & XW) & T\XW Constr. 
 
 T T : : ; 
 
 (HNb>3, once &W!l Ps. Ixxxix. 10, HNb'S, with 
 
 Affs. in^, inb^ once wp Job xii. 17, 
 
 once W33 Ps. xxviii. 2) ; 
 PAST N 3 s. m., and, with Affs., 
 
 3 s./., and with Aff. we 
 
 2 s. . (& nnxb'j with n), 
 
 with Aff. (me) ^r\$W) 
 
 W) 2 s./. (in D'HNBtt thouf. hast borne them m.), 
 
 i s., 
 
 W3 3 pi. (p. :^^), once ^ 'lacking ' 
 Ez. xxxix. 26, and once (as some say) Xlb 
 
 Ps. cxxxix. 20, 
 with Aff. them m. D 
 2 pi. m. ;
 
 303 
 PARTIC (1) X&) s. m., fW'3 & r\KBO a. /., 
 
 DWJ pi. i. (i.e. w'j), nfcip & rnNPj pi./. ; 
 
 PARTIC (2) JW3 s. m. (i.e. &WJ & Nb>J, once 'WJ 
 Ps. xxxii. 1, a form ' borrowed ' from a Root 
 PlS, like 6a in Tab. XXIII), 
 DWJ pi. w., nX^i pi. /. in DDTlfcbO (with 
 Aff. your m.} Is. xlvi. 1 ; 
 
 IMPER. Nj^ 2 s. m. (once N&J>3 Ps. x. 12, and once HD3 
 
 T T : T ; 
 
 Ps. iv. 7), 
 
 with Aff. him yr\tf&, 
 
 " T 
 
 W2s./., 
 
 !|N^ 2 pi. *., and with Aff. wie ^Nb; 
 FUT. N^^ 3 s. 01., and, with Affs., 
 
 
 
 3 s./. or 2 s. m., and, with Affs., 
 
 m.) DNm- 
 
 1 s., and w. Aff. Am 
 b^ 3 pi. w,, and, with Affs., 
 (him) irW', (^ee m.) ^MW Ps. xci. 12, comp. 
 
 Note (7) on Tab. XXVIII, 
 (them m.) QW) & D^, () ^,~ 
 n^N^n 3 pi./, (and three times H^n) ' lacking S ', 
 WP1 2 pi. m. (p. rtKBto and tpN^ft), 
 
 1 pi.
 
 304 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 INFIN. KE>3P! in Ktoa and 
 
 w. Aff. for 3 pi. IM.), 
 
 PAST NBO 3 s. ro. (7WJ Zech. v. 7. is Partic. s./.) ; 
 PARTIC. NfcSO s. w., 
 
 T 
 
 PIK&J s./. (& riKBtt instead of 
 DWJ pi. w., 
 
 T * 
 
 IMPER. Nb3H 2 s. *., Win 2 pi. w. ; 
 FUT. X&y 3 s. m., &TON 1 s., 
 
 T ' "TV 
 
 ' W^ 3 pi. m. (p. tittfeflV- 
 
 once Jer - 
 
 1^n 2 pi. OT. in Pause for JlKBtfFl. 
 
 T * : T 
 
 Pl-^L 
 
 PAST X^i 3 s. m. and N2SO 2 S. v. 12, 
 
 T ... 
 
 with Aff. iK0 Ae exalted him ; 
 PARTIC. D WJD pi. m. ; 
 
 IMPER. NBO 2 s. m. in DW5 (with Aff. D Mm m.) ; 
 FUT. NW 3 s. w. in VlN^ and Dtol, 
 
 !|N^* 3 pi. w. in J|P1 IfcW (with Aff. him) ; 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 PAST ftWn 3 pi. ; 
 
 HlTHPA-EL 
 
 INFJN. 
 PARTIC. 
 
 s. m. ; 
 
 FUT. fcttWJV 3 s. m. (in Pause, cp. 166 (c)), 
 ^3nn 3 s./. & ^ Nu. xxiv 7 
 ^3* 3 pi. w. Dan. xi. 14, 
 2 pi. ..
 
 (I) used only * in N$. (to be deceived}, and 
 NIPH-AL 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 INFIN. 
 PAST 
 
 FUT. 
 
 305 
 . (to deceive). 
 
 ! Absol. ; 
 
 l 3 s. m. and, with Affs., 
 (thee m.) J^N Wl Obad. r. 3 Pause-form not 
 
 in Pause for ^|K*B7J, 
 (me) ^iW'n Gen. iii. 13, 
 
 2 s. m ., 
 
 H 3 pi. (in ^laWh, with Aff. thee m.); 
 * 3 s. w. (& KB* Is. xxxvi. 14),and 
 
 with Aff. thee m. ^ti&\ 
 {T 3 pi. w., !|^ri 2 pi. w. 
 
 Xt^J (II) used only in Kal (to be a creditor} & H$. (to act an a 
 
 creditor}. 
 KAL 
 
 PARTIC. N0 s. m., D'WJ pi. m. Neh. v. 7 which might 
 however be given under Jl^i (II), as the K here is 
 ' superfluous ' ; 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 PUT. *W 3 s. m. (^' Krl Ps. Iv. 16). 
 
 (I) used only in Kal (to forget), Pi. (to make to forget), and 
 H<f>. (to cause to forget), also (to put out of mind, and 
 so forget intentionally). 
 KAL 
 
 INFIN. NKO Absol. (borrowed from Root KfcJO in form) ; 
 
 * For KB>3 ^a; Infin. Absol. see
 
 306 
 
 PAST JVBO 1 s- ; 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 FUT. n&>3fl 2 s. ro. in 'Jtfan *ib (thou shalt not be for- 
 
 gotten of Me, Is. xliv. 21) ; 
 PI-iL 
 
 PAST riEJ'J 3 s. w. in "OESO with Aff. me, Gen. xli. 51, 
 the 3 to suit perhaps the 3 in !"lB^p there. The 
 ilBftb is strictly the Pz. Partic. s. w. of Pltfj. 
 
 HlPH-lL 
 
 PAST n^H 3 s. *. in HB7I (with Aff. M Aer, Job xxxix. 17) ; 
 
 PARTIC. Pl^fi only used as a Noun (in the Constr. form 
 PlBfo, Deut. xv. 2) ; 
 
 FUT. n^ 3 s. ., 
 
 2 s. /. Deut. xxxii. 18, borrowed in form from 
 a non-existing Root nfl^, perhaps forTl^f;!' as 
 some think. Some take the word to be KaL Fut. 
 2s./. 
 
 O (II) used only in Kal (to be a creditor), and H$. (to lend, 
 to act as a creditor). 
 
 KAL 
 
 PAST 71W 1 s., )&} 3 pi. ; 
 
 T T 
 
 PARTIC. Pl^J s. m. (or PlB?fo), 
 
 DW pi. w- and D^ii in *^i3D Is. 1. 1 (/row or 
 
 of My creditors) ; 
 HIPH-IL 
 
 FUT. nB* 3 s. m., Pl^tt 2 s. m. 
 
 - - 
 
 [For the Irregular jrO, see Note (B) on Tab. XIX [p. xxvi].
 
 307 
 
 A Root imagined by some (and Ntf D by others) for the 
 word riKDNpS Is. xxvii. 8. There is, however, the 
 undoubted Hebrew Root DXD, from which the word 
 has long been taken and is still taken by many. 
 Thus, for instance, R. D. Kimkhi says that 
 
 (1) "possibly it is a NOUN, in place of P1XD, and in it 
 
 the 1 st and 2 d Rt-letters are repeated, and the H at 
 the end is the 3 d Rt-letter" (and as an example of 
 the repetition of the I 8t and 2 d Rt-letters he cites 
 JVS'S* in Ps. xlv. 3) ; 
 
 T ' T I T 
 
 (2) that " moreover, one might say that it is an INFINITIVE 
 
 of an Intensive Voice, and that the 1 st Rt-letter 
 only is repeated, as in the word ^HT from PpT, 
 the first tf being the 2 d Rt-letter and the second X 
 in the place of the 3 d Rt-letter, and the form of 
 the word therefore pfcfiSto." 
 
 [Obs. (i) The Dagesh in the D of PlNDNDlIl brings the word 
 into more full agreement with the FORM in (2), by 
 virtually supplying the Quiescent Shva [implied by 
 the Dagesh, Pt. I, 53, Note (f)] for the close of 
 the syllable after ( ), rather than nXDNDS. 
 
 (ii) The termination being an unusual one for an Infinitive 
 of a Verb H 7 with pref. 3, we prefer R. D. K.'s 
 ^ first-mentioned opinion, viz. that the word may be a 
 NOUN of reduplicated form. 
 
 (iii) Some think that the word is produced by actual 
 
 repetition of the Noun PlKD. So Gesenius says 
 (Thesaurus, p. 932. a) that it is "contracted from
 
 308 KID 
 
 ," which he supposes to mean " ad 
 
 T : T : 
 
 mensuram, i.e. modice." But the sense "moderately" 
 is rather questionable. And Dr. Ewald, in Note (2) 
 on p. 182 of his Ausfuhrliches Lehrbuch der ffebr. 
 Sprache, has a remark on "die ganz verkehrte 
 ableitung von HKD PlKD mass mass." And Fiirst 
 on p. 750 of the Concordance writes the words 
 "ejus modi forma composita abhorret a linguae 
 hebraicee legibus." It is scarcely necessary to warn 
 the Student against the mistake of supposing that 
 either the Targum or R. D. Kimkhi or Aben Ezra 
 or Rashi make any such statement (at least de- 
 finitely) respecting the form of the word. The 
 technical term rPlSD " reduplicated " does not 
 necessarily signify the bodily repetition of a word. 
 And we see no need for imagining a new Hebrew 
 Root (whether KID or KKD), from which the word 
 in Is. xxvii. 8 may be a 7s7^ or a yU^S form 
 (Infin. w. pref. 3 and Aff. her, as some say) in the 
 sense of "agitating" as some suppose, or "frightening 
 her" as others fancy, or "her expulsion" or "her 
 foul-dealing" as others imagine. The reduplicated 
 form from PlKD may fairly stand in some such a 
 sense as we might express by "in measured-measure" 
 or "careful measure" or "due measure" Sut we 
 may not dwell any longer on this now. A Com- 
 mentary on the passage would be out of place in 
 this mere LIST of VERB- FORMS.]
 
 - pity 309 
 
 In the following Roots the 2 d Rt-letter 1 is Consonantal, and 
 the forms correspond therefore with those in Tab. XXIII : 
 
 Pity used in K. (to be perverse}, N<f>. (to be perverted or perverse, 
 also to be distorted with pain), Pi. (to pervert, turn, 
 make crooked), and (J?$. to make perverse, pervert, act 
 
 perversely}. 
 KAL 
 PAST Pi 3s./., Wty 1 pi. ; 
 
 T :T T 
 
 NlPH-AL 
 
 PAST Witt 1 s., 
 
 PARTIC. Plty3 s. m. found only in the Constr. form Pity} ; 
 PI-EL 
 
 PAST Pity 3 s. m. ; 
 HIPH. 
 
 INFIN. Pl$Pl Absol., [TOP! Constr.] in iTViyPia w. pref. $ 
 and Aff. Ais, 
 
 PAST PltyPI 3 s. m., W^Pl 1 s., Wn 3 pi., WWPl 1 pi. 
 
 Pll^ used only in PL (to command) and PH. (to to be commanded) . 
 PI-EL 
 
 INFIN. fi^ in in^lX w. Aff. 3 s. m., and w. prefs. M-i^ 
 
 PAST Pl^ 3 s. w., and, with Affs., 
 
 T 
 
 (him) !|pfiX, (^e w.) ^M, in Pause 
 (w)W, in Pause J^, 
 (them m.) DW, (*) CftST^ 
 
 3 s./., and with Aff. her Hft^, 
 
 2 s. m. & nn^V'~ and ' with Affs - 
 we) ^n^x in Pause ' C ws ) ^n*, 
 
 1 s. (& WX), and, with Affs., 
 Atw)Vrm, (/cr)plWV, (^emO 
 ttm m.) DTM & DH,- 
 
 F F
 
 310 nn-nra 
 
 PARTIC. n^D s. m. (i.e. H ), w. Aff. thee m. ^^p, and 
 in Pause ft & JTJ , 
 
 IMPER. rN 2 s. ?w., apocop. 1 !flX 2 pi. wz. ; 
 
 FUT. n^ 3 s. m. (apocop. 1*, with 1 Convers. 1^ and 
 twice H^l, which is also -firz for ini^l Kthiv in 
 2 K. xvi. 15), and, with Affs., 
 
 (him) qnW, (thee m.) T]^, (them m.} D^, 
 
 3 s. /. or 2 s. ;w., and, with Affs., 
 
 ^ril (and she commanded him) with 1 Convers., 
 
 J0M w. *A/^ command him, 
 HJX 1 s., apocop. 1^, with 1 Convers. pljttfl and 
 once l^^l, and, with Affs., 
 
 ~ ~; T 
 
 (him) mtf , (Mee w.)^V? and in Pause ^ & * <? J , 
 W 3 pi. m., 
 !fifi 2 pi. wz. in "O^ft ye sAa// command me and 
 
 D^H ye sAa// command them m. ; 
 
 PTJ-AL 
 
 PAST p|W 3 s. m., JVtt 2 s. m., n* 1 s. ; 
 
 T %. T " -.. " '.. 
 
 FUT. Hy 3 s. m. 
 
 only used in K. (of the teeth) to lie dull, blunt, "on edge 
 
 E.Y., and PL to be very blunt (Eccles. x. 10). 
 KAL 
 
 FTJT. nynj3Tl 3 pi./.; 
 
 PI-L 
 
 PAST nnp 3 s. m. Eccles. x. 10.
 
 nip-Kip 311 
 
 Nip used only in K. & H<j). to spew, spew out. 
 KAL 
 
 PARTIC (1) PlNp s. /. Lev. xviii. 28. ("The Accent being 
 
 .T|T 
 
 on the last syllable, this word is properly s.f. Partic. 
 like n&*3 1 S. xxv. 19 (as R. D. Kimkhi says) 
 
 AT T 
 
 the s. /. Partic (1) K. of K11. The rendering in 
 Lev. xviii. 28 should, in accordance with this, be 
 " as the land is spewing out . . . ." The word has 
 however been supposed to be a Past-Tense form.] 
 
 IMPER. Vp 2 pi. m. "borrowed" in form from an unused 
 
 Eoot n'p; 
 HIPH. 
 
 PAST in&ppjl 2 s. m. with 1 pref. and Aff. it m. ; 
 
 FUT. N'to' 1 3 s. m., with 1 Convers. tfp*1, and 
 
 |-T I-T- 
 
 with Aff. it m. Kp?1_, 
 K'pfl 3 s. /. or 2 s. ., with 1 Convers. 
 
 ( T 
 
 Lev. xviii. 25, and 
 
 with Aff. fl 
 
 Hip (I.) used only in N<f>. to be gathered or gathered together 
 (E.V.), and 
 
 Hip (II.) used in K. (only in Partic. 1) to wait or wait for, andP*. 
 to wait or wait for with an Intensity of signification. 
 KAL (of II.) 
 
 PARTIC (1) D^lp pi. m. in ^p Constr. form ''waiters of" = 
 
 " those waiting for," and 
 
 with Affs. his, Ylp7 (with pref. 7, Lam. iii. 25), 
 thy m. Tip, my *ip (in Pause, for *1 
 Is. xlix. 23.
 
 312 mv-nip 
 
 NIPH. (of I.) 
 
 PAST flpj 3 pi. Jer. iii. 17 ; 
 
 FUT. y\g\ 3 pi. m. Gen. i. 9. 
 Pf-EL(oflL) 
 INFIN. Pl-ip & fftp AbsoL; 
 PAST nrUp 3s./, 
 
 Wp 1 s., w. Aff. Me w. TjWp, and Wp in 
 Is. viii. 17. 
 
 Vlp 3 pi., 
 
 Wlp 1 pi., w. Affs., (Am) 17mp, (thee m.} Sp^p . 
 IMPER. Pl-lp 2 s. wt. ; 
 FUT. ri;lp* 3 s. m. apocop. Ip* 1 and with 1 Converg 1p^ ; 
 
 HjpK 1 s., njpNI with 1, and HJpNJ with 1 Convers., 
 
 p* 3 pi. m., PlJpJ 1 pi. 
 
 PI 1 !*! used in ^. (to be satisfied with, to be saturated with], PL (to 
 satisfy, satisfy with, saturate), and H<j>. (to make 
 
 satisfied or saturated, to give plenteously). 
 KAL 
 
 FUT. JW 3 pi. m., n)*p 1 pi 
 
 PAST nm 3s./., W") 1 s. ; 
 IMPER. JlVl 2 s. w. ; 
 
 FUT. W'lK 1 s. Fut. w. Aff. theef. (Irregular), 
 *Trt*V 3 pi. m. w. Aff. ^Aee w. 
 
 HIPH. 
 PAST nVTl 3 s. m., w. Aff. we WJ1, 
 
 2 s. m. in ^H^^n w. Aff. me, in Pause for *3_ 
 
 - 
 
 PARTIC. Jlll/b s. m.
 
 rnn-rw 313 
 
 N 
 
 used in K. (to be equal, etc ), Pi. (to set, to level, etc.), 
 Ufa (to make equal), and NO. (to be alike], a ' Com- 
 
 pound' or 'Mixed' Voice. 
 KAL 
 PAST rW 3 s. m. ; 
 
 T T 
 
 PARTIC (1) rW; 
 
 FUT. rrow-i 2 s. w., 
 rim* i s., 
 
 VIB^ 3 pi. W. 
 P!-iL 
 
 PAST pfotf 3 s. m., Wl# 1 s. ; 
 
 T ' ... 
 
 PARTIC. fl^'p s. m. ; 
 
 FUT. r\yy\ 3 s. m., rwri 2 s. *. 
 
 [Pu-AL given by some for Hl^ih Kthiv Job xxx. 22, where 
 the Noun n*$D is rt.~\ 
 
 T * 
 
 HlPH. 
 
 NlTHPA-^L 
 
 PAST PllfiC^ 3 s. m., which is in form partly N<f>. and 
 partly H6* 
 
 used in Pi. (to mark or make marks, also to mark out bounds 
 and so H9., in a borrowed form, as is supposed), 
 and ff<f). to make a mark, also to limit) . 
 
 Pl-^L 
 
 Fur. 1JV 3 s. m. apocop. in 1JV1 1 S. xxi. 14 [for njJVV), 
 Jn 2 pi. m. Nu. xxxiv. 7 & 8, 'borrowed' in form 
 
 T : * 
 
 from 
 
 * For the transposition of the D of fin with the 1 st Rt-letter K>, see 'Note' on 
 page 315.
 
 314 mn 
 
 HlPH. 
 
 PAST rvinn 2 s . m., 
 
 T * : x 
 
 ^nn 3 pi., Ps. Ixxviii. 41, this has been supposed 
 to have the sense " they made to grieve, abhor, or 
 
 repent" which however is rather doubtful ; 
 HITHPA-L 
 
 PAST DJT^nn 2 pi. m., Nu. xxxiv. 10, ' borrowed ' in 
 
 form from P
 
 315 
 
 NOTE. 
 
 (I.) THE TRANSPOSITION OF THE fi of the Prefix fifi (of Hithpa-et) 
 
 and THE 1 ST RT-LETTER in some instances. 
 (a) When the 1 st Rt-letter is (1) #, or (2) '&, or (3) D, or (4) X, 
 the H of the HPl in Hithpd-el forms CHANGES PLACES 
 with that 1 st Rt-letter ; and, 
 
 (/8) Moreover, when [a (4)] the 1 st Rt-letter is , the H of 
 Hi! is replaced by tO 
 
 As examples of the above, we may give the following forms : 
 (1) From *}S5&?,_T|Sn&>n, [^>W S ], ^SFlPfi, 
 
 n'ywn wrwn etc., 
 
 nriB, p. ^njjB), etc.; 
 
 (2) From ^^-["l^bn], 13ri^p, ["12^, etc.] ; 
 
 (3) From VlD,_nriJ;lDn], IPlTlDp, [^TW??], and 
 
 (4) From pTX,_[fntoXn, fHbX*], tf^tDM [Gen.xliv.16 
 
 ( 166, c)], 
 and so, from TX formally, f_^^n [Josh. ix. 12 
 
 (Past 1 pi.)], 
 
 and, from T formally,_n T lDX^_ [Josh. ix. 4, 
 Fut. 3 pi. m., w. 1 Convers. f 166 c)]. 
 
 * The Student will observe that 1 Consonantal is introduced, after the n, in the 
 forms from this Root. The forms are given also at the foot of Tab. XXIII, in 
 Notes t to H. 
 
 t We say ' formally,' because the word here belongs in form to the Root TV. 
 X.B. The i is here Consonantal.
 
 316 NOTE. 
 
 (II.) THE DROPPING OF THE J"l of the Prefix Hi"! (of Hithpa-61), 
 and the INSERTION OF DAGESH F. IN THE 1 8T RT-LETTER, 
 in some instances. 
 
 (a) When the 1 st Rt-letter is (1)1, or (2) &, or (3) H, the 
 H of the JlH in HUhpd-el forms is DROPPED, and 
 Dagesh F. is put in the 1 st Rt-letter to stand for an 
 implied * letter instead of the H ; thus, 
 
 (1) From W,_nSHPI], IM?, [W, etc.], . 
 
 (2) From ipib,_[Tit3pi], iTitsn pi. tffifen 
 [Nu. viii. 7 ( 166, <*)], irjn&n, -ntsp, 
 
 njS>Pl (Imper.), and VirW (Fut. w. 1 Convers.) ; 
 
 (3) From D&n,_[D&rin, Diana, DIBIT], and 
 JD&nn [Ps. xviii. 26 & 2 S. xxii. 26 ( 166, c)]. 
 
 (/?) Also the H of the prefix npl (of Hithpd-el) is dropped, 
 and Dagesh F. is inserted in the 1 st Rt-letter to stand 
 for an implied letter instead of the fi , SOMETIMES when 
 the 1 st Rt-letter is (1) T,f (2) 3, (3) J, and (4) & ; 
 (1) From POT, once totPl Imper. H0. 2 pi. m. 
 [Is. i. 16] ; 
 
 * In the case of (3), i.e. when the 1 st Rt-letter is T\ , such a form as DJSFin (instead 
 of DtjJnnn) is in accordance with the general statement of Pt. I, 55 (12). The 
 occurrence of this form in the case of (1) & (2) may be taken as some evidence of 
 the likeness in sound of the letters 1, & 13, and F\, in old times. 
 
 N.B. This being only ' SOMETIMES' so in () points to some difference between the 
 cases of (a) & (ft), a partial likeness in the sound (it may be), but also an unlikeness 
 which may not be disregarded. 
 
 t Once, Is. i. 16. N.B. In the ' Chaldee,' as it is called, we find *T (instead of 
 the fl), and transposition of this and the 1 st Rt-letter T ; thus '^T.n (Dan. ii. 9, 
 instead of 'triH , comp. the Targum (Onk.) of Lev. rxv. 23, 34, 42, etc.
 
 NOTE. 317 
 
 (2) (*) From HDD, once HD^n Fut. HO. 3 s. /. 
 
 [Prov. xxvi. 26], 
 
 N.B. The n stands in the following forms from this Root HDD , viz. 
 Partic. nD2flP s. m., D'EG^D pi. OT., 
 Fut. D3i;i? 3 s. i. & D3rm 3 s. /. Pause-form 
 (apocop.for HDSJp* & il??^), & 4031^3 pi. m., 
 
 (*) and so, from |1D (comp Tab. XX), j;p3F| 
 Fut. m 3 s. /. [Nu. xxi. 27], and the 
 Pause-forms ^Jl3Fl 2 s. /. [Is. liv. 14], & 
 Wil3*3pl. m/[Ps. lix. 5], 
 
 N.B. the stands in \SteT\\ 3 s. m. Pause-form [Prov. xxiv. 3]. 
 
 (3) (a) From^,_' ( n23n H0. Past 1 s. [Ez. xxxvli. 10] 
 
 and 1K23ri Past 3 pi. [Jer. xxiii. 13], 
 
 N.B. the n glands in the following forms from this Boot K23 , viz. 
 ni33r>n HO. Infin. [1 S. 1. 13] and JV33J}n Past 2 s. m. 
 
 [1 S. x. 6] both of which are ' borrowed' in form 
 
 from an unused Boot i"G3 , 
 K3^P Partic. s. m., D$53J?9 pi. m., niN3.3J^p pi./., 
 
 and 
 N32I^ Fut - 3 s - > INSJ.ri? 3 P 1 - OT - 
 
 (4) and so, from Dm,_Wmn He. Past 1 s. 
 
 : ATV 
 
 Pause-form [Ez. v. 13], 
 
 N.B. the n stands in the following forms from this Root DH3 , viz. 
 DD3J;n^ Infin., Dmrip Partic. s. m., and fimJV 3 s. m. 
 Fut., & Dm^lK 1 s. Fut. (Pause-forms), 
 
 0) and so, from bi,_Xb3n H6. Fut. 3 s. /. 
 [Nu. xxiv. 7] and W&V Fut. 3 pi. m. 
 [Dan. xi. 14] ; 
 
 N.B. the n stands in the following forms from this Root NtW , viz. 
 SKOrin Infin., N^riD Partic. s. m., XB^ Fut. 3 a.m. 
 (Pause-form), K^i^F) Fut. 3s./., INtpjrjri Fut. 
 2 pi. w. 
 
 G
 
 318 NOTE. 
 
 (4) And so, from D/bfc? [comp. Tab. XXI], once 
 ri Hd. Fut. 2 s. m. [Eccles. vii. 16], 
 
 N.B. the Jl stands in the following forms from this Root DDK', viz. 
 Fut. 3 s. m. and DDifl Fut. 1 s. 
 
 Note. So, from Dl"! (comp. Tab. XX], some 
 give DltfnK [Is. xxxiii. 10] as HO. 
 Fut. 1 s. Pause-form, (instead of 
 D/bi^K), but it may also be a 'Mixed' 
 N<f>. and P&. form, Fut. 1 s. ; 
 
 N.B. the n stands in DCVlJV. #0. Fut. 3 s. m. 
 (7) The n is also dropped in some ' Mixed Voice ' forms ; thus, 
 
 (1) From 1D',_JnipW ' Mixed' N<j>. & H8. Past 3 pi. 
 
 [Ez. xxiii. 48], 
 
 (2) From Dl^D^n 'Mixed' Hoph. & H6. Infin. 
 
 [Lev. xiii. 55 & 56], 
 
 (3) From *TSD,_*l33i ' Mixed' N$. & H0. Past 3 s. m. 
 
 [Deut. xxi. 8], 
 
 N.B. the n stands in ")S3J^. He. Fut. 3 s. m., 
 
 (4) From f*JO ,_^N3fi ' Mixed ' Hd. & Pu. Partic. s. m. 
 
 [Is. lii. 5].
 
 FURTHER REMARKS ON VERB-FORMS. 319 
 
 [The 'Note' just given on pages 315-318 is a fuller statement 
 of a matter which has been already mentioned briefly see 
 Note (%*) on p. xv of the Tables. It was necessary to give to 
 the matter this more full treatment, and to bring it thus more 
 prominently before the Student's attention. 
 
 There are also several other 'Verb-forms' on which a few 
 remarks will be at least useful to the Student in his BIBLE- 
 reading. Such we will now give in the following (Vth) Section 
 of this Appendix.] 
 
 (Y). FURTHER REMARKS ON VERB-FORMS. 
 
 CERTAIN INFINITIVE FORMS. 
 
 INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 (1) The INFIN. ABSOL. KAL has mostly the form 7ty) or . 
 The 7^3 form, as 7*15* Gr. xxvi. 13, is comparatively rare. Of 
 this latter form we have (with 1 prefixed) /V?^ Ex. xii. 9 
 (before the PU-AL Partic. SfcSOft, the two words together! 
 expressing the "or sodden at all" of the E.V.). 
 
 [Note. The word rnSI, Hos. x. 4, is supposed by some to be 
 the Infin. Absol. (corresponding to the Infin. Absol. fih^ just 
 before it). If so, it is short for PHSI. Such shortening takes 
 place sometimes in the Infin. Constr., See Tab. XVI (3) (B) ; 
 but it is rare in the Infin. Absolute. Also this word rnSfl, in, 
 
 ~ T 
 
 Hos. x. 4, may very well be the Past 3 s. m. with 1 prefixed 
 signifying " and it shall flourish or grow"'] 
 
 * Comp. 137 (1, b). t Comp. p. 78, (ft) [Note (*) N.B. (2)].
 
 320 FURTHER REMARKS ON VERB-FORMS. 
 
 INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. 
 
 (2) (a) The INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT KAL has the ( )-form 
 7ty3 or 7J73 much more frequently than the ( )-form 
 (as 13$ mentioned in Note (*) on p. 79) . But this 
 form, though less common than the other, must 
 not be lost sight of. [For DfcPlS see 169 () & 
 167 (ii). 
 
 (/3) The ( )-form of Infin. Constr., with H at the end 
 [as in 137 (4, iii)], would in Pause be JPl7y3. And 
 
 (7) The ( )-form of Infin. Constr., with PI at the end 
 
 [as in 137 (4, iii)], would in Pause be {117^3. 
 Hence, bearing in mind that 
 
 (8) Pause-forms are not limited to places of Pause, but occur 
 
 sometimes with Accents other than Pause- Accents [see 
 167 (ii) and the examples there given], we see that 
 
 (e) ntDJ^'S) and H^OPI, in Is. xxxii. 11, and so also Pltt^ (ib.), 
 may so far as form is concerned be Infinitive ' Pause- 
 forms not in Pause ' ; the former two words like H 7^3 
 in 08), and the latter one (Pitt*)) like rhyS in (7). 
 
 For the sense in which if so they would stand see 
 'Note' after (?;) below. 
 
 () These three words, of Is. xxxii. 11, are however taken 
 by some to be Imper. K. 2 s. m. with PI at the end. 
 They must, then also, be 'Pause-forms not in Pause' ; 
 and we should have the somewhat awkward* construc- 
 
 * It seems to us rather awkward to have to say " Shudder --thou (m.), ye (/.)- 
 confident-ones" for fliPIES HTJl. The reference is to the "confident daughters" 
 ninpS Di33 of v. 9, to whom the Feminine Verb n3T|")J|l is applied in v. 10. 
 There is an idiom to which advocates of such a Construction might appeal in support
 
 FURTHER REMARKS ON VERB-FORMS. 321 
 
 tion of Singular Masculine forms referring to those 
 who are addressed as Plural Feminine. 
 
 But the three words need not be Imper. 2 s. m. at all. 
 
 They may be Infinitive forms,* as seen above. 
 (77) Similarly the word myt (ib.) may be Infin. KAL of 
 *ny [like 3D ^ Tab. XXI] with H at the end. 
 [Note. The Infinitive Construct is often used as a Verbal 
 Noun. Thus the three words in (e) may stand 
 for HUH "shuddering," ntpfefe "stripping," 
 mini "girding on"; and so PH^ in (if) for 
 " baring" The rendering would then be of the 
 form " [there shall be] shuddering, etc." 
 (6) INFINITIVES WITH 2 D RT-LETTER tf or H or T\ or JJ. 
 
 When the 2 d Rt-letter is either tf or !"l or H or ^, the 
 Infin. K. with the PI of 137 (4, iii), as also 
 the Infin. with Pron.-AfFs., has 
 
 (i.) Sometimes . under that 2 d Rt-letter, with 6 under 
 the 1 st Rt-letter, as in 
 
 njprrf? K. infin. w. h pre f. fr. pm (prnf?) w. n-, 
 
 K. Infin. w. Aff. my, fr. im, 
 & MDMb* K- Infi n- w. Affs. their (m.) & 
 your (m.) fr. DtfD, and 
 
 of it. But as we think that the Construction is inadmissible here, at least, we need 
 not dwell longer on it. Moreover we cannot venture to argue that HtJT etc. may be- 
 SING. m. because ITin (in Is. xxxii. 11) is Ptu. m. This last word ni.n may be 
 said to refer to the Masculine form D'BO, with which ni33KK' agrees in Gender. 
 
 * Some prefer to consider them as Imper. K. 2 pi. /. DMT for H3T3T the Pause- 
 form of rwri, and nofe^ for rut?'^, rnJQ for nrvin. 
 
 t If this be taken [as in Xote (*)] to be 2 pi./. Imper. JT., it must be for TCrfy 
 a form of 2 pi. /. Imper. corresponding to the 3 & 2 pi./. Fut. form HJ^bri given 
 in Xote (5) on Tab. XXI. 
 
 % The is replaced by the Slight-vowel u before the D with MOVING Shva,
 
 322 FURTHER REMARKS ON VERB- FORMS. 
 
 E- Infin. w. 7 pref. and Aff. their m., fr. 
 [comp. Tab. XV (i)] ; 
 
 (ii.) Sometimes under the 2 d Rt-letter, with under 
 
 the 1 st Rt-letter, as in 
 rnPlN^ X. Infin. w. S pref. fr. 3PIK (^HxS) with 
 
 n-, and so HgW K. Infin. fr. fcnfc? with T\-* 
 i7tt/b K. Infin. w. Aff. his fr. 7^/5, etc. ; and 
 
 (iii.) Sometimes the 2 d Rt-letter has Quiescent , as in 
 PttrnS K. Infin. w. 7 pref. fr. pi (jtn 1 ?) w. H-, 
 '. Infin. w. Aff. his fr. tj^T, 
 
 K. Infin. w. 3 pref. & Aff. thy m. fr. Ty, 
 etc. 
 
 (*) As a rare form of Infin. Coustr. K. we may mention 
 here fh& t (Nu. xiv. 16, Dt. ix. 28) fr.7^; and so 
 (Gen. viii. 7) fr. m> . 
 
 Note (i.) j"ll^!:l (Esth. viii. 6) is by some given as 
 an Infin. Constr. K. with 13 pref. and 
 | added, and by others as a Noun 'i.e.' 
 (and this we think it certainly is). 
 (ii.) JJ'V'YTp (Ezra x. 16) is an anomalous form 
 for the usual fe 
 
 * As the Pause-form of such an 'Infin. with !"! ' some give PPKK' Is. vii. 11 
 [from an imaginary Infin. PNK', after the form of 33!^ in Note (*) on p. 79.] 
 But this word HpNK' is properly the Pause-form of the IMPER. K. 2 s. m. C?Wy\ 
 with n , and there is no reason why it should not be so in Is. vii. 1 1 . There are 
 several other instances of two Imperatives together where we want an Infin. in 
 English for the second Verb. Some prefer to read n/XK' to agree with the eis aSrjv 
 given by Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion. 
 
 t This is the correct form in Ju. v. 4 and Ps. Ixviii. 8. Some Bibles have an 
 incorrect form in Ju. v. 4.
 
 FURTHER REMARKS ON VERB-FORMS. 323 
 
 (iii.) Vfth (Eccl. iii. 18) is K. Infin. w. h pref. 
 and Aff. them.(m.\ fr. 113. The Infin. 
 form without the prefix and affix would 
 be 13, like Tl fr. TH and like T|E> 
 fr. *13? which are given in Note (1, a) 
 on Tab. XXI. 
 
 (K) The ending f\ (instead of the ending Pi for 
 the Infin. w. !"l) is mentioned in 'Appendix (A) to 
 Tab. XIV (%*, 3); ^fijTTO? Ez. xvi. 52 being 
 from np*TO [for Hp'TC, PI-EL Infin. w. Jl] with pref. 21, 
 and Aff. thy (/.). 
 
 That ending is found in HT^Pl Gen. xl. 20 & Ez. xvi. 5, 
 which is HOPH. Infin. of *1T (instead of ("IT??!, w. PI), 
 comp. 202, for which we find HT^Pl in Ez. xvi. 4, 
 with !| for Kibbuts as in Pt. I, 14 (N.B.). 
 
 Note (i.) This (fi )-form is the ordinary form 
 of the Kal Infinitive Constr. in the case 
 of Verbs *') and Verbs /), when the 
 1 st Et-letter is dropped, see Tabs. XVIII 
 &XIX. 
 
 (ii.) Also the (H )-form m^ occurs in m^/b 
 [Gen. xlvi. 3] K. Infin. w. pref. Jb & w. PI , 
 fr. TV, -instead of the ordinary form n*H . 
 (iii.) We find also PllT 7 ! (with ) Is. xi. 9 Infinitive 
 K. fr. JTP with M , as in T^h (with pref. h) 
 Ex. ii. 4. 
 
 (iv.) The Infin. Constr. forms ending in fil , 
 asj"li /5, etc., in Tab. XXIII, are perhaps 
 .contracted, as some have supposed, from 
 the (fl )-form in (t) above.
 
 324 SOME PAST -TENSE FORMS (3) (a) & (/9). 
 
 (v.) nrnD (Krt for fV3Tl& Kthiv) 2 S. xiv. 11 
 is //<. Infin. Constr. fr. PQ1, correspond- 
 ing to the Infin. Absol. (13*1(1 [Gen. iii. 16 
 & xvi. 10 & xxii. 17] which is given in 
 Column (V) of Tab. XXIII by the side of 
 the ordinary form ending in Jl . 
 (vi.) The irregular form JVWl#Pl2l 2 K. v. 18 
 has * introduced in a somewhat Aramaean 
 manner. It is an Infinitive [STirjFlKTl], 
 from the Hithpa-el of HH^*, with 3 pref. 
 and Aff. my. 
 
 SOME PAST- TENSE FORMS. 
 
 (3) (a) As has already been said [ 138 (A), ii], the of the 
 
 7^3 form of PAST KAL occurs in the 3 s. m. and in 
 
 the PAUSE-forms of the 3 s. /. & 3 pi. ; but 
 
 N.B. Ordinarily the Second & First Person-forms 
 
 Singular and Plural, of the Past K. 7SJ3, have 
 
 to the 2 a Rt-letter as in the 7^3 forms in 
 
 - T 
 
 Tab. XIY, viz. nipS, VHJ53, etc. 
 
 (J3) In the case of a few Roots however we find instead 
 of under the 2 d Rt-letter in such Past K. forms ; 
 thus in DntSh") (Deut. iv. 1, etc.) the K. Past 2 pi. m. 
 with 1 pref., and so in flMK''!^ and DJ T 1&?'V1 given in 
 Obs. XLII on p. 209 ; see also the forms fr. 17* and 
 fr. hx& in Note (/S) on Tab. XXY. 
 
 Note. R. D. Kimkhi cites also DW31 Mai. iii. 20, 
 which word we mentioned above in 238 (ii).
 
 SOME PAST-TENSE FORMS. 325 
 
 (7) Very rarely the 2 d Rt-letter has in such a form, as 
 in Drtaifc? (2 pi. m. Past.tf.) 1 S. xii. 13 & xxv. 5, 
 
 and Job xxi. 29. 
 i 
 
 [(S) As we remarked in 238 (ii), the and in such 
 forms as those referred to in (/3) & (7) may have been 
 obtained from the of the 7^3 form of the Past K. 
 So some think. And we may add (as before, in 238, ii) 
 that so this and would be in analogy with the 
 (0) of Drfa*. & Jfta* the 2 pi. m. & /. Past K. of 
 the 7V3 form, Tab. XV, as also with the 6 of 
 
 ^ T 
 
 Obs. XLII, Note (iii). But we may not omit to 
 remark also that 
 
 (e) Euphony may be said to have had some concern with 
 the and the in those instances. Also that 
 
 () If we may say that ' in the forms from "17* in Note (/3) 
 on Tab. XXV the of the 7 is a mark of the 7573 
 
 * T 
 
 form of Past K.,' we must also admit that it is the 
 only trace of such a form from this Root. But 
 although "we fully admit that there is no actual 7^3 
 form from this Root throughout the Bible, but only 
 7^3 forms, yet we cannot but admit also that possibly 
 it may be a trace (though the only trace) of such a 
 form from this Root.] 
 
 (77) We find also , in the place of the more usual , 
 some few times in the H<f>. Past ; thus in 
 
 irWjfJKPTI 1 S. i. 28 (Zfy. Past 1 s., fr. 7NB>, with 
 Aff. Aim), 
 
 H H
 
 326 SOME PARTICIPLE FORMS (4). 
 
 and in the following forms from HID, viz. 
 D$?n & [mi (H<f>. Past 2 pi. ro. &/.), 
 WfcPfi 1 S. xvii. 35 (#</>. Past 1 s. with Aff. 
 
 the * before the ft being as in Pt. I, 12, N.B., 
 Vfipni Hos. ii. 5 (#<. Past 1 s. with Aff. her). 
 N.B. But the only form of the 1 s. Past H$. (with- 
 
 out an Affix) from ffi/b is ^DPI with the . 
 (0) So also in the H0. Past forms W^nni 'flfwW 
 Ez. xxxviii. 23, DTlKHDnni Lev. xi. 44 & xx. 7, the 
 2 d Rt-letter has in the place of the more usual . 
 Note. We have some remarks to offer on the Verb- 
 forms, with special reference to those in (/9) (6). 
 But such remarks would be out of place here. 
 We will but observe that 
 
 (i.) The -7- (and the ) of the above-mentioned 
 forms, in the place of the usual , occur in 
 UNACCENTED syllables ; 
 (ii.) In (rf) the may have a relation to the * of 
 
 the 7^(1 form ; and 
 
 (in.) In (6) the may have a relation to the of 
 the Ssnri form. 
 
 CERTAIN PARTICIPLE FORMS. 
 
 (4) Two forms of the Partic (1) Kal are given in Tab. XIV, 
 viz. the 75)3 form and the 7^3 form. There is also the 
 7^3 form of Participle mentioned in 'Appendix B to 
 Tab. XIV [S (iii)]. 
 
 The 7^3 and 7^3 forms of Participles differ from the 
 form in this remarkable particular that
 
 SOME PARTICIPLE FORMS. 327 
 
 (a) Whereas in the Sing. /. and the Plu. m. & f. of the 7^3 
 form the vowel of the 1 st Rt-letter is retained, and the 
 vowel of the 2 d Rt-letter is dropped thus we have [p. 83] 
 
 ,nnjp3 pi./. ,DHfpb pi. m. Arngb or) rnp>3 s./. ,1^3 s. m 
 
 ((3) Contrariwise, Participles of the 7^3 and 7^3 forms drop 
 the vowel of the 1 st Rt-letter and retain the vowel of the 
 2 d Rt-letter in the Sing./, and the Plu. m. &/. ; thus 
 (i.) The 7J73 forms are [read from right to left] 
 
 -tniVys pi./ ,^3 pi. m. ,rbys s./ ,7^3 s. m. 
 
 (ii.) The 7^3 forms are [read from right to left] 
 
 -:ni?y3 pi./ ,a%j pi. m. ,nbye ./ ,5j| s. . 
 
 (7) (i.) '!N CONSTRUCTION' the s. w. form 1p3 [in (a)] 
 remains unchanged.* Also the s. /. form rPlpS, 
 and the pi. / J"np3, remain unchanged in Con- 
 struction. 
 
 (ii.) The Constr. form of Pnp3 s./. is n*lp3, 
 (iii.) The Constr. form of DHp3 pi. >. is Hp3. 
 (S) So the 7^3 forms in /3 (i) are ' in Construction ' 
 
 -tn 5 !?'^ pi./ /Sys pi. m. t rb$& s./ ,7^3 s. m . 
 
 (e) But the 7^3 forms in /3 (ii) are 'in Construction' some- 
 what various, as follows : 
 (i.) () The Constr. form of the Sing. m. is 7y3 (as in 
 
 fr. "ii3 nn fr. ?nn, "ipn fr. npn, 
 
 fr. nV fr. 
 
 (A) We find also -7l fr. ?5 > in 
 Ps. xxxv. 14. But 
 
 * "With the rare exception of in place of the thus Ij'tf D. xxxii. 28 
 perishing of (or ' void of'} the E. Partic (1) ' i.e.' fr. T3K.
 
 328 SOME PARTICIPLE FORMS. 
 
 (c) N.B. The Sing. m. Participle of 7^3 form from 
 Verbs &$ 7 retains the ' in Construction,' as 
 Tfr.KT K7&fr.N7& etc. 
 
 (ii.) The Sing. fern. Oonstr. form JYpyS, and the Plu. 
 masc. Constr. form V^S, are sometimes shortened 
 by the removal of their penultimate vowel, in 
 accordance with 56 (i). 
 Thus we have not only the forms 
 
 () ntffcb (fr. nN&fc) s./., and ^SK, 'XSP1, 
 (from D^SN, D^SPJ, D s n&b>) plu. TO., 
 but also such shortened forms as 
 
 c*) nan* (fr. PINT) s. /., and ^a, *an>, 
 ( fr - Q' 1 ?"!?, 
 
 pi. m. 
 
 (i.) Rarely the 7SJ3 form of Participle has * Quiescent 
 (a) after thus MD (fr. MD) in MDH 2 K. viii. 21 
 the-one-compassing, (b) after thus ^ibifi (fr. *]^H) 
 Ps. xvi. 5 One-supporting which some however will 
 not allow to be a Participle, but which they suppose 
 to be Fut. H(f). 2 s. tn. fr. an imaginary Root ^/^ . 
 
 (ii.) Also rarely with Defective Long-khirik instead of 
 thus SJDV (fr. *p*) in tjpl* '1H Is. xxix. 14&xxxviii. 5 
 behold I am adding. 
 
 (iii.) Not to be confused herewith is such a as that in 
 ^ff'ti (fr. a*itf, r. 1^) Ex. xxiii. 4 & 2 S. iv. 8, thy 
 enemy ( 140, f), and ^Sp^ (fr. t|D8<, r. 6pN) 
 2 K. xxii. 20 & 2 Chr. xxxiv. 28 0;ze M/^ thee 
 away. Such a as these is merely a ' Slight '-vowel
 
 SOME PARTICIPLE FORMS. 329 
 
 (in place of the Moving Shva which the 2 d Rt-letter 
 has in fa^ ^&, etc., but which the 2 d Rt-letter 
 cannot have when the 3 d Rt-letter also has a Moving 
 Shva. This is the case when the Affix TJ is 
 attached). 
 
 N.B. Such a ' Slight'-vowel under the 2 d Rt-letter 
 when the 3 d Rt-letter has a Moving Shva is some- 
 times as in (iii), sometimes as in "^prO , some- 
 times as in *OPlfc . 
 
 (iv.) Also before the Afls. D3 & [? the 2 d Rt-letter 
 cannot have a Moving Shva, as in (iii). 
 
 (v.) In such a form as ^rbw (fr. rh&, r. Pl7#) 1 S. xxi. 3, 
 the 2 d Rt-letter retains the of Pl7fc? which is 
 dropped in such a form as *H7^, i.e. wlien the Affix 
 is such that the 3 d Rt-letter has a Vowel. 
 
 (77) (i.) The rare form PH^S (accented on the penultima) 
 Hos. vii. 4, is the Sing. Participle of 7^2 form, with 
 PI at the end. 
 
 (ii.) The form in (i.) is to be distinguished carefully from 
 the form Jl 7^3 (accented on the last syllable) the 
 Sing. Fern, of the 7^b Partic. (with in the place 
 of the more usual under the 2 d Rt-letter). This 
 form* occurs some few times. Thus we have PPDitf 
 
 VT " 
 
 s. /. in Is. xxi-g. 6 & xxx. 30 & xxxiii. 14, and so 
 rVTO s./ in Is.xxxiv.9 (instead of PTWals.xxx. 33). 
 
 * The fact of this form occurring several times in a place of Pause hardly allows 
 us to speak of it as a Pause-form. The Accent BELONGS TO THE LAST SYLLABLE 
 in each instance,
 
 330 SOME IMPERATIVE AND FUTURE FORMS (5) (a). 
 
 So also rn/V s. /. in Is. xxi. 3, etc., fntoi} s. /. in 
 Song. i. 6, and PlTO s./. Mi. iv. 6 & 7, etc. 
 (iii.) The Plural also is found thus, with in place of 
 the more usual , both in the Plu. Masc.^ as in 
 Lam. i. 16 (and, with the termination! j*~, 
 Lam. i. 4), and in the Plu. Fern., as in 
 
 PS. ixviii. 26. 
 
 (iv.) The stands sometimes (in place of the more usual ) 
 
 in other Yoices also, thus in the Pi. Partic. s. /. 
 
 PnSTp Na. iii. % jumping, and in the H6. Partic. s./. 
 
 (TlSinp 1 K. xiv. 5 & 6 one feigning herself to be 
 
 another. 
 
 (6) "We may mention here also that some Participles of Pit. & 
 PH. occur without the usual prefix p; thus some give 
 Eccles. iv. 2 as Pi. Partic. s. m. for nS^p, and so 
 
 Tlfi Zeph. i. 14 for TtbIB tfctt3 Ex. vii. 27 etc. 
 
 .. . . , i .. T T . 
 
 and so in the Pu., 73$ Ex. iii. 2 for 73Nb HEP 2 K. iL 10 
 
 . T .. T -.. :> |T -.. 
 
 for 
 
 Note (i.) For some other Participle forms it may be suffi- 
 
 cient to refer to ' Appendices (B) & (C) to Tab. XIV.' 
 
 (ii.) For Participle-forms with Pron-Affs. seeTab.XXYI. 
 
 SOME IMPERATIVE AND FUTURE FORMS. 
 
 (5) (a) The 6 of the 1 st Rt-letter in the form of PHbB> 
 K. Imper. 2 s. m. fr. ^ib^ (r. *Tfi^) with H [ 141, 7] 
 is not limited to Verbs which have - - to the 
 
 * From the Root DP we have also nOOIB' & nDO^ s. /., and niDOJJ> pi./. 
 (i.e. rilDp't? " desolate places of"). 
 
 t This termination p is common in Aramaean for the Plural D V .
 
 SOME IMPERATIVE AND FUTURE FORMS. 331 
 
 2 d Rt-letter in the Imper. 2 s. m., and in the Fut. 
 Thus the Boot S^lp has the Imper. 2 s. m. yV) and 
 the Fut. forms 3*lp^ ^""Ipft, etc< but we ^ ave ~ 6 
 under the p of the word ni*lp K. Iinper. 2 8. m. 
 
 I T :|T 
 
 fr. npw. n. 
 
 (/9) Unnecessary confusion and consequent trouble, which 
 have been introduced by some, may be avoided by our 
 bearing in mind that such a 6 may be considered 
 ^ in direct relation to the of a GENERALLY- 
 
 UNDERLYING* form 7J?3, without any 'mediate* 
 reference to the form of the Imper. 2 s. m. 
 [N.B. The form 7^3, from several Roots, stands itself 
 as an UNDEFINED or ' INFINITIVE ' form, when this 
 is used not Abstractly or ' Absolute'-ly but as a 
 Component-part of its sentence i.e. ' CON-STRUCT.'] 
 
 (7) So also the of ^*1H be thouf. dry (2 s. /. Imper. K. 
 
 fr. y\n , in Pause) may be and is best considered in 
 direct relation to the -- of a generally -underlying 
 form corresponding to 7^3 quite independent of 
 the ( )-form of Imper. 2 s. m. [S*Tl, p. Jl^H] from 
 which the of the *) in ^*in is obtained in Pause. 
 
 (8) And so the of Pntfp'l and refresh or have refreshment 
 
 (2 s. m. Imper. K. fr. TJftD, w. 1 pref. and H at the 
 end, in Pause) 1 K. xiii. 7, as also the of ^p 
 and cry out f. (Pause- form of 2 s./. Imper. K. fr. 
 w. 1 pref.) Jer. xxii. 20 may have direct relation to 
 
 * In the case of some Roots the Khoulem comes out in certain Infinitive forms 
 only.
 
 332 SOME IMPERATIVE AND FUTURE FORMS. 
 
 the of a generally-underlying form corresponding 
 to 7^3 quite independent of the ( )-form of Imper. 
 2 s. m. (n^D p.HD fr. T^D, and ptf* p.tpSN fr. 
 DJftO from which the Pause-vowel is obtained in 
 each case. 
 
 [(e) (i.) We ought perhaps to mention the supposition, on the 
 part of some, that PH^DI may be a sort of mixture 
 of "PnjDI and rTOW (??)," and pfcfl such a 
 mixture of " 'pftfl and 'DW(PP)." This seems t 
 us to be unnecessarily clumsy, and not quite satis- 
 ' factory, because it does not touch at all upon that 
 which specially requires consideration, viz. the occur- 
 rence of a bearing reference to an o- vowel in 
 these two Imperative forms, whereas (1) the of 
 the 2 d Rt-letter belongs not to the ( )-form but 
 distinctly to the ( )-form of the Imperative, and 
 (2) only the ( )-forms of the Imperative and the 
 the Future are found from the Root DJftf * 
 
 "We do not recognize aught anomalous in the two 
 words as they stand, because to us the seems to 
 refer directly to a generally-underlying 7^3 form 
 [comp. (/3) above] .f 
 
 * The K. Imper. 2 s. m. ~"IJ?p (Ju. xix. 8) may fairly be claimed by those who 
 wish to claim it as evidence of the ( )-form of Imper. K. from 1JJD. But as the 
 accented word ^D [for which see 141, a, Note (i)] occurs just before (Ju. xix. 5), 
 and as it is at least possible that these two words so near to each other may be the 
 same, i.e. the -f in v. 8 the same as that in v. 5, it may be that we have in Ju. xix. 8 
 an instance of a Long- Vowel ( ) before Makkeph like the two instances of Khoulem 
 before Makkeph in Note (f) on p. 114 [comp. Pt. I, 55 (8, ' Note'). If so, there 
 are only (-=-) -forms of the Imperative and Future found from the Root "11?D. 
 
 t Some cut the knot by asserting that the is merely because of the preceding -1,
 
 SOME IMPERATIVE AND FUTURE FORMS. 333 
 
 (ii.) If, instead of assuming an imaginary form involving 
 the same irregularity as that which they have to 
 deal with, and then supposing that imaginary 
 word to be mixed up with the regular form, and so 
 fancying that they had in any degree accounted for 
 an Irregular form as they regard it, the advocates 
 of that mixture had said that 
 
 (iii.) ' The may be regarded as a trace (although the 
 only trace) of a ( )-fonn of Imper. K., even in a 
 word which not only involves a mark of the ( )-form 
 but which belongs to a Root (as, for instance, pJ7) 
 from which the ( )-form alone certainly occurs,' 
 they would at least have touched upon the important 
 point really involved. "We could not have con- 
 tradicted such a statement, even if we had wished 
 to do so. For] 
 
 ) "We find sometimes in a Future form, where it is 
 either entirely due to Euphony (Pt. I, 72, 7), or 
 it is the only trace remaining of a ( )-form. Thus, 
 from the Root p#J we find nj3#N (1 s. Fut. K. y 
 w. n at the end) 1 K. xix. 20 ; but elsewhere the 
 Future from this Root has the ( )-form as in p*^ 
 tSTl , etc.* And so from the $ 7 Roots y& and 
 
 and this supposition is better than that of the above-mentioned mixture. But the 
 assertion cannot be made good. And it does not touch the very similar case of the 
 word "ann in which we find the (in place of ) although there is no ? preceding. 
 This however is asserted to be because of the following T . 
 
 Euphony may indeed have been partly concerned in the occurrence. But we can- 
 not credit it with the whole concern in these particular instances. 
 
 * For some Verbs having both the ( ) and the (-7-) forms see 162 (A). 
 
 I I
 
 334 SOME IMPERATIVE AND FUTURE FORMS. 
 
 ? we find P1$?SK (1 s. Fut. K., w. p| at the end) 
 Is. xxvii. 4, and PMb#NJ (1 s. Fut. K., w. 1 Convers.) 
 Dan. viii. 13 in some copies. 
 
 In these, some impute the wholly to Euphony, 
 as also the following. 
 
 Note (i.) The occurs some few times in such forms 
 from Verbs 'Fut. ( )'; thus in the 1 s. Fut. 
 K. w. H fr. fcp# and fr. W, viz. PltolpPK 
 
 I I T |T: : v 
 
 Is. xviii. 4 and Pi Tlp^'frO Ezra viii. 25, where 
 there is in each a ") superfluous,' from 
 &ip#K and ^pBfc. But 
 
 (ii.) N.B. The Student should never write such 
 forms. 
 
 (iii.) Somewhat less rare is the occurrence of in 
 
 some Yerb-forms that have Pron.-Affs. ; thus 
 
 from SpPl we find in Nu. xxxv. 20 l-l^iT 
 
 (i.e. SpJT E. Fut. 3 s. m. with Aff. him), 
 
 and in Josh, xxiii. 5 DS^PI* (i.e. 
 
 Fut. 3 s. m. with Aff. them m.} ; also 
 
 From *ID' we find in Hos. x. 10 
 
 [i.e. ibfij -ff". Fut. 1 s. (comp. 195, e 
 
 & 212) with 1 pref. and Aff. them m.] ; 
 
 and a few others which will be given in the 
 
 'Analytical Index.' 
 (ij) (i.) The Student will have observed that the * of the 
 
 Hiph-U Yoice stands in PO^'pH Imper. 2 s. m. 
 
 w. p| [ 141 (7, 5)] fr. S#p, and in PTT3TN Fut. 
 
 1 s. w. PI [144 (a)] fr. ^DT ; and so also in 
 
 PlTStt Fut. 1 pi. w. H fr.
 
 SOME IMPERATIVE AND FUTURE FORMS. 335 
 
 (ii.) With the exception of such H<f>. forms, and except 
 also the Pause-forms of other Voices, 
 
 When the Verb-form has at the end of it the 
 PI of 141 (7), or 144, the Vowel is dropped from 
 the 2 d Rt-letter in the case of 'Full' Verbs, and 
 of Verbs N"S and 'fi and j'a. For 'Full ' Verbs, 
 see the examples in 141 (7), and in 144 ; and 
 so in the Imperative forms 
 
 & PISDK corresponding to SbK & 
 fr. ^ & 6|DK, 
 
 & ngte corresponding to 1W & Btt (or 
 . fr. }W & Wft ; 
 
 and similarly in Future forms (1 s. & 1 pi.) 
 from such Roots, as in 
 
 rfofc & rhisti fr.boK, njBte & nj^i fr. yy\ 
 
 and PlSatf & nSfii fr. htt . But 
 (iii.) We find the following K 7 Verb-forms, 
 
 () PINS") (Ps. xli. 5) Imper. .ST. 2 s. m., w. H at 
 ^ the end, fr. Kfil, 
 
 (4) *n&Oj?X} (1 S. xxviii. 15) Fut. 1 s., w. 1 Con- 
 
 vers. & n at the end, 
 
 in which the 2 d B/t-letter has , as in the forms 
 and N^l^ without the PI. 
 
 * "We find sometimes H thus instead of the more usual n at the end of a word. 
 So in ilJtSh* (Ps. xx. 4) Pi. Fut. 3 s. m. fr. JtJH [comp. 144 (7 & 5)]. So also in 
 rnVTH 1 ) (Is. lix. 5) K. Partic (2) s. m. fr. lit like D-1p in Tab. XX with the pref . 1 
 and the H of 98. So too in PU^l. (Zech. v. 4) JT. Past 3 s. OT. fr. }^> ( 226), and in 
 iljn. (as in some Bihles, but n^l in others, w. n , Prov. xxiv. 14) K. Imper. 2 s. m. 
 
 fr'. JfT. 
 
 [The word nj^'l , as it stands in some Bibles in Prov. xxiv. 14, is by some taken as 
 as a Noun ' i.e.' " knowledge of" as in the E.V.j.
 
 336 SOME FUTURE FORMS. 
 
 This is very rare. But 
 
 Note. In some Noun-forms also the is not 
 dropped before X ; thus we have D^KtDri from 
 D^tOH, instead of a form corresponding to 
 DM^fi from D* J?0 (the great Rule of 59 even 
 being broken so as to retain the before N). 
 So also from Q^tOPl we have the Construct-form 
 
 T -: 
 
 *NtDn, in which the penultimate vowel ( ) is 
 retained,* instead of being dropped as it is in 
 ^0 from D'Jpa. 
 
 Similarly, [from D^tfUb] we have DJTKX1& and 
 and the Construct form ""N^i/b ; and so 
 
 " T 
 
 from niNtffc. 
 
 T 
 
 N.B. Such a however is sometimes dropped 
 in accordance with the Rules of 59 and 56 (i), 
 as in Vnterifl & Drtein from niaifi, and in 
 
 T : T : T 
 
 the Construct form of it viz. fiiX^in . 
 (6} The w-form of Fut. K. was just mentioned in the ' Note' 
 at the end of 141 (a), and as an example there was 
 given WHSMP (Ex. xviii. 26) K Fut. 3 pi. m. fr. 3$ 
 for which the usual form is of course ^ItOfifc^ (p. *ltO)EJ^). 
 [Obs. In some Bibles the Accent of ^SSJ^ is put 
 on the penultima (perhaps for the sake of having the 
 Accent 'drawn back' as in Pt. I, 46). But the 
 Accent should be on the last syllable, as it is in other 
 Bibles, and as we have given it above.] 
 
 * Sometimes the is retained also before JJ. Thus in ^J3O [Constr. form of 
 D'JHSO] in Mi. i. 6. But 
 
 N.B. The of WV) is dropped in the Constr. form *yi?3 Is. xvii. 10 as in 
 Tab. X, 4.
 
 SOME FUTURE FORMS. 337 
 
 So we have in Ruth ii. 8 'TQtfft K. 2 s.f. fr. nSV 
 
 v -: - 
 
 for which the ordinary form would be ^""D^ft. 
 
 So, with a Pron.-Aff., we have in Prov. xiv. 3 
 D^D^ri K. Fut. 3 s. /. (some say 2 s. m.) w. Aff. 
 them m. fr. *)?. 
 
 N.B. The i| of the 2 d Rt-letter is seen to be 
 unaccented in all these instances. This is in favour 
 of the 5) being in each instance of somewhat the same 
 class as the by the side of the in the of 
 (f, i) above [comp. Pt. I, 22 (latter part), and 
 14, N.B.]. 
 
 (t) Rarely, what is usually the form of the 2 pi. m. of the 
 Fut. seems to be used for the 3 pi. /.Thus in 
 Ez. xxxvii. 7 ni/bV ^^pni* and bones came-near. 
 So the word ^HlDlfi in Jer. xlix. 11 is mostly rendered 
 as 3 pi. /., let them (/.) trust ; but the word might very 
 well be rendered literally ye (m.) should trust or must 
 trust: thus, "Leave thy fatherless-children, I-witt-pre- 
 serve alive ; and as for thy icidows, ye-must-trust in Me." 
 The other rendering is however more natural, it may be. 
 
 * This might perhaps be rendered literally "and ye-came-together, bones"; for 
 the Noun DV bone (pi. D^DVJ? and JTlDyjJ), though almost always Fern., and so 
 in this Chapter, yet is sometimes Masc., as in Ez. xiiv. 10, Joh m. 30. But the 
 other may certainly be claimed as the more natural rendering.
 
 338 SOME NIPH-AL FORMS. 
 
 In this Section V of the Appendix we have hitherto dealt 
 mainly with Verb-forms of the KAL Voice, only mentioning a 
 few others as occasion offered or seemed to require. We will 
 conclude this Section with a brief mention of some Verb-forms 
 of the other Voices, 
 
 NIPH-AL. 
 
 (6) (a) The following are the passages in which we find the 
 instances of the 7J753 form of Infin. Absol. N<f>. which 
 are given in Note (d) on Tab. XIV. 
 
 ^bp3 thou didst greatly long, Gen. xxxi. 30, 
 S} DN or did he at all fight? Ju. xi. 25, 
 fcBtt David earnestly asked, 1 S. xx. 6 & 28, 
 
 D'HSD Pll/K^l and letters were sent, Esth. iii. 13 
 [comp. p. 78, Obs. (7)] ; 
 
 to which we may now add the following, which is 
 cited with those above by R. D. Kimkhi, 
 
 i fc|i2i *HNI surely he is quite smitten, Ju. xx. 39. 
 
 In these instances the 733 form stands, for 
 emphasis, before the N<f>. PAST, with the exception 
 of the passage from Esther, in which the Infinitive 
 is used alone the 'Infinitive' in place of a 'Finite' 
 part of the Verb, as some say. Comp. Note (f ) on 
 p. 78.
 
 * 000133997 
 
 SOME NIPH-AL FORMS. 339 
 
 Note (i.) Similarly Dinrtt Esth. viii. 8, 'SpSPjJ Esth. ix. 1, 
 and *lifly3 1 Chron. v. 20, may be (as some 
 say) Infin. Absol. N<j>. of this form. They 
 may however be (as others say) forms of the 
 Past Tense 3 s. m. N$. y or of the Participle 
 N<f>. s. m. 
 
 There is no valid reason against their being 
 
 unusual Participle forms. So R. D. K. in 
 
 his Lexicon takes the first one, and so the 
 
 second one may very well be. [Perhaps 
 
 they are best taken to be one of them 
 
 Infin. Absol., another of them the Past 3 s. m. y 
 
 and the other one Partic. s. m.~] 
 
 (ii.) P13PO Jer. xlix. 10 is given by R. D. K. as 
 
 Infin. "like to the Past" of N<f>. (for fcttHJ) 
 
 from JO!"!.* But it may very well be the 
 
 Partic. s. #., the particular form of the 
 
 so-called 'Substantive Verb' to be supplied 
 
 in English being here the Infin. * to be,' so 
 
 that the passage may run thus : " and he shall 
 
 not be able to be hidden (or a hidden-one)" 
 
 (/3) The Niph. 'Infin. Absol.' form 7^211 is the form also 
 
 of the ' Infin. Constr.' and of the * Infin. with prefixes,' 
 
 and it is the form of Infinitive which receives the 
 
 Pron.-Afis. ' But 
 
 N.B. This form of 'Infin. Absolute' is not used 
 with a PAST Tense or a PARTICIPLE for the purpose 
 of giving Emphasis. 
 * He gives it also as either ' JN>. Past or Infinitive' of PD!"!.
 
 340 SOME NIPH-AL FORMS. 
 
 (7) So also the Absolute forms |h3H and /b^Pl in Note (d) 
 on Tab. XIV are used before a Future. And so also 
 &)DKPI before t|p$ in 2 S. xvii. 11, and ETVlNPl (with 
 K instead of Jl, probably, as R. D. K. says, to avoid 
 having to pronounce p| twice consecutively) before 
 ' in Ez. xiv. 3. 
 
 Note. The rare form MiJl3 Ps. Ixviii. 3, is gene- 
 rally taken as a form of Infin. Constr. N<f>. correspond- 
 ing to the form 7^3Pl It may have been modified 
 to suit the form of fppft following.* It may also be 
 a ' Compound form ' made up of the N<j>. Infinitive 
 and the K. Infinitive (&Tp3) mixed together. Comp. 
 pp. 177 & 178. 
 
 (8) We mentioned in Note (f) on p. 79 the dropping of the 
 Jl of the Infin. N<j>. form /^SlPl after a prefix some- 
 times, as in fttOVS for M^PO Lam. ii. 11. So we 
 
 I T I T : 
 
 have !fn2l for inPlPD Ez. xxvi. 15 (with before 
 
 T V " T V ; 
 
 the unaccented f PI). And so the PI is dropped in 
 TO 1 ? for r\Wrh Infin. N$. fr. n^ Ex. x. 3, and 
 for nifcOnS Infin. N<f>. fr. 
 
 (e) Instead of JHJ3 (3 s. w. Past JV</>., fr. JTU), some Bibles 
 have jnijl with in Jer. 1. 22 a form like 
 , etc. 
 
 * The Dag. Lene of the T forbids us to say merely that the form is deduced 
 directly from Pp3n by dropping the penultimate vowel. But the form fp3n, or 
 Pp^n , so obtained, may perhaps have been altered into S]1Jn3 in order to suit the 
 subsequent fl'liFl . 
 
 t The in the Bible here is reckoned only as a Metheg, see Pt. I, 44 (e).